ATMEL AT91SAM7S64 At91 arm thumb-based microcontroller Datasheet

Features
• Incorporates the ARM7TDMI® ARM® Thumb® Processor
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
– High-performance 32-bit RISC Architecture
– High-density 16-bit Instruction Set
– Leader in MIPS/Watt
– Embedded ICE In-circuit Emulation, Debug Communication Channel Support
64 Kbytes of Internal High-speed Flash, Organized in 512 Pages of 128 Bytes
– Single Cycle Access at Up to 30 MHz in Worst Case Conditions,
Prefetch Buffer Optimizing Thumb Instruction Execution at Maximum Speed
– Page Programming Time: 4 ms, Including Page Auto-erase, Full Erase Time: 10 ms
– 10,000 Write Cycles, 10-year Data Retention Capability, Sector Lock Capabilities,
Flash Security Bit
– Fast Flash Programming Interface for High Volume Production
16 Kbytes of Internal High-speed SRAM, Single-cycle Access at Maximum Speed
Memory Controller (MC)
– Embedded Flash Controller, Abort Status and Misalignment Detection
Reset Controller (RSTC)
– Based on Power-on Reset and Low-power Factory-calibrated Brownout Detector
– Provides External Reset Signal Shaping and Reset Source Status
Clock Generator (CKGR)
– Low-power RC Oscillator, 3 to 20 MHz On-chip Oscillator and one PLL
Power Management Controller (PMC)
– Software Power Optimization Capabilities, Including Slow Clock Mode (Down to
500 Hz) and Idle Mode
– Three Programmable External Clock Signals
Advanced Interrupt Controller (AIC)
– Individually Maskable, Eight-level Priority, Vectored Interrupt Sources
– Two External Interrupt Sources and One Fast Interrupt Source, Spurious Interrupt
Protected
Debug Unit (DBGU)
– 2-wire UART and Support for Debug Communication Channel interrupt,
Programmable ICE Access Prevention
Periodic Interval Timer (PIT)
– 20-bit Programmable Counter plus 12-bit Interval Counter
Windowed Watchdog (WDT)
– 12-bit key-protected Programmable Counter
– Provides Reset or Interrupt Signals to the System
– Counter May Be Stopped While the Processor is in Debug State or in Idle Mode
Real-time Timer (RTT)
– 32-bit Free-running Counter with Alarm
– Runs Off the Internal RC Oscillator
One Parallel Input/Output Controller (PIOA)
– Thirty-two Programmable I/O Lines Multiplexed with up to Two Peripheral I/Os
– Input Change Interrupt Capability on Each I/O Line
– Individually Programmable Open-drain, Pull-up resistor and Synchronous Output
Eleven Peripheral DMA Controller (PDC) Channels
One USB 2.0 Full Speed (12 Mbits per second) Device Port
– On-chip Transceiver, 328-byte Configurable Integrated FIFOs
One Synchronous Serial Controller (SSC)
– Independent Clock and Frame Sync Signals for Each Receiver and Transmitter
– I²S Analog Interface Support, Time Division Multiplex Support
AT91 ARM®
Thumb®-based
Microcontrollers
AT91SAM7S64
Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
– High-speed Continuous Data Stream Capabilities with 32-bit Data Transfer
• Two Universal Synchronous/Asynchronous Receiver Transmitters (USART)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
– Individual Baud Rate Generator, IrDA Infrared Modulation/Demodulation
– Support for ISO7816 T0/T1 Smart Card, Hardware Handshaking, RS485 Support
– Full Modem Line Support on USART1
One Master/Slave Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)
– 8- to 16-bit Programmable Data Length, Four External Peripheral Chip Selects
One Three-channel 16-bit Timer/Counter (TC)
– Three External Clock Inputs, Two Multi-purpose I/O Pins per Channel
– Double PWM Generation, Capture/Waveform Mode, Up/Down Capability
One Four-channel 16-bit PWM Controller (PWMC)
One Two-wire Interface (TWI)
– Master Mode Support Only, All Two-wire Atmel EEPROMs Supported
One 8-channel 10-bit Analog-to-Digital Converter, Four Channels Multiplexed with Digital I/Os
IEEE 1149.1 JTAG Boundary Scan on All Digital Pins
5V-tolerant I/Os, including Four High-current Drive I/O lines, Up to 16 mA Each
Power Supplies
– Embedded 1.8V Regulator, Drawing up to 100 mA for the Core and External Components
– 3.3V VDDIO I/O Lines Power Supply, Independent 3.3V VDDFLASH Flash Power Supply
– 1.8V VDDCORE Core Power Supply with Brownout Detector
Fully Static Operation: Up to 55 MHz at 1.65V and 85° C Worst Case Conditions
Available in a 64-lead LQFP Package
1. Description
Atmel’s AT91SAM7S64 is a member of a series of low pincount Flash microcontrollers based on
the 32-bit ARM RISC processor. It features a 64 Kbyte high-speed Flash and a 16 Kbyte SRAM,
a large set of peripherals, including a USB 2.0 device, and a complete set of system functions
minimizing the number of external components. The device is an ideal migration path for 8-bit
microcontroller users looking for additional performance and extended memory.
The embedded Flash memory can be programmed in-system via the JTAG-ICE interface or via
a parallel interface on a production programmer prior to mounting. Built-in lock bits and a security bit protect the firmware from accidental overwrite and preserves its confidentiality.
The AT91SAM7S64 system controller includes a reset controller capable of managing the
power-on sequence of the microcontroller and the complete system. Correct device operation
can be monitored by a built-in brownout detector and a watchdog running off an integrated RC
oscillator.
The AT91SAM7S64 is a general-purpose microcontroller. Its integrated USB Device port makes
it an ideal device for peripheral applications requiring connectivity to a PC or cellular phone. Its
aggressive price point and high level of integration pushes its scope of use far into the cost-sensitive, high-volume consumer market.
2
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
2. Block Diagram
Figure 2-1.
AT91SAM7S64 Block Diagram
TDI
TDO
TMS
TCK
ICE
JTAG
SCAN
ARM7TDMI
Processor
JTAGSEL
1.8 V
Voltage
Regulator
System Controller
TST
FIQ
VDDCORE
AIC
PCK0-PCK2
PLLRC
PLL
XIN
XOUT
OSC
VDDIO
Memory Controller
PIO
IRQ0-IRQ1
SRAM
Embedded
Flash
Controller
Address
Decoder
Abort
Status
Misalignment
Detection
PMC
16 Kbytes
VDDFLASH
Flash
RCOSC
VDDCORE
BOD
VDDCORE
POR
VDDIN
GND
VDDOUT
ERASE
64 Kbytes
Peripheral Bridge
Reset
Controller
Peripheral DMA
Controller
NRST
PGMRDY
PGMNVALID
PGMNOE
PGMCK
PGMM0-PGMM3
PGMD0-PGMD15
PGMNCMD
PGMEN0-PGMEN2
Fast Flash
Programming
Interface
11 Channels
PIT
APB
WDT
DBGU
PDC
FIFO
PDC
USB Device
PIOA
PDC
PWMC
USART0
PDC
SSC
PIO
PDC
PDC
PDC
USART1
Timer Counter
PDC
PIO
RXD0
TXD0
SCK0
RTS0
CTS0
RXD1
TXD1
SCK1
RTS1
CTS1
DCD1
DSR1
DTR1
RI1
NPCS0
NPCS1
NPCS2
NPCS3
MISO
MOSI
SPCK
ADTRG
AD0
AD1
AD2
AD3
AD4
AD5
AD6
AD7
Transceiver
PIO
RTT
DRXD
DTXD
TC0
PDC
TC1
SPI
TC2
PDC
PDC
TWI
DDM
DDP
PWM0
PWM1
PWM2
PWM3
TF
TK
TD
RD
RK
RF
TCLK0
TCLK1
TCLK2
TIOA0
TIOB0
TIOA1
TIOB1
TIOA2
TIOB2
TWD
TWCK
ADC
ADVREF
3
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
3. Signal Description
Table 3-1.
Signal Name
Signal Description List
Function
Type
Active
Level
Comments
Power
VDDIN
Voltage Regulator Power Supply Input
Power
3.0V to 3.6V
VDDOUT
Voltage Regulator Output
Power
1.85V nominal
VDDFLASH
Flash Power Supply
Power
3.0V to 3.6V
VDDIO
I/O Lines Power Supply
Power
3.0V to 3.6V
VDDCORE
Core Power Supply
Power
1.65V to 1.95V
VDDPLL
PLL
Power
1.65V to 1.95V
GND
Ground
Ground
Clocks, Oscillators and PLLs
XIN
Main Oscillator Input
XOUT
Main Oscillator Output
PLLRC
PLL Filter
PCK0 - PCK2
Programmable Clock Output
Input
Output
Input
Output
ICE and JTAG
TCK
Test Clock
Input
No pull-up resistor
TDI
Test Data In
Input
No pull-up resistor
TDO
Test Data Out
TMS
Test Mode Select
Input
No pull-up resistor
JTAGSEL
JTAG Selection
Input
Pull-down resistor
Output
Flash Memory
Flash and NVM Configuration Bits Erase
Command
ERASE
Input
High
Pull-down resistor
I/O
Low
Pull-Up resistor
Reset/Test
NRST
Microcontroller Reset
TST
Test Mode Select
Input
Pull-down resistor
Debug Unit
DRXD
Debug Receive Data
Input
DTXD
Debug Transmit Data
Output
AIC
IRQ0 - IRQ1
External Interrupt Inputs
Input
FIQ
Fast Interrupt Input
Input
4
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
Table 3-1.
Signal Description List (Continued)
Signal Name
Function
Type
Active
Level
Comments
PIO
PA0 - PA31
Parallel IO Controller A
I/O
Pulled-up input at reset
USB Device Port
DDM
USB Device Port Data -
Analog
DDP
USB Device Port Data +
Analog
USART
SCK0 - SCK1
Serial Clock
I/O
TXD0 - TXD1
Transmit Data
I/O
RXD0 - RXD1
Receive Data
Input
RTS0 - RTS1
Request To Send
CTS0 - CTS1
Clear To Send
Input
DCD1
Data Carrier Detect
Input
DTR1
Data Terminal Ready
DSR1
Data Set Ready
Input
RI1
Ring Indicator
Input
Output
Output
Synchronous Serial Controller
TD
Transmit Data
Output
RD
Receive Data
Input
TK
Transmit Clock
I/O
RK
Receive Clock
I/O
TF
Transmit Frame Sync
I/O
RF
Receive Frame Sync
I/O
Timer/Counter
TCLK0 - TCLK2
External Clock Inputs
Input
TIOA0 - TIOA2
I/O Line A
I/O
TIOB0 - TIOB2
I/O Line B
I/O
PWM Controller
PWM0 - PWM3
PWM Channels
Output
SPI
MISO
Master In Slave Out
I/O
MOSI
Master Out Slave In
I/O
SPCK
SPI Serial Clock
I/O
NPCS0
SPI Peripheral Chip Select 0
I/O
Low
NPCS1-NPCS3
SPI Peripheral Chip Select 1 to 3
Output
Low
5
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
Table 3-1.
Signal Description List (Continued)
Signal Name
Function
Type
Active
Level
Comments
Two-Wire Interface
TWD
Two-wire Serial Data
I/O
TWCK
Two-wire Serial Clock
I/O
Analog-to-Digital Converter
AD0-AD3
Analog Inputs
Analog
Digital pulled-up inputs at reset
AD4-AD7
Analog Inputs
Analog
Analog Inputs
ADTRG
ADC Trigger
ADVREF
ADC Reference
Input
Analog
Fast Flash Programming Interface
PGMEN0-PGMEN2
Programming Enabling
Input
PGMM0-PGMM3
Programming Mode
Input
PGMD0-PGMD15
Programming Data
I/O
PGMRDY
Programming Ready
Output
High
PGMNVALID
Data Direction
Output
Low
PGMNOE
Programming Read
Input
Low
PGMCK
Programming Clock
Input
PGMNCMD
Programming Command
Input
6
Low
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
4. Package and Pinout
The AT91SAM7S64 is available in a 64-lead LQFP package.
4.1
64-lead LQFP Mechanical Overview
Figure 4-1 shows the orientation of the 64-lead LQFP package. A detailed mechanical description is given in the section Mechanical Characteristics of the full datasheet.
Figure 4-1.
64-lead LQFP Package Pinout (Top View)
33
48
49
32
64
17
16
1
4.2
Pinout
Table 4-1.
AT91SAM7S64 Pinout in 64-lead LQF Package
1
ADVREF
17
GND
33
TDI
49
TDO
2
GND
18
VDDIO
34
PA6/PGMNOE
50
JTAGSEL
3
AD4
19
PA16/PGMD4
35
PA5/PGMRDY
51
TMS
4
AD5
20
PA15/PGMD3
36
PA4/PGMNCMD
52
PA31
5
AD6
21
PA14/PGMD2
37
PA27/PGMD15
53
TCK
6
AD7
22
PA13/PGMD1
38
PA28
54
VDDCORE
7
VDDIN
23
PA24/PGMD12
39
NRST
55
ERASE
8
VDDOUT
24
VDDCORE
40
TST
56
DDM
9
PA17/PGMD5/AD0
25
PA25/PGMD13
41
PA29
57
DDP
10
PA18/PGMD6/AD1
26
PA26/PGMD14
42
PA30
58
VDDIO
11
PA21/PGMD9
27
PA12/PGMD0
43
PA3
59
VDDFLASH
12
VDDCORE
28
PA11/PGMM3
44
PA2/PGMEN2
60
GND
13
PA19/PGMD7/AD2
29
PA10/PGMM2
45
VDDIO
61
XOUT
14
PA22/PGMD10
30
PA9/PGMM1
46
GND
62
XIN/PGMCK
15
PA23/PGMD11
31
PA8/PGMM0
47
PA1/PGMEN1
63
PLLRC
16
PA20/PGMD8/AD3
32
PA7/PGMNVALID
48
PA0/PGMEN0
64
VDDPLL
7
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
5. Power Considerations
5.1
Power Supplies
The AT91SAM7S64 has six types of power supply pins and integrates a voltage regulator, allowing the device to be supplied with only one voltage. The six power supply pin types are:
• VDDIN pin. It powers the voltage regulator; voltage ranges from 3.0V to 3.6V, 3.3V nominal. If
the voltage regulator is not used, VDDIN should be connected to GND.
• VDDOUT pin. It is the output of the 1.8V voltage regulator.
• VDDIO pin. It powers the I/O lines and the USB transceivers; dual voltage range is
supported. Ranges from 3.0V to 3.6V, 3.3V nominal.
• VDDFLASH pin. It powers a part of the Flash and is required for the Flash to operate
correctly; voltage ranges from 3.0V to 3.6V, 3.3V nominal.
• VDDCORE pins. They power the logic of the device; voltage ranges from 1.65V to 1.95V,
1.8V typical. It can be connected to the VDDOUT pin with decoupling capacitor. VDDCORE
is required for the device, including its embedded Flash, to operate correctly.
• VDDPLL pin. It powers the oscillator and the PLL. It can be connected directly to the
VDDOUT pin.
No separate ground pins are provided for the different power supplies. Only GND pins are provided and should be connected as shortly as possible to the system ground plane.
5.2
Power Consumption
The AT91SAM7S64 has a static current of less than 60 µA on VDDCORE at 25°C, including the
RC oscillator, the voltage regulator and the power-on reset when the brownout detector is deactivated. Activating the brownout detector adds 20 µA static current.
The dynamic power consumption on VDDCORE is less than 50 mA at full speed when running
out of the Flash. Under the same conditions, the power consumption on VDDFLASH does not
exceed 10 mA.
5.3
Voltage Regulator
The AT91SAM7S64 embeds a voltage regulator that is managed by the System Controller.
In Normal Mode, the voltage regulator consumes less than 100 µA static current and draws 100
mA of output current.
The voltage regulator also has a Low-power Mode. In this mode, it consumes less than 20 µA
static current and draws 1 mA of output current.
Adequate output supply decoupling is mandatory for VDDOUT to reduce ripple and avoid oscillations. The best way to achieve this is to use two capacitors in parallel: one external 470 pF (or
1 nF) NPO capacitor must be connected between VDDOUT and GND as close to the chip as
possible. One external 2.2 µF (or 3.3 µF) X7R capacitor must be connected between VDDOUT
and GND.
Adequate input supply decoupling is mandatory for VDDIN in order to improve startup stability
and reduce source voltage drop. The input decoupling capacitor should be placed close to the
chip. For example, two capacitors can be used in parallel: 100 nF NPO and 4.7 µF X7R.
8
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
5.4
5.4.1
Typical Powering Schematics
3.3V Single Supply
The AT91SAM7S64 supports a 3.3V single supply mode. The internal regulator is connected to
the 3.3V source and its output feeds VDDCORE and the VDDPLL. Figure 5-1 shows the power
schematics to be used for USB bus-powered systems.
Figure 5-1.
3.3V System Single Power Supply Schematic
VDDFLASH
Power Source
ranges
from 4.5V (USB)
to 18V
DC/DC Converter
VDDIO
VDDIN
Voltage
Regulator
3.3V
VDDOUT
VDDCORE
VDDPLL
9
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
6. I/O Lines Considerations
6.1
JTAG Port Pins
TMS, TDI and TCK are schmitt trigger inputs. TMS and TCK are 5-V tolerant, TDI is not. TMS,
TDI and TCK do not integrate a pull-up resistor.
TDO is an output, driven at up to VDDIO, and has no pull-up resistor.
The pin JTAGSEL is used to select the JTAG boundary scan when asserted at a high level. The
pin JTAGSEL integrates a permanent pull-down resistor of about 15 kΩ to GND, so that it can be
left unconnected for normal operations.
6.2
Test Pin
The pin TST is used for manufacturing test or fast programming mode of the AT91SAM7S64
when asserted high. The pin TST integrates a permanent pull-down resistor of about 15 kΩ to
GND, so that it can be left unconnected for normal operations.
To enter fast programming mode, the TST pin and the PA0 and PA1 pins should be both tied
high.
Driving the TST pin at a high level while PA0 or PA1 is driven at 0 leads to unpredictable results.
6.3
Reset Pin
The pin NRST is bidirectional. It is handled by the on-chip reset controller and can be driven low
to provide a reset signal to the external components or asserted low externally to reset the
microcontroller. There is no constraint on the length of the reset pulse, and the reset controller
can guarantee a minimum pulse length. This allows connection of a simple push-button on the
pin NRST as system user reset, and the use of the signal NRST to reset all the components of
the system.
The pin NRST integrates a permanent pull-up resistor to VDDIO.
6.4
ERASE Pin
The pin ERASE is used to re-initialize the Flash content and some of its NVM bits. It integrates a
permanent pull-down resistor of about 15 kΩ to GND, so that it can be left unconnected for normal operations.
6.5
PIO Controller A Lines
All the I/O lines PA0 to PA31 are 5V-tolerant and all integrate a programmable pull-up resistor.
Programming of this pull-up resistor is performed independently for each I/O line through the
PIO controllers.
5V-tolerant means that the I/O lines can drive voltage level according to VDDIO, but can be
driven with a voltage of up to 5.5V. However, driving an I/O line with a voltage over VDDIO while
the programmable pull-up resistor is enabled can lead to unpredictable results. Care should be
taken, in particular at reset, as all the I/O lines default to input with pull-up resistor enabled at
reset.
10
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6.6
I/O Line Drive Levels
The PIO lines PA0 to PA3 are high-drive current capable. Each of these I/O lines can drive up to
16 mA permanently.
The remaining I/O lines can draw only 8 mA.
However, the total current drawn by all the I/O lines cannot exceed 150 mA.
11
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
7. Processor and Architecture
7.1
ARM7TDMI Processor
• RISC processor based on ARMv4T Von Neumann architecture
– Runs at up to 55 MHz, providing 0.9 MIPS/MHz
• Two instruction sets
– ARM® high-performance 32-bit instruction set
– Thumb® high code density 16-bit instruction set
• Three-stage pipeline architecture
– Instruction Fetch (F)
– Instruction Decode (D)
– Execute (E)
7.2
Debug and Test Features
• Integrated embedded in-circuit emulator
– Two watchpoint units
– Test access port accessible through a JTAG protocol
– Debug communication channel
• Debug Unit
– Two-pin UART
– Debug communication channel interrupt handling
– Chip ID Register
• IEEE1149.1 JTAG Boundary-scan on all digital pins
7.3
Memory Controller
• Bus Arbiter
– Handles requests from the ARM7TDMI and the Peripheral DMA Controller
• Address decoder provides selection signals for
– Three internal 1 Mbyte memory areas
– One 256 Mbyte embedded peripheral area
• Abort Status Registers
– Source, Type and all parameters of the access leading to an abort are saved
– Facilitates debug by detection of bad pointers
• Misalignment Detector
– Alignment checking of all data accesses
– Abort generation in case of misalignment
• Remap Command
– Remaps the SRAM in place of the embedded non-volatile memory
– Allows handling of dynamic exception vectors
• Embedded Flash Controller
– Embedded Flash interface, up to three programmable wait states
12
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
– Prefetch buffer, bufferizing and anticipating the 16-bit requests, reducing the
required wait states
– Key-protected program, erase and lock/unlock sequencer
– Single command for erasing, programming and locking operations
– Interrupt generation in case of forbidden operation
7.4
Peripheral DMA Controller (PDC)
• Handles data transfer between peripherals and memories
• Eleven channels
– Two for each USART
– Two for the Debug Unit
– Two for the Serial Synchronous Controller
– Two for the Serial Peripheral Interface
– One for the Analog-to-digital Converter
• Low bus arbitration overhead
– One Master Clock cycle needed for a transfer from memory to peripheral
– Two Master Clock cycles needed for a transfer from peripheral to memory
• Next Pointer management for reducing interrupt latency requirements
13
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
8. Memory
• 64 Kbytes of Flash Memory
– 512 pages of 128 bytes
– Fast access time, 30 MHz single-cycle access in Worst Case conditions
– Page programming time: 4 ms, including page auto-erase
– Page programming without auto-erase: 2 ms
– Full chip erase time: 10 ms
– 10,000 write cycles, 10-year data retention capability
– 16 lock bits, each protecting 16 sectors of 32 pages
– Protection Mode to secure contents of the Flash
• 16 Kbytes of Fast SRAM
– Single-cycle access at full speed
8.1
8.1.1
Memory Mapping
Internal SRAM
The AT91SAM7S64 embeds a high-speed 16-Kbyte SRAM bank. After reset and until the
Remap Command is performed, the SRAM is only accessible at address 0x0020 0000. After
Remap, the SRAM also becomes available at address 0x0.
8.1.2
Internal Flash
The AT91SAM7S64 features one bank of 64 Kbytes of Flash. At any time, the Flash is mapped
to address 0x0010 0000. It is also accessible at address 0x0 after the reset and before the
Remap Command.
Figure 8-1.
Internal Memory Mapping
0x0000 0000
0x000F FFFF
Flash Before Remap
SRAM After Remap
1 M Bytes
0x0010 0000
Internal Flash
1 M Bytes
Internal SRAM
1 M Bytes
0x001F FFFF
0x0020 0000
256M Bytes
0x002F FFFF
0x0030 0000
Undefined Areas
(Abort)
253 M Bytes
0x0FFF FFFF
14
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
8.2
Embedded Flash
8.2.1
Flash Overview
The Flash of the AT91SAM7S64 is organized in 512 pages of 128 bytes. The 65,536 bytes are
organized in 32-bit words.
The Flash contains a 128-byte write buffer, accessible through a 32-bit interface.
The Flash benefits from the integration of a power reset cell and from the brownout detector.
This prevents code corruption during power supply changes, even in the worst conditions.
When Flash is not used (read or write access), it is automatically placed into standby mode.
8.2.2
Embedded Flash Controller
The Embedded Flash Controller (EFC) manages accesses performed by the masters of the system. It enables reading the Flash and writing the write buffer. It also contains a User Interface,
mapped within the Memory Controller on the APB. The User Interface allows:
• programming of the access parameters of the Flash (number of wait states, timings, etc.)
• starting commands such as full erase, page erase, page program, NVM bit set, NVM bit
clear, etc.
• getting the end status of the last command
• getting error status
• programming interrupts on the end of the last commands or on errors
The Embedded Flash Controller also provides a dual 32-bit Prefetch Buffer that optimizes 16-bit
access to the Flash. This is particularly efficient when the processor is running in Thumb mode.
8.2.3
Lock Regions
The Embedded Flash Controller manages 16 lock bits to protect 16 regions of the flash against
inadvertent flash erasing or programming commands. The AT91SAM7S64 contains 16 lock
regions and each lock region contains 32 pages of 128 bytes. Each lock region has a size of 4
Kbytes.
If a locked-regions erase or program command occurs, the command is aborted and the EFC
trigs an interrupt.
The 16 NVM bits are software programmable through the EFC User Interface. The command
"Set Lock Bit" enables the protection. The command "Clear Lock Bit" unlocks the lock region.
Asserting the ERASE pin clears the lock bits, thus unlocking the entire Flash.
8.2.4
Security Bit Feature
The AT91SAM7S64 features a security bit, based on a specific NVM-Bit. When the security is
enabled, any access to the Flash, either through the ICE interface or through the Fast Flash Programming Interface, is forbidden. This ensures the confidentiality of the code programmed in the
Flash.
This security bit can only be enabled, through the Command "Set Security Bit" of the EFC User
Interface. Disabling the security bit can only be achieved by asserting the ERASE pin at 1, and
after a full flash erase is performed. When the security bit is deactivated, all accesses to the
flash are permitted.
15
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
It is important to note that the assertion of the ERASE pin should always be longer than 50 ms.
As the ERASE pin integrates a permanent pull-down, it can be left unconnected during normal
operation. However, it is safer to connect it directly to GND for the final application.
8.2.5
Non-volatile Brownout Detector Control
Two general purpose NVM (GPNVM) bits are used for controlling the brownout detector (BOD),
so that even after a power loss, the brownout detector operations remain as defined by the user.
These two GPNVM bits can be cleared or set respectively through the commands "Clear General-purpose NVM Bit" and "Set General-purpose NVM Bit" of the EFC User Interface.
• GPNVM Bit 0 is used as a brownout detector enable bit. Setting the GPNVM Bit 0 enables
the BOD, clearing it disables the BOD. Asserting ERASE clears the GPNVM Bit 0 and thus
disables the brownout detector by default.
• The GPNVM Bit 1 is used as a brownout reset enable signal for the reset controller. Setting
the GPNVM Bit 1 enables the brownout reset when a brownout is detected, Clearing the
GPNVM Bit 1 disables the brownout reset. Asserting ERASE disables the brownout reset by
default.
8.2.6
Calibration Bits
Eight NVM bits are used to calibrate the brownout detector and the voltage regulator. These bits
are factory configured and cannot be changed by the user. The ERASE pin has no effect on the
calibration bits.
8.3
Fast Flash Programming Interface
The Fast Flash Programming Interface allows programming the device through either a serial
JTAG interface or through a multiplexed fully-handshaked parallel port. It allows gang-programming with market-standard industrial programmers.
The FFPI supports read, page program, page erase, full erase, lock, unlock and protect
commands.
The Fast Flash Programming Interface is enabled and the Fast Programming Mode is entered
when the TST pin and the PA0 and PA1 pins are all tied high.
16
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
9. System Controller
The System Controller manages all vital blocks of the microcontroller: interrupts, clocks, power,
time, debug and reset.
Figure 9-1.
System Controller Block Diagram
System Controller
jtag_nreset
Boundary Scan
TAP Controller
nirq
irq0-irq1
Advanced
Interrupt
Controller
fiq
periph_irq[2..14]
nfiq
proc_nreset
ARM7TDMI
PCK
int
debug
pit_irq
rtt_irq
wdt_irq
dbgu_irq
pmc_irq
rstc_irq
ice_nreset
force_ntrst
MCK
periph_nreset
dbgu_irq
Debug
Unit
force_ntrst
dbgu_txd
dbgu_rxd
security_bit
MCK
debug
periph_nreset
SLCK
periph_nreset
pit_irq
Real-Time
Timer
rtt_irq
Watchdog
Timer
wdt_irq
flash_poe
flash_wrdis
cal
gpnvm[0]
wdt_fault
WDRPROC
gpnvm[1]
flash_wrdis
gpnvm[0..1]
MCK
bod_rst_en
BOD
proc_nreset
ice_nreset
jtag_nreset
POR
Reset
Controller
rstc_irq
NRST
OSC
SLCK
MAINCK
XOUT
Voltage
Regulator
Mode
Controller
standby
Voltage
Regulator
cal
SLCK
XIN
Memory
Controller
periph_nreset
proc_nreset
flash_poe
RCOSC
Embedded
Flash
cal
SLCK
debug
idle
proc_nreset
en
Periodic
Interval
Timer
periph_clk[2..14]
Power
Management
Controller
UDPCK
pck[0-2]
periph_clk[11]
PCK
periph_nreset
UDPCK
MCK
USB Device
Port
periph_irq[11]
usb_suspend
PLLRC
PLL
PLLCK
pmc_irq
int
idle
periph_nreset
periph_clk[4..14]
usb_suspend
periph_nreset
periph_nreset
irq0-irq1
periph_clk[2]
dbgu_rxd
Embedded
Peripherals
periph_irq{2]
PIO
Controller
fiq
periph_irq[4..14]
dbgu_txd
in
PA0-PA31
out
enable
17
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
9.1
System Controller Mapping
The System Controller peripherals are all mapped to the highest 4 Kbytes of address space,
between addresses 0xFFFF F000 and 0xFFFF FFFF.
Figure 9-2 shows the mapping of the System Controller. Note that the Memory Controller configuration user interface is also mapped within this address space.
Figure 9-2.
System Controller Mapping
Address
Peripheral
Peripheral Name
Size
0xFFFF F000
Advanced Interrupt Controller
512 Bytes/128 registers
DBGU
Debug Unit
512 Bytes/128 registers
PIOA
PIO Controller A
512 Bytes/128 registers
PMC
Power Management Controller
256 Bytes/64 registers
RSTC
Reset Controller
16 Bytes/4 registers
RTT
Real-time Timer
16 Bytes/4 registers
PIT
Periodic Interval Timer
16 Bytes/4 registers
Watchdog Timer
16 Bytes/4 registers
Voltage Regulator Mode Controller
4 Bytes/1 register
Memory Controller
256 Bytes/64 registers
AIC
0xFFFF F1FF
0xFFFF F200
0xFFFF F3FF
0xFFFF F400
0xFFFF F5FF
0xFFFF F600
Reserved
0xFFFF FBFF
0xFFFF FC00
0xFFFF FCFF
0xFFFF FD00
0xFFFF FD0F
Reserved
0xFFFF FD20
0xFFFF FC2F
0xFFFF FD30
0xFFFF FC3F
0xFFFF FD40
0xFFFF FD4F
WDT
Reserved
0xFFFF FD60
0xFFFF FC6F
0xFFFF FD70
0xFFFF FEFF
0xFFFF FF00
VREG
Reserved
MC
0xFFFF FFFF
9.2
Reset Controller
The Reset Controller is based on a power-on reset cell and one brownout detector. It gives the
status of the last reset, indicating whether it is a power-up reset, a software reset, a user reset, a
watchdog reset or a brownout reset. In addition, it controls the internal resets and the NRST pin
output. It allows to shape a signal on the NRST line, guaranteeing that the length of the pulse
meets any requirement.
18
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
Note that if NRST is used as a reset output signal for external devices during power-off, the
brownout detector must be activated.
9.2.1
Brownout Detector and Power-on Reset
The AT91SAM7S64 embeds a brownout detection circuit and a power-on reset cell. Both are
supplied with and monitor VDDCORE. Both signals are provided to the Flash to prevent any
code corruption during power-up or power-down sequences or if brownouts occur on the
VDDCORE power supply.
The power-on reset cell has a limited-accuracy threshold at around 1.5V. Its output remains low
during power-up until VDDCORE goes over this voltage level. This signal goes to the reset controller and allows a full re-initialization of the device.
The brownout detector monitors the VDDCORE level during operation by comparing it to a fixed
trigger level. It secures system operations in the most difficult environments and prevents code
corruption in case of brownout on the VDDCORE.
Only VDDCORE is monitored, as a voltage drop on VDDFLASH or any other power supply of
the device cannot affect the Flash.
When the brownout detector is enabled and VDDCORE decreases to a value below the trigger
level (Vbot-, defined as Vbot - hyst/2), the brownout output is immediately activated.
When VDDCORE increases above the trigger level (Vbot+, defined as Vbot + hyst/2), the reset
is released. The brownout detector only detects a drop if the voltage on VDDCORE stays below
the threshold voltage for longer than about 1µs.
The threshold voltage has a hysteresis of about 50 mV, to ensure spike free brownout detection.
The typical value of the brownout detector threshold is 1.68V with an accuracy of ± 2% and is
factory calibrated.
The brownout detector is low-power, as it consumes less than 20 µA static current. However, it
can be deactivated to save its static current. In this case, it consumes less than 1µA. The deactivation is configured through the GPNVM bit 0 of the Flash.
9.3
Clock Generator
The Clock Generator embeds one low-power RC Oscillator, one Main Oscillator and one PLL
with the following characteristics:
• RC Oscillator range is between 22 KHz and 42 KHz
• Main Oscillator frequency ranges between 3 and 20 MHz
• Main Oscillator can be bypassed
• PLL output ranges between 80 and 220 MHz
It provides SLCK, MAINCK and PLLCK.
19
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
Figure 9-3.
Clock Generator Block Diagram
Clock Generator
XIN
Embedded
RC
Oscillator
Slow Clock
SLCK
Main
Oscillator
Main Clock
MAINCK
PLL and
Divider
PLL Clock
PLLCK
XOUT
PLLRC
Status
Control
Power
Management
Controller
9.4
Power Management Controller
The Power Management Controller uses the Clock Generator outputs to provide:
• the Processor Clock PCK
• the Master Clock MCK
• the USB Clock UDPCK
• all the peripheral clocks, independently controllable
• three programmable clock outputs
The Master Clock (MCK) is programmable from a few hundred Hz to the maximum operating frequency of the device.
The Processor Clock (PCK) switches off when entering processor idle mode, thus allowing
reduced power consumption while waiting for an interrupt.
20
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
Figure 9-4.
Power Management Controller Block Diagram
Processor
Clock
Controller
Master Clock Controller
SLCK
MAINCK
PLLCK
PCK
int
Idle Mode
Prescaler
/1,/2,/4,...,/64
MCK
Peripherals
Clock Controller
periph_clk[2..14]
ON/OFF
Programmable Clock Controller
SLCK
MAINCK
PLLCK
Prescaler
/1,/2,/4,...,/64
USB Clock Controller
ON/OFF
PLLCK
9.5
Divider
/1,/2,/4
pck[0..2]
usb_suspend
UDPCK
Advanced Interrupt Controller
• Controls the interrupt lines (nIRQ and nFIQ) of an ARM Processor
• Individually maskable and vectored interrupt sources
– Source 0 is reserved for the Fast Interrupt Input (FIQ)
– Source 1 is reserved for system peripherals (RTT, PIT, EFC, PMC, DBGU, etc.)
– Other sources control the peripheral interrupts or external interrupts
– Programmable edge-triggered or level-sensitive internal sources
– Programmable positive/negative edge-triggered or high/low level-sensitive external
sources
• 8-level Priority Controller
– Drives the normal interrupt of the processor
– Handles priority of the interrupt sources
– Higher priority interrupts can be served during service of lower priority interrupt
• Vectoring
– Optimizes interrupt service routine branch and execution
– One 32-bit vector register per interrupt source
– Interrupt vector register reads the corresponding current interrupt vector
• Protect Mode
– Easy debugging by preventing automatic operations
• Fast Forcing
– Permits redirecting any interrupt source on the fast interrupt
• General Interrupt Mask
– Provides processor synchronization on events without triggering an interrupt
21
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
9.6
Debug Unit
• Comprises:
– One two-pin UART
– One Interface for the Debug Communication Channel (DCC) support
– One set of Chip ID Registers
– One interface providing ICE Access Prevention
• Two-pin UART
– Implemented features are compatible with the USART
– Programmable Baud Rate Generator
– Parity, Framing and Overrun Error
– Automatic Echo, Local Loopback and Remote Loopback Channel Modes
• Debug Communication Channel Support
– Offers visibility of COMMRX and COMMTX signals from the ARM Processor
• Chip ID Registers
– Identification of the device revision, sizes of the embedded memories, set of
peripherals
– Chip ID is 0x27090540 (VERSION 0)
9.7
Periodic Interval Timer
• 20-bit programmable counter plus 12-bit interval counter
9.8
Watchdog Timer
• 12-bit key-protected Programmable Counter running on prescaled SLCK
• Provides reset or interrupt signals to the system
• Counter may be stopped while the processor is in debug state or in idle mode
9.9
Real-time Timer
• 32-bit free-running counter with alarm running on prescaled SLCK
• Programmable 16-bit prescaler for SLCK accuracy compensation
9.10
PIO Controller
• One PIO Controller, controlling 32 I/O lines
• Fully programmable through set/clear registers
• Multiplexing of two peripheral functions per I/O line
• For each I/O line (whether assigned to a peripheral or used as general-purpose I/O)
– Input change interrupt
– Half a clock period glitch filter
– Multi-drive option enables driving in open drain
– Programmable pull-up on each I/O line
– Pin data status register, supplies visibility of the level on the pin at any time
• Synchronous output, provides Set and Clear of several I/O lines in a single write
22
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
9.11
Voltage Regulator Controller
The aim of this controller is to select the Power Mode of the Voltage Regulator between Normal
Mode (bit 0 is cleared) or Standby Mode (bit 0 is set).
23
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
10. Peripherals
10.1
Peripheral Mapping
Each peripheral is allocated 16 Kbytes of address space.
Figure 10-1. User Peripheral Mapping
Peripheral Name
Size
Timer/Counter 0, 1 and 2
16 Kbytes
USB Device Port
16 Kbytes
Two-Wire Interface
16 Kbytes
USART0
Universal Synchronous Asynchronous
Receiver Transmitter 0
16 Kbytes
USART1
Universal Synchronous Asynchronous
Receiver Transmitter 1
16 Kbytes
PWM Controller
16 Kbytes
SSC
Serial Synchronous Controller
16 Kbytes
ADC
Analog-to-Digital Converter
16 Kbytes
0xF000 0000
Reserved
0xFFF9 FFFF
0xFFFA 0000
TC0, TC1, TC2
0xFFFA 3FFF
0xFFFA 4000
Reserved
0xFFFA FFFF
0xFFFB 0000
UDP
0xFFFB 3FFF
0xFFFB 4000
Reserved
0xFFFB 7FFF
0xFFFB 8000
TWI
0xFFFB BFFF
0xFFFB C000
Reserved
0xFFFB FFFF
0xFFFC 0000
0xFFFC 3FFF
0xFFFC 4000
0xFFFC 7FFF
0xFFFC 8000
Reserved
0xFFFC BFFF
0xFFFC C000
PWMC
0xFFFC FFFF
0xFFFD 0000
Reserved
0xFFFD 3FFF
0xFFFD 4000
0xFFFD 7FFF
0xFFFD 8000
0xFFFD BFFF
0xFFFD C000
Reserved
0xFFFD FFFF
0xFFFE 0000
SPI
Serial Peripheral Interface
16 Kbytes
0xFFFE 3FFF
0xFFFE 4000
Reserved
0xFFFE FFFF
24
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
10.2
Peripheral Multiplexing on PIO Lines
The AT91SAM7S64 features one PIO controller, PIOA, that multiplexes the I/O lines of the
peripheral set.
PIO Controller A controls 32 lines. Each line can be assigned to one of two peripheral functions,
A or B. Some of them can also be multiplexed with the analog inputs of the ADC Controller.
Table 10-1 on page 26 defines how the I/O lines of the peripherals A, B or the analog inputs are
multiplexed on the PIO Controller A. The two columns “Function” and “Comments” have been
inserted for the user’s own comments; they may be used to track how pins are defined in an
application.
Note that some peripheral functions that are output only may be duplicated in the table.
All pins reset in their Parallel I/O lines function are configured in input with the programmable
pull-up enabled, so that the device is maintained in a static state as soon as a reset is detected.
25
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
10.3
PIO Controller A Multiplexing
Table 10-1.
Multiplexing on PIO Controller A
PIO Controller A
Application Usage
I/O Line
Peripheral A
Peripheral B
Comments
PA0
PWM0
TIOA0
High-Drive
PA1
PWM1
TIOB0
High-Drive
PA2
PWM2
SCK0
High-Drive
PA3
TWD
NPCS3
High-Drive
PA4
TWCK
TCLK0
PA5
RXD0
NPCS3
PA6
TXD0
PCK0
PA7
RTS0
PWM3
PA8
CTS0
ADTRG
PA9
DRXD
NPCS1
PA10
DTXD
NPCS2
PA11
NPCS0
PWM0
PA12
MISO
PWM1
PA13
MOSI
PWM2
PA14
SPCK
PWM3
PA15
TF
TIOA1
PA16
TK
TIOB1
PA17
TD
PCK1
AD0
PA18
RD
PCK2
AD1
PA19
RK
FIQ
AD2
PA20
RF
IRQ0
AD3
PA21
RXD1
PCK1
PA22
TXD1
NPCS3
PA23
SCK1
PWM0
PA24
RTS1
PWM1
PA25
CTS1
PWM2
PA26
DCD1
TIOA2
PA27
DTR1
TIOB2
PA28
DSR1
TCLK1
PA29
RI1
TCLK2
PA30
IRQ1
NPCS2
PA31
NPCS1
PCK2
26
Function
Comments
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
10.4
Peripheral Identifiers
The AT91SAM7S64 embeds a wide range of peripherals. Table 10-2 defines the Peripheral
Identifiers of the AT91SAM7S64. A peripheral identifier is required for the control of the peripheral interrupt with the Advanced Interrupt Controller and for the control of the peripheral clock
with the Power Management Controller.
Table 10-2.
Peripheral Identifiers
Peripheral
Peripheral
Peripheral
External
ID
Mnemonic
Name
Interrupt
0
AIC
Advanced Interrupt Controller
FIQ
System Interrupt
1
SYSIRQ
2
PIOA
3
Reserved
4
ADC(1)
Analog-to Digital Converter
5
SPI
Serial Peripheral Interface
6
US0
USART 0
7
US1
USART 1
8
SSC
Synchronous Serial Controller
9
TWI
Two-wire Interface
10
PWMC
PWM Controller
11
UDP
USB Device Port
12
TC0
Timer/Counter 0
13
TC1
Timer/Counter 1
14
TC2
Timer/Counter 2
15 - 29
Reserved
30
AIC
Advanced Interrupt Controller
IRQ0
AIC
Advanced Interrupt Controller
IRQ1
31
Note:
10.5
(1)
Parallel I/O Controller A
1. Setting SYSIRQ and ADC bits in the clock set/clear registers of the PMC has no effect. The
System Controller is continuously clocked. The ADC clock is automatically started for the first
conversion. In Sleep Mode the ADC clock is automatically stopped after each conversion.
Serial Peripheral Interface
• Supports communication with external serial devices
– Four chip selects with external decoder allow communication with up to 15
peripherals
– Serial memories, such as DataFlash® and 3-wire EEPROMs
– Serial peripherals, such as ADCs, DACs, LCD Controllers, CAN Controllers and
Sensors
– External co-processors
• Master or slave serial peripheral bus interface
– 8- to 16-bit programmable data length per chip select
– Programmable phase and polarity per chip select
27
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
– Programmable transfer delays between consecutive transfers and between clock
and data per chip select
– Programmable delay between consecutive transfers
– Selectable mode fault detection
– Maximum frequency at up to Master Clock
10.6
Two-wire Interface
• Master Mode only
• Compatibility with standard two-wire serial memories
• One, two or three bytes for slave address
• Sequential read/write operations
10.7
USART
• Programmable Baud Rate Generator
• 5- to 9-bit full-duplex synchronous or asynchronous serial communications
– 1, 1.5 or 2 stop bits in Asynchronous Mode
– 1 or 2 stop bits in Synchronous Mode
– Parity generation and error detection
– Framing error detection, overrun error detection
– MSB or LSB first
– Optional break generation and detection
– By 8 or by 16 over-sampling receiver frequency
– Hardware handshaking RTS - CTS
– Modem Signals Management DTR-DSR-DCD-RI on USART1
– Receiver time-out and transmitter timeguard
– Multi-drop Mode with address generation and detection
• RS485 with driver control signal
• ISO7816, T = 0 or T = 1 Protocols for interfacing with smart cards
– NACK handling, error counter with repetition and iteration limit
• IrDA modulation and demodulation
– Communication at up to 115.2 Kbps
• Test Modes
– Remote Loopback, Local Loopback, Automatic Echo
10.8
Serial Synchronous Controller
• Provides serial synchronous communication links used in audio and telecom applications
• Contains an independent receiver and transmitter and a common clock divider
• Offers a configurable frame sync and data length
• Receiver and transmitter can be programmed to start automatically or on detection of
different event on the frame sync signal
• Receiver and transmitter include a data signal, a clock signal and a frame synchronization
signal
28
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
10.9
Timer Counter
• Three 16-bit Timer Counter Channels
– Three output compare or two input capture
• Wide range of functions including:
– Frequency measurement
– Event counting
– Interval measurement
– Pulse generation
– Delay timing
– Pulse Width Modulation
– Up/down capabilities
• Each channel is user-configurable and contains:
– Three external clock inputs
– Five internal clock inputs, as defined in Table 10-3
Table 10-3.
Timer Counter Clocks Assignment
TC Clock Input
Clock
TIMER_CLOCK1
MCK/2
TIMER_CLOCK2
MCK/8
TIMER_CLOCK3
MCK/32
TIMER_CLOCK4
MCK/128
TIMER_CLOCK5
MCK/1024
– Two multi-purpose input/output signals
– Two global registers that act on all three TC channels
10.10 PWM Controller
• Four channels, one 16-bit counter per channel
• Common clock generator, providing thirteen different clocks
– One Modulo n counter providing eleven clocks
– Two independent linear dividers working on modulo n counter outputs
• Independent channel programming
– Independent enable/disable commands
– Independent clock selection
– Independent period and duty cycle, with double bufferization
– Programmable selection of the output waveform polarity
– Programmable center or left aligned output waveform
10.11 USB Device Port
• USB V2.0 full-speed compliant,12 Mbits per second.
• Embedded USB V2.0 full-speed transceiver
29
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
• Embedded 328-byte dual-port RAM for endpoints
• Four endpoints
– Endpoint 0: 8 bytes
– Endpoint 1 and 2: 64 bytes ping-pong
– Endpoint 3: 64 bytes
– Ping-pong Mode (two memory banks) for bulk endpoints
• Suspend/resume logic
10.12 Analog-to-digital Converter
• 8-channel ADC
• 10-bit 100 Ksamples/sec. Successive Approximation Register ADC
• -2/+2 LSB Integral Non Linearity, -1/+2 LSB Differential Non Linearity
• Integrated 8-to-1 multiplexer, offering eight independent 3.3V analog inputs
• Individual enable and disable of each channel
• External voltage reference for better accuracy on low voltage inputs
• Multiple trigger source
– Hardware or software trigger
– External trigger pin
– Timer Counter 0 to 2 outputs TIOA0 to TIOA2 trigger
• Sleep Mode and conversion sequencer
– Automatic wakeup on trigger and back to sleep mode after conversions of all
enabled channels
• Four of eight analog inputs shared with digital signals
30
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
11. ARM7TDMI Processor Overview
11.1
Overview
The ARM7TDMI core executes both the 32-bit ARM® and 16-bit Thumb® instruction sets, allowing the user to trade off between high performance and high code density.The ARM7TDMI
processor implements Von Neuman architecture, using a three-stage pipeline consisting of
Fetch, Decode, and Execute stages.
The main features of the ARM7tDMI processor are:
• ARM7TDMI Based on ARMv4T Architecture
• Two Instruction Sets
– ARM® High-performance 32-bit Instruction Set
– Thumb® High Code Density 16-bit Instruction Set
• Three-Stage Pipeline Architecture
– Instruction Fetch (F)
– Instruction Decode (D)
– Execute (E)
31
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
11.2
ARM7TDMI Processor
For further details on ARM7TDMI, refer to the following ARM documents:
ARM Architecture Reference Manual (DDI 0100E)
ARM7TDMI Technical Reference Manual (DDI 0210B)
11.2.1
Instruction Type
Instructions are either 32 bits long (in ARM state) or 16 bits long (in THUMB state).
11.2.2
Data Type
ARM7TDMI supports byte (8-bit), half-word (16-bit) and word (32-bit) data types. Words must be
aligned to four-byte boundaries and half words to two-byte boundaries.
Unaligned data access behavior depends on which instruction is used where.
11.2.3
ARM7TDMI Operating Mode
The ARM7TDMI, based on ARM architecture v4T, supports seven processor modes:
User: The normal ARM program execution state
FIQ: Designed to support high-speed data transfer or channel process
IRQ: Used for general-purpose interrupt handling
Supervisor: Protected mode for the operating system
Abort mode: Implements virtual memory and/or memory protection
System: A privileged user mode for the operating system
Undefined: Supports software emulation of hardware coprocessors
Mode changes may be made under software control, or may be brought about by external interrupts or exception processing. Most application programs execute in User mode. The non-user
modes, or privileged modes, are entered in order to service interrupts or exceptions, or to
access protected resources.
11.2.4
ARM7TDMI Registers
The ARM7TDMI processor has a total of 37registers:
• 31 general-purpose 32-bit registers
• 6 status registers
These registers are not accessible at the same time. The processor state and operating mode
determine which registers are available to the programmer.
At any one time 16 registers are visible to the user. The remainder are synonyms used to speed
up exception processing.
Register 15 is the Program Counter (PC) and can be used in all instructions to reference data
relative to the current instruction.
R14 holds the return address after a subroutine call.
R13 is used (by software convention) as a stack pointer.
32
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
Table 11-1.
ARM7TDMI ARM Modes and Registers Layout
User and
System Mode
Supervisor
Mode
Abort Mode
Undefined
Mode
Interrupt
Mode
Fast Interrupt
Mode
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
R1
R1
R1
R1
R1
R1
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R3
R3
R3
R3
R3
R3
R4
R4
R4
R4
R4
R4
R5
R5
R5
R5
R5
R5
R6
R6
R6
R6
R6
R6
R7
R7
R7
R7
R7
R7
R8
R8
R8
R8
R8
R8_FIQ
R9
R9
R9
R9
R9
R9_FIQ
R10
R10
R10
R10
R10
R10_FIQ
R11
R11
R11
R11
R11
R11_FIQ
R12
R12
R12
R12
R12
R12_FIQ
R13
R13_SVC
R13_ABORT
R13_UNDEF
R13_IRQ
R13_FIQ
R14
R14_SVC
R14_ABORT
R14_UNDEF
R14_IRQ
R14_FIQ
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
CPSR
CPSR
CPSR
CPSR
CPSR
CPSR
SPSR_SVC
SPSR_ABORT
SPSR_UNDEF
SPSR_IRQ
SPSR_FIQ
Mode-specific banked registers
Registers R0 to R7 are unbanked registers. This means that each of them refers to the same 32bit physical register in all processor modes. They are general-purpose registers, with no special
uses managed by the architecture, and can be used wherever an instruction allows a generalpurpose register to be specified.
Registers R8 to R14 are banked registers. This means that each of them depends on the current
mode of the processor.
11.2.4.1
Modes and Exception Handling
All exceptions have banked registers for R14 and R13.
After an exception, R14 holds the return address for exception processing. This address is used
to return after the exception is processed, as well as to address the instruction that caused the
exception.
R13 is banked across exception modes to provide each exception handler with a private stack
pointer.
The fast interrupt mode also banks registers 8 to 12 so that interrupt processing can begin without having to save these registers.
33
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
A seventh processing mode, System Mode, does not have any banked registers. It uses the
User Mode registers. System Mode runs tasks that require a privileged processor mode and
allows them to invoke all classes of exceptions.
11.2.4.2
Status Registers
All other processor states are held in status registers. The current operating processor status is
in the Current Program Status Register (CPSR). The CPSR holds:
• four ALU flags (Negative, Zero, Carry, and Overflow)
• two interrupt disable bits (one for each type of interrupt)
• one bit to indicate ARM or Thumb execution
• five bits to encode the current processor mode
All five exception modes also have a Saved Program Status Register (SPSR) that holds the
CPSR of the task immediately preceding the exception.
11.2.4.3
Exception Types
The ARM7TDMI supports five types of exception and a privileged processing mode for each type.
The types of exceptions are:
• fast interrupt (FIQ)
• normal interrupt (IRQ)
• memory aborts (used to implement memory protection or virtual memory)
• attempted execution of an undefined instruction
• software interrupts (SWIs)
Exceptions are generated by internal and external sources.
More than one exception can occur in the same time.
When an exception occurs, the banked version of R14 and the SPSR for the exception mode
are used to save state.
To return after handling the exception, the SPSR is moved to the CPSR, and R14 is moved to
the PC. This can be done in two ways:
• by using a data-processing instruction with the S-bit set, and the PC as the destination
• by using the Load Multiple with Restore CPSR instruction (LDM)
11.2.5
ARM Instruction Set Overview
The ARM instruction set is divided into:
• Branch instructions
• Data processing instructions
• Status register transfer instructions
• Load and Store instructions
• Coprocessor instructions
• Exception-generating instructions
ARM instructions can be executed conditionally. Every instruction contains a 4-bit condition
code field (bit[31:28]).
Table 11-2 gives the ARM instruction mnemonic list.
34
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
Table 11-2.
11.2.6
ARM Instruction Mnemonic List
Mnemonic
Operation
Mnemonic
Operation
MOV
Move
CDP
Coprocessor Data Processing
ADD
Add
MVN
Move Not
SUB
Subtract
ADC
Add with Carry
RSB
Reverse Subtract
SBC
Subtract with Carry
CMP
Compare
RSC
Reverse Subtract with Carry
TST
Test
CMN
Compare Negated
AND
Logical AND
TEQ
Test Equivalence
EOR
Logical Exclusive OR
BIC
Bit Clear
MUL
Multiply
ORR
Logical (inclusive) OR
SMULL
Sign Long Multiply
MLA
Multiply Accumulate
SMLAL
Signed Long Multiply Accumulate
UMULL
Unsigned Long Multiply
MSR
Move to Status Register
UMLAL
Unsigned Long Multiply Accumulate
B
Branch
MRS
Move From Status Register
BX
Branch and Exchange
BL
Branch and Link
LDR
Load Word
SWI
Software Interrupt
LDRSH
Load Signed Halfword
STR
Store Word
LDRSB
Load Signed Byte
STRH
Store Half Word
LDRH
Load Half Word
STRB
Store Byte
LDRB
Load Byte
STRBT
Store Register Byte with Translation
LDRBT
Load Register Byte with Translation
STRT
Store Register with Translation
LDRT
Load Register with Translation
STM
Store Multiple
LDM
Load Multiple
SWPB
Swap Byte
SWP
Swap Word
MRC
Move From Coprocessor
MCR
Move To Coprocessor
STC
Store From Coprocessor
LDC
Load To Coprocessor
Thumb Instruction Set Overview
The Thumb instruction set is a re-encoded subset of the ARM instruction set.
The Thumb instruction set is divided into:
• Branch instructions
• Data processing instructions
• Load and Store instructions
• Load and Store Multiple instructions
• Exception-generating instruction
In Thumb mode, eight general-purpose registers, R0 to R7, are available that are the same
physical registers as R0 to R7 when executing ARM instructions. Some Thumb instructions also
access to the Program Counter (ARM Register 15), the Link Register (ARM Register 14) and the
35
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
Stack Pointer (ARM Register 13). Further instructions allow limited access to the ARM registers
8 to 15.
Table 11-3 gives the Thumb instruction mnemonic list.
Table 11-3.
36
Thumb Instruction Mnemonic List
Mnemonic
Operation
Mnemonic
Operation
MOV
Move
MVN
Move Not
ADD
Add
ADC
Add with Carry
SUB
Subtract
SBC
Subtract with Carry
CMP
Compare
CMN
Compare Negated
TST
Test
NEG
Negate
AND
Logical AND
BIC
Bit Clear
EOR
Logical Exclusive OR
ORR
Logical (inclusive) OR
LSL
Logical Shift Left
LSR
Logical Shift Right
ASR
Arithmetic Shift Right
ROR
Rotate Right
MUL
Multiply
B
Branch
BL
Branch and Link
BX
Branch and Exchange
SWI
Software Interrupt
LDR
Load Word
STR
Store Word
LDRH
Load Half Word
STRH
Store Half Word
LDRB
Load Byte
STRB
Store Byte
LDRSH
Load Signed Halfword
LDRSB
Load Signed Byte
LDMIA
Load Multiple
STMIA
Store Multiple
PUSH
Push Register to stack
POP
Pop Register from stack
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
12. AT91SAM7S64 Debug and Test Features
12.1
Description
The AT91SAM7S64 features a number of complementary debug and test capabilities. A common JTAG/ICE (In-Circuit Emulator) port is used for standard debugging functions, such as
downloading code and single-stepping through programs. The Debug Unit provides a two-pin
UART that can be used to upload an application into internal SRAM. It manages the interrupt
handling of the internal COMMTX and COMMRX signals that trace the activity of the Debug
Communication Channel.
A set of dedicated debug and test input/output pins gives direct access to these capabilities from
a PC-based test environment.
12.2
Block Diagram
Figure 12-1. Debug and Test Block Diagram
TMS
TCK
TDI
ICE/JTAG
TAP
Boundary
TAP
JTAGSEL
TDO
ICE
POR
Reset
and
Test
TST
PIO
ARM7TDMI
PDC
DTXD
DBGU
DRXD
37
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
12.3
12.3.1
Application Examples
Debug Environment
Figure 12-2 on page 38 shows a complete debug environment example. The ICE/JTAG interface is used for standard debugging functions, such as downloading code and single-stepping
through the program.
Figure 12-2. Application Debug Environment Example
Host Debugger
ICE/JTAG
Interface
ICE/JTAG
Connector
AT91SAM7S64
RS232
Connector
Terminal
AT91SAM7S64-based Application Board
38
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
12.3.2
Test Environment
Figure 12-3 on page 39 shows a test environment example. Test vectors are sent and interpreted by the tester. In this example, the “board in test” is designed using a number of JTAGcompliant devices. These devices can be connected to form a single scan chain.
Figure 12-3. Application Test Environment Example
Test Adaptor
Tester
JTAG
Interface
ICE/JTAG
Connector
Chip n
AT91SAM7S64
Chip 2
Chip 1
AT91SAM7S64-based Application Board In Test
12.4
Debug and Test Pin Description
Table 12-1.
Pin Name
Debug and Test Pin List
Function
Type
Active Level
Input/Output
Low
Input
High
Reset/Test
NRST
Microcontroller Reset
TST
Test Mode Select
ICE and JTAG
TCK
Test Clock
Input
TDI
Test Data In
Input
TDO
Test Data Out
TMS
Test Mode Select
Input
JTAGSEL
JTAG Selection
Input
Output
Debug Unit
DRXD
Debug Receive Data
Input
DTXD
Debug Transmit Data
Output
39
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
12.5
Functional Description
12.6
Test Pin
One dedicated pin, TST, is used to define the device operating mode. The user must make sure
that this pin is tied at low level to ensure normal operating conditions. Other values associated
with this pin are reserved for manufacturing test.
12.6.1
Embedded In-circuit Emulator
The ARM7TDMI embedded In-circuit Emulator is supported via the ICE/JTAG port.The internal
state of the ARM7TDMI is examined through an ICE/JTAG port.
The ARM7TDMI processor contains hardware extensions for advanced debugging features:
• In halt mode, a store-multiple (STM) can be inserted into the instruction pipeline. This exports
the contents of the ARM7TDMI registers. This data can be serially shifted out without
affecting the rest of the system.
• In monitor mode, the JTAG interface is used to transfer data between the debugger and a
simple monitor program running on the ARM7TDMI processor.
There are three scan chains inside the ARM7TDMI processor that support testing, debugging,
and programming of the Embedded ICE. The scan chains are controlled by the ICE/JTAG port.
Embedded ICE mode is selected when JTAGSEL is low. It is not possible to switch directly
between ICE and JTAG operations. A chip reset must be performed after JTAGSEL is changed.
For further details on the Embedded In-Circuit-Emulator, see the ARM7TDMI (Rev4) Technical
Reference Manual (DDI0210B).
12.6.2
Debug Unit
The Debug Unit provides a two-pin (DXRD and TXRD) USART that can be used for several
debug and trace purposes and offers an ideal means for in-situ programming solutions and
debug monitor communication. Moreover, the association with two Peripheral DMA Controller
channels permits packet handling of these tasks with processor time reduced to a minimum.
The Debug Unit also manages the interrupt handling of the COMMTX and COMMRX signals
that come from the ICE and that trace the activity of the Debug Communication Channel.The
Debug Unit allows blockage of access to the system through the ICE interface.
A specific register, the Debug Unit Chip ID Register, gives information about the product version
and its internal configuration.
The AT91SAM7S64 Debug Unit Chip ID value is 0x27090540 on 32-bit width.
For further details on the Debug Unit, see ”Debug Unit (DBGU)” on page 181.
12.6.3
IEEE 1149.1 JTAG Boundary Scan
IEEE 1149.1 JTAG Boundary Scan allows pin-level access independent of the device packaging
technology.
IEEE 1149.1 JTAG Boundary Scan is enabled when JTAGSEL is high. The SAMPLE, EXTEST
and BYPASS functions are implemented. In ICE debug mode, the ARM processor responds
with a non-JTAG chip ID that identifies the processor to the ICE system. This is not IEEE 1149.1
JTAG-compliant.
40
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
It is not possible to switch directly between JTAG and ICE operations. A chip reset must be performed after JTAGSEL is changed.
A Boundary-scan Descriptor Language (BSDL) file is provided to set up test.
12.6.3.1
JTAG Boundary-scan Register
The Boundary-scan Register (BSR) contains 96 bits that correspond to active pins and associated control signals.
Each AT91SAM7S64 input/output pin corresponds to a 3-bit register in the BSR. The OUTPUT
bit contains data that can be forced on the pad. The INPUT bit facilitates the observability of data
applied to the pad. The CONTROL bit selects the direction of the pad.
Table 12-2.
AT91SAM7S64 JTAG Boundary Scan Register
Bit Number
Pin Name
Pin Type
96
95
Associated BSR
Cells
INPUT
PA17/PGMD5/AD0
IN/OUT
OUTPUT
94
CONTROL
93
INPUT
92
PA18/PGMD6/AD1
IN/OUT
OUTPUT
91
CONTROL
90
INPUT
89
PA21/PGMD9
IN/OUT
OUTPUT
88
CONTROL
87
INPUT
86
PA19/PGMD7/AD2
IN/OUT
OUTPUT
85
CONTROL
84
INPUT
83
PA20/PGMD8/AD3
IN/OUT
OUTPUT
82
CONTROL
81
INPUT
80
PA16/PGMD4
IN/OUT
OUTPUT
79
CONTROL
78
INPUT
77
PA15/PGM3
IN/OUT
OUTPUT
76
CONTROL
75
INPUT
74
PA14/PGMD2
IN/OUT
OUTPUT
73
CONTROL
72
INPUT
71
70
PA13/PGMD1
IN/OUT
OUTPUT
CONTROL
41
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
Table 12-2.
AT91SAM7S64 JTAG Boundary Scan Register (Continued)
Bit Number
Pin Name
Pin Type
69
68
INPUT
PA22/PGMD10
IN/OUT
OUTPUT
67
CONTROL
66
INPUT
65
PA23/PGMD11
IN/OUT
OUTPUT
64
CONTROL
63
INPUT
62
PA24/PGMD12
IN/OUT
OUTPUT
61
CONTROL
60
INPUT
59
PA12/PGMD0
IN/OUT
OUTPUT
58
CONTROL
57
INPUT
56
PA11/PGMM3
IN/OUT
OUTPUT
55
CONTROL
54
INPUT
53
PA10/PGMM2
IN/OUT
OUTPUT
52
CONTROL
51
INPUT
50
PA9/PGMM1
IN/OUT
OUTPUT
49
CONTROL
48
INPUT
47
PA8/PGMM0
IN/OUT
OUTPUT
46
CONTROL
45
INPUT
44
PA7/PGMNVALID
IN/OUT
OUTPUT
43
CONTROL
42
INPUT
41
PA6/PGMNOE
IN/OUT
OUTPUT
40
CONTROL
39
INPUT
38
PA5/PGMRDY
IN/OUT
OUTPUT
37
CONTROL
36
INPUT
35
PA4/PGMNCMD
34
42
Associated BSR
Cells
IN/OUT
OUTPUT
CONTROL
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
Table 12-2.
AT91SAM7S64 JTAG Boundary Scan Register (Continued)
Bit Number
Pin Name
Pin Type
33
32
Associated BSR
Cells
INPUT
PA25/PGMD13
IN/OUT
OUTPUT
31
CONTROL
30
INPUT
29
PA26/PGMD14
IN/OUT
OUTPUT
28
CONTROL
27
INPUT
26
PA27/PGMD15
IN/OUT
OUTPUT
25
CONTROL
24
INPUT
23
PA28
IN/OUT
OUTPUT
22
CONTROL
21
INPUT
20
PA3
IN/OUT
OUTPUT
19
CONTROL
18
INPUT
17
PA2/PGMEN2
IN/OUT
OUTPUT
16
CONTROL
15
INPUT
14
PA1/PGMEN1
IN/OUT
OUTPUT
13
CONTROL
12
INPUT
11
PA0/PGMEN0
IN/OUT
OUTPUT
10
CONTROL
9
INPUT
8
PA29
IN/OUT
OUTPUT
7
CONTROL
6
INPUT
5
PA30
IN/OUT
OUTPUT
4
CONTROL
3
INPUT
2
PA31
IN/OUT
1
0
OUTPUT
CONTROL
ERASE
IN
INPUT
43
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
12.6.4
ID Code Register
Access: Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
VERSION
23
22
26
25
24
PART NUMBER
21
20
19
18
17
16
10
9
8
PART NUMBER
15
14
13
12
11
PART NUMBER
7
6
MANUFACTURER IDENTITY
5
4
MANUFACTURER IDENTITY
3
2
1
0
1
VERSION[31:28]: Product Version Number
Set to 0x1.
PART NUMBER[27:12]: Product Part Number
Set to 0x5B06.
MANUFACTURER IDENTITY[11:1]
Set to 0x01F.
Bit[0] Required by IEEE Std. 1149.1.
Set to 0x1.
JTAG ID Code value is 05B0_603F.
44
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
13. Reset Controller (RSTC)
13.1
Overview
The Reset Controller (RSTC), based on power-on reset cells, handles all the resets of the system without any external components. It reports which reset occurred last.
The Reset Controller also drives independently or simultaneously the external reset and the
peripheral and processor resets.
A brownout detection is also available to prevent the processor from falling into an unpredictable
state.
13.2
Block Diagram
Figure 13-1. Reset Controller Block Diagram
Reset Controller
bod_rst_en
Brownout
Manager
brown_out
Main Supply
POR
bod_reset
Reset
State
Manager
Startup
Counter
rstc_irq
proc_nreset
user_reset
NRST
NRST
Manager
nrst_out
periph_nreset
exter_nreset
WDRPROC
wd_fault
SLCK
45
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
13.3
Functional Description
The Reset Controller is made up of an NRST Manager, a Brownout Manager, a Startup Counter
and a Reset State Manager. It runs at Slow Clock and generates the following reset signals:
• proc_nreset: Processor reset line. It also resets the Watchdog Timer.
• periph_nreset: Affects the whole set of embedded peripherals.
• nrst_out: Drives the NRST pin.
These reset signals are asserted by the Reset Controller, either on external events or on software action. The Reset State Manager controls the generation of reset signals and provides a
signal to the NRST Manager when an assertion of the NRST pin is required.
The NRST Manager shapes the NRST assertion during a programmable time, thus controlling
external device resets.
13.3.1
NRST Manager
The NRST Manager samples the NRST input pin and drives this pin low when required by the
Reset State Manager. Figure 13-2 shows the block diagram of the NRST Manager.
Figure 13-2. NRST Manager
RSTC_MR
URSTIEN
RSTC_SR
URSTS
NRSTL
rstc_irq
RSTC_MR
URSTEN
Other
interrupt
sources
user_reset
NRST
RSTC_MR
ERSTL
nrst_out
13.3.1.1
External Reset Timer
exter_nreset
NRST Signal or Interrupt
The NRST Manager samples the NRST pin at Slow Clock speed. When the line is detected low,
a User Reset is reported to the Reset State Manager.
However, the NRST Manager can be programmed to not trigger a reset when an assertion of
NRST occurs. Writing the bit URSTEN at 0 in RSTC_MR disables the User Reset trigger.
The level of the pin NRST can be read at any time in the bit NRSTL (NRST level) in RSTC_SR.
As soon as the pin NRST is asserted, the bit URSTS in RSTC_SR is set. This bit clears only
when RSTC_SR is read.
The Reset Controller can also be programmed to generate an interrupt instead of generating a
reset. To do so, the bit URSTIEN in RSTC_MR must be written at 1.
13.3.1.2
NRST External Reset Control
The Reset State Manager asserts the signal ext_nreset to assert the NRST pin. When this
occurs, the “nrst_out” signal is driven low by the NRST Manager for a time programmed by the
field ERSTL in RSTC_MR. This assertion duration, named EXTERNAL_RESET_LENGTH, lasts
46
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
2(ERSTL+1) Slow Clock cycles. This gives the approximate duration of an assertion between 60 µs
and 2 seconds. Note that ERSTL at 0 defines a two-cycle duration for the NRST pulse.
This feature allows the Reset Controller to shape the NRST pin level, and thus to guarantee that
the NRST line is driven low for a time compliant with potential external devices connected on the
system reset.
13.3.2
Brownout Manager
Brownout detection prevents the processor from falling into an unpredictable state if the power
supply drops below a certain level. When VDDCORE drops below the brownout threshold, the
brownout manager requests a brownout reset by asserting the bod_reset signal.
The programmer can disable the brownout reset by setting low the bod_rst_en input signal, i.e.;
by locking the corresponding general-purpose NVM bit in the Flash. When the brownout reset is
disabled, no reset is performed. Instead, the brownout detection is reported in the bit BODSTS
of RSTC_SR. BODSTS is set and clears only when RSTC_SR is read.
The bit BODSTS can trigger an interrupt if the bit BODIEN is set in the RSTC_MR.
At factory, the brownout reset is disabled.
Figure 13-3. Brownout Manager
bod_rst_en
bod_reset
RSTC_MR
BODIEN
RSTC_SR
brown_out
BODSTS
rstc_irq
Other
interrupt
sources
47
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
13.3.3
Reset States
The Reset State Manager handles the different reset sources and generates the internal reset
signals. It reports the reset status in the field RSTTYP of the Status Register (RSTC_SR). The
update of the field RSTTYP is performed when the processor reset is released.
13.3.3.1
Power-up Reset
When VDDCORE is powered on, the Main Supply POR cell output is filtered with a start-up
counter that operates at Slow Clock. The purpose of this counter is to ensure that the Slow
Clock oscillator is stable before starting up the device.
The startup time, as shown in Figure 13-4, is hardcoded to comply with the Slow Clock Oscillator
startup time. After the startup time, the reset signals are released and the field RSTTYP in
RSTC_SR reports a Power-up Reset.
When VDDCORE is detected low by the Main Supply POR Cell, all reset signals are asserted
immediately.
Figure 13-4. Power-up Reset
SLCK
Any
Freq.
MCK
Main Supply
POR output
proc_nreset
Startup Time
Processor Startup
= 3 cycles
periph_nreset
NRST
(nrst_out)
EXTERNAL RESET LENGTH
= 2 cycles
48
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
13.3.3.2
User Reset
The User Reset is entered when a low level is detected on the NRST pin and the bit URSTEN in
RSTC_MR is at 1. The NRST input signal is resynchronized with SLCK to insure proper behavior of the system.
The User Reset is entered as soon as a low level is detected on NRST. The Processor Reset
and the Peripheral Reset are asserted.
The User Reset is left when NRST rises, after a two-cycle resynchronization time and a threecycle processor startup. The processor clock is re-enabled as soon as NRST is confirmed high.
When the processor reset signal is released, the RSTTYP field of the Status Register
(RSTC_SR) is loaded with the value 0x4, indicating a User Reset.
The NRST Manager guarantees that the NRST line is asserted for
EXTERNAL_RESET_LENGTH Slow Clock cycles, as programmed in the field ERSTL. However, if NRST does not rise after EXTERNAL_RESET_LENGTH because it is driven low
externally, the internal reset lines remain asserted until NRST actually rises.
Figure 13-5. User Reset State
SLCK
MCK
Any
Freq.
NRST
Resynch.
2 cycles
Resynch.
2 cycles
Processor Startup
= 3 cycles
proc_nreset
RSTTYP
Any
XXX
0x4 = User Reset
periph_nreset
NRST
(nrst_out)
>= EXTERNAL RESET LENGTH
49
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
13.3.3.3
Brownout Reset
When the brown_out/bod_reset signal is asserted, the Reset State Manager immediately enters
the Brownout Reset. In this state, the processor, the peripheral and the external reset lines are
asserted.
The Brownout Reset is left 3 Slow Clock cycles after the rising edge of brown_out/bod_reset
after a two-cycle resynchronization. An external reset is also triggered.
When the processor reset is released, the field RSTTYP in RSTC_SR is loaded with the value
0x5, thus indicating that the last reset is a Brownout Reset.
Figure 13-6. Brownout Reset State
SLCK
MCK
Any
Freq.
brown_out
or bod_reset
Resynch.
2 cycles
Processor Startup
= 3 cycles
proc_nreset
RSTTYP
Any
XXX
0x5 = Brownout Reset
periph_nreset
NRST
(nrst_out)
EXTERNAL RESET LENGTH
8 cycles (ERSTL=2)
50
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
13.3.3.4
Software Reset
The Reset Controller offers several commands used to assert the different reset signals. These
commands are performed by writing the Control Register (RSTC_CR) with the following bits at
1:
• PROCRST: Writing PROCRST at 1 resets the processor and the watchdog timer.
• PERRST: Writing PERRST at 1 resets all the embedded peripherals, including the memory
system, and, in particular, the Remap Command. The Peripheral Reset is generally used for
debug purposes.
• EXTRST: Writing EXTRST at 1 asserts low the NRST pin during a time defined by the field
ERSTL in the Mode Register (RSTC_MR).
The software reset is entered if at least one of these bits is set by the software. All these commands can be performed independently or simultaneously. The software reset lasts 3 Slow
Clock cycles.
The internal reset signals are asserted as soon as the register write is performed. This is
detected on the Master Clock (MCK). They are released when the software reset is left, i.e.; synchronously to SLCK.
If EXTRST is set, the nrst_out signal is asserted depending on the programming of the field
ERSTL. However, the resulting falling edge on NRST does not lead to a User Reset.
If and only if the PROCRST bit is set, the Reset Controller reports the software status in the field
RSTTYP of the Status Register (RSTC_SR). Other Software Resets are not reported in
RSTTYP.
As soon as a software operation is detected, the bit SRCMP (Software Reset Command in
Progress) is set in the Status Register (RSTC_SR). It is cleared as soon as the software reset is
left. No other software reset can be performed while the SRCMP bit is set, and writing any value
in RSTC_CR has no effect.
Figure 13-7. Software Reset
SLCK
MCK
Any
Freq.
Write RSTC_CR
Resynch.
1 cycle
Processor Startup
= 3 cycles
proc_nreset
if PROCRST=1
RSTTYP
Any
XXX
0x3 = Software Reset
periph_nreset
if PERRST=1
NRST
(nrst_out)
if EXTRST=1
EXTERNAL RESET LENGTH
8 cycles (ERSTL=2)
SRCMP in RSTC_SR
51
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
13.3.3.5
Watchdog Reset
The Watchdog Reset is entered when a watchdog fault occurs. This state lasts 3 Slow Clock
cycles.
When in Watchdog Reset, assertion of the reset signals depends on the WDRPROC bit in
WDT_MR:
• If WDRPROC is 0, the Processor Reset and the Peripheral Reset are asserted. The NRST
line is also asserted, depending on the programming of the field ERSTL. However, the
resulting low level on NRST does not result in a User Reset state.
• If WDRPROC = 1, only the processor reset is asserted.
The Watchdog Timer is reset by the proc_nreset signal. As the watchdog fault always causes a
processor reset if WDRSTEN is set, the Watchdog Timer is always reset after a Watchdog
Reset, and the Watchdog is enabled by default and with a period set to a maximum.
When the WDRSTEN in WDT_MR bit is reset, the watchdog fault has no impact on the reset
controller.
Figure 13-8. Watchdog Reset
SLCK
MCK
Any
Freq.
wd_fault
Processor Startup
= 3 cycles
proc_nreset
RSTTYP
Any
XXX
0x2 = Watchdog Reset
periph_nreset
Only if
WDRPROC = 0
NRST
(nrst_out)
EXTERNAL RESET LENGTH
8 cycles (ERSTL=2)
52
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
13.3.4
Reset State Priorities
The Reset State Manager manages the following priorities between the different reset sources,
given in descending order:
• Power-up Reset
• Brownout Reset
• Watchdog Reset
• Software Reset
• User Reset
Particular cases are listed below:
• When in User Reset:
– A watchdog event is impossible because the Watchdog Timer is being reset by the
proc_nreset signal.
– A software reset is impossible, since the processor reset is being activated.
• When in Software Reset:
– A watchdog event has priority over the current state.
– The NRST has no effect.
• When in Watchdog Reset:
– The processor reset is active and so a Software Reset cannot be programmed.
– A User Reset cannot be entered.
13.3.5
Reset Controller Status Register
The Reset Controller status register (RSTC_SR) provides several status fields:
• RSTTYP field: This field gives the type of the last reset, as explained in previous sections.
• SRCMP bit: This field indicates that a Software Reset Command is in progress and that no
further software reset should be performed until the end of the current one. This bit is
automatically cleared at the end of the current software reset.
• NRSTL bit: The NRSTL bit of the Status Register gives the level of the NRST pin sampled on
each MCK rising edge.
• URSTS bit: A high-to-low transition of the NRST pin sets the URSTS bit of the RSTC_SR
register. This transition is also detected on the Master Clock (MCK) rising edge (see Figure
13-9). If the User Reset is disabled (URSTEN = 0) and if the interruption is enabled by the
URSTIEN bit in the RSTC_MR register, the URSTS bit triggers an interrupt. Reading the
RSTC_SR status register resets the URSTS bit and clears the interrupt.
• BODSTS bit: This bit indicates a brownout detection when the brownout reset is disabled
(bod_rst_en = 0). It triggers an interrupt if the bit BODIEN in the RSTC_MR register enables
the interrupt. Reading the RSTC_SR register resets the BODSTS bit and clears the interrupt.
53
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
Figure 13-9.
Reset Controller Status and Interrupt
MCK
read
RSTC_SR
Peripheral Access
2 cycle
resynchronization
2 cycle
resynchronization
NRST
NRSTL
URSTS
rstc_irq
if (URSTEN = 0) and
(URSTIEN = 1)
54
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
13.4
Reset Controller (RSTC) User Interface
Table 13-1.
Reset Controller (RSTC) Register Mapping
Offset
Register
Name
Access
Reset Value
0x00
Control Register
RSTC_CR
Write-only
-
0x04
Status Register
RSTC_SR
Read-only
0x0000_0000
0x08
Mode Register
RSTC_MR
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
55
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
13.4.1
Reset Controller Control Register
Register Name:
RSTC_CR
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
KEY
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
EXTRST
2
PERRST
1
–
0
PROCRST
• PROCRST: Processor Reset
0 = No effect.
1 = If KEY is correct, resets the processor.
• PERRST: Peripheral Reset
0 = No effect.
1 = If KEY is correct, resets the peripherals.
• EXTRST: External Reset
0 = No effect.
1 = If KEY is correct, asserts the NRST pin.
• KEY: Password
Should be written at value 0xA5. Writing any other value in this field aborts the write operation.
56
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
13.4.2
Reset Controller Status Register
Register Name:
RSTC_SR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
SRCMP
16
NRSTL
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
9
RSTTYP
8
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
BODSTS
0
URSTS
• URSTS: User Reset Status
0 = No high-to-low edge on NRST happened since the last read of RSTC_SR.
1 = At least one high-to-low transition of NRST has been detected since the last read of RSTC_SR.
• BODSTS: Brownout Detection Status
0 = No brownout high-to-low transition happened since the last read of RSTC_SR.
1 = A brownout high-to-low transition has been detected since the last read of RSTC_SR.
• RSTTYP: Reset Type
Reports the cause of the last processor reset. Reading this RSTC_SR does not reset this field.
RSTTYP
Reset Type
Comments
0
0
0
Power-up Reset
VDDCORE rising
0
1
0
Watchdog Reset
Watchdog fault occurred
0
1
1
Software Reset
Processor reset required by the software
1
0
0
User Reset
NRST pin detected low
1
0
1
Brownout Reset
BrownOut reset occurred
• NRSTL: NRST Pin Level
Registers the NRST Pin Level at Master Clock (MCK).
• SRCMP: Software Reset Command in Progress
0 = No software command is being performed by the reset controller. The reset controller is ready for a software command.
1 = A software reset command is being performed by the reset controller. The reset controller is busy.
57
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
13.4.3
Reset Controller Mode Register
Register Name:
RSTC_MR
Access Type:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
17
–
16
BODIEN
9
8
1
–
0
URSTEN
KEY
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
10
7
–
6
–
5
4
URSTIEN
3
–
ERSTL
2
–
• URSTEN: User Reset Enable
0 = The detection of a low level on the pin NRST does not generate a User Reset.
1 = The detection of a low level on the pin NRST triggers a User Reset.
• URSTIEN: User Reset Interrupt Enable
0 = USRTS bit in RSTC_SR at 1 has no effect on rstc_irq.
1 = USRTS bit in RSTC_SR at 1 asserts rstc_irq if URSTEN = 0.
• BODIEN: Brownout Detection Interrupt Enable
0 = BODSTS bit in RSTC_SR at 1 has no effect on rstc_irq.
1 = BODSTS bit in RSTC_SR at 1 asserts rstc_irq.
• ERSTL: External Reset Length
This field defines the external reset length. The external reset is asserted during a time of 2(ERSTL+1) Slow Clock cycles. This
allows assertion duration to be programmed between 60 µs and 2 seconds.
• KEY: Password
Should be written at value 0xA5. Writing any other value in this field aborts the write operation.
58
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
14. Real-time Timer (RTT)
14.1
Overview
The Real-time Timer is built around a 32-bit counter and used to count elapsed seconds. It generates a periodic interrupt or/and triggers an alarm on a programmed value.
14.2
Block Diagram
Figure 14-1. Real-time Timer
RTT_MR
RTTRST
RTT_MR
RTPRES
RTT_MR
SLCK
RTTINCIEN
reload
16-bit
Divider
set
0
RTT_MR
RTTRST
RTTINC
RTT_SR
1
reset
0
rtt_int
32-bit
Counter
read
RTT_SR
RTT_MR
ALMIEN
RTT_VR
reset
CRTV
RTT_SR
ALMS
set
rtt_alarm
=
RTT_AR
14.3
ALMV
Functional Description
The Real-time Timer is used to count elapsed seconds. It is built around a 32-bit counter fed by
Slow Clock divided by a programmable 16-bit value. The value can be programmed in the field
RTPRES of the Real-time Mode Register (RTT_MR).
Programming RTPRES at 0x00008000 corresponds to feeding the real-time counter with a 1 Hz
signal (if the Slow Clock is 32.768 Hz). The 32-bit counter can count up to 232 seconds, corresponding to more than 136 years, then roll over to 0.
The Real-time Timer can also be used as a free-running timer with a lower time-base. The best
accuracy is achieved by writing RTPRES to 3. Programming RTPRES to 1 or 2 is possible, but
may result in losing status events because the status register is cleared two Slow Clock cycles
after read. Thus if the RTT is configured to trigger an interrupt, the interrupt occurs during 2 Slow
Clock cycles after reading RTT_SR. To prevent several executions of the interrupt handler, the
interrupt must be disabled in the interrupt handler and re-enabled when the status register is
clear.
59
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
The Real-time Timer value (CRTV) can be read at any time in the register RTT_VR (Real-time
Value Register). As this value can be updated asynchronously from the Master Clock, it is advisable to read this register twice at the same value to improve accuracy of the returned value.
The current value of the counter is compared with the value written in the alarm register
RTT_AR (Real-time Alarm Register). If the counter value matches the alarm, the bit ALMS in
RTT_SR is set. The alarm register is set to its maximum value, corresponding to 0xFFFF_FFFF,
after a reset.
The bit RTTINC in RTT_SR is set each time the Real-time Timer counter is incremented. This bit
can be used to start a periodic interrupt, the period being one second when the RTPRES is programmed with 0x8000 and Slow Clock equal to 32.768 Hz.
Reading the RTT_SR status register resets the RTTINC and ALMS fields.
Writing the bit RTTRST in RTT_MR immediately reloads and restarts the clock divider with the
new programmed value. This also resets the 32-bit counter.
Figure 14-2. RTT Counting
APB cycle
APB cycle
MCK
RTPRES - 1
Prescaler
0
RTT
0
...
ALMV-1
ALMV
ALMV+1
ALMV+2
ALMV+3
RTTINC (RTT_SR)
ALMS (RTT_SR)
APB Interface
read RTT_SR
60
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
14.4
Real-time Timer (RTT) User Interface
Table 14-1.
Real-time Timer (RTT) Register Mapping
Offset
Register
Name
Access
Reset Value
0x00
Mode Register
RTT_MR
Read/Write
0x0000_8000
0x04
Alarm Register
RTT_AR
Read/Write
0xFFFF_FFFF
0x08
Value Register
RTT_VR
Read-only
0x0000_0000
0x0C
Status Register
RTT_SR
Read-only
0x0000_0000
61
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
14.4.1
Real-time Timer Mode Register
Register Name:
RTT_MR
Access Type:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
RTTRST
17
RTTINCIEN
16
ALMIEN
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
RTPRES
7
6
5
4
RTPRES
• RTPRES: Real-time Timer Prescaler Value
Defines the number of SLCK periods required to increment the real-time timer. RTPRES is defined as follows:
RTPRES = 0: The Prescaler Period is equal to 216
RTPRES ≠ 0: The Prescaler Period is equal to RTPRES.
• ALMIEN: Alarm Interrupt Enable
0 = The bit ALMS in RTT_SR has no effect on interrupt.
1 = The bit ALMS in RTT_SR asserts interrupt.
• RTTINCIEN: Real-time Timer Increment Interrupt Enable
0 = The bit RTTINC in RTT_SR has no effect on interrupt.
1 = The bit RTTINC in RTT_SR asserts interrupt.
• RTTRST: Real-time Timer Restart
1 = Reloads and restarts the clock divider with the new programmed value. This also resets the 32-bit counter.
62
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
14.4.2
Real-time Timer Alarm Register
Register Name:
RTT_AR
Access Type:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
ALMV
23
22
21
20
ALMV
15
14
13
12
ALMV
7
6
5
4
ALMV
• ALMV: Alarm Value
Defines the alarm value (ALMV+1) compared with the Real-time Timer.
14.4.3
Real-time Timer Value Register
Register Name:
RTT_VR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
CRTV
23
22
21
20
CRTV
15
14
13
12
CRTV
7
6
5
4
CRTV
• CRTV: Current Real-time Value
Returns the current value of the Real-time Timer.
63
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
14.4.4
Real-time Timer Status Register
Register Name:
RTT_SR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
RTTINC
0
ALMS
• ALMS: Real-time Alarm Status
0 = The Real-time Alarm has not occurred since the last read of RTT_SR.
1 = The Real-time Alarm occurred since the last read of RTT_SR.
• RTTINC: Real-time Timer Increment
0 = The Real-time Timer has not been incremented since the last read of the RTT_SR.
1 = The Real-time Timer has been incremented since the last read of the RTT_SR.
64
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
15. Periodic Interval Timer (PIT)
15.1
Overview
The Periodic Interval Timer (PIT) provides the operating system’s scheduler interrupt. It is
designed to offer maximum accuracy and efficient management, even for systems with long
response time.
15.2
Block Diagram
Figure 15-1. Periodic Interval Timer
PIT_MR
PIV
=?
PIT_MR
PITIEN
set
0
PIT_SR
PITS
pit_irq
reset
0
MCK
Prescaler
0
0
1
12-bit
Adder
1
read PIT_PIVR
20-bit
Counter
MCK/16
CPIV
PIT_PIVR
CPIV
PIT_PIIR
PICNT
PICNT
65
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
15.3
Functional Description
The Periodic Interval Timer aims at providing periodic interrupts for use by operating systems.
The PIT provides a programmable overflow counter and a reset-on-read feature. It is built
around two counters: a 20-bit CPIV counter and a 12-bit PICNT counter. Both counters work at
Master Clock /16.
The first 20-bit CPIV counter increments from 0 up to a programmable overflow value set in the
field PIV of the Mode Register (PIT_MR). When the counter CPIV reaches this value, it resets to
0 and increments the Periodic Interval Counter, PICNT. The status bit PITS in the Status Register (PIT_SR) rises and triggers an interrupt, provided the interrupt is enabled (PITIEN in
PIT_MR).
Writing a new PIV value in PIT_MR does not reset/restart the counters.
When CPIV and PICNT values are obtained by reading the Periodic Interval Value Register
(PIT_PIVR), the overflow counter (PICNT) is reset and the PITS is cleared, thus acknowledging
the interrupt. The value of PICNT gives the number of periodic intervals elapsed since the last
read of PIT_PIVR.
When CPIV and PICNT values are obtained by reading the Periodic Interval Image Register
(PIT_PIIR), there is no effect on the counters CPIV and PICNT, nor on the bit PITS. For example, a profiler can read PIT_PIIR without clearing any pending interrupt, whereas a timer
interrupt clears the interrupt by reading PIT_PIVR.
The PIT may be enabled/disabled using the PITEN bit in the PIT_MR register (disabled on
reset). The PITEN bit only becomes effective when the CPIV value is 0. Figure 15-2 illustrates
the PIT counting. After the PIT Enable bit is reset (PITEN= 0), the CPIV goes on counting until
the PIV value is reached, and is then reset. PIT restarts counting, only if the PITEN is set again.
The PIT is stopped when the core enters debug state.
66
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
Figure 15-2. Enabling/Disabling PIT with PITEN
APB cycle
APB cycle
MCK
15
restarts MCK Prescaler
MCK Prescaler 0
PITEN
CPIV
PICNT
0
1
PIV - 1
0
PIV
1
0
1
0
PITS (PIT_SR)
APB Interface
read PIT_PIVR
67
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
15.4
Periodic Interval Timer (PIT) User Interface
Table 15-1.
Periodic Interval Timer (PIT) Register Mapping
Offset
Register
Name
Access
Reset Value
0x00
Mode Register
PIT_MR
Read/Write
0x000F_FFFF
0x04
Status Register
PIT_SR
Read-only
0x0000_0000
0x08
Periodic Interval Value Register
PIT_PIVR
Read-only
0x0000_0000
0x0C
Periodic Interval Image Register
PIT_PIIR
Read-only
0x0000_0000
68
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
15.4.1
Periodic Interval Timer Mode Register
Register Name:
PIT_MR
Access Type:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
PITIEN
24
PITEN
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
PIV
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
PIV
7
6
5
4
PIV
• PIV: Periodic Interval Value
Defines the value compared with the primary 20-bit counter of the Periodic Interval Timer (CPIV). The period is equal to
(PIV + 1).
• PITEN: Period Interval Timer Enabled
0 = The Periodic Interval Timer is disabled when the PIV value is reached.
1 = The Periodic Interval Timer is enabled.
• PITIEN: Periodic Interval Timer Interrupt Enable
0 = The bit PITS in PIT_SR has no effect on interrupt.
1 = The bit PITS in PIT_SR asserts interrupt.
15.4.2
Periodic Interval Timer Status Register
Register Name:
PIT_SR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
PITS
• PITS: Periodic Interval Timer Status
0 = The Periodic Interval timer has not reached PIV since the last read of PIT_PIVR.
1 = The Periodic Interval timer has reached PIV since the last read of PIT_PIVR.
69
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
15.4.3
Periodic Interval Timer Value Register
Register Name:
PIT_PIVR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
PICNT
23
22
21
20
PICNT
15
14
CPIV
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
25
24
17
16
CPIV
7
6
5
4
CPIV
Reading this register clears PITS in PIT_SR.
• CPIV: Current Periodic Interval Value
Returns the current value of the periodic interval timer.
• PICNT: Periodic Interval Counter
Returns the number of occurrences of periodic intervals since the last read of PIT_PIVR.
15.4.4
Periodic Interval Timer Image Register
Register Name:
PIT_PIIR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
19
18
PICNT
23
22
21
20
PICNT
15
14
CPIV
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
CPIV
7
6
5
4
CPIV
• CPIV: Current Periodic Interval Value
Returns the current value of the periodic interval timer.
• PICNT: Periodic Interval Counter
Returns the number of occurrences of periodic intervals since the last read of PIT_PIVR.
70
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
71
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
72
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
16. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
16.1
Overview
The Watchdog Timer can be used to prevent system lock-up if the software becomes trapped in
a deadlock. It features a 12-bit down counter that allows a watchdog period of up to 16 seconds
(slow clock at 32.768 kHz). It can generate a general reset or a processor reset only. In addition,
it can be stopped while the processor is in debug mode or idle mode.
16.2
Block Diagram
Figure 16-1. Watchdog Timer Block Diagram
write WDT_MR
WDT_MR
WV
WDT_CR
WDRSTT
reload
1
0
12-bit Down
Counter
WDT_MR
reload
Current
Value
WDD
1/128
SLCK
<= WDD
WDT_MR
WDRSTEN
= 0
wdt_fault
(to Reset Controller)
set
WDUNF
set
wdt_int
reset
WDERR
read WDT_SR
or
reset
reset
WDFIEN
WDT_MR
73
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
16.3
Functional Description
The Watchdog Timer can be used to prevent system lock-up if the software becomes trapped in
a deadlock. It is supplied with VDDCORE. It restarts with initial values on processor reset.
The Watchdog is built around a 12-bit down counter, which is loaded with the value defined in
the field WV of the Mode Register (WDT_MR). The Watchdog Timer uses the Slow Clock
divided by 128 to establish the maximum Watchdog period to be 16 seconds (with a typical Slow
Clock of 32.768 kHz).
After a Processor Reset, the value of WV is 0xFFF, corresponding to the maximum value of the
counter with the external reset generation enabled (field WDRSTEN at 1 after a Backup Reset).
This means that a default Watchdog is running at reset, i.e., at power-up. The user must either
disable it (by setting the WDDIS bit in WDT_MR) if he does not expect to use it or must reprogram it to meet the maximum Watchdog period the application requires.
The Watchdog Mode Register (WDT_MR) can be written only once. Only a processor reset
resets it. Writing the WDT_MR register reloads the timer with the newly programmed mode
parameters.
In normal operation, the user reloads the Watchdog at regular intervals before the timer underflow occurs, by writing the Control Register (WDT_CR) with the bit WDRSTT to 1. The
Watchdog counter is then immediately reloaded from WDT_MR and restarted, and the Slow
Clock 128 divider is reset and restarted. The WDT_CR register is write-protected. As a result,
writing WDT_CR without the correct hard-coded key has no effect. If an underflow does occur,
the “wdt_fault” signal to the Reset Controller is asserted if the bit WDRSTEN is set in the Mode
Register (WDT_MR). Moreover, the bit WDUNF is set in the Watchdog Status Register
(WDT_SR).
To prevent a software deadlock that continuously triggers the Watchdog, the reload of the
Watchdog must occur in a window defined by 0 and WDD in the WDT_MR:
0 ≤WDT ≤WDD; writing WDRSTT restarts the Watchdog Timer.
Any attempt to restart the Watchdog Timer in the range [WDV; WDD] results in a Watchdog
error, even if the Watchdog is disabled. The bit WDERR is updated in the WDT_SR and the
“wdt_fault” signal to the Reset Controller is asserted.
Note that this feature can be disabled by programming a WDD value greater than or equal to the
WDV value. In such a configuration, restarting the Watchdog Timer is permitted in the whole
range [0; WDV] and does not generate an error. This is the default configuration on reset (the
WDD and WDV values are equal).
The status bits WDUNF (Watchdog Underflow) and WDERR (Watchdog Error) trigger an interrupt, provided the bit WDFIEN is set in the mode register. The signal “wdt_fault” to the reset
controller causes a Watchdog reset if the WDRSTEN bit is set as already explained in the reset
controller programmer Datasheet. In that case, the processor and the Watchdog Timer are
reset, and the WDERR and WDUNF flags are reset.
If a reset is generated or if WDT_SR is read, the status bits are reset, the interrupt is cleared,
and the “wdt_fault” signal to the reset controller is deasserted.
Writing the WDT_MR reloads and restarts the down counter.
While the processor is in debug state or in idle mode, the counter may be stopped depending on
the value programmed for the bits WDIDLEHLT and WDDBGHLT in the WDT_MR.
74
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
Figure 16-2. Watchdog Behavior
Watchdog Error
Watchdog Underflow
if WDRSTEN is 1
FFF
Normal behavior
if WDRSTEN is 0
WDV
Forbidden
Window
WDD
Permitted
Window
0
Watchdog
Fault
WDT_CR = WDRSTT
75
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
16.4
Watchdog Timer (WDT) User Interface
Table 16-1.
Watchdog Timer (WDT) Register Mapping
Offset
Register
Name
0x00
Control Register
0x04
0x08
16.4.1
Access
Reset Value
WDT_CR
Write-only
-
Mode Register
WDT_MR
Read/Write Once
0x3FFF_2FFF
Status Register
WDT_SR
Read-only
0x0000_0000
Watchdog Timer Control Register
Register Name:
WDT_CR
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
KEY
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
WDRSTT
• WDRSTT: Watchdog Restart
0: No effect.
1: Restarts the Watchdog.
• KEY: Password
Should be written at value 0xA5. Writing any other value in this field aborts the write operation.
76
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
16.4.2
Watchdog Timer Mode Register
Register Name:
WDT_MR
Access Type:
Read/Write Once
31
30
23
29
WDIDLEHLT
28
WDDBGHLT
27
21
20
19
18
11
10
22
26
25
24
17
16
9
8
1
0
WDD
WDD
15
WDDIS
14
13
12
WDRPROC
WDRSTEN
WDFIEN
7
6
5
4
WDV
3
2
WDV
• WDV: Watchdog Counter Value
Defines the value loaded in the 12-bit Watchdog Counter.
• WDFIEN: Watchdog Fault Interrupt Enable
0: A Watchdog fault (underflow or error) has no effect on interrupt.
1: A Watchdog fault (underflow or error) asserts interrupt.
• WDRSTEN: Watchdog Reset Enable
0: A Watchdog fault (underflow or error) has no effect on the resets.
1: A Watchdog fault (underflow or error) triggers a Watchdog reset.
• WDRPROC: Watchdog Reset Processor
0: If WDRSTEN is 1, a Watchdog fault (underflow or error) activates all resets.
1: If WDRSTEN is 1, a Watchdog fault (underflow or error) activates the processor reset.
• WDD: Watchdog Delta Value
Defines the permitted range for reloading the Watchdog Timer.
If the Watchdog Timer value is less than or equal to WDD, writing WDT_CR with WDRSTT = 1 restarts the timer.
If the Watchdog Timer value is greater than WDD, writing WDT_CR with WDRSTT = 1 causes a Watchdog error.
• WDDBGHLT: Watchdog Debug Halt
0: The Watchdog runs when the processor is in debug state.
1: The Watchdog stops when the processor is in debug state.
• WDIDLEHLT: Watchdog Idle Halt
0: The Watchdog runs when the system is in idle mode.
1: The Watchdog stops when the system is in idle state.
• WDDIS: Watchdog Disable
0: Enables the Watchdog Timer.
1: Disables the Watchdog Timer.
77
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
16.4.3
Watchdog Timer Status Register
Register Name:
WDT_SR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
WDERR
0
WDUNF
• WDUNF: Watchdog Underflow
0: No Watchdog underflow occurred since the last read of WDT_SR.
1: At least one Watchdog underflow occurred since the last read of WDT_SR.
• WDERR: Watchdog Error
0: No Watchdog error occurred since the last read of WDT_SR.
1: At least one Watchdog error occurred since the last read of WDT_SR.
78
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
17. Voltage Regulator Mode Controller (VREG)
17.1
Overview
The Voltage Regulator Mode Controller contains one Read/Write register, the Voltage Regulator
Mode Register. Its offset is 0x60 with respect to the System Controller offset.
This register controls the Voltage Regulator Mode. Setting PSTDBY (bit 0) puts the Voltage
Regulator in Standby Mode or Low-power Mode. On reset, the PSTDBY is reset, so as to wake
up the Voltage Regulator in Normal Mode.
79
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
17.2
Voltage Regulator Power Controller (VREG) User Interface
Table 17-1.
Voltage Regulator Power Controller Register Mapping
Offset
Register
Name
0x60
Voltage Regulator Mode Register
VREG_MR
17.2.1
Access
Reset Value
Read/Write
0x0
Voltage Regulator Mode Register
Register Name:
VREG_MR
Access Type:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
PSTDBY
• PSTDBY: Periodic Interval Value
0 = Voltage regulator in normal mode.
1 = Voltage regulator in standby mode (low-power mode).
80
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
18. Memory Controller (MC)
18.1
Overview
The Memory Controller (MC) manages the ASB bus and controls accesses requested by the
masters, typically the ARM7TDMI processor and the Peripheral DMA Controller. It features a
simple bus arbiter, an address decoder, an abort status, a misalignment detector and an
Embedded Flash Controller.
18.2
Block Diagram
Figure 18-1. Memory Controller Block Diagram
Memory Controller
ASB
ARM7TDMI
Processor
Embedded
Flash
Controller
Abort
Internal
Flash
Abort
Status
Internal
RAM
Bus
Arbiter
Misalignment
Detector
Address
Decoder
User
Interface
Peripheral
DMA
Controller
APB
Bridge
Peripheral 0
Peripheral 1
APB
From Master
to Slave
Peripheral N
81
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
18.3
Functional Description
The Memory Controller handles the internal ASB bus and arbitrates the accesses of both
masters.
It is made up of:
• A bus arbiter
• An address decoder
• An abort status
• A misalignment detector
• An Embedded Flash Controller
The MC handles only little-endian mode accesses. The masters work in little-endian mode only.
18.3.1
Bus Arbiter
The Memory Controller has a simple, hard-wired priority bus arbiter that gives the control of the
bus to one of the two masters. The Peripheral DMA Controller has the highest priority; the ARM
processor has the lowest one.
18.3.2
Address Decoder
The Memory Controller features an Address Decoder that first decodes the four highest bits of
the 32-bit address bus and defines three separate areas:
• One 256-Mbyte address space for the internal memories
• One 256-Mbyte address space reserved for the embedded peripherals
• An undefined address space of 3584M bytes representing fourteen 256-Mbyte areas that
return an Abort if accessed
Figure 18-2 shows the assignment of the 256-Mbyte memory areas.
Figure 18-2. Memory Areas
256M Bytes
0x0000 0000
Internal Memories
0x0FFF FFFF
0x1000 0000
14 x 256MBytes
3,584 Mbytes
Undefined
(Abort)
0xEFFF FFFF
256M Bytes
0xF000 0000
Peripherals
0xFFFF FFFF
82
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
18.3.2.1
Internal Memory Mapping
Within the Internal Memory address space, the Address Decoder of the Memory Controller
decodes eight more address bits to allocate 1-Mbyte address spaces for the embedded
memories.
The allocated memories are accessed all along the 1-Mbyte address space and so are repeated
n times within this address space, n equaling 1M bytes divided by the size of the memory.
When the address of the access is undefined within the internal memory area, the Address
Decoder returns an Abort to the master.
Figure 18-3. Internal Memory Mapping
0x0000 0000
Internal Memory Area 0
1M Bytes
Internal Memory Area 1
Internal Flash
1M Bytes
Internal Memory Area 2
Internal SRAM
1M Bytes
0x000F FFFF
0x0010 0000
0x001F FFFF
0x0020 0000
256M Bytes
0x002F FFFF
0x0030 0000
Undefined Areas
(Abort)
253M bytes
0x0FFF FFFF
18.3.2.2
Internal Memory Area 0
The first 32 bytes of Internal Memory Area 0 contain the ARM processor exception vectors, in
particular, the Reset Vector at address 0x0.
Before execution of the remap command, the on-chip Flash is mapped into Internal Memory
Area 0, so that the ARM7TDMI reaches an executable instruction contained in Flash. After the
remap command, the internal SRAM at address 0x0020 0000 is mapped into Internal Memory
Area 0. The memory mapped into Internal Memory Area 0 is accessible in both its original location and at address 0x0.
18.3.3
Remap Command
After execution, the Remap Command causes the Internal SRAM to be accessed through the
Internal Memory Area 0.
As the ARM vectors (Reset, Abort, Data Abort, Prefetch Abort, Undefined Instruction, Interrupt,
and Fast Interrupt) are mapped from address 0x0 to address 0x20, the Remap Command allows
the user to redefine dynamically these vectors under software control.
The Remap Command is accessible through the Memory Controller User Interface by writing the
MC_RCR (Remap Control Register) RCB field to one.
The Remap Command can be cancelled by writing the MC_RCR RCB field to one, which acts as
a toggling command. This allows easy debug of the user-defined boot sequence by offering a
simple way to put the chip in the same configuration as after a reset.
83
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
18.3.4
Abort Status
There are three reasons for an abort to occur:
• access to an undefined address
• an access to a misaligned address.
When an abort occurs, a signal is sent back to all the masters, regardless of which one has generated the access. However, only the ARM7TDMI can take an abort signal into account, and
only under the condition that it was generating an access. The Peripheral DMA Controller does
not handle the abort input signal. Note that the connection is not represented in Figure 18-1.
To facilitate debug or for fault analysis by an operating system, the Memory Controller integrates
an Abort Status register set.
The full 32-bit wide abort address is saved in MC_AASR. Parameters of the access are saved in
MC_ASR and include:
• the size of the request (field ABTSZ)
• the type of the access, whether it is a data read or write, or a code fetch (field ABTTYP)
• whether the access is due to accessing an undefined address (bit UNDADD) or a misaligned
address (bit MISADD)
• the source of the access leading to the last abort (bits MST0 and MST1)
• whether or not an abort occurred for each master since the last read of the register (bit
SVMST0 and SVMST1) unless this information is loaded in MST bits
In the case of a Data Abort from the processor, the address of the data access is stored. This is
useful, as searching for which address generated the abort would require disassembling the
instructions and full knowledge of the processor context.
In the case of a Prefetch Abort, the address may have changed, as the prefetch abort is pipelined in the ARM processor. The ARM processor takes the prefetch abort into account only if the
read instruction is executed and it is probable that several aborts have occurred during this time.
Thus, in this case, it is preferable to use the content of the Abort Link register of the ARM
processor.
18.3.5
Embedded Flash Controller
The Embedded Flash Controller is added to the Memory Controller and ensures the interface of
the Flash block with the 32-bit internal bus. It increases performance in Thumb Mode for Code
Fetch with its system of 32-bit buffers. It also manages with the programming, erasing, locking
and unlocking sequences thanks to a full set of commands.
18.3.6
Misalignment Detector
The Memory Controller features a Misalignment Detector that checks the consistency of the
accesses.
For each access, regardless of the master, the size of the access and the bits 0 and 1 of the
address bus are checked. If the type of access is a word (32-bit) and the bits 0 and 1 are not 0,
or if the type of the access is a half-word (16-bit) and the bit 0 is not 0, an abort is returned to the
master and the access is cancelled. Note that the accesses of the ARM processor when it is
fetching instructions are not checked.
The misalignments are generally due to software bugs leading to wrong pointer handling. These
bugs are particularly difficult to detect in the debug phase.
As the requested address is saved in the Abort Status Register and the address of the instruction generating the misalignment is saved in the Abort Link Register of the processor, detection
and fix of this kind of software bug is simplified.
84
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
18.4
Memory Controller (MC) User Interface
Base Address: 0xFFFFFF00
Memory Controller (MC) Register Mapping
Offset
Register
Name
Access
0x00
Reset State
MC Remap Control Register
MC_RCR
Write-only
0x04
MC Abort Status Register
MC_ASR
Read-only
0x0
0x08
MC Abort Address Status Register
MC_AASR
Read-only
0x0
0x0C-0x5C
Reserved
–
–
–
0x60
EFC Configuration Registers
See ”Embedded Flash Controller (EFC)” on page 89.
85
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
18.4.1
MC Remap Control Register
Register Name:
MC_RCR
Access Type:
Write-only
Offset:
0x00
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
RCB
• RCB: Remap Command Bit
0: No effect.
1: This Command Bit acts on a toggle basis: writing a 1 alternatively cancels and restores the remapping of the page zero
memory devices.
86
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
18.4.2
MC Abort Status Register
Register Name:
MC_ASR
Access Type:
Read-only
Reset Value:
0x0
Offset:
0x04
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
SVMST1
SVMST0
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
MST1
MST0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
–
–
–
–
MISADD
UNDADD
ABTTYP
8
ABTSZ
• UNDADD: Undefined Address Abort Status
0: The last abort was not due to the access of an undefined address in the address space.
1: The last abort was due to the access of an undefined address in the address space.
• MISADD: Misaligned Address Abort Status
0: The last aborted access was not due to an address misalignment.
1: The last aborted access was due to an address misalignment.
• ABTSZ: Abort Size Status.
ABTSZ
Abort Size
0
0
Byte
0
1
Half-word
1
0
Word
1
1
Reserved
• ABTTYP: Abort Type Status.
ABTTYP
Abort Type
0
0
Data Read
0
1
Data Write
1
0
Code Fetch
1
1
Reserved
• MST0: PDC Abort Source
0: The last aborted access was not due to the PDC.
1: The last aborted access was due to the PDC.
87
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
• MST1: ARM7TDMI Abort Source
0: The last aborted access was not due to the ARM7TDMI.
1: The last aborted access was due to the ARM7TDMI.
• SVMST0: Saved PDC Abort Source
0: No abort due to the PDC occurred since the last read of MC_ASR or it is notified in the bit MST0.
1: At least one abort due to the PDC occurred since the last read of MC_ASR.
• SVMST1: Saved ARM7TDMI Abort Source
0: No abort due to the ARM7TDMI occurred since the last read of MC_ASR or it is notified in the bit MST1.
1: At least one abort due to the ARM7TDMI occurred since the last read of MC_ASR.
18.4.3
MC Abort Address Status Register
Register Name:
MC_AASR
Access Type:
Read-only
Reset Value:
0x0
Offset:
0x08
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
ABTADD
23
22
21
20
ABTADD
15
14
13
12
ABTADD
7
6
5
4
ABTADD
• ABTADD: Abort Address
This field contains the address of the last aborted access.
88
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
19. Embedded Flash Controller (EFC)
19.1
Overview
The Embedded Flash Controller (EFC) is a part of the Memory Controller and ensures the interface of the Flash block with the 32-bit internal bus. It increases performance in Thumb Mode for
Code Fetch with its system of 32-bit buffers. It also manages the programming, erasing, locking
and unlocking sequences using a full set of commands.
19.2
19.2.1
Functional Description
Embedded Flash Organization
The Embedded Flash interfaces directly to the 32-bit internal bus. It is composed of several
interfaces:
• One memory plane organized in several pages of the same size
• Two 32-bit read buffers used for code read optimization. (See “Read Operations” on page
91.)
• One write buffer that manages page programming. The write buffer size is equal to the page
size. This buffer is write-only and accessible all along the 1 MByte address space, so that
each word can be written to its final address. (See “Write Operations” on page 93.)
• Several lock bits used to protect write and erase operations on lock regions. A lock region is
composed of several consecutive pages, and each lock region has its associated lock bit.
• Several general-purpose NVM bits. Each bit controls a specific feature in the device. Refer to
the product definition section to get the GP NVM assignment.
The Embedded Flash size, the page size and the lock region organization are described in the
product definition section.
89
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
Figure 19-1. Embedded Flash Memory Mapping
Page 0
Flash Memory
Start Address
Lock Region 0
Lock Bit 0
Lock Region 1
Lock Bit 1
Lock Region (n-1)
Lock Bit n-1
Page (m-1)
Page ( (n-1)*m )
32-bit wide
Page (n*m-1)
90
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
19.2.2
Read Operations
An optimized controller manages embedded Flash reads. A system of 2 x 32-bit buffers is added
in order to start access at following address during the second read, thus increasing performance when the processor is running in Thumb mode (16-bit instruction set). See Figure 19-2,
Figure 19-3 and Figure 19-4.
This optimization concerns only Code Fetch and not Data.
The read operations can be performed with or without wait state. Up to 3 wait states can be programmed in the field FWS (Flash Wait State) in the Flash Mode Register MC_FMR (see ”MC
Flash Mode Register” on page 100). Defining FWS to be 0 enables the single-cycle access of
the embedded Flash.
The Flash memory is accessible through 8-, 16- and 32-bit reads.
As the Flash block size is smaller than the address space reserved for the internal memory area,
the embedded Flash wraps around the address space and appears to be repeated within it.
Figure 19-2. Code Read Optimization in Thumb Mode for FWS = 0
Master Clock
ARM Request (16-bit)
Code Fetch
@Byte 0
Flash Access
@Byte 2
@Byte 4
Bytes 0-3
Bytes 4-7
Buffer (32 bits)
Data To ARM
Note:
Bytes 0-3
Bytes 0-1
Bytes 2-3
@Byte 6
@Byte 8
@Byte 10
Bytes 4-7
Bytes 6-7
@Byte 14
Bytes 12-15
Bytes 8-11
Bytes 4-5
@Byte 12
Bytes 8-11
Bytes 8-9
Bytes 10-11
@Byte 16
Bytes 16-19
Bytes 12-15
Bytes 12-13
Bytes 14-15
When FWS is equal to 0, all accesses are performed in a single-cycle access.
91
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
Figure 19-3. Code Read Optimization in Thumb Mode for FWS = 1
1 Wait State Cycle
1 Wait State Cycle
1 Wait State Cycle
1 Wait State Cycle
Master Clock
ARM Request (16-bit)
Code Fetch
Flash Access
@Byte 4
@Byte 2
@Byte 0
Bytes 0-3
Buffer (32 bits)
Data To ARM
Note:
@Byte 6
@Byte 10
@Byte 12
@Byte 14
Bytes 4-7
Bytes 8-11
Bytes 12-15
Bytes 0-3
Bytes 4-7
Bytes 8-11
Bytes 2-3
Bytes 0-1
@Byte 8
Bytes 4-5
Bytes 6-7
Bytes 8-9
Bytes 10-11
Bytes 12-13
When FWS is equal to 1, in case of sequential reads, all the accesses are performed in a single-cycle access (except for the
first one).
Figure 19-4. Code Read Optimization in Thumb Mode for FWS = 3
3 Wait State Cycles
3 Wait State Cycles
3 Wait State Cycles
3 Wait State Cycles
Master Clock
ARM Request (16-bit)
Code Fetch
@2
@Byte 0
Flash Access
Bytes 0-3
Buffer (32 bits)
Data To ARM
Note:
92
0-1
@6
@4
@10
@8
@12
Bytes 4-7
Bytes 8-11
Bytes 12-15
Bytes 0-3
Bytes 4-7
Bytes 8-11
2-3
4-5
6-7
8-9 10-11
12-13
When FWS is equal to 2 or 3, in case of sequential reads, the first access takes FWS cycles, the second access one cycle, the
third access FWS cycles, the fourth access one cycle, etc.
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
19.2.3
Write Operations
The internal memory area reserved for the embedded Flash can also be written through a writeonly latch buffer. Write operations take into account only the 8 lowest address bits and thus wrap
around within the internal memory area address space and appear to be repeated 1024 times
within it.
Write operations can be prevented by programming the Memory Protection Unit of the product.
Writing 8-bit and 16-bit data is not allowed and may lead to unpredictable data Fcorruption.
Write operations are performed in the number of wait states equal to the number of wait states
for read operations + 1, except for FWS = 3 (see ”MC Flash Mode Register” on page 100).
19.2.4
Flash Commands
The Embedded Flash Controller offers a command set to manage programming the memory
flash, locking and unlocking lock sectors, consecutive programming and locking, and full Flash
erasing.
Table 19-1.
Set of Commands
Command
Value
Mnemonic
Write page
0x01
WP
Set Lock Bit
0x02
SLB
Write Page and Lock
0x03
WPL
Clear Lock Bit
0x04
CLB
Erase all
0x08
EA
Set General-purpose NVM Bit
0x0B
SGPB
Clear General-purpose NVM Bit
0x0D
CGPB
Set Security Bit
0x0F
SSB
To run one of these commands, the field FCMD of the MC_FCR register has to be written with
the command number. As soon as the MC_FCR register is written, the FRDY flag is automatically cleared. Once the current command is achieved, then the FRDY flag is automatically set. If
an interrupt has been enabled by setting the bit FRDY in MC_FMR, the interrupt line of the Memory Controller is activated.
All the commands are protected by the same keyword, which has to be written in the eight highest bits of the MC_FCR register.
Writing MC_FCR with data that does not contain the correct key and/or with an invalid command
has no effect on the memory plane; however, the PROGE flag is set in the MC_FSR register.
This flag is automatically cleared by a read access to the MC_FSR register.
When the current command writes or erases a page in a locked region, the command has no
effect on the whole memory plane; however, the FLOCKE flag is set in the MC_FSR register.
This flag is automatically cleared by a read access to the MC_FSR register.
93
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
Figure 19-5. Command Statechart
Read Status: MC_FSR
No
Check if FRDY flag set
Yes
Write FCMD and PAGENB in MC_FCR
Read Status: MC_FSR
No
Check if FRDY flag set
Yes
Check if LOCKE flag set
Yes
Locking region violation
No
Check if PROGE flag set
Yes
Bad keyword violation and/or Invalid command
No
Command Successful
In order to guarantee valid operations on the Flash memory, the field Flash Microsecond Cycle
Number (FMCN) in the Flash Mode Register MC_FMR must be correctly programmed (see ”MC
Flash Mode Register” on page 100).
Note:
94
This field defines the number of Master Clock cycles in 1 microsecond that allow some necessary
internal timings to be computed.
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
19.2.4.1
Flash Programming
Several commands can be used to program the Flash.
The Flash technology requires that an erase must be done before programming. The entire
memory plane can be erased at the same time, or a page can be automatically erased by clearing the NEBP bit in the MC_FMR register before writing the command in the MC_FCR register.
By setting the NEBP bit in the MC_FMR register, a page can be programmed in several steps if
it has been erased before (see Figure 19-6).
Figure 19-6. Example of Partial Page Programming:
32 bits wide
32 bits wide
16 words
16 words
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
16 words
FF
FF
FF
16 words
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF FF
...
FF FF
FF FF
FF
CA
FE
FF
FF
CA
CA
FE
FE
FF FF
...
FF FF
FF FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF FF
...
FF FF
FF FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
...
Step 1.
Erase All Flash
Page 7 erased
...
...
...
...
32 bits wide
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
CA
FE
CA
FE
CA
CA
FE
FE
CA
CA
FE
FE
FF
FF
DE
CA
FF
FF
FF
FF
DE
DE
CA
CA
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
Step 2.
Programming of the second part of Page 7
(NEBP = 1)
FF
...
FF
FF
FF
CA
FE
CA
CA
FE
FE
DE
CA
DE
DE
CA
CA
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
...
...
...
Step 3.
Programming of the third part of Page 7
(NEBP = 1)
After programming, the page (the whole lock region) can be locked to prevent miscellaneous
write or erase sequences. The lock bit can be automatically set after page programming using
WPL.
Data to be written are stored in an internal latch buffer. The size of the latch buffer corresponds
to the page size. The latch buffer wraps around within the internal memory area address space
and appears to be repeated by the number of pages in it.
Note:
Writing of 8-bit and 16-bit data is not allowed and may lead to unpredictable data corruption.
Data are written to the latch buffer before the programming command is written to the Flash
Command Register MC_FCR. The sequence is as follows:
• Write the full page, at any page address, within the internal memory area address space
using only 32-bit access.
• Programming starts as soon as the page number and the programming command are written
to the Flash Command Register. The FRDY bit in the Flash Programming Status Register
(MC_FSR) is automatically cleared.
• When programming is completed, the bit FRDY in the Flash Programming Status Register
(MC_FSR) rises. If an interrupt was enabled by setting the bit FRDY in MC_FMR, the
interrupt line of the Memory Controller is activated.
Two errors can be detected in the MC_FSR register after a programming sequence:
• Programming Error: A bad keyword and/or an invalid command have been written in the
MC_FCR register.
95
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
• Lock Error: The page to be programmed belongs to a locked region. A command must be
previously run to unlock the corresponding region.
19.2.4.2
Erase All Command
The entire memory can be erased if the Erase All Command (EA) in the Flash Command Register MC_FCR is written.
Erase All operation is allowed only if there are no lock bits set. Thus, if at least one lock region is
locked, the bit LOCKE in MC_FSR rises and the command is cancelled. If the bit LOCKE has
been written at 1 in MC_FMR, the interrupt line rises.
When programming is complete, the bit FRDY bit in the Flash Programming Status Register
(MC_FSR) rises. If an interrupt has been enabled by setting the bit FRDY in MC_FMR, the interrupt line of the Memory Controller is activated.
Two errors can be detected in the MC_FSR register after a programming sequence:
• Programming Error: A bad keyword and/or an invalid command have been written in the
MC_FCR register.
• Lock Error: At least one lock region to be erased is protected. The erase command has been
refused and no page has been erased. A Clear Lock Bit command must be executed
previously to unlock the corresponding lock regions.
19.2.4.3
Lock Bit Protection
Lock bits are associated with several pages in the embedded Flash memory plane. This defines
lock regions in the embedded Flash memory plane. They prevent writing/erasing protected
pages.
After production, the device may have some embedded Flash lock regions locked. These locked
regions are reserved for a default application. Refer to the product definition section for the
default embedded Flash mapping. Locked sectors can be unlocked to be erased and then programmed with another application or other data.
The lock sequence is:
• The Flash Command register must be written with the following value:
(0x5A << 24) | (lockPageNumber << 8 & PAGEN) | SLB
lockPageNumber is a page of the corresponding lock region.
• When locking completes, the bit FRDY in the Flash Programming Status Register (MC_FSR)
rises. If an interrupt has been enabled by setting the bit FRDY in MC_FMR, the interrupt line
of the Memory Controller is activated.
A programming error, where a bad keyword and/or an invalid command have been written in the
MC_FCR register, may be detected in the MC_FSR register after a programming sequence.
It is possible to clear lock bits that were set previously. Then the locked region can be erased or
programmed. The unlock sequence is:
• The Flash Command register must be written with the following value:
(0x5A << 24) | (lockPageNumber << 8 & PAGEN) | CLB
lockPageNumber is a page of the corresponding lock region.
• When the unlock completes, the bit FRDY in the Flash Programming Status Register
(MC_FSR) rises. If an interrupt has been enabled by setting the bit FRDY in MC_FMR, the
interrupt line of the Memory Controller is activated.
96
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
A programming error, where a bad keyword and/or an invalid command have been written in the
MC_FCR register, may be detected in the MC_FSR register after a programming sequence.
The Unlock command programs the lock bit to 1; the corresponding bit LOCKSx in MC_FSR
reads 0. The Lock command programs the lock bit to 0; the corresponding bit LOCKSx in
MC_FSR reads 1.
Note:
19.2.4.4
Access to the Flash in Read Mode is permitted when a Lock or Unlock command is performed.
General-purpose NVM Bits
General-purpose NVM bits do not interfere with the embedded Flash memory plane. These general-purpose bits are dedicated to protect other parts of the product. They can be set (activated)
or cleared individually. Refer to the product definition section for the general-purpose NVM bit
action.
The activation sequence is:
• Start the Set General Purpose Bit command (SGPB) by writing the Flash Command Register
with the SEL command and the number of the general-purpose bit to be set in the PAGEN
field.
• When the bit is set, the bit FRDY in the Flash Programming Status Register (MC_FSR) rises.
If an interrupt has been enabled by setting the bit FRDY in MC_FMR, the interrupt line of the
Memory Controller is activated.
Two errors can be detected in the MC_FSR register after a programming sequence:
• Programming Error: A bad keyword and/or an invalid command have been written in the
MC_FCR register
• If the general-purpose bit number is greater than the total number of general-purpose bits,
then the command has no effect.
It is possible to deactivate a general-purpose NVM bit set previously. The clear sequence is:
• Start the Clear General-purpose Bit command (CGPB) by writing the Flash Command
Register with CGPB and the number of the general-purpose bit to be cleared in the PAGEN
field.
• When the clear completes, the bit FRDY in the Flash Programming Status Register
(MC_FSR) rises. If an interrupt has been enabled by setting the bit FRDY in MC_FMR, the
interrupt line of the Memory Controller is activated.
Two errors can be detected in the MC_FSR register after a programming sequence:
• Programming Error: a bad keyword and/or an invalid command have been written in the
MC_FCR register
• If the number of the general-purpose bit set in the PAGEN field is greater than the total
number of general-purpose bits, then the command has no effect.
The Clear General-purpose Bit command programs the general-purpose NVM bit to 1; the corresponding bit GPNVMx in MC_FSR reads 0. The Set General-purpose Bit command programs
the general-purpose NVM bit to 0; the corresponding bit GPNVMx in MC_FSR reads 1.
Note:
Access to the Flash in read mode is permitted when a Set, Clear or Get General-purpose NVM Bit
command is performed.
97
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
19.2.4.5
Security Bit
The goal of the security bit is to prevent external access to the internal bus system. JTAG, Fast
Flash Programming and Flash Serial Test Interface features are disabled. Once set, this bit can
be reset only by an external hardware ERASE request to the chip. Refer to the product definition
section for the pin name that controls the ERASE. In this case, the full memory plane is erased
and all lock and general-purpose NVM bits are cleared. The security bit in the MC_FSR is
cleared only after these operations.
The activation sequence is:
• Start the Set Security Bit command (SSB) by writing the Flash Command Register.
• When the locking completes, the bit FRDY in the Flash Programming Status Register
(MC_FSR) rises. If an interrupt has been enabled by setting the bit FRDY in MC_FMR, the
interrupt line of the Memory Controller is activated.
When the security bit is active, the SECURITY bit in the MC_FSR is set.
98
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
19.3
Embedded Flash Controller (EFC) User Interface
The User Interface of the Embedded Flash Controller is integrated within the Memory Controller.
Base Address: 0xFFFF FF00
Table 19-2.
Embedded Flash Controller (EFC) Register Mapping
Offset
Register
Name
Access
Reset State
0x60
MC Flash Mode Register
MC_FMR
Read/Write
0x0
0x64
MC Flash Command Register
MC_FCR
Write-only
–
0x68
MC Flash Status Register
MC_FSR
Read-only
–
0x6C
Reserved
–
–
–
99
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
19.3.1
MC Flash Mode Register
Register Name:
MC_FMR
Access Type:
Read/Write
Offset:
0x60
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
23
22
21
20
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
19
18
17
16
8
FMCN
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
7
NEBP
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
PROGE
2
LOCKE
1
–
FWS
0
FRDY
• FRDY: Flash Ready Interrupt Enable
0 = Flash Ready does not generate an interrupt.
1 = Flash Ready generates an interrupt.
• LOCKE: Lock Error Interrupt Enable
0 = Lock Error does not generate an interrupt.
1 = Lock Error generates an interrupt.
• PROGE: Programming Error Interrupt Enable
0 = Programming Error does not generate an interrupt.
1 = Programming Error generates an interrupt.
• NEBP: No Erase Before Programming
0 = A page erase is performed before programming.
1 = No erase is performed before programming.
• FWS: Flash Wait State
This field defines the number of wait states for read and write operations:
FWS
Read Operations
Write Operations
0
1 cycle
2 cycles
1
2 cycles
3 cycles
2
3 cycles
4 cycles
3
4 cycles
4 cycles
• FMCN: Flash Microsecond Cycle Number
This field defines the number of Master Clock cycles in 1 microsecond.
Warning: The value 0 is only allowed for a master clock period superior to 30 microseconds.
Warning: In order to guarantee valid operations on the Flash memory, the field Flash Microsecond Cycle Number (FMCN)
must be correctly programmed.
100
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
19.3.2
MC Flash Command Register
Register Name:
MC_FCR
Access Type:
Write-only
Offset:
0x64
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
KEY
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
PAGEN
PAGEN
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
FCMD
• FCMD: Flash Command
This field defines the Flash commands:
FCMD
Operations
0000
No command.
Does not raise the Programming Error Status flag in the Flash Status Register MC_FSR.
0001
Write Page Command (WP):
Starts the programming of the page specified in the PAGEN field.
0010
Set Lock Bit Command (SLB):
Starts a set lock bit sequence of the lock region specified in the PAGEN field.
0011
Write Page and Lock Command (WPL):
The lock sequence of the lock region associated with the page specified in the field PAGEN
occurs automatically after completion of the programming sequence.
0100
Clear Lock Bit Command (CLB):
Starts a clear lock bit sequence of the lock region specified in the PAGEN field.
1000
Erase All Command (EA):
Starts the erase of the entire Flash.
If at least one page is locked, the command is cancelled.
1011
Set General-purpose NVM Bit (SGPB):
Activates the general-purpose NVM bit corresponding to the number specified in the PAGEN
field.
1101
Clear General Purpose NVM Bit (CGPB):
Deactivates the general-purpose NVM bit corresponding to the number specified in the PAGEN
field.
1111
Set Security Bit Command (SSB):
Sets security bit.
Others
Reserved.
Raises the Programming Error Status flag in the Flash Status Register MC_FSR.
101
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
• PAGEN: Page Number
Command
PAGEN Description
Write Page Command
PAGEN defines the page number to be written.
Write Page and Lock Command
PAGEN defines the page number to be written and its associated
lock region.
Erase All Command
This field is meaningless
Set/Clear Lock Bit Command
PAGEN defines one page number of the lock region to be locked or
unlocked.
Set/Clear General Purpose NVM Bit Command
PAGEN defines the general-purpose bit number.
Set Security Bit Command
This field is meaningless
Note:
Depending on the command, all the possible unused bits of PAGEN are meaningless.
• KEY: Write Protection Key
This field should be written with the value 0x5A to enable the command defined by the bits of the register. If the field is written with a different value, the write is not performed and no action is started.
102
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
19.3.3
MC Flash Status Register
Register Name:
MC_FSR
Access Type:
Read-only
Offset:
0x68
31
LOCKS15
30
LOCKS14
29
LOCKS13
28
LOCKS12
27
LOCKS11
26
LOCKS10
25
LOCKS9
24
LOCKS8
23
LOCKS7
22
LOCKS6
21
LOCKS5
20
LOCKS4
19
LOCKS3
18
LOCKS2
17
LOCKS1
16
LOCKS0
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
GPNVM1
8
GPNVM0
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
SECURITY
3
PROGE
2
LOCKE
1
–
0
FRDY
• FRDY: Flash Ready Status
0 = The Embedded Flash Controller is busy and the application must wait before running a new command.
1 = The Embedded Flash Controller is ready to run a new command.
• LOCKE: Lock Error Status
0 = No programming of at least one locked lock region has happened since the last read of MC_FSR.
1 = Programming of at least one locked lock region has happened since the last read of MC_FSR.
• PROGE: Programming Error Status
0 = No invalid commands and no bad keywords were written in the Flash Command Register MC_FCR.
1 = An invalid command and/or a bad keyword was/were written in the Flash Command Register MC_FCR.
• SECURITY: Security Bit Status
0 = The security bit is inactive.
1 = The security bit is active.
• GPNVMx: General-purpose NVM Bit Status
0 = The corresponding general-purpose NVM bit is inactive.
1 = The corresponding general-purpose NVM bit is active.
• LOCKSx: Lock Region x Lock Status
0 = The corresponding lock region is not locked.
1 = The corresponding lock region is locked.
103
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
104
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
20. Fast Flash Programming Interface (FFPI)
20.1
Overview
The Fast Flash Programming Interface provides two solutions - parallel or serial - for high-volume programming using a standard gang programmer. The parallel interface is fully
handshaked and the device is considered to be a standard EEPROM. Additionally, the parallel
protocol offers an optimized access to all the embedded Flash functionalities. The serial interface uses the standard IEEE 1149.1 JTAG protocol. It offers an optimized access to all the
embedded Flash functionalities.
Although the Fast Flash Programming Mode is a dedicated mode for high volume programming,
this mode is not designed for in-situ programming.
105
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
20.2
Parallel Fast Flash Programming
20.2.1
Device Configuration
In Fast Flash Programming Mode, the device is in a specific test mode. Only a certain set of pins
is significant. Other pins must be left unconnected.
Figure 20-1. Parallel Programming Interface
VDDIO
VDDIO
VDDIO
GND
TST
PGMEN0
PGMEN1
PGMEN2
NCMD
RDY
PGMNCMD
PGMRDY
NOE
PGMNOE
VDDFLASH
PGMNVALID
GND
NVALID
Table 20-1.
Signal Name
MODE[3:0]
PGMM[3:0]
DATA[15:0]
PGMD[15:0]
0 - 50MHz
XIN
VDDCORE
VDDIO
VDDPLL
Signal Description List
Function
Type
Active
Level
Comments
Power
VDDFLASH
Flash Power Supply
Power
VDDIO
I/O Lines Power Supply
Power
VDDCORE
Core Power Supply
Power
VDDPLL
PLL Power Supply
Power
GND
Ground
Ground
Clocks
Main Clock Input.
This input can be tied to GND. In this
case, the device is clocked by the
internal RC oscillator.
XIN
Input
32KHz to 50MHz
Test
TST
Test Mode Select
Input
High
Must be connected to VDDIO
PGMEN0
Test Mode Select
Input
High
Must be connected to VDDIO
PGMEN1
Test Mode Select
Input
High
Must be connected to VDDIO
PGMEN2
Test Mode Select
Input
Low
Must be connected to GND
106
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
Table 20-1.
Signal Description List (Continued)
Signal Name
Function
Type
Active
Level
Input
Low
Pulled-up input at reset
Output
High
Pulled-up input at reset
Input
Low
Pulled-up input at reset
Output
Low
Pulled-up input at reset
Comments
PIO
PGMNCMD
Valid command available
PGMRDY
0: Device is busy
1: Device is ready for a new command
PGMNOE
Output Enable (active high)
PGMNVALID
0: DATA[15:0] is in input mode
1: DATA[15:0] is in output mode
PGMM[3:0]
Specifies DATA type (See Table 20-2)
PGMD[15:0]
Bi-directional data bus
20.2.2
Input
Pulled-up input at reset
Input/Output
Pulled-up input at reset
Signal Names
Depending on the MODE settings, DATA is latched in different internal registers.
Table 20-2.
MODE[3:0]
Mode Coding
Symbol
Data
0000
CMDE
Command Register
0001
ADDR0
Address Register LSBs
0010
ADDR1
0011
ADDR2
0100
ADDR2
Address Register MSBs
0101
DATA
Data Register
Default
IDLE
No register
When MODE is equal to CMDE, then a new command (strobed on DATA[15:0] signals) is stored
in the command register.
Table 20-3.
DATA[15:0]
Command Bit Coding
Symbol
Command Executed
0x0011
READ
Read Flash
0x0012
WP
Write Page Flash
0x0022
WPL
Write Page and Lock Flash
0x0032
EWP
Erase Page and Write Page
0x0042
EWPL
Erase Page and Write Page then Lock
0x0013
EA
Erase All
0x0014
SLB
Set Lock Bit
0x0024
CLB
Clear Lock Bit
0x0015
GLB
Get Lock Bit
0x0034
SFB
Set General Purpose NVM bit
0x0044
CFB
Clear General Purpose NVM bit
0x0025
GFB
Get General Purpose NVM bit
0x0054
SSE
Set Security Bit
0x0035
GSE
Get Security Bit
0x001E
GVE
Get Version
107
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
20.2.3
Entering Programming Mode
The following algorithm puts the device in Parallel Programming Mode:
• Apply GND, VDDIO, VDDCORE, VDDFLASH and VDDPLL.
• Apply XIN clock within TPOR_RESET if an external clock is available.
• Wait for TPOR_RESET
• Start a read or write handshaking.
Note:
20.2.3.1
After reset, the device is clocked by the internal RC oscillator. Before clearing RDY signal, if an
external clock ( > 32 kHz) is connected to XIN, then the device switches on the external clock.
Else, XIN input is not considered. A higher frequency on XIN speeds up the programmer
handshake.
Programmer Handshaking
An handshake is defined for read and write operations. When the device is ready to start a new
operation (RDY signal set), the programmer starts the handshake by clearing the NCMD signal.
The handshaking is achieved once NCMD signal is high and RDY is high.
20.2.3.2
Write Handshaking
For details on the write handshaking sequence, refer to Figure 20-2 and Table 20-4.
Figure 20-2. Parallel Programming Timing, Write Sequence
NCMD
2
4
3
RDY
5
NOE
NVALID
DATA[15:0]
1
MODE[3:0]
Table 20-4.
Write Handshake
Step
Programmer Action
Device Action
Data I/O
1
Sets MODE and DATA signals
Waits for NCMD low
Input
2
Clears NCMD signal
Latches MODE and DATA
Input
3
Waits for RDY low
Clears RDY signal
Input
4
Releases MODE and DATA signals
Executes command and polls NCMD high
Input
5
Sets NCMD signal
Executes command and polls NCMD high
Input
6
Waits for RDY high
Sets RDY
Input
108
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
20.2.4
Read Handshaking
For details on the read handshaking sequence, refer to Figure 20-3 and Table 20-5.
Figure 20-3. Parallel Programming Timing, Read Sequence
NCMD
12
2
3
RDY
13
NOE
9
5
NVALID
11
7
4
DATA[15:0]
Adress IN
6
Z
10
8
Data OUT
X
IN
1
MODE[3:0]
Table 20-5.
ADDR
Read Handshake
Step
Programmer Action
Device Action
DATA I/O
1
Sets MODE and DATA signals
Waits for NCMD low
Input
2
Clears NCMD signal
Latch MODE and DATA
Input
3
Waits for RDY low
Clears RDY signal
Input
4
Sets DATA signal in tristate
Waits for NOE Low
Input
5
Clears NOE signal
6
Waits for NVALID low
7
Tristate
Sets DATA bus in output mode and outputs
the flash contents.
Output
Clears NVALID signal
Output
Waits for NOE high
Output
8
Reads value on DATA Bus
9
Sets NOE signal
10
Waits for NVALID high
Sets DATA bus in input mode
X
11
Sets DATA in ouput mode
Sets NVALID signal
Input
12
Sets NCMD signal
Waits for NCMD high
Input
13
Waits for RDY high
Sets RDY signal
Input
Output
109
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
20.2.5
Device Operations
Several commands on the Flash memory are available. These commands are summarized in
Table 20-3 on page 107. Each command is driven by the programmer through the parallel interface running several read/write handshaking sequences.
When a new command is executed, the previous one is automatically achieved. Thus, chaining
a read command after a write automatically flushes the load buffer in the Flash.
20.2.5.1
Flash Read Command
This command is used to read the contents of the Flash memory. The read command can start
at any valid address in the memory plane and is optimized for consecutive reads. Read handshaking can be chained; an internal address buffer is automatically increased.
Table 20-6.
20.2.5.2
Read Command
Step
Handshake Sequence
MODE[3:0]
DATA[15:0]
1
Write handshaking
CMDE
READ
2
Write handshaking
ADDR0
32-bit Memory Address First byte
3
Write handshaking
ADDR1
32-bit Flash Address
4
Write handshaking
ADDR2
32-bit Flash Address
5
Write handshaking
ADDR3
32-bit Flash Address Last Byte
6
Read handshaking
DATA
*Memory Address++
7
Read handshaking
DATA
*Memory Address++
...
...
...
...
n
Write handshaking
ADDR0
32-bit Memory Address First byte
n+1
Write handshaking
ADDR1
32-bit Flash Address
n+2
Write handshaking
ADDR2
32-bit Flash Address
n+3
Write handshaking
ADDR3
32-bit Flash Address Last Byte
n+4
Read handshaking
DATA
*Memory Address++
n+5
Read handshaking
DATA
*Memory Address++
...
...
...
...
Flash Write Command
This command is used to write the Flash contents.
The Flash memory plane is organized into several pages. Data to be written are stored in a load
buffer that corresponds to a Flash memory page. The load buffer is automatically flushed to the
Flash:
• before access to any page other than the current one
• when a new command is validated (MODE = CMDE)
110
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
The Write Page command (WP) is optimized for consecutive writes. Write handshaking can be
chained; an internal address buffer is automatically increased.
Table 20-7.
Write Command
Step
Handshake Sequence
MODE[3:0]
DATA[15:0]
1
Write handshaking
CMDE
WP or WPL or EWP or EWPL
2
Write handshaking
ADDR0
32-bit Memory Address First byte
3
Write handshaking
ADDR1
32-bit Flash Address
4
Write handshaking
ADDR2
32-bit Flash Address
5
Write handshaking
ADDR3
32-bit Flash Address Last Byte
6
Write handshaking
DATA
*Memory Address++
7
Write handshaking
DATA
*Memory Address++
...
...
...
...
n
Write handshaking
ADDR0
32-bit Memory Address First byte
n+1
Write handshaking
ADDR1
32-bit Flash Address
n+2
Write handshaking
ADDR2
32-bit Flash Address
n+3
Write handshaking
ADDR3
32-bit Flash Address Last Byte
n+4
Write handshaking
DATA
*Memory Address++
n+5
Write handshaking
DATA
*Memory Address++
...
...
...
...
The Flash command Write Page and Lock (WPL) is equivalent to the Flash Write Command.
However, the lock bit is automatically set at the end of the Flash write operation. As a lock region
is composed of several pages, the programmer writes to the first pages of the lock region using
Flash write commands and writes to the last page of the lock region using a Flash write and lock
command.
The Flash command Erase Page and Write (EWP) is equivalent to the Flash Write Command.
However, before programming the load buffer, the page is erased.
The Flash command Erase Page and Write the Lock (EWPL) combines EWP and WPL
commands.
20.2.5.3
Flash Full Erase Command
This command is used to erase the Flash memory planes.
All lock regions must be unlocked before the Full Erase command by using the CLB command.
Otherwise, the erase command is aborted and no page is erased.
Table 20-8.
Full Erase Command
Step
Handshake Sequence
MODE[3:0]
DATA[15:0]
1
Write handshaking
CMDE
EA
2
Write handshaking
DATA
0
111
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
20.2.5.4
Flash Lock Commands
Lock bits can be set using WPL or EWPL commands. They can also be set by using the Set
Lock command (SLB). With this command, several lock bits can be activated. A Bit Mask is provided as argument to the command. When bit 0 of the bit mask is set, then the first lock bit is
activated.
In the same way, the Clear Lock command (CLB) is used to clear lock bits. All the lock bits are
also cleared by the EA command.
Table 20-9.
Set and Clear Lock Bit Command
Step
Handshake Sequence
MODE[3:0]
DATA[15:0]
1
Write handshaking
CMDE
SLB or CLB
2
Write handshaking
DATA
Bit Mask
Lock bits can be read using Get Lock Bit command (GLB). The nth lock bit is active when the bit
n of the bit mask is set..
Table 20-10. Get Lock Bit Command
Step
Handshake Sequence
MODE[3:0]
DATA[15:0]
1
Write handshaking
CMDE
GLB
DATA
Lock Bit Mask Status
0 = Lock bit is cleared
1 = Lock bit is set
2
20.2.5.5
Read handshaking
Flash General Purpose NVM Commands
General-purpose NVM bits (GP NVM bits) can be set using the Set Fuse command (SFB). This
command also activates GP NVM bits. A bit mask is provided as argument to the command.
When bit 0 of the bit mask is set, then the first GP NVM bit is activated.
In the same way, the Clear Fuse command (CFB) is used to clear general-purpose NVM bits.
All the general-purpose NVM bits are also cleared by the EA command. The general-purpose
NVM bit is deactived when the corresponding bit in the pattern value is set to 1.
Table 20-11. Set/Clear GP NVM Command
Step
Handshake Sequence
MODE[3:0]
DATA[15:0]
1
Write handshaking
CMDE
SFB or CFB
2
Write handshaking
DATA
GP NVM bit pattern value
General-purpose NVM bits can be read using the Get Fuse Bit command (GFB). The nth GP
NVM bit is active when bit n of the bit mask is set..
Table 20-12. Get GP NVM Bit Command
112
Step
Handshake Sequence
MODE[3:0]
DATA[15:0]
1
Write handshaking
CMDE
GFB
2
Read handshaking
DATA
GP NVM Bit Mask Status
0 = GP NVM bit is cleared
1 = GP NVM bit is set
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
20.2.5.6
Flash Security Bit Command
A security bit can be set using the Set Security Bit command (SSE). Once the security bit is
active, the Fast Flash programming is disabled. No other command can be run. An event on the
Erase pin can erase the security bit once the contents of the Flash have been erased.
Table 20-13. Set Security Bit Command
20.2.5.7
Step
Handshake Sequence
MODE[3:0]
DATA[15:0]
1
Write handshaking
CMDE
SSE
2
Write handshaking
DATA
0
Get Version Command
The Get Version (GVE) command retrieves the version of the FFPI interface.
Table 20-14. Get Version Command
20.3
Step
Handshake Sequence
MODE[3:0]
DATA[15:0]
1
Write handshaking
CMDE
GVE
2
Write handshaking
DATA
Version
Serial Fast Flash Programming
The Serial Fast Flash programming interface is based on IEEE Std. 1149.1 “Standard Test
Access Port and Boundary-Scan Architecture”. Refer to this standard for an explanation of terms
used in this chapter and for a description of the TAP controller states.
In this mode, data read/written from/to the embedded Flash of the device are transmitted
through the JTAG interface of the device.
20.3.1
Device Configuration
In Serial Fast Flash Programming Mode, the device is in a specific test mode. Only a distinct set
of pins is significant. Other pins must be left unconnected.
Figure 20-4. Serial Programming
VDDIO
VDDIO
VDDIO
GND
TST
PGMEN0
PGMEN1
PGMEN2
VDDCORE
VDDIO
TDI
TDO
VDDPLL
TMS
VDDFLASH
TCK
GND
0-50MHz
XIN
113
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
Table 20-15. Signal Description List
Signal Name
Function
Type
Active
Level
Comments
Power
VDDFLASH
Flash Power Supply
Power
VDDIO
I/O Lines Power Supply
Power
VDDCORE
Core Power Supply
Power
VDDPLL
PLL Power Supply
Power
GND
Ground
Ground
XIN
Main Clock Input.
This input can be tied to GND. In this
case, the device is clocked by the internal
RC oscillator.
Clocks
Input
32 kHz to 50 MHz
Test
TST
Test Mode Select
Input
High
Must be connected to VDDIO.
PGMEN0
Test Mode Select
Input
High
Must be connected to VDDIO
PGMEN1
Test Mode Select
Input
High
Must be connected to VDDIO
PGMEN2
Test Mode Select
Input
Low
Must be connected to GND
JTAG
TCK
JTAG TCK
Input
-
Pulled-up input at reset
TDI
JTAG Test Data In
Input
-
Pulled-up input at reset
TDO
JTAG Test Data Out
Output
-
TMS
JTAG Test Mode Select
Input
-
20.3.2
Pulled-up input at reset
Entering Serial Programming Mode
The following algorithm puts the device in Serial Programming Mode:
• Apply GND, VDDIO, VDDCORE, VDDFLASH and VDDPLL.
• Apply XIN clock within TPOR_RESET + 32(TSCLK) if an external clock is available.
• Wait for TPOR_RESET.
• Reset the TAP controller clocking 5 TCK pulses with TMS set.
• Shift 0x2 into the IR register ( IR is 4 bits long, LSB first) without going through the Run-TestIdle state.
• Shift 0x2 into the DR register ( DR is 4 bits long, LSB first) without going through the RunTest-Idle state.
• Shift 0xC into the IR register ( IR is 4 bits long, LSB first) without going through the Run-TestIdle state.
Note:
114
After reset, the device is clocked by the internal RC oscillator. Before clearing RDY signal, if an
external clock ( > 32 kHz) is connected to XIN, then the device will switch on the external clock.
Else, XIN input is not considered. An higher frequency on XIN speeds up the programmer
handshake.
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
Table 20-16. Reset TAP controller and go to Select-DR-Scan
20.3.3
TDI
TMS
TAP Controller State
X
1
X
1
X
1
X
1
X
1
Test-Logic Reset
X
0
Run-Test/Idle
Xt
1
Select-DR-Scan
Read/Write Handshake
Two registers of the device are accessible through the JTAG:
• Debug Comms Control Register: DCCR
• Debug Comms Data Register: DCDR
Access to these registers is done through the TAP 38-bit DR register comprising a 32-bit data
field, a 5-bit address field and a read/write bit. The data to be written is scanned into the 32-bit
data field with the address of the register to the 5-bit address field and 1 to the read/write bit. A
register is read by scanning its address into the address field and 0 into the read/write bit, going
through the UPDATE-DR TAP state, then scanning out the data. The 32-bit data field is ignored.
Figure 20-5. TAP 8-bit DR Register
TDI
r/w
4
Address
5
Address
Decoder
0
31
0
Data
TDO
32
Debug Comms Control Register
Debug Comms Control Register
A read or write takes place when the TAP controller enters UPDATE-DR state.
• The address of the Debug Comms Control Register is 0x04.
• The address of the Debug Comms Data Register is 0x05.
The Debug Comms Control Register is read-only and allows synchronized handshaking
between the processor and the debugger.
• Bit 1 (W): Denotes whether the programmer can read a data through the Debug Comms Data
Register. If the device is busy W = 0, then the programmer must poll until W = 1.
• Bit 0 (R): Denotes whether the programmer can send data from the Debug Comms Data
Register. If R = 1, data previously placed there through the scan chain has not been collected
by the device and so the programmer must wait.
115
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
20.3.4
Device Operations
Several commands on the Flash memory are available. These commands are summarized in
Table 20-3 on page 107. Commands are run by the programmer through the serial interface that
is reading and writing the Debug Comms Registers.
20.3.4.1
Flash Read Command
This command is used to read the Flash contents. The memory map is accessible through this
command. Memory is seen as an array of words (32-bit wide). The read command can start at
any valid address in the memory plane. This address must be word-aligned. The address is
automatically incremented.
Table 20-17. Read Command
20.3.4.2
Read/Write
DR Data
Write
(Number of Words to Read) << 16 | READ
Write
Address
Read
Memory [address]
Read
Memory [address+4]
...
...
Read
Memory [address+(Number of Words to Read - 1)* 4]
Flash Write Command
This command is used to write the Flash contents. The address transmitted must be a valid
Flash address in the memory plane.
The Flash memory plane is organized into several pages. Data to be written is stored in a load
buffer that corresponds to a Flash memory page. The load buffer is automatically flushed to the
Flash:
• before access to any page than the current one
• at the end of the number of words transmitted
The Write Page command (WP) is optimized for consecutive writes. Write handshaking can be
chained; an internal address buffer is automatically increased.
Table 20-18. Write Command
Read/Write
DR Data
Write
(Number of Words to Write) << 16 | (WP or WPL or EWP or EWPL)
Write
Address
Write
Memory [address]
Write
Memory [address+4]
Write
Memory [address+8]
Write
Memory [address+(Number of Words to Write - 1)* 4]
Flash Write Page and Lock command (WPL) is equivalent to the Flash Write Command. However, the lock bit is automatically set at the end of the Flash write operation. As a lock region is
composed of several pages, the programmer writes to the first pages of the lock region using
116
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
Flash write commands and writes to the last page of the lock region using a Flash write and lock
command.
Flash Erase Page and Write command (EWP) is equivalent to the Flash Write Command. However, before programming the load buffer, the page is erased.
Flash Erase Page and Write the Lock command (EWPL) combines EWP and WPL
commands.
20.3.4.3
Flash Full Erase Command
This command is used to erase the Flash memory planes.
All lock bits must be deactivated before using the Full Erase command. This can be done by
using the CLB command.
Table 20-19. Full Erase Command
20.3.4.4
Read/Write
DR Data
Write
EA
Flash Lock Commands
Lock bits can be set using WPL or EWPL commands. They can also be set by using the Set
Lock command (SLB). With this command, several lock bits can be activated at the same time.
Bit 0 of Bit Mask corresponds to the first lock bit and so on.
In the same way, the Clear Lock command (CLB) is used to clear lock bits. All the lock bits can
also be cleared by the EA command.
Table 20-20. Set and Clear Lock Bit Command
Read/Write
DR Data
Write
SLB or CLB
Write
Bit Mask
Lock bits can be read using Get Lock Bit command (GLB). When a bit set in the Bit Mask is
returned, then the corresponding lock bit is active.
Table 20-21. Get Lock Bit Command
20.3.4.5
Read/Write
DR Data
Write
GLB
Read
Bit Mask
Flash General-purpose NVM Commands
General-purpose NVM bits (GP NVM) can be set with the Set Fuse command (SFB). Using this
command, several GP NVM bits can be activated at the same time. Bit 0 of Bit Mask corresponds to the first fuse bit and so on.
In the same way, the Clear Fuse command (CFB) is used to clear GP NVM bits. All the generalpurpose NVM bits are also cleared by the EA command.
117
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
Table 20-22. Set and Clear General-purpose NVM Bit Command
Read/Write
DR Data
Write
SFB or CFB
Write
Bit Mask
GP NVM bits can be read using Get Fuse Bit command (GFB). When a bit set in the Bit Mask is
returned, then the corresponding fuse bit is set.
Table 20-23. Get General-purpose NVM Bit Command
20.3.4.6
Read/Write
DR Data
Write
GFB
Read
Bit Mask
Flash Security Bit Command
Security bits can be set using Set Security Bit command (SSE). Once the security bit is active,
the Fast Flash programming is disabled. No other command can be run. Only an event on the
Erase pin can erase the security bit once the contents of the Flash have been erased.
Table 20-24. Set Security Bit Command
20.3.4.7
Read/Write
DR Data
Write
SSE
Get Version Command
The Get Version (GVE) command retrieves the version of the FFPI interface.
Table 20-25. Get Version Command
118
Read/Write
DR Data
Write
GVE
Read
Version
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
21. Peripheral DMA Controller (PDC)
21.1
Overview
The Peripheral DMA Controller (PDC) transfers data between on-chip serial peripherals such as
the UART, USART, SSC, SPI, MCI and the on- and off-chip memories. Using the Peripheral
DMA Contoller avoids processor intervention and removes the processor interrupt-handling
overhead. This significantly reduces the number of clock cycles required for a data transfer and,
as a result, improves the performance of the microcontroller and makes it more power efficient.
The PDC channels are implemented in pairs, each pair being dedicated to a particular peripheral. One channel in the pair is dedicated to the receiving channel and one to the transmitting
channel of each UART, USART, SSC and SPI.
The user interface of a PDC channel is integrated in the memory space of each peripheral. It
contains:
• A 32-bit memory pointer register
• A 16-bit transfer count register
• A 32-bit register for next memory pointer
• A 16-bit register for next transfer count
The peripheral triggers PDC transfers using transmit and receive signals. When the programmed data is transferred, an end of transfer interrupt is generated by the corresponding
peripheral.
21.2
Block Diagram
Figure 21-1. Block Diagram
Peripheral
Peripheral DMA Controller
THR
PDC Channel 0
RHR
PDC Channel 1
Control
Control
Memory
Controller
Status & Control
119
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
21.3
21.3.1
Functional Description
Configuration
The PDC channels user interface enables the user to configure and control the data transfers for
each channel. The user interface of a PDC channel is integrated into the user interface of the
peripheral (offset 0x100), which it is related to.
Per peripheral, it contains four 32-bit Pointer Registers (RPR, RNPR, TPR, and TNPR) and four
16-bit Counter Registers (RCR, RNCR, TCR, and TNCR).
The size of the buffer (number of transfers) is configured in an internal 16-bit transfer counter
register, and it is possible, at any moment, to read the number of transfers left for each channel.
The memory base address is configured in a 32-bit memory pointer by defining the location of
the first address to access in the memory. It is possible, at any moment, to read the location in
memory of the next transfer and the number of remaining transfers. The PDC has dedicated status registers which indicate if the transfer is enabled or disabled for each channel. The status for
each channel is located in the peripheral status register. Transfers can be enabled and/or disabled by setting TXTEN/TXTDIS and RXTEN/RXTDIS in PDC Transfer Control Register. These
control bits enable reading the pointer and counter registers safely without any risk of their
changing between both reads.
The PDC sends status flags to the peripheral visible in its status-register (ENDRX, ENDTX,
RXBUFF, and TXBUFE).
ENDRX flag is set when the PERIPH_RCR register reaches zero.
RXBUFF flag is set when both PERIPH_RCR and PERIPH_RNCR reach zero.
ENDTX flag is set when the PERIPH_TCR register reaches zero.
TXBUFE flag is set when both PERIPH_TCR and PERIPH_TNCR reach zero.
These status flags are described in the peripheral status register.
21.3.2
Memory Pointers
Each peripheral is connected to the PDC by a receiver data channel and a transmitter data
channel. Each channel has an internal 32-bit memory pointer. Each memory pointer points to a
location anywhere in the memory space (on-chip memory or external bus interface memory).
Depending on the type of transfer (byte, half-word or word), the memory pointer is incremented
by 1, 2 or 4, respectively for peripheral transfers.
If a memory pointer is reprogrammed while the PDC is in operation, the transfer address is
changed, and the PDC performs transfers using the new address.
21.3.3
Transfer Counters
There is one internal 16-bit transfer counter for each channel used to count the size of the block
already transferred by its associated channel. These counters are decremented after each data
transfer. When the counter reaches zero, the transfer is complete and the PDC stops transferring data.
If the Next Counter Register is equal to zero, the PDC disables the trigger while activating the
related peripheral end flag.
120
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
If the counter is reprogrammed while the PDC is operating, the number of transfers is updated
and the PDC counts transfers from the new value.
Programming the Next Counter/Pointer registers chains the buffers. The counters are decremented after each data transfer as stated above, but when the transfer counter reaches zero,
the values of the Next Counter/Pointer are loaded into the Counter/Pointer registers in order to
re-enable the triggers.
For each channel, two status bits indicate the end of the current buffer (ENDRX, ENTX) and the
end of both current and next buffer (RXBUFF, TXBUFE). These bits are directly mapped to the
peripheral status register and can trigger an interrupt request to the AIC.
The peripheral end flag is automatically cleared when one of the counter-registers (Counter or
Next Counter Register) is written.
Note: When the Next Counter Register is loaded into the Counter Register, it is set to zero.
21.3.4
Data Transfers
The peripheral triggers PDC transfers using transmit (TXRDY) and receive (RXRDY) signals.
When the peripheral receives an external character, it sends a Receive Ready signal to the PDC
which then requests access to the system bus. When access is granted, the PDC starts a read
of the peripheral Receive Holding Register (RHR) and then triggers a write in the memory.
After each transfer, the relevant PDC memory pointer is incremented and the number of transfers left is decremented. When the memory block size is reached, a signal is sent to the
peripheral and the transfer stops.
The same procedure is followed, in reverse, for transmit transfers.
21.3.5
Priority of PDC Transfer Requests
The Peripheral DMA Controller handles transfer requests from the channel according to priorities fixed for each product.These priorities are defined in the product datasheet.
If simultaneous requests of the same type (receiver or transmitter) occur on identical peripherals, the priority is determined by the numbering of the peripherals.
If transfer requests are not simultaneous, they are treated in the order they occurred. Requests
from the receivers are handled first and then followed by transmitter requests.
121
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
21.4
Peripheral DMA Controller (PDC) User Interface
Table 21-1.
Offset
Peripheral DMA Controller (PDC) Register Mapping
Register
Register Name
(1)
Read/Write
Reset
0x100
Receive Pointer Register
PERIPH _RPR
Read/Write
0x0
0x104
Receive Counter Register
PERIPH_RCR
Read/Write
0x0
0x108
Transmit Pointer Register
PERIPH_TPR
Read/Write
0x0
0x10C
Transmit Counter Register
PERIPH_TCR
Read/Write
0x0
0x110
Receive Next Pointer Register
PERIPH_RNPR
Read/Write
0x0
0x114
Receive Next Counter Register
PERIPH_RNCR
Read/Write
0x0
0x118
Transmit Next Pointer Register
PERIPH_TNPR
Read/Write
0x0
0x11C
Transmit Next Counter Register
PERIPH_TNCR
Read/Write
0x0
0x120
PDC Transfer Control Register
PERIPH_PTCR
Write-only
-
0x124
PDC Transfer Status Register
PERIPH_PTSR
Read-only
0x0
Note: 1.
PERIPH: Ten registers are mapped in the peripheral memory space at the same offset. These can be defined by the
user according to the function and the peripheral desired (DBGU, USART, SSC, SPI, MCI etc).
122
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
21.4.1
PDC Receive Pointer Register
Register Name:
Access Type:
31
PERIPH_RPR
Read/Write
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
RXPTR
23
22
21
20
RXPTR
15
14
13
12
RXPTR
7
6
5
4
RXPTR
• RXPTR: Receive Pointer Address
Address of the next receive transfer.
21.4.2
PDC Receive Counter Register
Register Name:
Access Type:
31
PERIPH_RCR
Read/Write
30
29
28
-23
22
21
20
-15
14
13
12
RXCTR
7
6
5
4
RXCTR
• RXCTR: Receive Counter Value
Number of receive transfers to be performed.
123
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
21.4.3
PDC Transmit Pointer Register
Register Name:
Access Type:
31
PERIPH_TPR
Read/Write
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
TXPTR
23
22
21
20
TXPTR
15
14
13
12
TXPTR
7
6
5
4
TXPTR
• TXPTR: Transmit Pointer Address
Address of the transmit buffer.
21.4.4
PDC Transmit Counter Register
Register Name:
Access Type:
31
PERIPH_TCR
Read/Write
30
29
28
-23
22
21
20
-15
14
13
12
TXCTR
7
6
5
4
TXCTR
• TXCTR: Transmit Counter Value
TXCTR is the size of the transmit transfer to be performed. At zero, the peripheral DMA transfer is stopped.
124
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
21.4.5
PDC Receive Next Pointer Register
Register Name:
Access Type:
31
PERIPH_RNPR
Read/Write
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
RXNPTR
23
22
21
20
RXNPTR
15
14
13
12
RXNPTR
7
6
5
4
RXNPTR
• RXNPTR: Receive Next Pointer Address
RXNPTR is the address of the next buffer to fill with received data when the current buffer is full.
21.4.6
PDC Receive Next Counter Register
Register Name:
Access Type:
31
PERIPH_RNCR
Read/Write
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
-23
22
21
20
-15
14
13
12
RXNCR
7
6
5
4
RXNCR
• RXNCR: Receive Next Counter Value
RXNCR is the size of the next buffer to receive.
125
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
21.4.7
PDC Transmit Next Pointer Register
Register Name:
Access Type:
31
PERIPH_TNPR
Read/Write
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
TXNPTR
23
22
21
20
TXNPTR
15
14
13
12
TXNPTR
7
6
5
4
TXNPTR
• TXNPTR: Transmit Next Pointer Address
TXNPTR is the address of the next buffer to transmit when the current buffer is empty.
21.4.8
PDC Transmit Next Counter Register
Register Name:
Access Type:
31
PERIPH_TNCR
Read/Write
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
-23
22
21
20
-15
14
13
12
TXNCR
7
6
5
4
TXNCR
• TXNCR: Transmit Next Counter Value
TXNCR is the size of the next buffer to transmit.
126
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
21.4.9
PDC Transfer Control Register
Register Name:
Access Type:
PERIPH_PTCR
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
TXTDIS
TXTEN
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
–
–
–
–
RXTDIS
RXTEN
• RXTEN: Receiver Transfer Enable
0 = No effect.
1 = Enables the receiver PDC transfer requests if RXTDIS is not set.
• RXTDIS: Receiver Transfer Disable
0 = No effect.
1 = Disables the receiver PDC transfer requests.
• TXTEN: Transmitter Transfer Enable
0 = No effect.
1 = Enables the transmitter PDC transfer requests.
• TXTDIS: Transmitter Transfer Disable
0 = No effect.
1 = Disables the transmitter PDC transfer requests
127
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
21.4.10
PDC Transfer Status Register
Register Name:
Access Type:
PERIPH_PTSR
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
TXTEN
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
RXTEN
• RXTEN: Receiver Transfer Enable
0 = Receiver PDC transfer requests are disabled.
1 = Receiver PDC transfer requests are enabled.
• TXTEN: Transmitter Transfer Enable
0 = Transmitter PDC transfer requests are disabled.
1 = Transmitter PDC transfer requests are enabled.
128
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
22. Advanced Interrupt Controller (AIC)
22.1
Overview
The Advanced Interrupt Controller (AIC) is an 8-level priority, individually maskable, vectored
interrupt controller, providing handling of up to thirty-two interrupt sources. It is designed to substantially reduce the software and real-time overhead in handling internal and external
interrupts.
The AIC drives the nFIQ (fast interrupt request) and the nIRQ (standard interrupt request) inputs
of an ARM processor. Inputs of the AIC are either internal peripheral interrupts or external interrupts coming from the product's pins.
The 8-level Priority Controller allows the user to define the priority for each interrupt source, thus
permitting higher priority interrupts to be serviced even if a lower priority interrupt is being
treated.
Internal interrupt sources can be programmed to be level sensitive or edge triggered. External
interrupt sources can be programmed to be positive-edge or negative-edge triggered or highlevel or low-level sensitive.
The fast forcing feature redirects any internal or external interrupt source to provide a fast interrupt rather than a normal interrupt.
22.2
Block Diagram
Figure 22-1. Block Diagram
FIQ
AIC
IRQ0-IRQn
Embedded
PeripheralEE
Embedded
ARM
Processor
Up to
Thirty-two
Sources
nFIQ
nIRQ
Peripheral
Embedded
Peripheral
APB
22.3
Application Block Diagram
Figure 22-2. Description of the Application Block
OS-based Applications
Standalone
Applications
OS Drivers
RTOS Drivers
Hard Real Time Tasks
General OS Interrupt Handler
Advanced Interrupt Controller
Embedded Peripherals
External Peripherals
(External Interrupts)
129
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
22.4
AIC Detailed Block Diagram
Figure 22-3. AIC Detailed Block Diagram
Advanced Interrupt Controller
FIQ
PIO
Controller
Fast
Interrupt
Controller
External
Source
Input
Stage
ARM
Processor
nFIQ
nIRQ
IRQ0-IRQn
Interrupt
Priority
Controller
Fast
Forcing
PIOIRQ
Internal
Source
Input
Stage
Embedded
Peripherals
Processor
Clock
Power
Management
Controller
User Interface
Wake Up
APB
22.5
I/O Line Description
Table 22-1.
22.6
22.6.1
I/O Line Description
Pin Name
Pin Description
Type
FIQ
Fast Interrupt
Input
IRQ0 - IRQn
Interrupt 0 - Interrupt n
Input
Product Dependencies
I/O Lines
The interrupt signals FIQ and IRQ0 to IRQn are normally multiplexed through the PIO controllers. Depending on the features of the PIO controller used in the product, the pins must be
programmed in accordance with their assigned interrupt function. This is not applicable when
the PIO controller used in the product is transparent on the input path.
22.6.2
Power Management
The Advanced Interrupt Controller is continuously clocked. The Power Management Controller
has no effect on the Advanced Interrupt Controller behavior.
The assertion of the Advanced Interrupt Controller outputs, either nIRQ or nFIQ, wakes up the
ARM processor while it is in Idle Mode. The General Interrupt Mask feature enables the AIC to
wake up the processor without asserting the interrupt line of the processor, thus providing synchronization of the processor on an event.
22.6.3
Interrupt Sources
The Interrupt Source 0 is always located at FIQ. If the product does not feature an FIQ pin, the
Interrupt Source 0 cannot be used.
130
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
The Interrupt Source 1 is always located at System Interrupt. This is the result of the OR-wiring
of the system peripheral interrupt lines, such as the System Timer, the Real Time Clock, the
Power Management Controller and the Memory Controller. When a system interrupt occurs, the
service routine must first distinguish the cause of the interrupt. This is performed by reading successively the status registers of the above mentioned system peripherals.
The interrupt sources 2 to 31 can either be connected to the interrupt outputs of an embedded
user peripheral or to external interrupt lines. The external interrupt lines can be connected
directly, or through the PIO Controller.
The PIO Controllers are considered as user peripherals in the scope of interrupt handling.
Accordingly, the PIO Controller interrupt lines are connected to the Interrupt Sources 2 to 31.
The peripheral identification defined at the product level corresponds to the interrupt source
number (as well as the bit number controlling the clock of the peripheral). Consequently, to simplify the description of the functional operations and the user interface, the interrupt sources are
named FIQ, SYS, and PID2 to PID31.
131
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
22.7
Functional Description
22.7.1
22.7.1.1
Interrupt Source Control
Interrupt Source Mode
The Advanced Interrupt Controller independently programs each interrupt source. The SRCTYPE field of the corresponding AIC_SMR (Source Mode Register) selects the interrupt
condition of each source.
The internal interrupt sources wired on the interrupt outputs of the embedded peripherals can be
programmed either in level-sensitive mode or in edge-triggered mode. The active level of the
internal interrupts is not important for the user.
The external interrupt sources can be programmed either in high level-sensitive or low level-sensitive modes, or in positive edge-triggered or negative edge-triggered modes.
22.7.1.2
Interrupt Source Enabling
Each interrupt source, including the FIQ in source 0, can be enabled or disabled by using the
command registers; AIC_IECR (Interrupt Enable Command Register) and AIC_IDCR (Interrupt
Disable Command Register). This set of registers conducts enabling or disabling in one instruction. The interrupt mask can be read in the AIC_IMR register. A disabled interrupt does not affect
servicing of other interrupts.
22.7.1.3
Interrupt Clearing and Setting
All interrupt sources programmed to be edge-triggered (including the FIQ in source 0) can be
individually set or cleared by writing respectively the AIC_ISCR and AIC_ICCR registers. Clearing or setting interrupt sources programmed in level-sensitive mode has no effect.
The clear operation is perfunctory, as the software must perform an action to reinitialize the
“memorization” circuitry activated when the source is programmed in edge-triggered mode.
However, the set operation is available for auto-test or software debug purposes. It can also be
used to execute an AIC-implementation of a software interrupt.
The AIC features an automatic clear of the current interrupt when the AIC_IVR (Interrupt Vector
Register) is read. Only the interrupt source being detected by the AIC as the current interrupt is
affected by this operation. (See “Priority Controller” on page 135.) The automatic clear reduces
the operations required by the interrupt service routine entry code to reading the AIC_IVR. Note
that the automatic interrupt clear is disabled if the interrupt source has the Fast Forcing feature
enabled as it is considered uniquely as a FIQ source. (See “Fast Forcing” on page 139.)
The automatic clear of the interrupt source 0 is performed when AIC_FVR is read.
22.7.1.4
Interrupt Status
For each interrupt, the AIC operation originates in AIC_IPR (Interrupt Pending Register) and its
mask in AIC_IMR (Interrupt Mask Register). AIC_IPR enables the actual activity of the sources,
whether masked or not.
The AIC_ISR register reads the number of the current interrupt (see ”Priority Controller” on page
135) and the register AIC_CISR gives an image of the signals nIRQ and nFIQ driven on the
processor.
Each status referred to above can be used to optimize the interrupt handling of the systems.
132
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
22.7.1.5
Internal Interrupt Source Input Stage
Figure 22-4.
Internal Interrupt Source Input Stage
AIC_SMRI
(SRCTYPE)
Level/
Edge
Source i
AIC_IPR
AIC_IMR
Fast Interrupt Controller
or
Priority Controller
Edge
AIC_IECR
Detector
Set Clear
FF
AIC_ISCR
AIC_ICCR
AIC_IDCR
22.7.1.6
External Interrupt Source Input Stage
Figure 22-5. External Interrupt Source Input Stage
High/Low
AIC_SMRi
SRCTYPE
Level/
Edge
Source i
AIC_IPR
AIC_IMR
Fast Interrupt Controller
or
Priority Controller
AIC_IECR
Pos./Neg.
Edge
Detector
Set
AIC_ISCR
FF
Clear
AIC_IDCR
AIC_ICCR
133
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
22.7.2
Interrupt Latencies
Global interrupt latencies depend on several parameters, including:
• The time the software masks the interrupts.
• Occurrence, either at the processor level or at the AIC level.
• The execution time of the instruction in progress when the interrupt occurs.
• The treatment of higher priority interrupts and the resynchronization of the hardware signals.
This section addresses only the hardware resynchronizations. It gives details of the latency
times between the event on an external interrupt leading in a valid interrupt (edge or level) or the
assertion of an internal interrupt source and the assertion of the nIRQ or nFIQ line on the processor. The resynchronization time depends on the programming of the interrupt source and on
its type (internal or external). For the standard interrupt, resynchronization times are given
assuming there is no higher priority in progress.
The PIO Controller multiplexing has no effect on the interrupt latencies of the external interrupt
sources.
22.7.2.1
External Interrupt Edge Triggered Source
Figure 22-6.
External Interrupt Edge Triggered Source
MCK
IRQ or FIQ
(Positive Edge)
IRQ or FIQ
(Negative Edge)
nIRQ
Maximum IRQ Latency = 4 Cycles
nFIQ
Maximum FIQ Latency = 4 Cycles
22.7.2.2
External Interrupt Level Sensitive Source
Figure 22-7.
External Interrupt Level Sensitive Source
MCK
IRQ or FIQ
(High Level)
IRQ or FIQ
(Low Level)
nIRQ
Maximum IRQ
Latency = 3 Cycles
nFIQ
Maximum FIQ
Latency = 3 cycles
134
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
22.7.2.3
Internal Interrupt Edge Triggered Source
Figure 22-8.
Internal Interrupt Edge Triggered Source
MCK
nIRQ
Maximum IRQ Latency = 4.5 Cycles
Peripheral Interrupt
Becomes Active
22.7.2.4
Internal Interrupt Level Sensitive Source
Figure 22-9.
Internal Interrupt Level Sensitive Source
MCK
nIRQ
Maximum IRQ Latency = 3.5 Cycles
Peripheral Interrupt
Becomes Active
22.7.3
22.7.3.1
Normal Interrupt
Priority Controller
An 8-level priority controller drives the nIRQ line of the processor, depending on the interrupt
conditions occurring on the interrupt sources 1 to 31 (except for those programmed in Fast
Forcing).
Each interrupt source has a programmable priority level of 7 to 0, which is user-definable by writing the PRIOR field of the corresponding AIC_SMR (Source Mode Register). Level 7 is the
highest priority and level 0 the lowest.
As soon as an interrupt condition occurs, as defined by the SRCTYPE field of the AIC_SVR
(Source Vector Register), the nIRQ line is asserted. As a new interrupt condition might have
happened on other interrupt sources since the nIRQ has been asserted, the priority controller
determines the current interrupt at the time the AIC_IVR (Interrupt Vector Register) is read. The
read of AIC_IVR is the entry point of the interrupt handling which allows the AIC to consider
that the interrupt has been taken into account by the software.
The current priority level is defined as the priority level of the current interrupt.
If several interrupt sources of equal priority are pending and enabled when the AIC_IVR is read,
the interrupt with the lowest interrupt source number is serviced first.
The nIRQ line can be asserted only if an interrupt condition occurs on an interrupt source with a
higher priority. If an interrupt condition happens (or is pending) during the interrupt treatment in
135
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
progress, it is delayed until the software indicates to the AIC the end of the current service by
writing the AIC_EOICR (End of Interrupt Command Register). The write of AIC_EOICR is the
exit point of the interrupt handling.
22.7.3.2
Interrupt Nesting
The priority controller utilizes interrupt nesting in order for the high priority interrupt to be handled
during the service of lower priority interrupts. This requires the interrupt service routines of the
lower interrupts to re-enable the interrupt at the processor level.
When an interrupt of a higher priority happens during an already occurring interrupt service routine, the nIRQ line is re-asserted. If the interrupt is enabled at the core level, the current
execution is interrupted and the new interrupt service routine should read the AIC_IVR. At this
time, the current interrupt number and its priority level are pushed into an embedded hardware
stack, so that they are saved and restored when the higher priority interrupt servicing is finished
and the AIC_EOICR is written.
The AIC is equipped with an 8-level wide hardware stack in order to support up to eight interrupt
nestings pursuant to having eight priority levels.
22.7.3.3
Interrupt Vectoring
The interrupt handler addresses corresponding to each interrupt source can be stored in the registers AIC_SVR1 to AIC_SVR31 (Source Vector Register 1 to 31). When the processor reads
AIC_IVR (Interrupt Vector Register), the value written into AIC_SVR corresponding to the current interrupt is returned.
This feature offers a way to branch in one single instruction to the handler corresponding to the
current interrupt, as AIC_IVR is mapped at the absolute address 0xFFFF F100 and thus accessible from the ARM interrupt vector at address 0x0000 0018 through the following instruction:
LDR
PC,[PC,# -&F20]
When the processor executes this instruction, it loads the read value in AIC_IVR in its program
counter, thus branching the execution on the correct interrupt handler.
This feature is often not used when the application is based on an operating system (either real
time or not). Operating systems often have a single entry point for all the interrupts and the first
task performed is to discern the source of the interrupt.
However, it is strongly recommended to port the operating system on AT91 products by supporting the interrupt vectoring. This can be performed by defining all the AIC_SVR of the interrupt
source to be handled by the operating system at the address of its interrupt handler. When doing
so, the interrupt vectoring permits a critical interrupt to transfer the execution on a specific very
fast handler and not onto the operating system’s general interrupt handler. This facilitates the
support of hard real-time tasks (input/outputs of voice/audio buffers and software peripheral handling) to be handled efficiently and independently of the application running under an operating
system.
22.7.3.4
Interrupt Handlers
This section gives an overview of the fast interrupt handling sequence when using the AIC. It is
assumed that the programmer understands the architecture of the ARM processor, and especially the processor interrupt modes and the associated status bits.
It is assumed that:
136
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
1. The Advanced Interrupt Controller has been programmed, AIC_SVR registers are
loaded with corresponding interrupt service routine addresses and interrupts are
enabled.
2. The instruction at the ARM interrupt exception vector address is required to work with
the vectoring
LDR PC, [PC, # -&F20]
When nIRQ is asserted, if the bit “I” of CPSR is 0, the sequence is as follows:
1. The CPSR is stored in SPSR_irq, the current value of the Program Counter is loaded in
the Interrupt link register (R14_irq) and the Program Counter (R15) is loaded with 0x18.
In the following cycle during fetch at address 0x1C, the ARM core adjusts R14_irq, decrementing it by four.
2. The ARM core enters Interrupt mode, if it has not already done so.
3. When the instruction loaded at address 0x18 is executed, the program counter is
loaded with the value read in AIC_IVR. Reading the AIC_IVR has the following effects:
– Sets the current interrupt to be the pending and enabled interrupt with the highest
priority. The current level is the priority level of the current interrupt.
– De-asserts the nIRQ line on the processor. Even if vectoring is not used, AIC_IVR
must be read in order to de-assert nIRQ.
– Automatically clears the interrupt, if it has been programmed to be edge-triggered.
– Pushes the current level and the current interrupt number on to the stack.
– Returns the value written in the AIC_SVR corresponding to the current interrupt.
4. The previous step has the effect of branching to the corresponding interrupt service
routine. This should start by saving the link register (R14_irq) and SPSR_IRQ. The link
register must be decremented by four when it is saved if it is to be restored directly into
the program counter at the end of the interrupt. For example, the instruction SUB PC,
LR, #4 may be used.
5. Further interrupts can then be unmasked by clearing the “I” bit in CPSR, allowing reassertion of the nIRQ to be taken into account by the core. This can happen if an interrupt with a higher priority than the current interrupt occurs.
6. The interrupt handler can then proceed as required, saving the registers that will be
used and restoring them at the end. During this phase, an interrupt of higher priority
than the current level will restart the sequence from step 1.
Note:
If the interrupt is programmed to be level sensitive, the source of the interrupt must be cleared during this phase.
7. The “I” bit in CPSR must be set in order to mask interrupts before exiting to ensure that
the interrupt is completed in an orderly manner.
8. The End of Interrupt Command Register (AIC_EOICR) must be written in order to indicate to the AIC that the current interrupt is finished. This causes the current level to be
popped from the stack, restoring the previous current level if one exists on the stack. If
another interrupt is pending, with lower or equal priority than the old current level but
with higher priority than the new current level, the nIRQ line is re-asserted, but the interrupt sequence does not immediately start because the “I” bit is set in the core.
SPSR_irq is restored. Finally, the saved value of the link register is restored directly into
the PC. This has the effect of returning from the interrupt to whatever was being executed before, and of loading the CPSR with the stored SPSR, masking or unmasking
the interrupts depending on the state saved in SPSR_irq.
Note:
The “I” bit in SPSR is significant. If it is set, it indicates that the ARM core was on the verge of
masking an interrupt when the mask instruction was interrupted. Hence, when SPSR is restored,
the mask instruction is completed (interrupt is masked).
137
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
22.7.4
22.7.4.1
Fast Interrupt
Fast Interrupt Source
The interrupt source 0 is the only source which can raise a fast interrupt request to the processor
except if fast forcing is used. The interrupt source 0 is generally connected to a FIQ pin of the
product, either directly or through a PIO Controller.
22.7.4.2
Fast Interrupt Control
The fast interrupt logic of the AIC has no priority controller. The mode of interrupt source 0 is
programmed with the AIC_SMR0 and the field PRIOR of this register is not used even if it reads
what has been written. The field SRCTYPE of AIC_SMR0 enables programming the fast interrupt source to be positive-edge triggered or negative-edge triggered or high-level sensitive or
low-level sensitive
Writing 0x1 in the AIC_IECR (Interrupt Enable Command Register) and AIC_IDCR (Interrupt
Disable Command Register) respectively enables and disables the fast interrupt. The bit 0 of
AIC_IMR (Interrupt Mask Register) indicates whether the fast interrupt is enabled or disabled.
22.7.4.3
Fast Interrupt Vectoring
The fast interrupt handler address can be stored in AIC_SVR0 (Source Vector Register 0). The
value written into this register is returned when the processor reads AIC_FVR (Fast Vector Register). This offers a way to branch in one single instruction to the interrupt handler, as AIC_FVR
is mapped at the absolute address 0xFFFF F104 and thus accessible from the ARM fast interrupt vector at address 0x0000 001C through the following instruction:
LDR
PC,[PC,# -&F20]
When the processor executes this instruction it loads the value read in AIC_FVR in its program
counter, thus branching the execution on the fast interrupt handler. It also automatically performs the clear of the fast interrupt source if it is programmed in edge-triggered mode.
22.7.4.4
Fast Interrupt Handlers
This section gives an overview of the fast interrupt handling sequence when using the AIC. It is
assumed that the programmer understands the architecture of the ARM processor, and especially the processor interrupt modes and associated status bits.
Assuming that:
1. The Advanced Interrupt Controller has been programmed, AIC_SVR0 is loaded with
the fast interrupt service routine address, and the interrupt source 0 is enabled.
2. The Instruction at address 0x1C (FIQ exception vector address) is required to vector
the fast interrupt:
LDR PC, [PC, # -&F20]
3. The user does not need nested fast interrupts.
When nFIQ is asserted, if the bit "F" of CPSR is 0, the sequence is:
1. The CPSR is stored in SPSR_fiq, the current value of the program counter is loaded in
the FIQ link register (R14_FIQ) and the program counter (R15) is loaded with 0x1C. In
the following cycle, during fetch at address 0x20, the ARM core adjusts R14_fiq, decrementing it by four.
2. The ARM core enters FIQ mode.
138
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
3. When the instruction loaded at address 0x1C is executed, the program counter is
loaded with the value read in AIC_FVR. Reading the AIC_FVR has effect of automatically clearing the fast interrupt, if it has been programmed to be edge triggered. In this
case only, it de-asserts the nFIQ line on the processor.
4. The previous step enables branching to the corresponding interrupt service routine. It is
not necessary to save the link register R14_fiq and SPSR_fiq if nested fast interrupts
are not needed.
5. The Interrupt Handler can then proceed as required. It is not necessary to save registers R8 to R13 because FIQ mode has its own dedicated registers and the user R8 to
R13 are banked. The other registers, R0 to R7, must be saved before being used, and
restored at the end (before the next step). Note that if the fast interrupt is programmed
to be level sensitive, the source of the interrupt must be cleared during this phase in
order to de-assert the interrupt source 0.
6. Finally, the Link Register R14_fiq is restored into the PC after decrementing it by four
(with instruction SUB PC, LR, #4 for example). This has the effect of returning from
the interrupt to whatever was being executed before, loading the CPSR with the SPSR
and masking or unmasking the fast interrupt depending on the state saved in the
SPSR.
Note:
The "F" bit in SPSR is significant. If it is set, it indicates that the ARM core was just about to mask
FIQ interrupts when the mask instruction was interrupted. Hence when the SPSR is restored, the
interrupted instruction is completed (FIQ is masked).
Another way to handle the fast interrupt is to map the interrupt service routine at the address of
the ARM vector 0x1C. This method does not use the vectoring, so that reading AIC_FVR must
be performed at the very beginning of the handler operation. However, this method saves the
execution of a branch instruction.
22.7.4.5
Fast Forcing
The Fast Forcing feature of the advanced interrupt controller provides redirection of any normal
Interrupt source on the fast interrupt controller.
Fast Forcing is enabled or disabled by writing to the Fast Forcing Enable Register (AIC_FFER)
and the Fast Forcing Disable Register (AIC_FFDR). Writing to these registers results in an
update of the Fast Forcing Status Register (AIC_FFSR) that controls the feature for each internal or external interrupt source.
When Fast Forcing is disabled, the interrupt sources are handled as described in the previous
pages.
When Fast Forcing is enabled, the edge/level programming and, in certain cases, edge detection of the interrupt source is still active but the source cannot trigger a normal interrupt to the
processor and is not seen by the priority handler.
If the interrupt source is programmed in level-sensitive mode and an active level is sampled,
Fast Forcing results in the assertion of the nFIQ line to the core.
If the interrupt source is programmed in edge-triggered mode and an active edge is detected,
Fast Forcing results in the assertion of the nFIQ line to the core.
The Fast Forcing feature does not affect the Source 0 pending bit in the Interrupt Pending Register (AIC_IPR).
The Fast Interrupt Vector Register (AIC_FVR) reads the contents of the Source Vector Register
0 (AIC_SVR0), whatever the source of the fast interrupt may be. The read of the FVR does not
139
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
clear the Source 0 when the fast forcing feature is used and the interrupt source should be
cleared by writing to the Interrupt Clear Command Register (AIC_ICCR).
All enabled and pending interrupt sources that have the fast forcing feature enabled and that are
programmed in edge-triggered mode must be cleared by writing to the Interrupt Clear Command
Register. In doing so, they are cleared independently and thus lost interrupts are prevented.
The read of AIC_IVR does not clear the source that has the fast forcing feature enabled.
The source 0, reserved to the fast interrupt, continues operating normally and becomes one of
the Fast Interrupt sources.
Figure 22-10. Fast Forcing
Source 0 _ FIQ
AIC_IPR
Input Stage
Automatic Clear
AIC_IMR
nFIQ
Read FVR if Fast Forcing is
disabled on Sources 1 to 31.
AIC_FFSR
Source n
AIC_IPR
Input Stage
Priority
Manager
Automatic Clear
AIC_IMR
nIRQ
Read IVR if Source n is the current interrupt
and if Fast Forcing is disabled on Source n.
22.7.5
Protect Mode
The Protect Mode permits reading the Interrupt Vector Register without performing the associated automatic operations. This is necessary when working with a debug system. When a
debugger, working either with a Debug Monitor or the ARM processor's ICE, stops the applications and updates the opened windows, it might read the AIC User Interface and thus the IVR.
This has undesirable consequences:
• If an enabled interrupt with a higher priority than the current one is pending, it is stacked.
• If there is no enabled pending interrupt, the spurious vector is returned.
In either case, an End of Interrupt command is necessary to acknowledge and to restore the
context of the AIC. This operation is generally not performed by the debug system as the debug
system would become strongly intrusive and cause the application to enter an undesired state.
This is avoided by using the Protect Mode. Writing DBGM in AIC_DCR (Debug Control Register)
at 0x1 enables the Protect Mode.
When the Protect Mode is enabled, the AIC performs interrupt stacking only when a write access
is performed on the AIC_IVR. Therefore, the Interrupt Service Routines must write (arbitrary
data) to the AIC_IVR just after reading it. The new context of the AIC, including the value of the
Interrupt Status Register (AIC_ISR), is updated with the current interrupt only when AIC_IVR is
written.
An AIC_IVR read on its own (e.g., by a debugger), modifies neither the AIC context nor the
AIC_ISR. Extra AIC_IVR reads perform the same operations. However, it is recommended to
140
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
not stop the processor between the read and the write of AIC_IVR of the interrupt service routine
to make sure the debugger does not modify the AIC context.
To summarize, in normal operating mode, the read of AIC_IVR performs the following operations within the AIC:
1. Calculates active interrupt (higher than current or spurious).
2. Determines and returns the vector of the active interrupt.
3. Memorizes the interrupt.
4. Pushes the current priority level onto the internal stack.
5. Acknowledges the interrupt.
However, while the Protect Mode is activated, only operations 1 to 3 are performed when
AIC_IVR is read. Operations 4 and 5 are only performed by the AIC when AIC_IVR is written.
Software that has been written and debugged using the Protect Mode runs correctly in Normal
Mode without modification. However, in Normal Mode the AIC_IVR write has no effect and can
be removed to optimize the code.
22.7.6
Spurious Interrupt
The Advanced Interrupt Controller features protection against spurious interrupts. A spurious
interrupt is defined as being the assertion of an interrupt source long enough for the AIC to
assert the nIRQ, but no longer present when AIC_IVR is read. This is most prone to occur when:
• An external interrupt source is programmed in level-sensitive mode and an active level occurs
for only a short time.
• An internal interrupt source is programmed in level sensitive and the output signal of the
corresponding embedded peripheral is activated for a short time. (As in the case for the
Watchdog.)
• An interrupt occurs just a few cycles before the software begins to mask it, thus resulting in a
pulse on the interrupt source.
The AIC detects a spurious interrupt at the time the AIC_IVR is read while no enabled interrupt
source is pending. When this happens, the AIC returns the value stored by the programmer in
AIC_SPU (Spurious Vector Register). The programmer must store the address of a spurious
interrupt handler in AIC_SPU as part of the application, to enable an as fast as possible return to
the normal execution flow. This handler writes in AIC_EOICR and performs a return from
interrupt.
22.7.7
General Interrupt Mask
The AIC features a General Interrupt Mask bit to prevent interrupts from reaching the processor.
Both the nIRQ and the nFIQ lines are driven to their inactive state if the bit GMSK in AIC_DCR
(Debug Control Register) is set. However, this mask does not prevent waking up the processor if
it has entered Idle Mode. This function facilitates synchronizing the processor on a next event
and, as soon as the event occurs, performs subsequent operations without having to handle an
interrupt. It is strongly recommended to use this mask with caution.
141
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
22.8
Advanced Interrupt Controller (AIC) User Interface
22.8.1
Base Address
The AIC is mapped at the address 0xFFFF F000. It has a total 4-Kbyte addressing space. This
permits the vectoring feature, as the PC-relative load/store instructions of the ARM processor
support only an ± 4-Kbyte offset.
Table 22-2.
Offset
Advanced Interrupt Controller (AIC) Register Mapping
Register
Name
Access
Reset Value
0000
Source Mode Register 0
AIC_SMR0
Read/Write
0x0
0x04
Source Mode Register 1
AIC_SMR1
Read/Write
0x0
---
---
---
---
---
0x7C
Source Mode Register 31
AIC_SMR31
Read/Write
0x0
0x80
Source Vector Register 0
AIC_SVR0
Read/Write
0x0
0x84
Source Vector Register 1
AIC_SVR1
Read/Write
0x0
---
---
---
AIC_SVR31
Read/Write
0x0
---
---
0xFC
Source Vector Register 31
0x100
Interrupt Vector Register
AIC_IVR
Read-only
0x0
0x104
Fast Interrupt Vector Register
AIC_FVR
Read-only
0x0
0x108
Interrupt Status Register
AIC_ISR
Read-only
0x0
0x10C
Interrupt Pending Register
AIC_IPR
Read-only
0x0(1)
0x110
Interrupt Mask Register
AIC_IMR
Read-only
0x0
0x114
Core Interrupt Status Register
AIC_CISR
Read-only
0x0
0x118
Reserved
---
---
---
0x11C
Reserved
---
---
---
0x120
Interrupt Enable Command Register
AIC_IECR
Write-only
---
0x124
Interrupt Disable Command Register
AIC_IDCR
Write-only
---
0x128
Interrupt Clear Command Register
AIC_ICCR
Write-only
---
0x12C
Interrupt Set Command Register
AIC_ISCR
Write-only
---
0x130
End of Interrupt Command Register
AIC_EOICR
Write-only
---
0x134
Spurious Interrupt Vector Register
AIC_SPU
Read/Write
0x0
0x138
Debug Control Register
AIC_DCR
Read/Write
0x0
0x13C
Reserved
---
---
---
0x140
Fast Forcing Enable Register
AIC_FFER
Write-only
---
0x144
Fast Forcing Disable Register
AIC_FFDR
Write-only
---
0x148
Fast Forcing Status Register
AIC_FFSR
Read-only
0x0
Note: 1.
The reset value of this register depends on the level of the external interrupt source. All other sources are cleared at
reset, thus not pending.
142
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
22.8.2
AIC Source Mode Register
Register Name:
AIC_SMR0..AIC_SMR31
Access Type:
Read/Write
Reset Value:
0x0
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
–
SRCTYPE
PRIOR
• PRIOR: Priority Level
Programs the priority level for all sources except FIQ source (source 0).
The priority level can be between 0 (lowest) and 7 (highest).
The priority level is not used for the FIQ in the related SMR register AIC_SMRx.
• SRCTYPE: Interrupt Source Type
The active level or edge is not programmable for the internal interrupt sources.
SRCTYPE
Internal Interrupt Sources
0
0
Level Sensitive
0
1
Edge Triggered
1
0
Level Sensitive
1
1
Edge Triggered
143
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
22.8.3
AIC Source Vector Register
Register Name:
AIC_SVR0..AIC_SVR31
Access Type:
Read/Write
Reset Value:
0x0
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
VECTOR
23
22
21
20
VECTOR
15
14
13
12
VECTOR
7
6
5
4
VECTOR
• VECTOR: Source Vector
The user may store in these registers the addresses of the corresponding handler for each interrupt source.
22.8.4
AIC Interrupt Vector Register
Register Name:
AIC_IVR
Access Type:
Read-only
Reset Value:
0
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
IRQV
23
22
21
20
IRQV
15
14
13
12
IRQV
7
6
5
4
IRQV
• IRQV: Interrupt Vector Register
The Interrupt Vector Register contains the vector programmed by the user in the Source Vector Register corresponding to
the current interrupt.
The Source Vector Register is indexed using the current interrupt number when the Interrupt Vector Register is read.
When there is no current interrupt, the Interrupt Vector Register reads the value stored in AIC_SPU.
144
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
22.8.5
AIC FIQ Vector Register
Register Name:
AIC_FVR
Access Type:
Read-only
Reset Value:
0
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
FIQV
23
22
21
20
FIQV
15
14
13
12
FIQV
7
6
5
4
FIQV
• FIQV: FIQ Vector Register
The FIQ Vector Register contains the vector programmed by the user in the Source Vector Register 0. When there is no
fast interrupt, the Fast Interrupt Vector Register reads the value stored in AIC_SPU.
22.8.6
AIC Interrupt Status Register
Register Name:
AIC_ISR
Access Type:
Read-only
Reset Value:
0
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
–
IRQID
• IRQID: Current Interrupt Identifier
The Interrupt Status Register returns the current interrupt source number.
145
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
22.8.7
AIC Interrupt Pending Register
Register Name:
AIC_IPR
Access Type:
Read-only
Reset Value:
0
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
PID31
PID30
PID29
PID28
PID27
PID26
PID25
PID24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
PID23
PID22
PID21
PID20
PID19
PID18
PID17
PID16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
PID15
PID14
PID13
PID12
PID11
PID10
PID9
PID8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PID7
PID6
PID5
PID4
PID3
PID2
SYS
FIQ
• FIQ, SYS, PID2-PID31: Interrupt Pending
0 = Corresponding interrupt is not pending.
1 = Corresponding interrupt is pending.
22.8.8
AIC Interrupt Mask Register
Register Name:
AIC_IMR
Access Type:
Read-only
Reset Value:
0
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
PID31
PID30
PID29
PID28
PID27
PID26
PID25
PID24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
PID23
PID22
PID21
PID20
PID19
PID18
PID17
PID16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
PID15
PID14
PID13
PID12
PID11
PID10
PID9
PID8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PID7
PID6
PID5
PID4
PID3
PID2
SYS
FIQ
• FIQ, SYS, PID2-PID31: Interrupt Mask
0 = Corresponding interrupt is disabled.
1 = Corresponding interrupt is enabled.
146
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
22.8.9
AIC Core Interrupt Status Register
Register Name:
AIC_CISR
Access Type:
Read-only
Reset Value:
0
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
–
–
–
–
NIRQ
NIFQ
• NFIQ: NFIQ Status
0 = nFIQ line is deactivated.
1 = nFIQ line is active.
• NIRQ: NIRQ Status
0 = nIRQ line is deactivated.
1 = nIRQ line is active.
22.8.10
AIC Interrupt Enable Command Register
Register Name:
AIC_IECR
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
PID31
PID30
PID29
PID28
PID27
PID26
PID25
PID24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
PID23
PID22
PID21
PID20
PID19
PID18
PID17
PID16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
PID15
PID14
PID13
PID12
PID11
PID10
PID9
PID8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PID7
PID6
PID5
PID4
PID3
PID2
SYS
FIQ
• FIQ, SYS, PID2-PID3: Interrupt Enable
0 = No effect.
1 = Enables corresponding interrupt.
147
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
22.8.11
AIC Interrupt Disable Command Register
Register Name:
AIC_IDCR
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
PID31
PID30
PID29
PID28
PID27
PID26
PID25
PID24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
PID23
PID22
PID21
PID20
PID19
PID18
PID17
PID16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
PID15
PID14
PID13
PID12
PID11
PID10
PID9
PID8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PID7
PID6
PID5
PID4
PID3
PID2
SYS
FIQ
• FIQ, SYS, PID2-PID31: Interrupt Disable
0 = No effect.
1 = Disables corresponding interrupt.
22.8.12
AIC Interrupt Clear Command Register
Register Name:
AIC_ICCR
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
PID31
PID30
PID29
PID28
PID27
PID26
PID25
PID24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
PID23
PID22
PID21
PID20
PID19
PID18
PID17
PID16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
PID15
PID14
PID13
PID12
PID11
PID10
PID9
PID8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PID7
PID6
PID5
PID4
PID3
PID2
SYS
FIQ
• FIQ, SYS, PID2-PID31: Interrupt Clear
0 = No effect.
1 = Clears corresponding interrupt.
148
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
22.8.13
AIC Interrupt Set Command Register
Register Name:
AIC_ISCR
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
PID31
PID30
PID29
PID28
PID27
PID26
PID25
PID24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
PID23
PID22
PID21
PID20
PID19
PID18
PID17
PID16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
PID15
PID14
PID13
PID12
PID11
PID10
PID9
PID8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PID7
PID6
PID5
PID4
PID3
PID2
SYS
FIQ
• FIQ, SYS, PID2-PID31: Interrupt Set
0 = No effect.
1 = Sets corresponding interrupt.
22.8.14
AIC End of Interrupt Command Register
Register Name:
AIC_EOICR
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
The End of Interrupt Command Register is used by the interrupt routine to indicate that the interrupt treatment is complete.
Any value can be written because it is only necessary to make a write to this register location to signal the end of interrupt
treatment.
149
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
22.8.15
AIC Spurious Interrupt Vector Register
Register Name:
AIC_SPU
Access Type:
Read/Write
Reset Value:
0
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
SIQV
23
22
21
20
SIQV
15
14
13
12
SIQV
7
6
5
4
SIQV
• SIQV: Spurious Interrupt Vector Register
The user may store the address of a spurious interrupt handler in this register. The written value is returned in AIC_IVR in
case of a spurious interrupt and in AIC_FVR in case of a spurious fast interrupt.
22.8.16
AIC Debug Control Register
Register Name:
AIC_DEBUG
Access Type:
Read/Write
Reset Value:
0
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
–
–
–
–
GMSK
PROT
• PROT: Protection Mode
0 = The Protection Mode is disabled.
1 = The Protection Mode is enabled.
• GMSK: General Mask
0 = The nIRQ and nFIQ lines are normally controlled by the AIC.
1 = The nIRQ and nFIQ lines are tied to their inactive state.
150
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
22.8.17
AIC Fast Forcing Enable Register
Register Name:
AIC_FFER
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
PID31
PID30
PID29
PID28
PID27
PID26
PID25
PID24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
PID23
PID22
PID21
PID20
PID19
PID18
PID17
PID16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
PID15
PID14
PID13
PID12
PID11
PID10
PID9
PID8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PID7
PID6
PID5
PID4
PID3
PID2
SYS
–
• SYS, PID2-PID31: Fast Forcing Enable
0 = No effect.
1 = Enables the fast forcing feature on the corresponding interrupt.
22.8.18
AIC Fast Forcing Disable Register
Register Name:
AIC_FFDR
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
PID31
PID30
PID29
PID28
PID27
PID26
PID25
PID24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
PID23
PID22
PID21
PID20
PID19
PID18
PID17
PID16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
PID15
PID14
PID13
PID12
PID11
PID10
PID9
PID8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PID7
PID6
PID5
PID4
PID3
PID2
SYS
–
• SYS, PID2-PID31: Fast Forcing Disable
0 = No effect.
1 = Disables the Fast Forcing feature on the corresponding interrupt.
151
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
22.8.19
AIC Fast Forcing Status Register
Register Name:
AIC_FFSR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
PID31
PID30
PID29
PID28
PID27
PID26
PID25
PID24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
PID23
PID22
PID21
PID20
PID19
PID18
PID17
PID16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
PID15
PID14
PID13
PID12
PID11
PID10
PID9
PID8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PID7
PID6
PID5
PID4
PID3
PID2
SYS
–
• SYS, PID2-PID31: Fast Forcing Status
0 = The Fast Forcing feature is disabled on the corresponding interrupt.
1 = The Fast Forcing feature is enabled on the corresponding interrupt.
152
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
23. Clock Generator
23.1
Overview
The Clock Generator is made up of 1 PLL, a Main Oscillator, an RC Oscillator and .
It provides the following clocks:
•
SLCK, the Slow Clock, which is the only permanent clock within the system.
•
MAINCK is the output of the Main Oscillator
•
PLLCK is the output of the Divider and PLL block
The Clock Generator User Interface is embedded within the Power Management Controller one
and is described in Section 24.9. However, the Clock Generator registers are named CKGR_.
23.2
Slow Clock RC Oscillator
The slow clock is the output of the RC Oscillator and is the only clock considered permanent in a
system that includes the Power Management Controller. It is mandatory in the operations of the
PMC.
The user has to take the possible drifts of the RC Oscillator into account. More details are given
in the DC Characteristics section of the product datasheet.
23.3
Main Oscillator
Figure 23-1. Main Oscillator Block Diagram
MOSCEN
XIN
XOUT
Main
Oscillator
MAINCK
Main Clock
OSCOUNT
SLCK
Slow Clock
Main
Oscillator
Counter
Main Clock
Frequency
Counter
23.3.1
MOSCS
MAINF
MAINRDY
Main Oscillator Connections
The Clock Generator integrates a Main Oscillator that is designed for a 3 to 20 MHz fundamental
crystal. The typical crystal connection is illustrated in Figure 23-2. The 1 kΩ resistor is only
required for crystals with frequencies lower than 8 MHz. The oscillator contains 25 pF capacitors
on each XIN and XOUT pin. Consequently, CL1 and CL2 can be removed when a crystal with a
load capacitance of 12.5 pF is used. For further details on the electrical characteristics of the
Main Oscillator, see the DC Characteristics section of the product datasheet.
153
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
Figure 23-2. Typical Crystal Connection
XIN
XOUT
GND
1K
CL1
23.3.2
CL2
Main Oscillator Startup Time
The startup time of the Main Oscillator is given in the DC Characteristics section of the product
datasheet. The startup time depends on the crystal frequency and decreases when the frequency rises.
23.3.3
Main Oscillator Control
To minimize the power required to start up the system, the main oscillator is disabled after reset
and slow clock is selected.
The software enables or disables the main oscillator so as to reduce power consumption by
clearing the MOSCEN bit in the Main Oscillator Register (CKGR_MOR).
When disabling the main oscillator by clearing the MOSCEN bit in CKGR_MOR, the MOSCS bit
in PMC_SR is automatically cleared, indicating the main clock is off.
When enabling the main oscillator, the user must initiate the main oscillator counter with a value
corresponding to the startup time of the oscillator. This startup time depends on the crystal frequency connected to the main oscillator.
When the MOSCEN bit and the OSCOUNT are written in CKGR_MOR to enable the main oscillator, the MOSCS bit in PMC_SR (Status Register) is cleared and the counter starts counting
down on the slow clock divided by 8 from the OSCOUNT value. Since the OSCOUNT value is
coded with 8 bits, the maximum startup time is about 62 ms.
When the counter reaches 0, the MOSCS bit is set, indicating that the main clock is valid. Setting the MOSCS bit in PMC_IMR can trigger an interrupt to the processor.
23.3.4
Main Clock Frequency Counter
The Main Oscillator features a Main Clock frequency counter that provides the quartz frequency
connected to the Main Oscillator. Generally, this value is known by the system designer; however, it is useful for the boot program to configure the device with the correct clock speed,
independently of the application.
The Main Clock frequency counter starts incrementing at the Main Clock speed after the next rising edge of the Slow Clock as soon as the Main Oscillator is stable, i.e., as soon as the MOSCS
bit is set. Then, at the 16th falling edge of Slow Clock, the MAINRDY bit in CKGR_MCFR (Main
Clock Frequency Register) is set and the counter stops counting. Its value can be read in the
MAINF field of CKGR_MCFR and gives the number of Main Clock cycles during 16 periods of
Slow Clock, so that the frequency of the crystal connected on the Main Oscillator can be
determined.
154
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
23.3.5
Main Oscillator Bypass
The user can input a clock on the device instead of connecting a crystal. In this case, the user
has to provide the external clock signal on the XIN pin. The input characteristics of the XIN pin
under these conditions are given in the product electrical characteristics section. The programmer has to be sure to set the OSCBYPASS bit to 1 and the MOSCEN bit to 0 in the Main OSC
register (CKGR_MOR) for the external clock to operate properly.
23.4
Divider and PLL Block
The PLL embeds an input divider to increase the accuracy of the resulting clock signals. However, the user must respect the PLL minimum input frequency when programming the divider.
Figure 23-3 shows the block diagram of the divider and PLL block.
Figure 23-3. Divider and PLL Block Diagram
DIV
Divider
MAINCK
OUT
MUL
PLLCK
PLL
PLLRC
PLLCOUNT
PLL
Counter
SLCK
23.4.1
LOCK
PLL Filter
The PLL requires connection to an external second-order filter through the PLLRC pin. Figure
23-4 shows a schematic of these filters.
Figure 23-4. PLL Capacitors and Resistors
PLLRC
PLL
R
C2
C1
GND
Values of R, C1 and C2 to be connected to the PLLRC pin must be calculated as a function of
the PLL input frequency, the PLL output frequency and the phase margin. A trade-off has to be
found between output signal overshoot and startup time.
155
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
23.4.2
Divider and Phase Lock Loop Programming
The divider can be set between 1 and 255 in steps of 1. When a divider field (DIV) is set to 0, the
output of the corresponding divider and the PLL output is a continuous signal at level 0. On
reset, each DIV field is set to 0, thus the corresponding PLL input clock is set to 0.
The PLL allows multiplication of the divider’s outputs. The PLL clock signal has a frequency that
depends on the respective source signal frequency and on the parameters DIV and MUL. The
factor applied to the source signal frequency is (MUL + 1)/DIV. When MUL is written to 0, the
corresponding PLL is disabled and its power consumption is saved. Re-enabling the PLL can be
performed by writing a value higher than 0 in the MUL field.
Whenever the PLL is re-enabled or one of its parameters is changed, the LOCK bit in PMC_SR
is automatically cleared. The values written in the PLLCOUNT field in CKGR_PLLR are loaded
in the PLL counter. The PLL counter then decrements at the speed of the Slow Clock until it
reaches 0. At this time, the LOCK bit is set in PMC_SR and can trigger an interrupt to the processor. The user has to load the number of Slow Clock cycles required to cover the PLL
transient time into the PLLCOUNT field. The transient time depends on the PLL filter. The initial
state of the PLL and its target frequency can be calculated using a specific tool provided by
Atmel.
156
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
24. Power Management Controller
24.1
Overview
The Power Management Controller (PMC) optimizes power consumption by controlling all system and user peripheral clocks. The PMC enables/disables the clock inputs to many of the
peripherals and the ARM Processor.
The Power Management Controller provides the following clocks:
24.2
•
MCK, the Master Clock, programmable from a few hundred Hz to the maximum operating
frequency of the device. It is available to the modules running permanently, such as the AIC
and the Memory Controller.
•
Processor Clock (PCK), switched off when entering processor in idle mode.
•
Peripheral Clocks, typically MCK, provided to the embedded peripherals (USART, SSC, SPI,
TWI, TC, MCI, etc.) and independently controllable. In order to reduce the number of clock
names in a product, the Peripheral Clocks are named MCK in the product datasheet.
•
UDP Clock (UDPCK), required by USB Device Port operations.
•
Programmable Clock Outputs can be selected from the clocks provided by the clock
generator and driven on the PCKx pins.
Master Clock Controller
The Master Clock Controller provides selection and division of the Master Clock (MCK). MCK is
the clock provided to all the peripherals and the memory controller.
The Master Clock is selected from one of the clocks provided by the Clock Generator. Selecting
the Slow Clock provides a Slow Clock signal to the whole device. Selecting the Main Clock
saves power consumption of the PLL.
The Master Clock Controller is made up of a clock selector and a prescaler.
The Master Clock selection is made by writing the CSS field (Clock Source Selection) in
PMC_MCKR (Master Clock Register). The prescaler supports the division by a power of 2 of the
selected clock between 1 and 64. The PRES field in PMC_MCKR programs the prescaler.
Each time PMC_MCKR is written to define a new Master Clock, the MCKRDY bit is cleared in
PMC_SR. It reads 0 until the Master Clock is established. Then, the MCKRDY bit is set and can
trigger an interrupt to the processor. This feature is useful when switching from a high-speed
clock to a lower one to inform the software when the change is actually done.
Figure 24-1. Master Clock Controller
PMC_MCKR
CSS
PMC_MCKR
PRES
SLCK
MAINCK
Master Clock
Prescaler
MCK
PLLCK
To the Processor
Clock Controller (PCK)
157
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
24.3
Processor Clock Controller
The PMC features a Processor Clock Controller (PCK) that implements the Processor Idle
Mode. The Processor Clock can be enabled and disabled by writing the System Clock Enable
(PMC_SCER) and System Clock Disable Registers (PMC_SCDR). The status of this clock (at
least for debug purpose) can be read in the System Clock Status Register (PMC_SCSR).
The Processor Clock PCK is enabled after a reset and is automatically re-enabled by any
enabled interrupt. The Processor Idle Mode is achieved by disabling the Processor Clock, which
is automatically re-enabled by any enabled fast or normal interrupt, or by the reset of the
product.
When the Processor Clock is disabled, the current instruction is finished before the clock is
stopped, but this does not prevent data transfers from other masters of the system bus.
24.4
USB Clock Controller
The USB Source Clock is the PLL output. If using the USB, the user must program the PLL to
generate a 48 MHz, a 96 MHz or a 192 MHz signal with an accuracy of ± 0.25% depending on
the USBDIV bit in CKGR_PLLR.
When the PLL output is stable, i.e., the LOCK bit is set:
•
The USB device clock can be enabled by setting the UDP bit in PMC_SCER. To save power
on this peripheral when it is not used, the user can set the UDP bit in PMC_SCDR. The UDP
bit in PMC_SCSR gives the activity of this clock. The USB device port require both the 48
MHz signal and the Master Clock. The Master Clock may be controlled via the Peripheral
Clock Controller.
Figure 24-2. USB Clock Controller
USBDIV
USB
Source
Clock
24.5
Divider
/1,/2,/4
UDP Clock (UDPCK)
UDP
Peripheral Clock Controller
The Power Management Controller controls the clocks of each embedded peripheral by the way
of the Peripheral Clock Controller. The user can individually enable and disable the Master
Clock on the peripherals by writing into the Peripheral Clock Enable (PMC_PCER) and Peripheral Clock Disable (PMC_PCDR) registers. The status of the peripheral clock activity can be
read in the Peripheral Clock Status Register (PMC_PCSR).
When a peripheral clock is disabled, the clock is immediately stopped. The peripheral clocks are
automatically disabled after a reset.
In order to stop a peripheral, it is recommended that the system software wait until the peripheral
has executed its last programmed operation before disabling the clock. This is to avoid data corruption or erroneous behavior of the system.
158
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
The bit number within the Peripheral Clock Control registers (PMC_PCER, PMC_PCDR, and
PMC_PCSR) is the Peripheral Identifier defined at the product level. Generally, the bit number
corresponds to the interrupt source number assigned to the peripheral.
24.6
Programmable Clock Output Controller
The PMC controls 3 signals to be output on external pins PCKx. Each signal can be independently programmed via the PMC_PCKx registers.
PCKx can be independently selected between the Slow clock, the PLL output and the main
clock by writing the CSS field in PMC_PCKx. Each output signal can also be divided by a power
of 2 between 1 and 64 by writing the PRES (Prescaler) field in PMC_PCKx.
Each output signal can be enabled and disabled by writing 1 in the corresponding bit, PCKx of
PMC_SCER and PMC_SCDR, respectively. Status of the active programmable output clocks
are given in the PCKx bits of PMC_SCSR (System Clock Status Register).
Moreover, like the PCK, a status bit in PMC_SR indicates that the Programmable Clock is actually what has been programmed in the Programmable Clock registers.
As the Programmable Clock Controller does not manage with glitch prevention when switching
clocks, it is strongly recommended to disable the Programmable Clock before any configuration
change and to re-enable it after the change is actually performed.
24.7
Programming Sequence
1. Enabling the Main Oscillator:
The main oscillator is enabled by setting the MOSCEN field in the CKGR_MOR register. In
some cases it may be advantageous to define a start-up time. This can be achieved by writing a value in the OSCOUNT field in the CKGR_MOR register.
Once this register has been correctly configured, the user must wait for MOSCS field in the
PMC_SR register to be set. This can be done either by polling the status register or by waiting the interrupt line to be raised if the associated interrupt to MOSCS has been enabled in
the PMC_IER register.
Code Example:
write_register(CKGR_MOR,0x00000701)
Start Up Time = 8 * OSCOUNT / SLCK = 56 Slow Clock Cycles.
So, the main oscillator will be enabled (MOSCS bit set) after 56 Slow Clock Cycles.
2. Checking the Main Oscillator Frequency (Optional):
In some situations the user may need an accurate measure of the main oscillator frequency.
This measure can be accomplished via the CKGR_MCFR register.
Once the MAINRDY field is set in CKGR_MCFR register, the user may read the MAINF field
in CKGR_MCFR register. This provides the number of main clock cycles within sixteen slow
clock cycles.
159
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
3. Setting PLL and divider:
All parameters needed to configure PLL and the divider are located in the CKGR_PLLR
register.
The DIV field is used to control divider itself. A value between 0 and 255 can be programmed.
Divider output is divider input divided by DIV parameter. By default DIV parameter is set to 0
which means that divider is turned off.
The OUT field is used to select the PLL B output frequency range.
The MUL field is the PLL multiplier factor. This parameter can be programmed between 0
and 2047. If MUL is set to 0, PLL will be turned off, otherwise the PLL output frequency is
PLL input frequency multiplied by (MUL + 1).
The PLLCOUNT field specifies the number of slow clock cycles before LOCK bit is set in the
PMC_SR register after CKGR_PLLR register has been written.
Once the PMC_PLL register has been written, the user must wait for the LOCK bit to be set
in the PMC_SR register. This can be done either by polling the status register or by waiting
the interrupt line to be raised if the associated interrupt to LOCK has been enabled in the
PMC_IER register. All parameters in CKGR_PLLR can be programmed in a single write
operation. If at some stage one of the following parameters, MUL, DIV is modified, LOCK bit
will go low to indicate that PLL is not ready yet. When PLL is locked, LOCK will be set again.
The user is constrained to wait for LOCK bit to be set before using the PLL output clock.
The USBDIV field is used to control the additional divider by 1, 2 or 4, which generates the
USB clock(s).
Code Example:
write_register(CKGR_PLLR,0x00040805)
If PLL and divider are enabled, the PLL input clock is the main clock. PLL output clock is PLL
input clock multiplied by 5. Once CKGR_PLLR has been written, LOCK bit will be set after
eight slow clock cycles.
4. Selection of Master Clock and Processor Clock
The Master Clock and the Processor Clock are configurable via the PMC_MCKR register.
The CSS field is used to select the Master Clock divider source. By default, the selected
clock source is slow clock.
The PRES field is used to control the Master Clock prescaler. The user can choose between
different values (1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64). Master Clock output is prescaler input divided by
PRES parameter. By default, PRES parameter is set to 1 which means that master clock is
equal to slow clock.
160
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
Once PMC_MCKR register has been written, the user must wait for the MCKRDY bit to be
set in the PMC_SR register. This can be done either by polling the status register or by waiting for the interrupt line to be raised if the associated interrupt to MCKRDY has been enabled
in the PMC_IER register.
All parameters in PMC_MCKR can be programmed in a single write operation. If at some
stage one of the following parameters, CSS or PRES, is modified, the MCKRDY bit will go
low to indicate that the Master Clock and the Processor Clock are not ready yet. The user
must wait for MCKRDY bit to be set again before using the Master and Processor Clocks.
Note:
IF PLLx clock was selected as the Master Clock and the user decides to modify it by writing in
CKGR_PLLR, the MCKRDY flag will go low while PLL is unlocked. Once PLL is locked again,
LOCK goes high and MCKRDY is set.
While PLL is unlocked, the Master Clock selection is automatically changed to Main Clock. For further information, see Section 24.8.2. ”Clock Switching Waveforms” on page 164.
Code Example:
write_register(PMC_MCKR,0x00000011)
The Master Clock is main clock divided by 16.
The Processor Clock is the Master Clock.
5. Selection of Application Clock
The Application Clock is configurable via the PMC_ACKR register.
The CSS field is used to select the Application Clock divider source. There are four clock
options available: main clock, slow clock, PLL A clock, PLL B clock. By default, the selected
clock source is slow clock.
The PRES field is used to control the Application Clock prescaler. The user can choose
between different values (1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64). Application Clock output is prescaler input
divided by PRES parameter. By default, PRES parameter is set to 1 which means that master clock is equal to slow clock.
Once PMC_ACKR register has been written, the user must wait for the ACKRDY bit to be set
in the PMC_SR register. This can be done either by polling the status register or by waiting
for the interrupt line to be raised if the associated interrupt to ACKRDY has been enabled in
the PMC_IER register.
All parameters in PMC_ACKR can be programmed in a single write operation. If at some
stage one of the following parameters, CSS or PRES, is modified, ACKRDY bit will go low to
indicate that the Application Clock is not ready yet. The user must wait for the ACKRDY bit to
be set again before using the Application Clock.
Note:
If the PLL A (or PLL B) clock was selected as the Application Clock and the user decides to
modify it by writing in CKGR_PLLAR (CKGR_PLLBR), the ACKRDY flag goes low while PLL A
(PLL B) is unlocked. Once PLL A (PLL B) is locked again, LOCKA (LOCKB) goes high and ACKRDY is set.
While PLL A (PLL B) is unlocked, the Application Clock selection is automatically changed to
161
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
slow clock (main clock). For further information, see Section 24.8.2. ”Clock Switching Waveforms”
on page 164
Code Example:
write_register(PMC_ACKR,0x00000011)
The Application Clock is main clock divided by 16.
6. Selection of Programmable clocks
Programmable clocks are controlled via registers; PMC_SCER, PMC_SCDR and
PMC_SCSR.
Programmable clocks can be enabled and/or disabled via the PMC_SCER and PMC_SCDR
registers. Depending on the system used, 3 Programmable clocks can be enabled or disabled. The PMC_SCSR provides a clear indication as to which Programmable clock is
enabled. By default all Programmable clocks are disabled.
PMC_PCKx registers are used to configure Programmable clocks.
The CSS field is used to select the Programmable clock divider source. Four clock options
are available: main clock, slow clock, PLLCK. By default, the clock source selected is slow
clock.
The PRES field is used to control the Programmable clock prescaler. It is possible to choose
between different values (1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64). Programmable clock output is prescaler input
divided by PRES parameter. By default, the PRES parameter is set to 1 which means that
master clock is equal to slow clock.
Once the PMC_PCKx register has been programmed, The corresponding Programmable
clock must be enabled and the user is constrained to wait for the PCKRDYx bit to be set in
the PMC_SR register. This can be done either by polling the status register or by waiting the
interrupt line to be raised if the associated interrupt to PCKRDYx has been enabled in the
PMC_IER register. All parameters in PMC_PCKx can be programmed in a single write
operation.
If the CSS and PRES parameters are to be modified, the corresponding Programmable clock
must be disabled first. The parameters can then be modified. Once this has been done, the
user must re-enable the Programmable clock and wait for the PCKRDYx bit to be set.
Code Example:
write_register(PMC_PCK0,0x00000015)
Programmable clock 0 is main clock divided by 32.
7. Enabling Peripheral Clocks
Once all of the previous steps have been completed, the peripheral clocks can be enabled
and/or disabled via registers PMC_PCER and PMC_PCDR.
162
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
Depending on the system used, 12 peripheral clocks can be enabled or disabled. The
PMC_PCSR provides a clear view as to which peripheral clock is enabled.
Note:
Each enabled peripheral clock corresponds to Master Clock.
Code Examples:
write_register(PMC_PCER,0x00000110)
Peripheral clocks 4 and 8 are enabled.
write_register(PMC_PCDR,0x00000010)
Peripheral clock 4 is disabled.
163
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
24.8
24.8.1
Clock Switching Details
Master Clock Switching Timings
Table 24-1 gives the worst case timing required for the Master Clock to switch from one selected
clock to another one. This is in the event that the prescaler is de-activated. When the prescaler
is activated, an additional time of 64 clock cycles of the new selected clock has to be added.
Table 24-1.
Clock Switching Timings (Worst Case)
From
Main Clock
SLCK
PLL Clock
–
4 x SLCK +
2.5 x Main Clock
3 x PLL Clock +
4 x SLCK +
1 x Main Clock
0.5 x Main Clock +
4.5 x SLCK
–
3 x PLL Clock +
5 x SLCK
0.5 x Main Clock +
4 x SLCK +
PLLCOUNT x SLCK +
2.5 x PLLx Clock
2.5 x PLL Clock +
5 x SLCK +
PLLCOUNT x SLCK
2.5 x PLL Clock +
4 x SLCK +
PLLCOUNT x SLCK
To
Main Clock
SLCK
PLL Clock
24.8.2
Clock Switching Waveforms
Figure 24-3. Switch Master Clock from Slow Clock to PLL Clock
Slow Clock
PLL Clock
LOCK
MCKRDY
Master Clock
Write PMC_MCKR
164
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
Figure 24-4. Switch Master Clock from Main Clock to Slow Clock
Slow Clock
Main Clock
MCKRDY
Master Clock
Write PMC_MCKR
Figure 24-5. Change PLL Programming
Slow Clock
PLL Clock
LOCK
MCKRDY
Master Clock
Slow Clock
Write CKGR_PLLR
165
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
Figure 24-6. Programmable Clock Output Programming
PLL Clock
PCKRDY
PCKx Output
Write PMC_PCKx
PLL Clock is selected
Write PMC_SCER
Write PMC_SCDR
166
PCKx is enabled
PCKx is disabled
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
24.9
Power Management User Interface
Table 24-2.
Register Mapping
Offset
Register
Name
Access
Reset Value
0x0000
System Clock Enable Register
PMC_SCER
Write-only
–
0x0004
System Clock Disable Register
PMC_SCDR
Write-only
–
0x0008
System Clock Status Register
PMC _SCSR
Read-only
0x01
0x000C
Reserved
–
–
0x0010
Peripheral Clock Enable Register
PMC _PCER
Write-only
–
0x0014
Peripheral Clock Disable Register
PMC_PCDR
Write-only
–
0x0018
Peripheral Clock Status Register
PMC_PCSR
Read-only
0x0
0x001C
Reserved
–
–
0x0020
Main Oscillator Register
CKGR_MOR
Read/Write
0x0
0x0024
Main Clock Frequency Register
CKGR_MCFR
Read-only
0x0
0x0028
Reserved
–
–
0x002C
PLL Register
CKGR_PLLR
Read/Write
0x3F00
0x0030
Master Clock Register
PMC_MCKR
Read/Write
0x0
0x0034
Application Clock Register
PMC_ACKR
Read/Write
0x0
0x0038
Reserved
–
–
–
0x003C
Reserved
–
–
–
0x0040
Programmable Clock 0 Register
PMC_PCK0
Read/Write
0x0
0x0044
Programmable Clock 1 Register
PMC_PCK1
Read/Write
0x0
...
...
0x0060
Interrupt Enable Register
PMC_IER
Write-only
--
0x0064
Interrupt Disable Register
PMC_IDR
Write-only
--
0x0068
Status Register
PMC_SR
Read-only
0x08
0x006C
Interrupt Mask Register
PMC_IMR
Read-only
0x0
–
–
...
0x0070 - 0x00FC
Reserved
–
–
–
...
–
...
167
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
24.9.1
PMC System Clock Enable Register
Register Name: PMC_SCER
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
PCK2
PCK1
PCK0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
UDP
–
–
–
–
–
–
PCK
• PCK: Processor Clock Enable
0 = No effect.
1 = Enables the Processor clock.
• UDP: USB Device Port Clock Enable
0 = No effect.
1 = Enables the 48 MHz clock of the USB Device Port.
• PCKx: Programmable Clock x Output Enable
0 = No effect.
1 = Enables the corresponding Programmable Clock output.
168
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
24.9.2
PMC System Clock Disable Register
Register Name: PMC_SCDR
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
PCK2
PCK1
PCK0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
UDP
–
–
–
–
–
–
PCK
• PCK: Processor Clock Disable
0 = No effect.
1 = Disables the Processor clock. This is used to enter teh processor in Idle Mode.
• UDP: USB Device Port Clock Disable
0 = No effect.
1 = Disables the 48 MHz clock of the USB Device Port.
• PCKx: Programmable Clock x Output Disable
0 = No effect.
1 = Disables the corresponding Programmable Clock output.
169
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
24.9.3
PMC System Clock Status Register
Register Name: PMC_SCSR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
PCK2
PCK1
PCK0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
UDP
–
–
–
–
–
–
PCK
• PCK: Processor Clock Status
0 = The Processor clock is disabled.
1 = The Processor clock is enabled.
• UDP: USB Device Port Clock Status
0 = The 48 MHz clock (UDPCK) of the USB Device Port is disabled.
1 = The 48 MHz clock (UDPCK) of the USB Device Port is enabled.
• PCKx: Programmable Clock x Output Status
0 = The corresponding Programmable Clock output is disabled.
1 = The corresponding Programmable Clock output is enabled.
170
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
24.9.4
PMC Peripheral Clock Enable Register
Register Name: PMC_PCER
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
PID31
PID30
PID29
PID28
PID27
PID26
PID25
PID24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
PID23
PID22
PID21
PID20
PID19
PID18
PID17
PID16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
PID15
PID14
PID13
PID12
PID11
PID10
PID9
PID8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PID7
PID6
PID5
PID4
PID3
PID2
-
-
• PIDx: Peripheral Clock x Enable
0 = No effect.
1 = Enables the corresponding peripheral clock.
Note:
Programming the control bits of the Peripheral ID that are not implemented has no effect on the behavior of the PMC.
171
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
24.9.5
PMC Peripheral Clock Disable Register
Register Name: PMC_PCDR
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
PID31
PID30
PID29
PID28
PID27
PID26
PID25
PID24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
PID23
PID22
PID21
PID20
PID19
PID18
PID17
PID16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
PID15
PID14
PID13
PID12
PID11
PID10
PID9
PID8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PID7
PID6
PID5
PID4
PID3
PID2
-
-
• PIDx: Peripheral Clock x Disable
0 = No effect.
1 = Disables the corresponding peripheral clock.
172
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
24.9.6
PMC Peripheral Clock Status Register
Register Name: PMC_PCSR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
PID31
PID30
PID29
PID28
PID27
PID26
PID25
PID24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
PID23
PID22
PID21
PID20
PID19
PID18
PID17
PID16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
PID15
PID14
PID13
PID12
PID11
PID10
PID9
PID8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PID7
PID6
PID5
PID4
PID3
PID2
–
–
• PIDx: Peripheral Clock x Status
0 = The corresponding peripheral clock is disabled.
1 = The corresponding peripheral clock is enabled.
24.9.7
PMC Clock Generator Main Oscillator Register
Register Name: CKGR_MOR
Access Type:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
–
2
–
1
OSCBYPASS
0
MOSCEN
OSCOUNT
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
• MOSCEN: Main Oscillator Enable
A crystal must be connected between XIN and XOUT.
0 = The Main Oscillator is disabled.
1 = The Main Oscillator is enabled. OSCBYPASS must be set to 0.
When MOSCEN is set, the MOSCS flag is set once the Main Oscillator startup time is achieved.
• OSCBYPASS: Oscillator Bypass
0 = No effect.
1 = The Main Oscillator is bypassed . MOSCEN must be set to 0. An external clock must be connected on XIN.
When OSCBYPASS is set, the MOSCS flag in PMC_SR is automatically set.
Clearing MOSCEN and OSCBYPASS bits allows resetting the MOSCS flag.
• OSCOUNT: Main Oscillator Start-up Time
Specifies the number of Slow Clock cycles multiplied by 8 for the Main Oscillator start-up time.
173
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
24.9.8
PMC Clock Generator Main Clock Frequency Register
Register Name: CKGR_MCFR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
MAINRDY
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
MAINF
7
6
5
4
MAINF
• MAINF: Main Clock Frequency
Gives the number of Main Clock cycles within 16 Slow Clock periods.
• MAINRDY: Main Clock Ready
0 = MAINF value is not valid or the Main Oscillator is disabled.
1 = The Main Oscillator has been enabled previously and MAINF value is available.
174
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
24.9.9
PMC Clock Generator PLL Register
Register Name: CKGR_PLLR
Access Type:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
23
22
21
28
27
–
26
25
MUL
24
20
19
18
17
16
10
9
8
2
1
0
USBDIV
MUL
15
14
13
12
11
OUT
PLLCOUNT
7
6
5
4
3
DIV
Possible limitations on PLL input frequencies and multiplier factors should be checked before using the PMC.
• DIV: Divider
DIV
Divider Selected
0
Divider output is 0
1
Divider is bypassed
2 - 255
Divider output is the selected clock divided by DIV.
• PLLCOUNT: PLL Counter
Specifies the number of slow clock cycles before the LOCK bit is set in PMC_SR after CKGR_PLLR is written.
• OUT: PLL Clock Frequency Range
OUT
PLL Clock Frequency Range
0
0
Refer to the DC Characteristics section of the product datasheet
0
1
Reserved
1
0
Refer to the DC Characteristics section of the product datasheet
1
1
Reserved
• MUL: PLL Multiplier
0 = The PLL is deactivated.
1 up to 2047 = The PLL Clock frequency is the PLL input frequency multiplied by MUL+ 1.
• USBDIV: Divider for USB Clock
USBDIV
Divider for USB Clock(s)
0
0
Divider output is PLL clock output.
0
1
Divider output is PLL clock output divided by 2.
1
0
Divider output is PLL clock output divided by 4.
1
1
Reserved.
175
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
24.9.10 PMC Master Clock Register
Register Name: PMC_MCKR
Access Type:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
–
–
–
–
–
–
4
3
2
7
6
5
–
–
–
8
–
1
PRES
0
CSS
• CSS: Master Clock Selection
CSS
Clock Source Selection
0
0
Slow Clock is selected
0
1
Main Clock is selected
1
0
Reserved
1
1
PLL Clock is selected.
• PRES: Master Clock Prescaler
PRES
176
Master Clock
0
0
0
Selected clock
0
0
1
Selected clock divided by 2
0
1
0
Selected clock divided by 4
0
1
1
Selected clock divided by 8
1
0
0
Selected clock divided by 16
1
0
1
Selected clock divided by 32
1
1
0
Selected clock divided by 64
1
1
1
Reserved
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
24.9.11 PMC Programmable Clock Register
Register Name: PMC_PCKx
Access Type:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
–
–
–
PRES
0
CSS
• CSS: Master Clock Selection
CSS
Clock Source Selection
0
0
Slow Clock is selected
0
1
Main Clock is selected
1
0
Reserved
1
1
PLL Clock is selected
• PRES: Programmable Clock Prescaler
PRES
Master Clock
0
0
0
Selected clock
0
0
1
Selected clock divided by 2
0
1
0
Selected clock divided by 4
0
1
1
Selected clock divided by 8
1
0
0
Selected clock divided by 16
1
0
1
Selected clock divided by 32
1
1
0
Selected clock divided by 64
1
1
1
Reserved
177
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
24.9.12 PMC Interrupt Enable Register
Register Name: PMC_IER
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
PCKRDY2
PCKRDY1
PCKRDY0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
–
–
MCKRDY
LOCK
–
MOSCS
• MOSCS: Main Oscillator Status Interrupt Enable
• LOCK: PLL Lock Interrupt Enable
• MCKRDY: Master Clock Ready Interrupt Enable
• PCKRDYx: Programmable Clock Ready x Interrupt Enable
0 = No effect.
1 = Enables the corresponding interrupt.
24.9.13 PMC Interrupt Disable Register
Register Name: PMC_IDR
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
PCKRDY2
PCKRDY1
PCKRDY0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
–
–
MCKRDY
LOCK
–
MOSCS
• MOSCS: Main Oscillator Status Interrupt Disable
• LOCK: PLL Lock Interrupt Disable
• MCKRDY: Master Clock Ready Interrupt Disable
• PCKRDYx: Programmable Clock Ready x Interrupt Disable
0 = No effect.
1 = Disables the corresponding interrupt.
178
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
24.9.14 PMC Status Register
Register Name: PMC_SR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
PCKRDY2
PCKRDY1
PCKRDY0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
–
–
MCKRDY
LOCK
–
MOSCS
• MOSCS: MOSCS Flag Status
0 = Main oscillator is not stabilized.
1 = Main oscillator is stabilized.
• LOCK: PLL Lock Status
0 = PLL is not locked
1 = PLL is locked.
• MCKRDY: Master Clock Status
0 = Master Clock is not ready.
1 = Master Clock is ready.
• PCKRDYx: Programmable Clock Ready Status
0 = Programmable Clock x is not ready.
1 = Programmable Clock x is ready.
179
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
24.9.15 PMC Interrupt Mask Register
Register Name: PMC_IMR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
PCKRDY2
PCKRDY1
PCKRDY0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
–
–
MCKRDY
LOCK
–
MOSCS
• MOSCS: Main Oscillator Status Interrupt Mask
• LOCK: PLL Lock Interrupt Mask
• MCKRDY: Master Clock Ready Interrupt Mask
• PCKRDYx: Programmable Clock Ready x Interrupt Mask
0 = The corresponding interrupt is enabled.
1 = The corresponding interrupt is disabled.
180
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
25. Debug Unit (DBGU)
25.1
Overview
The Debug Unit provides a single entry point from the processor for access to all the debug
capabilities of Atmel’s ARM-based systems.
The Debug Unit features a two-pin UART that can be used for several debug and trace purposes
and offers an ideal medium for in-situ programming solutions and debug monitor communications. Moreover, the association with two Peripheral DMA ControllerPeripheral DMA Controller
channels permits packet handling for these tasks with processor time reduced to a minimum.
The Debug Unit also makes the Debug Communication Channel (DCC) signals provided by the
In-circuit Emulator of the ARM processor visible to the software. These signals indicate the status of the DCC read and write registers and generate an interrupt to the ARM processor, making
possible the handling of the DCC under interrupt control.
Chip Identifier registers permit recognition of the device and its revision. These registers inform
as to the sizes and types of the on-chip memories, as well as the set of embedded peripherals.
Finally, the Debug Unit features a Force NTRST capability that enables the software to decide
whether to prevent access to the system via the In-circuit Emulator. This permits protection of
the code, stored in ROM.
181
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
25.2
Block Diagram
Figure 25-1. Debug Unit Functional Block Diagram
Peripheral
Bridge
Peripheral DMA Controller
APB
Debug Unit
DTXD
Transmit
Power
Management
Controller
Parallel
Input/
Output
Baud Rate
Generator
MCK
Receive
DRXD
COMMRX
ARM
Processor
DCC
Handler
COMMTX
Chip ID
nTRST
ICE
Access
Handler
Interrupt
Control
dbgu_irq
force_ntrst
ice_nreset
Table 25-1.
Debug Unit Pin Description
Pin Name
Description
Type
DRXD
Debug Receive Data
Input
DTXD
Debug Transmit Data
Output
Figure 25-2. Debug Unit Application Example
Boot Program
Debug Monitor
Trace Manager
Debug Unit
RS232 Drivers
Programming Tool
182
Debug Console
Trace Console
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
25.3
25.3.1
Product Dependencies
I/O Lines
Depending on product integration, the Debug Unit pins may be multiplexed with PIO lines. In this
case, the programmer must first configure the corresponding PIO Controller to enable I/O lines
operations of the Debug Unit.
25.3.2
Power Management
Depending on product integration, the Debug Unit clock may be controllable through the Power
Management Controller. In this case, the programmer must first configure the PMC to enable the
Debug Unit clock. Usually, the peripheral identifier used for this purpose is 1.
25.3.3
Interrupt Source
Depending on product integration, the Debug Unit interrupt line is connected to one of the interrupt sources of the Advanced Interrupt Controller. Interrupt handling requires programming of
the AIC before configuring the Debug Unit. Usually, the Debug Unit interrupt line connects to the
interrupt source 1 of the AIC, which may be shared with the real-time clock, the system timer
interrupt lines and other system peripheral interrupts, as shown in Figure 25-1. This sharing
requires the programmer to determine the source of the interrupt when the source 1 is triggered.
25.4
UART Operations
The Debug Unit operates as a UART, (asynchronous mode only) and supports only 8-bit character handling (with parity). It has no clock pin.
The Debug Unit's UART is made up of a receiver and a transmitter that operate independently,
and a common baud rate generator. Receiver timeout and transmitter time guard are not implemented. However, all the implemented features are compatible with those of a standard USART.
25.4.1
Baud Rate Generator
The baud rate generator provides the bit period clock named baud rate clock to both the receiver
and the transmitter.
The baud rate clock is the master clock divided by 16 times the value (CD) written in
DBGU_BRGR (Baud Rate Generator Register). If DBGU_BRGR is set to 0, the baud rate clock
is disabled and the Debug Unit's UART remains inactive. The maximum allowable baud rate is
Master Clock divided by 16. The minimum allowable baud rate is Master Clock divided by (16 x
65536).
MCK
Baud Rate = ---------------------16 × CD
183
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
Figure 25-3. Baud Rate Generator
CD
CD
MCK
16-bit Counter
OUT
>1
1
0
Divide
by 16
Baud Rate
Clock
0
Receiver
Sampling Clock
25.4.2
25.4.2.1
Receiver
Receiver Reset, Enable and Disable
After device reset, the Debug Unit receiver is disabled and must be enabled before being used.
The receiver can be enabled by writing the control register DBGU_CR with the bit RXEN at 1. At
this command, the receiver starts looking for a start bit.
The programmer can disable the receiver by writing DBGU_CR with the bit RXDIS at 1. If the
receiver is waiting for a start bit, it is immediately stopped. However, if the receiver has already
detected a start bit and is receiving the data, it waits for the stop bit before actually stopping its
operation.
The programmer can also put the receiver in its reset state by writing DBGU_CR with the bit
RSTRX at 1. In doing so, the receiver immediately stops its current operations and is disabled,
whatever its current state. If RSTRX is applied when data is being processed, this data is lost.
25.4.2.2
Start Detection and Data Sampling
The Debug Unit only supports asynchronous operations, and this affects only its receiver. The
Debug Unit receiver detects the start of a received character by sampling the DRXD signal until
it detects a valid start bit. A low level (space) on DRXD is interpreted as a valid start bit if it is
detected for more than 7 cycles of the sampling clock, which is 16 times the baud rate. Hence, a
space that is longer than 7/16 of the bit period is detected as a valid start bit. A space which is
7/16 of a bit period or shorter is ignored and the receiver continues to wait for a valid start bit.
When a valid start bit has been detected, the receiver samples the DRXD at the theoretical midpoint of each bit. It is assumed that each bit lasts 16 cycles of the sampling clock (1-bit period)
so the bit sampling point is eight cycles (0.5-bit period) after the start of the bit. The first sampling
point is therefore 24 cycles (1.5-bit periods) after the falling edge of the start bit was detected.
Each subsequent bit is sampled 16 cycles (1-bit period) after the previous one.
184
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
Figure 25-4. Start Bit Detection
Sampling Clock
DRXD
True Start
Detection
D0
Baud Rate
Clock
Figure 25-5. Character Reception
Example: 8-bit, parity enabled 1 stop
0.5 bit
period
1 bit
period
DRXD
D0
D1
True Start Detection
Sampling
25.4.2.3
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Stop Bit
Parity Bit
Receiver Ready
When a complete character is received, it is transferred to the DBGU_RHR and the RXRDY status bit in DBGU_SR (Status Register) is set. The bit RXRDY is automatically cleared when the
receive holding register DBGU_RHR is read.
Figure 25-6. Receiver Ready
DRXD
S
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
S
P
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
P
RXRDY
Read DBGU_RHR
25.4.2.4
Receiver Overrun
If DBGU_RHR has not been read by the software (or the Peripheral DMA Controller) since the
last transfer, the RXRDY bit is still set and a new character is received, the OVRE status bit in
DBGU_SR is set. OVRE is cleared when the software writes the control register DBGU_CR with
the bit RSTSTA (Reset Status) at 1.
Figure 25-7. Receiver Overrun
DRXD
S
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
P
stop
S
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
P
stop
RXRDY
OVRE
RSTSTA
185
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
25.4.2.5
Parity Error
Each time a character is received, the receiver calculates the parity of the received data bits, in
accordance with the field PAR in DBGU_MR. It then compares the result with the received parity
bit. If different, the parity error bit PARE in DBGU_SR is set at the same time the RXRDY is set.
The parity bit is cleared when the control register DBGU_CR is written with the bit RSTSTA
(Reset Status) at 1. If a new character is received before the reset status command is written,
the PARE bit remains at 1.
Figure 25-8. Parity Error
DRXD
S
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
P
stop
RXRDY
PARE
Wrong Parity Bit
25.4.2.6
RSTSTA
Receiver Framing Error
When a start bit is detected, it generates a character reception when all the data bits have been
sampled. The stop bit is also sampled and when it is detected at 0, the FRAME (Framing Error)
bit in DBGU_SR is set at the same time the RXRDY bit is set. The bit FRAME remains high until
the control register DBGU_CR is written with the bit RSTSTA at 1.
Figure 25-9. Receiver Framing Error
DRXD
S
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
P
stop
RXRDY
FRAME
Stop Bit
Detected at 0
25.4.3
25.4.3.1
RSTSTA
Transmitter
Transmitter Reset, Enable and Disable
After device reset, the Debug Unit transmitter is disabled and it must be enabled before being
used. The transmitter is enabled by writing the control register DBGU_CR with the bit TXEN at 1.
From this command, the transmitter waits for a character to be written in the Transmit Holding
Register DBGU_THR before actually starting the transmission.
The programmer can disable the transmitter by writing DBGU_CR with the bit TXDIS at 1. If the
transmitter is not operating, it is immediately stopped. However, if a character is being processed into the Shift Register and/or a character has been written in the Transmit Holding
Register, the characters are completed before the transmitter is actually stopped.
The programmer can also put the transmitter in its reset state by writing the DBGU_CR with the
bit RSTTX at 1. This immediately stops the transmitter, whether or not it is processing
characters.
186
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
25.4.3.2
Transmit Format
The Debug Unit transmitter drives the pin DTXD at the baud rate clock speed. The line is driven
depending on the format defined in the Mode Register and the data stored in the Shift Register.
One start bit at level 0, then the 8 data bits, from the lowest to the highest bit, one optional parity
bit and one stop bit at 1 are consecutively shifted out as shown on the following figure. The field
PARE in the mode register DBGU_MR defines whether or not a parity bit is shifted out. When a
parity bit is enabled, it can be selected between an odd parity, an even parity, or a fixed space or
mark bit.
Figure 25-10. Character Transmission
Example: Parity enabled
Baud Rate
Clock
DTXD
Start
Bit
25.4.3.3
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Parity
Bit
Stop
Bit
Transmitter Control
When the transmitter is enabled, the bit TXRDY (Transmitter Ready) is set in the status register
DBGU_SR. The transmission starts when the programmer writes in the Transmit Holding Register DBGU_THR, and after the written character is transferred from DBGU_THR to the Shift
Register. The bit TXRDY remains high until a second character is written in DBGU_THR. As
soon as the first character is completed, the last character written in DBGU_THR is transferred
into the shift register and TXRDY rises again, showing that the holding register is empty.
When both the Shift Register and the DBGU_THR are empty, i.e., all the characters written in
DBGU_THR have been processed, the bit TXEMPTY rises after the last stop bit has been
completed.
Figure 25-11. Transmitter Control
DBGU_THR
Data 0
Data 1
Shift Register
DTXD
Data 0
S
Data 0
Data 1
P
stop
S
Data 1
P
stop
TXRDY
TXEMPTY
Write Data 0
in DBGU_THR
Write Data 1
in DBGU_THR
187
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
25.4.4
Peripheral DMA Controller
Both the receiver and the transmitter of the Debug Unit's UART are generally connected to a
Peripheral DMA Controller (PDC) channel.
The Peripheral DMA Controller channels are programmed via registers that are mapped within
the Debug Unit user interface from the offset 0x100. The status bits are reported in the Debug
Unit status register DBGU_SR and can generate an interrupt.
The RXRDY bit triggers the PDC channel data transfer of the receiver. This results in a read of
the data in DBGU_RHR. The TXRDY bit triggers the PDC channel data transfer of the transmitter. This results in a write of a data in DBGU_THR.
25.4.5
Test Modes
The Debug Unit supports three tests modes. These modes of operation are programmed by
using the field CHMODE (Channel Mode) in the mode register DBGU_MR.
The Automatic Echo mode allows bit-by-bit retransmission. When a bit is received on the DRXD
line, it is sent to the DTXD line. The transmitter operates normally, but has no effect on the
DTXD line.
The Local Loopback mode allows the transmitted characters to be received. DTXD and DRXD
pins are not used and the output of the transmitter is internally connected to the input of the
receiver. The DRXD pin level has no effect and the DTXD line is held high, as in idle state.
The Remote Loopback mode directly connects the DRXD pin to the DTXD line. The transmitter
and the receiver are disabled and have no effect. This mode allows a bit-by-bit retransmission.
188
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
Figure 25-12. Test Modes
Automatic Echo
RXD
Receiver
Transmitter
Disabled
TXD
Local Loopback
Disabled
Receiver
RXD
VDD
Disabled
Transmitter
Remote Loopback
Receiver
Transmitter
25.4.6
TXD
VDD
Disabled
Disabled
RXD
TXD
Debug Communication Channel Support
The Debug Unit handles the signals COMMRX and COMMTX that come from the Debug Communication Channel of the ARM Processor and are driven by the In-circuit Emulator.
The Debug Communication Channel contains two registers that are accessible through the ICE
Breaker on the JTAG side and through the coprocessor 0 on the ARM Processor side.
As a reminder, the following instructions are used to read and write the Debug Communication
Channel:
MRC
p14, 0, Rd, c1, c0, 0
Returns the debug communication data read register into Rd
MCR
p14, 0, Rd, c1, c0, 0
Writes the value in Rd to the debug communication data write register.
The bits COMMRX and COMMTX, which indicate, respectively, that the read register has been
written by the debugger but not yet read by the processor, and that the write register has been
written by the processor and not yet read by the debugger, are wired on the two highest bits of
the status register DBGU_SR. These bits can generate an interrupt. This feature permits handling under interrupt a debug link between a debug monitor running on the target system and a
debugger.
189
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
25.4.7
Chip Identifier
The Debug Unit features two chip identifier registers, DBGU_CIDR (Chip ID Register) and
DBGU_EXID (Extension ID). Both registers contain a hard-wired value that is read-only. The first
register contains the following fields:
• EXT - shows the use of the extension identifier register
• NVPTYP and NVPSIZ - identifies the type of embedded non-volatile memory and its size
• ARCH - identifies the set of embedded peripheral
• SRAMSIZ - indicates the size of the embedded SRAM
• EPROC - indicates the embedded ARM processor
• VERSION - gives the revision of the silicon
The second register is device-dependent and reads 0 if the bit EXT is 0.
25.4.8
ICE Access Prevention
The Debug Unit allows blockage of access to the system through the ARM processor's ICE
interface. This feature is implemented via the register Force NTRST (DBGU_FNR), that allows
assertion of the NTRST signal of the ICE Interface. Writing the bit FNTRST (Force NTRST) to 1
in this register prevents any activity on the TAP controller.
On standard devices, the bit FNTRST resets to 0 and thus does not prevent ICE access.
This feature is especially useful on custom ROM devices for customers who do not want their
on-chip code to be visible.
190
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
25.5
Debug Unit (DBGU) User Interface
Table 25-2.
Debug Unit (DBGU) Memory Mapping
Offset
Register
Name
Access
Reset Value
0x0000
Control Register
DBGU_CR
Write-only
–
0x0004
Mode Register
DBGU_MR
Read/Write
0x0
0x0008
Interrupt Enable Register
DBGU_IER
Write-only
–
0x000C
Interrupt Disable Register
DBGU_IDR
Write-only
–
0x0010
Interrupt Mask Register
DBGU_IMR
Read-only
0x0
0x0014
Status Register
DBGU_SR
Read-only
–
0x0018
Receive Holding Register
DBGU_RHR
Read-only
0x0
0x001C
Transmit Holding Register
DBGU_THR
Write-only
–
0x0020
Baud Rate Generator Register
DBGU_BRGR
Read/Write
0x0
–
–
–
0x0024 - 0x003C
Reserved
0X0040
Chip ID Register
DBGU_CIDR
Read-only
–
0X0044
Chip ID Extension Register
DBGU_EXID
Read-only
–
0X0048
Force NTRST Register
DBGU_FNR
Read/Write
0x0
0x004C - 0x00FC
Reserved
–
–
–
0x0100 - 0x0124
PDC Area
–
–
–
191
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
25.5.1
Debug Unit Control Register
Name:
DBGU_CR
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
RSTSTA
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TXDIS
TXEN
RXDIS
RXEN
RSTTX
RSTRX
–
–
• RSTRX: Reset Receiver
0 = No effect.
1 = The receiver logic is reset and disabled. If a character is being received, the reception is aborted.
• RSTTX: Reset Transmitter
0 = No effect.
1 = The transmitter logic is reset and disabled. If a character is being transmitted, the transmission is aborted.
• RXEN: Receiver Enable
0 = No effect.
1 = The receiver is enabled if RXDIS is 0.
• RXDIS: Receiver Disable
0 = No effect.
1 = The receiver is disabled. If a character is being processed and RSTRX is not set, the character is completed before the
receiver is stopped.
• TXEN: Transmitter Enable
0 = No effect.
1 = The transmitter is enabled if TXDIS is 0.
• TXDIS: Transmitter Disable
0 = No effect.
1 = The transmitter is disabled. If a character is being processed and a character has been written the DBGU_THR and
RSTTX is not set, both characters are completed before the transmitter is stopped.
• RSTSTA: Reset Status Bits
0 = No effect.
1 = Resets the status bits PARE, FRAME and OVRE in the DBGU_SR.
192
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
25.5.2
Debug Unit Mode Register
Name:
DBGU_MR
Access Type:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
15
CHMODE
–
PAR
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
• PAR: Parity Type
PAR
Parity Type
0
0
0
Even parity
0
0
1
Odd parity
0
1
0
Space: parity forced to 0
0
1
1
Mark: parity forced to 1
1
x
x
No parity
• CHMODE: Channel Mode
CHMODE
Mode Description
0
0
Normal Mode
0
1
Automatic Echo
1
0
Local Loopback
1
1
Remote Loopback
193
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
25.5.3
Debug Unit Interrupt Enable Register
Name:
DBGU_IER
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
COMMRX
COMMTX
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
RXBUFF
TXBUFE
–
TXEMPTY
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PARE
FRAME
OVRE
ENDTX
ENDRX
–
TXRDY
RXRDY
• RXRDY: Enable RXRDY Interrupt
• TXRDY: Enable TXRDY Interrupt
• ENDRX: Enable End of Receive Transfer Interrupt
• ENDTX: Enable End of Transmit Interrupt
• OVRE: Enable Overrun Error Interrupt
• FRAME: Enable Framing Error Interrupt
• PARE: Enable Parity Error Interrupt
• TXEMPTY: Enable TXEMPTY Interrupt
• TXBUFE: Enable Buffer Empty Interrupt
• RXBUFF: Enable Buffer Full Interrupt
• COMMTX: Enable COMMTX (from ARM) Interrupt
• COMMRX: Enable COMMRX (from ARM) Interrupt
0 = No effect.
1 = Enables the corresponding interrupt.
194
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
25.5.4
Debug Unit Interrupt Disable Register
Name:
DBGU_IDR
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
COMMRX
COMMTX
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
RXBUFF
TXBUFE
–
TXEMPTY
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PARE
FRAME
OVRE
ENDTX
ENDRX
–
TXRDY
RXRDY
• RXRDY: Disable RXRDY Interrupt
• TXRDY: Disable TXRDY Interrupt
• ENDRX: Disable End of Receive Transfer Interrupt
• ENDTX: Disable End of Transmit Interrupt
• OVRE: Disable Overrun Error Interrupt
• FRAME: Disable Framing Error Interrupt
• PARE: Disable Parity Error Interrupt
• TXEMPTY: Disable TXEMPTY Interrupt
• TXBUFE: Disable Buffer Empty Interrupt
• RXBUFF: Disable Buffer Full Interrupt
• COMMTX: Disable COMMTX (from ARM) Interrupt
• COMMRX: Disable COMMRX (from ARM) Interrupt
0 = No effect.
1 = Disables the corresponding interrupt.
195
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
25.5.5
Debug Unit Interrupt Mask Register
Name:
DBGU_IMR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
COMMRX
COMMTX
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
RXBUFF
TXBUFE
–
TXEMPTY
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PARE
FRAME
OVRE
ENDTX
ENDRX
–
TXRDY
RXRDY
• RXRDY: Mask RXRDY Interrupt
• TXRDY: Disable TXRDY Interrupt
• ENDRX: Mask End of Receive Transfer Interrupt
• ENDTX: Mask End of Transmit Interrupt
• OVRE: Mask Overrun Error Interrupt
• FRAME: Mask Framing Error Interrupt
• PARE: Mask Parity Error Interrupt
• TXEMPTY: Mask TXEMPTY Interrupt
• TXBUFE: Mask TXBUFE Interrupt
• RXBUFF: Mask RXBUFF Interrupt
• COMMTX: Mask COMMTX Interrupt
• COMMRX: Mask COMMRX Interrupt
0 = The corresponding interrupt is disabled.
1 = The corresponding interrupt is enabled.
196
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
25.5.6
Debug Unit Status Register
Name:
DBGU_SR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
COMMRX
COMMTX
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
RXBUFF
TXBUFE
–
TXEMPTY
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PARE
FRAME
OVRE
ENDTX
ENDRX
–
TXRDY
RXRDY
• RXRDY: Receiver Ready
0 = No character has been received since the last read of the DBGU_RHR or the receiver is disabled.
1 = At least one complete character has been received, transferred to DBGU_RHR and not yet read.
• TXRDY: Transmitter Ready
0 = A character has been written to DBGU_THR and not yet transferred to the Shift Register, or the transmitter is disabled.
1 = There is no character written to DBGU_THR not yet transferred to the Shift Register.
• ENDRX: End of Receiver Transfer
0 = The End of Transfer signal from the receiver Peripheral DMA Controller channel is inactive.
1 = The End of Transfer signal from the receiver Peripheral DMA Controller channel is active.
• ENDTX: End of Transmitter Transfer
0 = The End of Transfer signal from the transmitter Peripheral DMA Controller channel is inactive.
1 = The End of Transfer signal from the transmitter Peripheral DMA Controller channel is active.
• OVRE: Overrun Error
0 = No overrun error has occurred since the last RSTSTA.
1 = At least one overrun error has occurred since the last RSTSTA.
• FRAME: Framing Error
0 = No framing error has occurred since the last RSTSTA.
1 = At least one framing error has occurred since the last RSTSTA.
• PARE: Parity Error
0 = No parity error has occurred since the last RSTSTA.
1 = At least one parity error has occurred since the last RSTSTA.
• TXEMPTY: Transmitter Empty
0 = There are characters in DBGU_THR, or characters being processed by the transmitter, or the transmitter is disabled.
1 = There are no characters in DBGU_THR and there are no characters being processed by the transmitter.
• TXBUFE: Transmission Buffer Empty
0 = The buffer empty signal from the transmitter PDC channel is inactive.
1 = The buffer empty signal from the transmitter PDC channel is active.
197
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
• RXBUFF: Receive Buffer Full
0 = The buffer full signal from the receiver PDC channel is inactive.
1 = The buffer full signal from the receiver PDC channel is active.
• COMMTX: Debug Communication Channel Write Status
0 = COMMTX from the ARM processor is inactive.
1 = COMMTX from the ARM processor is active.
• COMMRX: Debug Communication Channel Read Status
0 = COMMRX from the ARM processor is inactive.
1 = COMMRX from the ARM processor is active.
198
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
25.5.7
Debug Unit Receiver Holding Register
Name:
DBGU_RHR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RXCHR
• RXCHR: Received Character
Last received character if RXRDY is set.
25.5.8
Debug Unit Transmit Holding Register
Name:
DBGU_THR
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TXCHR
• TXCHR: Character to be Transmitted
Next character to be transmitted after the current character if TXRDY is not set.
199
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
25.5.9
Debug Unit Baud Rate Generator Register
Name:
DBGU_BRGR
Access Type:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
CD
7
6
5
4
CD
• CD: Clock Divisor
CD
0
Disabled
1
MCK
2 to 65535
200
Baud Rate Clock
MCK / (CD x 16)
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
25.5.10
Debug Unit Chip ID Register
Name:
DBGU_CIDR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
30
29
EXT
23
28
27
26
NVPTYP
22
21
20
19
18
ARCH
15
14
13
6
24
17
16
9
8
1
0
SRAMSIZ
12
11
10
NVPSIZ2
7
25
ARCH
NVPSIZ
5
4
3
EPROC
2
VERSION
• VERSION: Version of the Device
• EPROC: Embedded Processor
EPROC
Processor
0
0
1
ARM946ES
0
1
0
ARM7TDMI
1
0
0
ARM920T
1
0
1
ARM926EJS
• NVPSIZ: Nonvolatile Program Memory Size
NVPSIZ
Size
0
0
0
0
None
0
0
0
1
8K bytes
0
0
1
0
16K bytes
0
0
1
1
32K bytes
0
1
0
0
Reserved
0
1
0
1
64K bytes
0
1
1
0
Reserved
0
1
1
1
128K bytes
1
0
0
0
Reserved
1
0
0
1
256K bytes
1
0
1
0
512K bytes
1
0
1
1
Reserved
1
1
0
0
1024K bytes
1
1
0
1
Reserved
1
1
1
0
2048K bytes
1
1
1
1
Reserved
201
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
• NVPSIZ2: Second Nonvolatile Program Memory Size
NVPSIZ2
Size
0
0
0
0
None
0
0
0
1
8K bytes
0
0
1
0
16K bytes
0
0
1
1
32K bytes
0
1
0
0
Reserved
0
1
0
1
64K bytes
0
1
1
0
Reserved
0
1
1
1
128K bytes
1
0
0
0
Reserved
1
0
0
1
256K bytes
1
0
1
0
512K bytes
1
0
1
1
Reserved
1
1
0
0
1024K bytes
1
1
0
1
Reserved
1
1
1
0
2048K bytes
1
1
1
1
Reserved
• SRAMSIZ: Internal SRAM Size
SRAMSIZ
202
Size
0
0
0
0
Reserved
0
0
0
1
1K bytes
0
0
1
0
2K bytes
0
0
1
1
Reserved
0
1
0
0
Reserved
0
1
0
1
4K bytes
0
1
1
0
Reserved
0
1
1
1
160K bytes
1
0
0
0
8K bytes
1
0
0
1
16K bytes
1
0
1
0
32K bytes
1
0
1
1
64K bytes
1
1
0
0
128K bytes
1
1
0
1
256K bytes
1
1
1
0
96K bytes
1
1
1
1
512K bytes
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
• ARCH: Architecture Identifier
ARCH
Hex
Bin
Architecture
0xF0
1111 0001
AT75Cxx Series
0x40
0100 0000
AT91x40 Series
0x63
0110 0011
AT91x63 Series
0x55
0101 0101
AT91x55 Series
0x42
0100 0010
AT91x42 Series
0x92
1001 0010
AT91x92 Series
0x34
0011 0100
AT91x34 Series
0x70
0111 0000
AT91SAM7Sxx and AT91SAM7Axx Series
0x71
0111 0001
AT91SAM7Xxx Series
0x72
0111 0010
AT91SAM7SExx Series
0x73
0111 0011
AT91SAM7Lxx Series
0x19
0001 1001
AT91SAM9xx Series
• NVPTYP: Nonvolatile Program Memory Type
NVPTYP
Memory
0
0
0
ROM
0
0
1
ROMless or on-chip Flash
1
0
0
SRAM emulating ROM
0
1
0
Embedded Flash Memory
0
1
1
ROM and Embedded Flash Memory
NVPSIZ is ROM size
NVPSIZ2 is Flash size
• EXT: Extension Flag
0 = Chip ID has a single register definition without extension
1 = An extended Chip ID exists.
203
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
25.5.11
Debug Unit Chip ID Extension Register
Name:
DBGU_EXID
Access Type:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
EXID
23
22
21
20
EXID
15
14
13
12
EXID
7
6
5
4
EXID
• EXID: Chip ID Extension
Reads 0 if the bit EXT in DBGU_CIDR is 0.
25.5.12
Debug Unit Force NTRST Register
Name:
DBGU_FNR
Access Type:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
FNTRST
• FNTRST: Force NTRST
0 = NTRST of the ARM processor’s TAP controller is driven by the ice_nreset signal.
1 = NTRST of the ARM processor’s TAP controller is held low.
204
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
26. Parallel Input/Output Controller (PIO)
26.1
Overview
The Parallel Input/Output Controller (PIO) manages up to 32 fully programmable input/output
lines. Each I/O line may be dedicated as a general-purpose I/O or be assigned to a function of
an embedded peripheral. This assures effective optimization of the pins of a product.
Each I/O line is associated with a bit number in all of the 32-bit registers of the 32-bit wide User
Interface.
Each I/O line of the PIO Controller features:
• An input change interrupt enabling level change detection on any I/O line.
• A glitch filter providing rejection of pulses lower than one-half of clock cycle.
• Multi-drive capability similar to an open drain I/O line.
• Control of the the pull-up of the I/O line.
• Input visibility and output control.
The PIO Controller also features a synchronous output providing up to 32 bits of data output in a
single write operation.
205
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
26.2
Block Diagram
Figure 26-1. Block Diagram
PIO Controller
AIC
PMC
PIO Interrupt
PIO Clock
Data, Enable
Up to 32
peripheral IOs
Embedded
Peripheral
PIN 0
Data, Enable
PIN 1
Up to 32 pins
Embedded
Peripheral
Up to 32
peripheral IOs
PIN 31
APB
26.3
Application Block Diagram
Figure 26-2. Application Block Diagram
On-Chip Peripheral Drivers
Keyboard Driver
Control & Command
Driver
On-Chip Peripherals
PIO Controller
Keyboard Driver
206
General Purpose I/Os
External Devices
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
26.4
26.4.1
Product Dependencies
Pin Multiplexing
Each pin is configurable, according to product definition as either a general-purpose I/O line
only, or as an I/O line multiplexed with one or two peripheral I/Os. As the multiplexing is hardware-defined and thus product-dependent, the hardware designer and programmer must
carefully determine the configuration of the PIO controllers required by their application. When
an I/O line is general-purpose only, i.e. not multiplexed with any peripheral I/O, programming of
the PIO Controller regarding the assignment to a peripheral has no effect and only the PIO Controller can control how the pin is driven by the product.
26.4.2
External Interrupt Lines
The interrupt signals FIQ and IRQ0 to IRQn are most generally multiplexed through the PIO
Controllers. However, it is not necessary to assign the I/O line to the interrupt function as the
PIO Controller has no effect on inputs and the interrupt lines (FIQ or IRQs) are used only as
inputs.
26.4.3
Power Management
The Power Management Controller controls the PIO Controller clock in order to save power.
Writing any of the registers of the user interface does not require the PIO Controller clock to be
enabled. This means that the configuration of the I/O lines does not require the PIO Controller
clock to be enabled.
However, when the clock is disabled, not all of the features of the PIO Controller are available.
Note that the Input Change Interrupt and the read of the pin level require the clock to be
validated.
After a hardware reset, the PIO clock is disabled by default.
The user must configure the Power Management Controller before any access to the input line
information.
26.4.4
Interrupt Generation
For interrupt handling, the PIO Controllers are considered as user peripherals. This means that
the PIO Controller interrupt lines are connected among the interrupt sources 2 to 31. Refer to the
PIO Controller peripheral identifier in the product description to identify the interrupt sources
dedicated to the PIO Controllers.
The PIO Controller interrupt can be generated only if the PIO Controller clock is enabled.
207
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
26.5
Functional Description
The PIO Controller features up to 32 fully-programmable I/O lines. Most of the control logic associated to each I/O is represented in Figure 26-3. In this description each signal shown
represents but one of up to 32 possible indexes.
Figure 26-3. I/O Line Control Logic
PIO_OER[0]
PIO_OSR[0]
PIO_PUER[0]
PIO_ODR[0]
PIO_PUSR[0]
PIO_PUDR[0]
1
Peripheral A
Output Enable
0
0
Peripheral B
Output Enable
0
1
PIO_ASR[0]
PIO_PER[0]
PIO_ABSR[0]
1
PIO_PSR[0]
PIO_BSR[0]
PIO_PDR[0]
Peripheral A
Output
0
Peripheral B
Output
1
PIO_MDER[0]
PIO_MDSR[0]
PIO_MDDR[0]
0
PIO_SODR[0]
1
PIO_ODSR[0]
1
Pad
PIO_CODR[0]
0
Peripheral A
Input
PIO_PDSR[0]
PIO_ISR[0]
0
Edge
Detector
Glitch
Filter
Peripheral B
Input
(Up to 32 possible inputs)
PIO Interrupt
1
PIO_IFER[0]
PIO_IFSR[0]
PIO_IFDR[0]
PIO_IER[0]
PIO_IMR[0]
PIO_IDR[0]
PIO_ISR[31]
PIO_IER[31]
PIO_IMR[31]
PIO_IDR[31]
208
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
26.5.1
Pull-up Resistor Control
Each I/O line is designed with an embedded pull-up resistor. The value of this resistor is about
10 kΩ (see the product electrical characteristics for more details about this value). The pull-up
resistor can be enabled or disabled by writing respectively PIO_PUER (Pull-up Enable Register)
and PIO_PUDR (Pull-up Disable Resistor). Writing in these registers results in setting or clearing
the corresponding bit in PIO_PUSR (Pull-up Status Register). Reading a 1 in PIO_PUSR means
the pull-up is disabled and reading a 0 means the pull-up is enabled.
Control of the pull-up resistor is possible regardless of the configuration of the I/O line.
After reset, all of the pull-ups are enabled, i.e. PIO_PUSR resets at the value 0x0.
26.5.2
I/O Line or Peripheral Function Selection
When a pin is multiplexed with one or two peripheral functions, the selection is controlled with
the registers PIO_PER (PIO Enable Register) and PIO_PDR (PIO Disable Register). The register PIO_PSR (PIO Status Register) is the result of the set and clear registers and indicates
whether the pin is controlled by the corresponding peripheral or by the PIO Controller. A value of
0 indicates that the pin is controlled by the corresponding on-chip peripheral selected in the
PIO_ABSR (AB Select Status Register). A value of 1 indicates the pin is controlled by the PIO
controller.
If a pin is used as a general purpose I/O line (not multiplexed with an on-chip peripheral),
PIO_PER and PIO_PDR have no effect and PIO_PSR returns 1 for the corresponding bit.
After reset, most generally, the I/O lines are controlled by the PIO controller, i.e. PIO_PSR
resets at 1. However, in some events, it is important that PIO lines are controlled by the peripheral (as in the case of memory chip select lines that must be driven inactive after reset or for
address lines that must be driven low for booting out of an external memory). Thus, the reset
value of PIO_PSR is defined at the product level, depending on the multiplexing of the device.
26.5.3
Peripheral A or B Selection
The PIO Controller provides multiplexing of up to two peripheral functions on a single pin. The
selection is performed by writing PIO_ASR (A Select Register) and PIO_BSR (Select B Register). PIO_ABSR (AB Select Status Register) indicates which peripheral line is currently selected.
For each pin, the corresponding bit at level 0 means peripheral A is selected whereas the corresponding bit at level 1 indicates that peripheral B is selected.
Note that multiplexing of peripheral lines A and B only affects the output line. The peripheral
input lines are always connected to the pin input.
After reset, PIO_ABSR is 0, thus indicating that all the PIO lines are configured on peripheral A.
However, peripheral A generally does not drive the pin as the PIO Controller resets in I/O line
mode.
Writing in PIO_ASR and PIO_BSR manages PIO_ABSR regardless of the configuration of the
pin. However, assignment of a pin to a peripheral function requires a write in the corresponding
peripheral selection register (PIO_ASR or PIO_BSR) in addition to a write in PIO_PDR.
26.5.4
Output Control
When the I/0 line is assigned to a peripheral function, i.e. the corresponding bit in PIO_PSR is at
0, the drive of the I/O line is controlled by the peripheral. Peripheral A or B, depending on the
value in PIO_ABSR, determines whether the pin is driven or not.
209
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
When the I/O line is controlled by the PIO controller, the pin can be configured to be driven. This
is done by writing PIO_OER (Output Enable Register) and PIO_PDR (Output Disable Register).
The results of these write operations are detected in PIO_OSR (Output Status Register). When
a bit in this register is at 0, the corresponding I/O line is used as an input only. When the bit is at
1, the corresponding I/O line is driven by the PIO controller.
The level driven on an I/O line can be determined by writing in PIO_SODR (Set Output Data
Register) and PIO_CODR (Clear Output Data Register). These write operations respectively set
and clear PIO_ODSR (Output Data Status Register), which represents the data driven on the I/O
lines. Writing in PIO_OER and PIO_ODR manages PIO_OSR whether the pin is configured to
be controlled by the PIO controller or assigned to a peripheral function. This enables configuration of the I/O line prior to setting it to be managed by the PIO Controller.
Similarly, writing in PIO_SODR and PIO_CODR effects PIO_ODSR. This is important as it
defines the first level driven on the I/O line.
26.5.5
Synchronous Data Output
Controlling all parallel busses using several PIOs requires two successive write operations in the
PIO_SODR and PIO_CODR registers. This may lead to unexpected transient values. The PIO
controller offers a direct control of PIO outputs by single write access to PIO_ODSR (Output
Data Status Register). Only bits unmasked by PIO_OSWSR (Output Write Status Register) are
written. The mask bits in the PIO_OWSR are set by writing to PIO_OWER (Output Write Enable
Register) and cleared by writing to PIO_OWDR (Output Write Disable Register).
After reset, the synchronous data output is disabled on all the I/O lines as PIO_OWSR resets at
0x0.
26.5.6
Multi Drive Control (Open Drain)
Each I/O can be independently programmed in Open Drain by using the Multi Drive feature. This
feature permits several drivers to be connected on the I/O line which is driven low only by each
device. An external pull-up resistor (or enabling of the internal one) is generally required to guarantee a high level on the line.
The Multi Drive feature is controlled by PIO_MDER (Multi-driver Enable Register) and
PIO_MDDR (Multi-driver Disable Register). The Multi Drive can be selected whether the I/O line
is controlled by the PIO controller or assigned to a peripheral function. PIO_MDSR (Multi-driver
Status Register) indicates the pins that are configured to support external drivers.
After reset, the Multi Drive feature is disabled on all pins, i.e. PIO_MDSR resets at value 0x0.
26.5.7
Output Line Timings
Figure 26-4 shows how the outputs are driven either by writing PIO_SODR or PIO_CODR, or by
directly writing PIO_ODSR. This last case is valid only if the corresponding bit in PIO_OWSR is
set. Figure 26-4 also shows when the feedback in PIO_PDSR is available.
210
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
Figure 26-4. Output Line Timings
MCK
Write PIO_SODR
Write PIO_ODSR at 1
APB Access
Write PIO_CODR
Write PIO_ODSR at 0
APB Access
PIO_ODSR
2 cycles
2 cycles
PIO_PDSR
26.5.8
Inputs
The level on each I/O line can be read through PIO_PDSR (Pin Data Status Register). This register indicates the level of the I/O lines regardless of their configuration, whether uniquely as an
input or driven by the PIO controller or driven by a peripheral.
Reading the I/O line levels requires the clock of the PIO controller to be enabled, otherwise
PIO_PDSR reads the levels present on the I/O line at the time the clock was disabled.
26.5.9
Input Glitch Filtering
Optional input glitch filters are independently programmable on each I/O line. When the glitch filter is enabled, a glitch with a duration of less than 1/2 Master Clock (MCK) cycle is automatically
rejected, while a pulse with a duration of 1 Master Clock cycle or more is accepted. For pulse
durations between 1/2 Master Clock cycle and 1 Master Clock cycle the pulse may or may not
be taken into account, depending on the precise timing of its occurrence. Thus for a pulse to be
visible it must exceed 1 Master Clock cycle, whereas for a glitch to be reliably filtered out, its
duration must not exceed 1/2 Master Clock cycle. The filter introduces one Master Clock cycle
latency if the pin level change occurs before a rising edge. However, this latency does not
appear if the pin level change occurs before a falling edge. This is illustrated in Figure 26-5.
The glitch filters are controlled by the register set; PIO_IFER (Input Filter Enable Register),
PIO_IFDR (Input Filter Disable Register) and PIO_IFSR (Input Filter Status Register). Writing
PIO_IFER and PIO_IFDR respectively sets and clears bits in PIO_IFSR. This last register
enables the glitch filter on the I/O lines.
When the glitch filter is enabled, it does not modify the behavior of the inputs on the peripherals.
It acts only on the value read in PIO_PDSR and on the input change interrupt detection. The
glitch filters require that the PIO Controller clock is enabled.
211
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
Figure 26-5. Input Glitch Filter Timing
MCK
up to 1.5 cycles
Pin Level
1 cycle
1 cycle
1 cycle
1 cycle
PIO_PDSR
if PIO_IFSR = 0
2 cycles
PIO_PDSR
if PIO_IFSR = 1
26.5.10
up to 2.5 cycles
1 cycle
up to 2 cycles
Input Change Interrupt
The PIO Controller can be programmed to generate an interrupt when it detects an input change
on an I/O line. The Input Change Interrupt is controlled by writing PIO_IER (Interrupt Enable
Register) and PIO_IDR (Interrupt Disable Register), which respectively enable and disable the
input change interrupt by setting and clearing the corresponding bit in PIO_IMR (Interrupt Mask
Register). As Input change detection is possible only by comparing two successive samplings of
the input of the I/O line, the PIO Controller clock must be enabled. The Input Change Interrupt is
available, regardless of the configuration of the I/O line, i.e. configured as an input only, controlled by the PIO Controller or assigned to a peripheral function.
When an input change is detected on an I/O line, the corresponding bit in PIO_ISR (Interrupt
Status Register) is set. If the corresponding bit in PIO_IMR is set, the PIO Controller interrupt
line is asserted. The interrupt signals of the thirty-two channels are ORed-wired together to generate a single interrupt signal to the Advanced Interrupt Controller.
When the software reads PIO_ISR, all the interrupts are automatically cleared. This signifies that
all the interrupts that are pending when PIO_ISR is read must be handled.
Figure 26-6. Input Change Interrupt Timings
MCK
Pin Level
PIO_ISR
Read PIO_ISR
212
APB Access
APB Access
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
26.6
I/O Lines Programming Example
The programing example as shown in Table 26-1 below is used to define the following
configuration.
• 4-bit output port on I/O lines 0 to 3, (should be written in a single write operation), open-drain,
with pull-up resistor
• Four output signals on I/O lines 4 to 7 (to drive LEDs for example), driven high and low, no
pull-up resistor
• Four input signals on I/O lines 8 to 11 (to read push-button states for example), with pull-up
resistors, glitch filters and input change interrupts
• Four input signals on I/O line 12 to 15 to read an external device status (polled, thus no input
change interrupt), no pull-up resistor, no glitch filter
• I/O lines 16 to 19 assigned to peripheral A functions with pull-up resistor
• I/O lines 20 to 23 assigned to peripheral B functions, no pull-up resistor
• I/O line 24 to 27 assigned to peripheral A with Input Change Interrupt and pull-up resistor
Table 26-1.
Programming Example
Register
Value to be Written
PIO_PER
0x0000 FFFF
PIO_PDR
0x0FFF 0000
PIO_OER
0x0000 00FF
PIO_ODR
0x0FFF FF00
PIO_IFER
0x0000 0F00
PIO_IFDR
0x0FFF F0FF
PIO_SODR
0x0000 0000
PIO_CODR
0x0FFF FFFF
PIO_IER
0x0F00 0F00
PIO_IDR
0x00FF F0FF
PIO_MDER
0x0000 000F
PIO_MDDR
0x0FFF FFF0
PIO_PUDR
0x00F0 00F0
PIO_PUER
0x0F0F FF0F
PIO_ASR
0x0F0F 0000
PIO_BSR
0x00F0 0000
PIO_OWER
0x0000 000F
PIO_OWDR
0x0FFF FFF0
213
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
26.7
Parallel Input/Output Controller (PIO) User Interface
Each I/O line controlled by the PIO Controller is associated with a bit in each of the PIO Controller User Interface registers. Each register is 32 bits wide. If a parallel I/O line is not defined,
writing to the corresponding bits has no effect. Undefined bits read zero. If the I/O line is not multiplexed with any peripheral, the I/O line is controlled by the PIO Controller and PIO_PSR returns
1 systematically.
Table 26-2.
Parallel Input/Output Controller (PIO) Register Mapping
Offset
Register
Name
Access
Reset Value
0x0000
PIO Enable Register
PIO_PER
Write-only
–
0x0004
PIO Disable Register
PIO_PDR
Write-only
–
0x0008
PIO Status Register (1)
PIO_PSR
Read-only
0x0000 0000
0x000C
Reserved
0x0010
Output Enable Register
PIO_OER
Write-only
–
0x0014
Output Disable Register
PIO_ODR
Write-only
–
0x0018
Output Status Register
PIO_OSR
Read-only
0x0000 0000
0x001C
Reserved
0x0020
Glitch Input Filter Enable Register
PIO_IFER
Write-only
–
0x0024
Glitch Input Filter Disable Register
PIO_IFDR
Write-only
–
0x0028
Glitch Input Filter Status Register
PIO_IFSR
Read-only
0x0000 0000
0x002C
Reserved
0x0030
Set Output Data Register
PIO_SODR
Write-only
–
0x0034
Clear Output Data Register
PIO_CODR
Write-only
–
0x0038
Output Data Status Register(2)
PIO_ODSR
Read-only
0x0000 0000
PIO_PDSR
Read-only
(3)
0x003C
Pin Data Status Register
0x0040
Interrupt Enable Register
PIO_IER
Write-only
–
0x0044
Interrupt Disable Register
PIO_IDR
Write-only
–
0x0048
Interrupt Mask Register
PIO_IMR
Read-only
0x00000000
PIO_ISR
Read-only
0x00000000
(4)
0x004C
Interrupt Status Register
0x0050
Multi-driver Enable Register
PIO_MDER
Write-only
–
0x0054
Multi-driver Disable Register
PIO_MDDR
Write-only
–
0x0058
Multi-driver Status Register
PIO_MDSR
Read-only
0x00000000
0x005C
Reserved
0x0060
Pull-up Disable Register
PIO_PUDR
Write-only
–
0x0064
Pull-up Enable Register
PIO_PUER
Write-only
–
0x0068
Pad Pull-up Status Register
PIO_PUSR
Read-only
0x00000000
0x006C
Reserved
214
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
Table 26-2.
Parallel Input/Output Controller (PIO) Register Mapping (Continued)
Offset
0x0070
0x0074
Register
Name
(5)
(5)
Peripheral A Select Register
Peripheral B Select Register
(5)
Access
Reset Value
PIO_ASR
Write-only
–
PIO_BSR
Write-only
–
PIO_ABSR
Read-only
0x00000000
0x0078
AB Status Register
0x007C - 0x009C
Reserved
0x00A0
Output Write Enable
PIO_OWER
Write-only
–
0x00A4
Output Write Disable
PIO_OWDR
Write-only
–
0x00A8
Output Write Status Register
PIO_OWSR
Read-only
0x00000000
0x00AC - 0x00FC
Reserved
Notes: 1. Reset value of PIO_PSR depends on the product implementation.
2. PIO_ODSR is Read-only or Read/Write depending on PIO_OWSR I/O lines.
3. Reset value of PIO_PDSR depends on the level of the I/O lines.
4. PIO_ISR is reset at 0x0. However, the first read of the register may read a different value as input changes may have
occurred.
5. Only this set of registers clears the status by writing 1 in the first register and sets the status by writing 1 in the second
register.
215
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
26.7.1
PIO Controller PIO Enable Register
Name:
PIO_PER
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0-P31: PIO Enable
0 = No effect.
1 = Enables the PIO to control the corresponding pin (disables peripheral control of the pin).
26.7.2
PIO Controller PIO Disable Register
Name:
PIO_PDR
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0-P31: PIO Disable
0 = No effect.
1 = Disables the PIO from controlling the corresponding pin (enables peripheral control of the pin).
216
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
26.7.3
PIO Controller PIO Status Register
Name:
PIO_PSR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0-P31: PIO Status
0 = PIO is inactive on the corresponding I/O line (peripheral is active).
1 = PIO is active on the corresponding I/O line (peripheral is inactive).
26.7.4
PIO Controller Output Enable Register
Name:
PIO_OER
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0-P31: Output Enable
0 = No effect.
1 = Enables the output on the I/O line.
217
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
26.7.5
PIO Controller Output Disable Register
Name:
PIO_ODR
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0-P31: Output Disable
0 = No effect.
1 = Disables the output on the I/O line.
26.7.6
PIO Controller Output Status Register
Name:
PIO_OSR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0-P31: Output Status
0 = The I/O line is a pure input.
1 = The I/O line is enabled in output.
218
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
26.7.7
PIO Controller Input Filter Enable Register
Name:
PIO_IFER
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0-P31: Input Filter Enable
0 = No effect.
1 = Enables the input glitch filter on the I/O line.
26.7.8
PIO Controller Input Filter Disable Register
Name:
PIO_IFDR
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0-P31: Input Filter Disable
0 = No effect.
1 = Disables the input glitch filter on the I/O line.
219
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
26.7.9
PIO Controller Input Filter Status Register
Name:
PIO_IFSR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0-P31: Input Filer Status
0 = The input glitch filter is disabled on the I/O line.
1 = The input glitch filter is enabled on the I/O line.
26.7.10
PIO Controller Set Output Data Register
Name:
PIO_SODR
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0-P31: Set Output Data
0 = No effect.
1 = Sets the data to be driven on the I/O line.
220
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
26.7.11
PIO Controller Clear Output Data Register
Name:
PIO_CODR
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0-P31: Set Output Data
0 = No effect.
1 = Clears the data to be driven on the I/O line.
26.7.12
PIO Controller Output Data Status Register
Name:
PIO_ODSR
Access Type:
Read-only or Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0-P31: Output Data Status
0 = The data to be driven on the I/O line is 0.
1 = The data to be driven on the I/O line is 1.
221
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
26.7.13
PIO Controller Pin Data Status Register
Name:
PIO_PDSR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0-P31: Output Data Status
0 = The I/O line is at level 0.
1 = The I/O line is at level 1.
26.7.14
PIO Controller Interrupt Enable Register
Name:
PIO_IER
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0-P31: Input Change Interrupt Enable
0 = No effect.
1 = Enables the Input Change Interrupt on the I/O line.
222
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
26.7.15
PIO Controller Interrupt Disable Register
Name:
PIO_IDR
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0-P31: Input Change Interrupt Disable
0 = No effect.
1 = Disables the Input Change Interrupt on the I/O line.
26.7.16
PIO Controller Interrupt Mask Register
Name:
PIO_IMR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0-P31: Input Change Interrupt Mask
0 = Input Change Interrupt is disabled on the I/O line.
1 = Input Change Interrupt is enabled on the I/O line.
223
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
26.7.17
PIO Controller Interrupt Status Register
Name:
PIO_ISR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0-P31: Input Change Interrupt Status
0 = No Input Change has been detected on the I/O line since PIO_ISR was last read or since reset.
1 = At least one Input Change has been detected on the I/O line since PIO_ISR was last read or since reset.
26.7.18
PIO Multi-driver Enable Register
Name:
PIO_MDER
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0-P31: Multi Drive Enable.
0 = No effect.
1 = Enables Multi Drive on the I/O line.
224
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
26.7.19
PIO Multi-driver Disable Register
Name:
PIO_MDDR
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0-P31: Multi Drive Disable.
0 = No effect.
1 = Disables Multi Drive on the I/O line.
26.7.20
PIO Multi-driver Status Register
Name:
PIO_MDSR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0-P31: Multi Drive Status.
0 = The Multi Drive is disabled on the I/O line. The pin is driven at high and low level.
1 = The Multi Drive is enabled on the I/O line. The pin is driven at low level only.
225
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
26.7.21
PIO Pull Up Disable Register
Name:
PIO_PUDR
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0-P31: Pull Up Disable.
0 = No effect.
1 = Disables the pull up resistor on the I/O line.
26.7.22
PIO Pull Up Enable Register
Name:
PIO_PUER
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0-P31: Pull Up Enable.
0 = No effect.
1 = Enables the pull up resistor on the I/O line.
226
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
26.7.23
PIO Pull Up Status Register
Name:
PIO_PUSR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0-P31: Pull Up Status.
0 = Pull Up resistor is enabled on the I/O line.
1 = Pull Up resistor is disabled on the I/O line.
26.7.24
PIO Peripheral A Select Register
Name:
PIO_ASR
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0-P31: Peripheral A Select.
0 = No effect.
1 = Assigns the I/O line to the Peripheral A function.
227
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
26.7.25
PIO Peripheral B Select Register
Name:
PIO_BSR
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0-P31: Peripheral B Select.
0 = No effect.
1 = Assigns the I/O line to the peripheral B function.
26.7.26
PIO Peripheral A B Status Register
Name:
PIO_ABSR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0-P31: Peripheral A B Status.
0 = The I/O line is assigned to the Peripheral A.
1 = The I/O line is assigned to the Peripheral B.
228
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
26.7.27
PIO Output Write Enable Register
Name:
PIO_OWER
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0-P31: Output Write Enable.
0 = No effect.
1 = Enables writing PIO_ODSR for the I/O line.
26.7.28
PIO Output Write Disable Register
Name:
PIO_OWDR
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0-P31: Output Write Disable.
0 = No effect.
1 = Disables writing PIO_ODSR for the I/O line.
229
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
26.7.29
PIO Output Write Status Register
Name:
PIO_OWSR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0-P31: Output Write Status.
0 = Writing PIO_ODSR does not affect the I/O line.
1 = Writing PIO_ODSR affects the I/O line.
230
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
27. Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)
27.1
Overview
The Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) circuit is a synchronous serial data link that provides communication with external devices in Master or Slave Mode. It also enables communication
between processors if an external processor is connected to the system.
The Serial Peripheral Interface is essentially a shift register that serially transmits data bits to
other SPIs. During a data transfer, one SPI system acts as the “master”' which controls the data
flow, while the other devices act as “slaves'' which have data shifted into and out by the master.
Different CPUs can take turn being masters (Multiple Master Protocol opposite to Single Master
Protocol where one CPU is always the master while all of the others are always slaves) and one
master may simultaneously shift data into multiple slaves. However, only one slave may drive its
output to write data back to the master at any given time.
A slave device is selected when the master asserts its NSS signal. If multiple slave devices
exist, the master generates a separate slave select signal for each slave (NPCS).
The SPI system consists of two data lines and two control lines:
• Master Out Slave In (MOSI): This data line supplies the output data from the master shifted
into the input(s) of the slave(s).
• Master In Slave Out (MISO): This data line supplies the output data from a slave to the input
of the master. There may be no more than one slave transmitting data during any particular
transfer.
• Serial Clock (SPCK): This control line is driven by the master and regulates the flow of the
data bits. The master may transmit data at a variety of baud rates; the SPCK line cycles once
for each bit that is transmitted.
• Slave Select (NSS): This control line allows slaves to be turned on and off by hardware.
231
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
27.2
Block Diagram
Figure 27-1. Block Diagram
PDC
APB
SPCK
MISO
MOSI
MCK
PMC
SPI Interface
PIO
NPCS0/NSS
NPCS1
DIV
NPCS2
Interrupt Control
MCK(1)
N
NPCS3
SPI Interrupt
Note:
27.3
1. N = 32
Application Block Diagram
Figure 27-2. Application Block Diagram: Single Master/Multiple Slave Implementation
SPI Master
SPCK
SPCK
MISO
MISO
MOSI
MOSI
NPCS0
NSS
Slave 0
SPCK
NPCS1
NPCS2
NC
NPCS3
MISO
Slave 1
MOSI
NSS
SPCK
MISO
Slave 2
MOSI
NSS
232
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
27.4
Signal Description
Table 27-1.
Signal Description
Type
27.5
27.5.1
Pin Name
Pin Description
Master
Slave
MISO
Master In Slave Out
Input
Output
MOSI
Master Out Slave In
Output
Input
SPCK
Serial Clock
Output
Input
NPCS1-NPCS3
Peripheral Chip Selects
Output
Unused
NPCS0/NSS
Peripheral Chip Select/Slave Select
Output
Input
Product Dependencies
I/O Lines
The pins used for interfacing the compliant external devices may be multiplexed with PIO lines.
The programmer must first program the PIO controllers to assign the SPI pins to their peripheral
functions.
27.5.2
Power Management
The SPI may be clocked through the Power Management Controller (PMC), thus the programmer must first configure the PMC to enable the SPI clock.
27.5.3
Interrupt
The SPI interface has an interrupt line connected to the Advanced Interrupt Controller (AIC).
Handling the SPI interrupt requires programming the AIC before configuring the SPI.
233
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
27.6
27.6.1
Functional Description
Modes of Operation
The SPI operates in Master Mode or in Slave Mode.
Operation in Master Mode is programmed by writing at 1 the MSTR bit in the Mode Register.
The pins NPCS0 to NPCS3 are all configured as outputs, the SPCK pin is driven, the MISO line
is wired on the receiver input and the MOSI line driven as an output by the transmitter.
If the MSTR bit is written at 0, the SPI operates in Slave Mode. The MISO line is driven by the
transmitter output, the MOSI line is wired on the receiver input, the SPCK pin is driven by the
transmitter to synchronize the receiver. The NPCS0 pin becomes an input, and is used as a
Slave Select signal (NSS). The pins NPCS1 to NPCS3 are not driven and can be used for other
purposes.
The data transfers are identically programmable for both modes of operations. The baud rate
generator is activated only in Master Mode.
27.6.2
Data Transfer
Four combinations of polarity and phase are available for data transfers. The clock polarity is
programmed with the CPOL bit in the Chip Select Register. The clock phase is programmed with
the NCPHA bit. These two parameters determine the edges of the clock signal on which data is
driven and sampled. Each of the two parameters has two possible states, resulting in four possible combinations that are incompatible with one another. Thus, a master/slave pair must use the
same parameter pair values to communicate. If multiple slaves are used and fixed in different
configurations, the master must reconfigure itself each time it needs to communicate with a different slave.
Table 27-2 shows the four modes and corresponding parameter settings.
Table 27-2.
SPI Bus Protocol Mode
SPI Mode
CPOL
NCPHA
0
0
1
1
0
0
2
1
1
3
1
0
Figure 27-3 and Figure 27-4 show examples of data transfers.
234
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
Figure 27-3. SPI Transfer Format (NCPHA = 1, 8 bits per transfer)
1
SPCK cycle (for reference)
2
3
4
6
5
7
8
SPCK
(CPOL = 0)
SPCK
(CPOL = 1)
MOSI
(from master)
MSB
MISO
(from slave)
MSB
6
5
4
3
2
1
LSB
6
5
4
3
2
1
LSB
*
NSS
(to slave)
* Not defined, but normally MSB of previous character received.
Figure 27-4. SPI Transfer Format (NCPHA = 0, 8 bits per transfer)
1
SPCK cycle (for reference)
2
3
4
5
7
6
8
SPCK
(CPOL = 0)
SPCK
(CPOL = 1)
MOSI
(from master)
MISO
(from slave)
*
MSB
6
5
4
3
2
1
MSB
6
5
4
3
2
1
LSB
LSB
NSS
(to slave)
* Not defined but normally LSB of previous character transmitted.
235
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
27.6.3
Master Mode Operations
When configured in Master Mode, the SPI operates on the clock generated by the internal programmable baud rate generator. It fully controls the data transfers to and from the slave(s)
connected to the SPI bus. The SPI drives the chip select line to the slave and the serial clock
signal (SPCK).
The SPI features two holding registers, the Transmit Data Register and the Receive Data Register, and a single Shift Register. The holding registers maintain the data flow at a constant rate.
After enabling the SPI, a data transfer begins when the processor writes to the SPI_TDR (Transmit Data Register). The written data is immediately transferred in the Shift Register and transfer
on the SPI bus starts. While the data in the Shift Register is shifted on the MOSI line, the MISO
line is sampled and shifted in the Shift Register. Transmission cannot occur without reception.
No transfer is started when writing into the SPI_TDR if the PCS field does not select a slave. The
PCS field is set by writing the SPI_TDR in variable mode, or the SPI_MR in fixed mode, depending on the value of PCS field.
If new data is written in SPI_TDR during the transfer, it stays in it until the current transfer is
completed. Then, the received data is transferred from the Shift Register to SPI_RDR, the data
in SPI_TDR is loaded in the Shift Register and a new transfer starts.
The transfer of a data written in SPI_TDR in the Shift Register is indicated by the TDRE bit
(Transmit Data Register Empty) in the Status Register (SPI_SR). When new data is written in
SPI_TDR, this bit is cleared. The TDRE bit is used to trigger the Transmit PDC channel.
The end of transfer is indicated by the TXEMPTY flag in the SPI_SR register. If a transfer delay
(DLYBCT) is greater than 0 for the last transfer, TXEMPTY is set after the completion of said
delay. The master clock (MCK) can be switched off at this time.
The transfer of received data from the Shift Register in SPI_RDR is indicated by the RDRF bit
(Receive Data Register Full) in the Status Register (SPI_SR). When the received data is read,
the RDRF bit is cleared.
If the SPI_RDR (Receive Data Register) has not been read before new data is received, the
Overrun Error bit (OVRES) in SPI_SR is set. As long as this flag is set, no data is loaded in
SPI_RDR. The user has to read the status register to clear the OVRES bit.
Figure 27-5 on page 237 shows a block diagram of the SPI when operating in Master Mode. Figure 27-6 on page 238 shows a flow chart describing how transfers are handled.
236
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
27.6.3.1
Master Mode Block Diagram
Figure 27-5. Master Mode Block Diagram
FDIV
SPI_CSR0..3
SCBR
MCK
0
Baud Rate Generator
MCK/N
SPCK
1
SPI
Clock
SPI_CSR0..3
BITS
NCPHA
CPOL
LSB
MISO
SPI_RDR
RDRF
OVRES
RD
MSB
Shift Register
MOSI
SPI_TDR
TD
SPI_CSR0..3
CSAAT
TDRE
SPI_RDR
PCS
PS
NPCS3
PCSDEC
SPI_MR
PCS
0
NPCS2
Current
Peripheral
NPCS1
SPI_TDR
NPCS0
PCS
1
MSTR
MODF
NPCS0
MODFDIS
237
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
27.6.3.2
Master Mode Flow Diagram
Figure 27-6. Master Mode Flow Diagram S
SPI Enable
- NPCS defines the current Chip Select
- CSAAT, DLYBS, DLYBCT refer to the fields of the
Chip Select Register corresponding to the Current Chip Select
- When NPCS is 0xF, CSAAT is 0.
1
TDRE ?
0
1
PS ?
0
1
0
Fixed
peripheral
PS ?
1
Fixed
peripheral
0
CSAAT ?
Variable
peripheral
Variable
peripheral
SPI_TDR(PCS)
= NPCS ?
no
NPCS = SPI_TDR(PCS)
NPCS = SPI_MR(PCS)
yes
SPI_MR(PCS)
= NPCS ?
no
NPCS = 0xF
NPCS = 0xF
Delay DLYBCS
Delay DLYBCS
NPCS = SPI_TDR(PCS)
NPCS = SPI_MR(PCS),
SPI_TDR(PCS)
Delay DLYBS
Serializer = SPI_TDR(TD)
TDRE = 1
Data Transfer
SPI_RDR(RD) = Serializer
RDRF = 1
Delay DLYBCT
0
TDRE ?
1
1
CSAAT ?
0
NPCS = 0xF
Delay DLYBCS
238
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
27.6.3.3
Clock Generation
The SPI Baud rate clock is generated by dividing the Master Clock (MCK) or the Master Clock
divided by 32, by a value between 2 and 255. The selection between Master Clock or Master
Clock divided by N is done by the FDIV value set in the Mode Register
This allows a maximum operating baud rate at up to Master Clock/2 and a minimum operating
baud rate of MCK divided by 255*32.
Programming the SCBR field at 0 is forbidden. Triggering a transfer while SCBR is at 0 can lead
to unpredictable results.
At reset, SCBR is 0 and the user has to program it at a valid value before performing the first
transfer.
The divisor can be defined independently for each chip select, as it has to be programmed in the
SCBR field of the Chip Select Registers. This allows the SPI to automatically adapt the baud
rate for each interfaced peripheral without reprogramming.
27.6.3.4
Transfer Delays
Figure 27-7 shows a chip select transfer change and consecutive transfers on the same chip
select. Three delays can be programmed to modify the transfer waveforms:
• The delay between chip selects, programmable only once for all the chip selects by writing
the DLYBCS field in the Mode Register. Allows insertion of a delay between release of one
chip select and before assertion of a new one.
• The delay before SPCK, independently programmable for each chip select by writing the field
DLYBS. Allows the start of SPCK to be delayed after the chip select has been asserted.
• The delay between consecutive transfers, independently programmable for each chip select
by writing the DLYBCT field. Allows insertion of a delay between two transfers occurring on
the same chip select
These delays allow the SPI to be adapted to the interfaced peripherals and their speed and bus
release time.
Figure 27-7. Programmable Delays
Chip Select 1
Chip Select 2
SPCK
DLYBCS
27.6.3.5
DLYBS
DLYBCT
DLYBCT
Peripheral Selection
The serial peripherals are selected through the assertion of the NPCS0 to NPCS3 signals. By
default, all the NPCS signals are high before and after each transfer.
The peripheral selection can be performed in two different ways:
239
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
• Fixed Peripheral Select: SPI exchanges data with only one peripheral
• Variable Peripheral Select: Data can be exchanged with more than one peripheral
Fixed Peripheral Select is activated by writing the PS bit to zero in SPI_MR (Mode Register). In
this case, the current peripheral is defined by the PCS field in SPI_MR and the PCS fields of the
Chip Select Registers have no effect.
Variable Peripheral Select is activated by setting PS bit to one. The PCS field in SPI_TDR is
used to select the current peripheral. This means that the peripheral selection can be defined for
each new data.
The Fixed Peripheral Selection allows buffer transfers with a single peripheral. Using the PDC is
an optimal means, as the size of the data transfer between the memory and the SPI is either 8
bits or 16 bits. However, changing the peripheral selection requires the Mode Register to be
reprogrammed.
The Variable Peripheral Selection allows buffer transfers with multiple peripherals without reprogramming the Mode Register. Data written in SPI_TDR is 32 bits wide and defines the real data
to be transmitted and the peripheral it is destined to. Using the PDC in this mode requires 32-bit
wide buffers, with the data in the LSBs and the PCS and LASTXFER fields in the MSBs, however the SPI still controls the number of bits (8 to16) to be transferred through MISO and MOSI
lines with the chip select configuration registers. This is not the optimal means in term of memory size for the buffers, but it provides a very effective means to exchange data with several
peripherals without any intervention of the processor.
27.6.3.6
Peripheral Chip Select Decoding
The user can program the SPI to operate with up to 15 peripherals by decoding the four Chip
Select lines, NPCS0 to NPCS3 with an external logic. This can be enabled by writing the PCSDEC bit at 1 in the Mode Register (SPI_MR).
When operating without decoding, the SPI makes sure that in any case only one chip select line
is activated, i.e. driven low at a time. If two bits are defined low in a PCS field, only the lowest
numbered chip select is driven low.
When operating with decoding, the SPI directly outputs the value defined by the PCS field of
either the Mode Register or the Transmit Data Register (depending on PS).
As the SPI sets a default value of 0xF on the chip select lines (i.e. all chip select lines at 1) when
not processing any transfer, only 15 peripherals can be decoded.
The SPI has only four Chip Select Registers, not 15. As a result, when decoding is activated,
each chip select defines the characteristics of up to four peripherals. As an example, SPI_CRS0
defines the characteristics of the externally decoded peripherals 0 to 3, corresponding to the
PCS values 0x0 to 0x3. Thus, the user has to make sure to connect compatible peripherals on
the decoded chip select lines 0 to 3, 4 to 7, 8 to 11 and 12 to 14.
27.6.3.7
Peripheral Deselection
When operating normally, as soon as the transfer of the last data written in SPI_TDR is completed, the NPCS lines all rise. This might lead to runtime error if the processor is too long in
responding to an interrupt, and thus might lead to difficulties for interfacing with some serial
peripherals requiring the chip select line to remain active during a full set of transfers.
240
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
To facilitate interfacing with such devices, the Chip Select Register can be programmed with the
CSAAT bit (Chip Select Active After Transfer) at 1. This allows the chip select lines to remain in
their current state (low = active) until transfer to another peripheral is required.
Figure 27-8 shows different peripheral deselection cases and the effect of the CSAAT bit.
Figure 27-8. Peripheral Deselection
CSAAT = 0
TDRE
NPCS[0..3]
CSAAT = 1
DLYBCT
DLYBCT
A
A
A
A
DLYBCS
A
DLYBCS
PCS = A
PCS = A
Write SPI_TDR
TDRE
NPCS[0..3]
DLYBCT
DLYBCT
A
A
A
A
DLYBCS
A
DLYBCS
PCS=A
PCS = A
Write SPI_TDR
TDRE
NPCS[0..3]
DLYBCT
DLYBCT
A
B
A
B
DLYBCS
PCS = B
DLYBCS
PCS = B
Write SPI_TDR
27.6.3.8
Mode Fault Detection
A mode fault is detected when the SPI is programmed in Master Mode and a low level is driven
by an external master on the NPCS0/NSS signal. As this pin is generally configured in opendrain, it is important that a pull up resistor is connected on the NPCS0 line, so that a high level is
guaranteed and no spurious mode fault is detected.
When a mode fault is detected, the MODF bit in the SPI_SR is set until the SPI_SR is read and
the SPI is automatically disabled until re-enabled by writing the SPIEN bit in the SPI_CR (Control Register) at 1.
By default, the Mode Fault detection circuitry is enabled. The user can disable Mode Fault
detection by setting the MODFDIS bit in the SPI Mode Register (SPI_MR).
241
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
27.6.4
SPI Slave Mode
When operating in Slave Mode, the SPI processes data bits on the clock provided on the SPI
clock pin (SPCK).
The SPI waits for NSS to go active before receiving the serial clock from an external master.
When NSS falls, the clock is validated on the serializer, which processes the number of bits
defined by the BITS field of the Chip Select Register 0 (SPI_CSR0). These bits are processed
following a phase and a polarity defined respectively by the NCPHA and CPOL bits of the
SPI_CSR0. Note that BITS, CPOL and NCPHA of the other Chip Select Registers have no
effect when the SPI is programmed in Slave Mode.
The bits are shifted out on the MISO line and sampled on the MOSI line.
When all the bits are processed, the received data is transferred in the Receive Data Register
and the RDRF bit rises. If RDRF is already high when the data is transferred, the Overrun bit
rises and the data transfer to SPI_RDR is aborted.
When a transfer starts, the data shifted out is the data present in the Shift Register. If no data
has been written in the Transmit Data Register (SPI_TDR), the last data received is transferred.
If no data has been received since the last reset, all bits are transmitted low, as the Shift Register resets at 0.
When a first data is written in SPI_TDR, it is transferred immediately in the Shift Register and the
TDRE bit rises. If new data is written, it remains in SPI_TDR until a transfer occurs, i.e. NSS falls
and there is a valid clock on the SPCK pin. When the transfer occurs, the last data written in
SPI_TDR is transferred in the Shift Register and the TDRE bit rises. This enables frequent
updates of critical variables with single transfers.
Then, a new data is loaded in the Shift Register from the Transmit Data Register. In case no
character is ready to be transmitted, i.e. no character has been written in SPI_TDR since the last
load from SPI_TDR to the Shift Register, the Shift Register is not modified and the last received
character is retransmitted.
Figure 27-9 shows a block diagram of the SPI when operating in Slave Mode.
Figure 27-9. Slave Mode Functional Block Diagram
SPCK
NSS
SPI
Clock
SPIEN
SPIENS
SPIDIS
SPI_CSR0
BITS
NCPHA
CPOL
MOSI
LSB
SPI_RDR
RDRF
OVRES
RD
MSB
Shift Register
MISO
SPI_TDR
FLOAD
242
TD
TDRE
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
27.7
Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) User Interface
Table 27-3.
Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) Register Mapping
Offset
Register
Register Name
Access
Reset
0x00
Control Register
SPI_CR
Write-only
---
0x04
Mode Register
SPI_MR
Read/Write
0x0
0x08
Receive Data Register
SPI_RDR
Read-only
0x0
0x0C
Transmit Data Register
SPI_TDR
Write-only
---
0x10
Status Register
SPI_SR
Read-only
0x000000F0
0x14
Interrupt Enable Register
SPI_IER
Write-only
---
0x18
Interrupt Disable Register
SPI_IDR
Write-only
---
0x1C
Interrupt Mask Register
SPI_IMR
Read-only
0x0
0x20 - 0x2C
Reserved
0x30
Chip Select Register 0
SPI_CSR0
Read/Write
0x0
0x34
Chip Select Register 1
SPI_CSR1
Read/Write
0x0
0x38
Chip Select Register 2
SPI_CSR2
Read/Write
0x0
0x3C
Chip Select Register 3
SPI_CSR3
Read/Write
0x0
–
–
–
0x004C - 0x00FC
0x100 - 0x124
Reserved
Reserved for the PDC
243
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
27.7.1
SPI Control Register
Name:
SPI_CR
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
LASTXFER
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SWRST
–
–
–
–
–
SPIDIS
SPIEN
• SPIEN: SPI Enable
0 = No effect.
1 = Enables the SPI to transfer and receive data.
• SPIDIS: SPI Disable
0 = No effect.
1 = Disables the SPI.
All pins are set in input mode and no data is received or transmitted.
If a transfer is in progress, the transfer is finished before the SPI is disabled.
If both SPIEN and SPIDIS are equal to one when the control register is written, the SPI is disabled.
• SWRST: SPI Software Reset
0 = No effect.
1 = Reset the SPI. A software-triggered hardware reset of the SPI interface is performed.
• LASTXFER: Last Transfer
0 = No effect.
1 = The current NPCS will be deasserted after the character written in TD has been transferred. When CSAAT is set, this
allows to close the communication with the current serial peripheral by raising the corresponding NPCS line as soon as TD
transfer has completed.
244
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
27.7.2
SPI Mode Register
Name:
SPI_MR
Access Type:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
19
18
25
24
17
16
DLYBCS
23
22
21
20
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
PCS
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
LLB
–
–
MODFDIS
FDIV
PCSDEC
PS
MSTR
• MSTR: Master/Slave Mode
0 = SPI is in Slave mode.
1 = SPI is in Master mode.
• PS: Peripheral Select
0 = Fixed Peripheral Select.
1 = Variable Peripheral Select.
• PCSDEC: Chip Select Decode
0 = The chip selects are directly connected to a peripheral device.
1 = The four chip select lines are connected to a 4- to 16-bit decoder.
When PCSDEC equals one, up to 15 Chip Select signals can be generated with the four lines using an external 4- to 16-bit
decoder. The Chip Select Registers define the characteristics of the 16 chip selects according to the following rules:
SPI_CSR0 defines peripheral chip select signals 0 to 3.
SPI_CSR1 defines peripheral chip select signals 4 to 7.
SPI_CSR2 defines peripheral chip select signals 8 to 11.
SPI_CSR3 defines peripheral chip select signals 12 to 15.
• FDIV: Clock Selection
0 = The SPI operates at MCK.
1 = The SPI operates at MCK/N.
• MODFDIS: Mode Fault Detection
0 = Mode fault detection is enabled.
1 = Mode fault detection is disabled.
• LLB: Local Loopback Enable
0 = Local loopback path disabled.
1 = Local loopback path enabled.
LLB controls the local loopback on the data serializer for testing in Master Mode only.
• PCS: Peripheral Chip Select
This field is only used if Fixed Peripheral Select is active (PS = 0).
245
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
If PCSDEC = 0:
PCS = xxx0
NPCS[3:0] = 1110
PCS = xx01
NPCS[3:0] = 1101
PCS = x011
NPCS[3:0] = 1011
PCS = 0111
NPCS[3:0] = 0111
PCS = 1111
forbidden (no peripheral is selected)
(x = don’t care)
If PCSDEC = 1:
NPCS[3:0] output signals = PCS.
• DLYBCS: Delay Between Chip Selects
This field defines the delay from NPCS inactive to the activation of another NPCS. The DLYBCS time guarantees non-overlapping chip selects and solves bus contentions in case of peripherals having long data float times.
If DLYBCS is less than or equal to six, six MCK periods (or 6*N MCK periods if FDIV is set) will be inserted by default.
Otherwise, the following equation determines the delay:
If FDIV is 0:
Delay Between Chip Selects = DLYBCS
----------------------MCK
If FDIV is 1:
× NDelay Between Chip Selects = DLYBCS
--------------------------------MCK
246
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
27.7.3
SPI Receive Data Register
Name:
SPI_RDR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
PCS
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
RD
7
6
5
4
RD
• RD: Receive Data
Data received by the SPI Interface is stored in this register right-justified. Unused bits read zero.
• PCS: Peripheral Chip Select
In Master Mode only, these bits indicate the value on the NPCS pins at the end of a transfer. Otherwise, these bits read
zero.
247
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
27.7.4
SPI Transmit Data Register
Name:
SPI_TDR
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
LASTXFER
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
PCS
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
TD
7
6
5
4
TD
• TD: Transmit Data
Data to be transmitted by the SPI Interface is stored in this register. Information to be transmitted must be written to the
transmit data register in a right-justified format.
PCS: Peripheral Chip Select
This field is only used if Variable Peripheral Select is active (PS = 1).
If PCSDEC = 0:
PCS = xxx0
NPCS[3:0] = 1110
PCS = xx01
NPCS[3:0] = 1101
PCS = x011
NPCS[3:0] = 1011
PCS = 0111
NPCS[3:0] = 0111
PCS = 1111
forbidden (no peripheral is selected)
(x = don’t care)
If PCSDEC = 1:
NPCS[3:0] output signals = PCS
• LASTXFER: Last Transfer
0 = No effect.
1 = The current NPCS will be deasserted after the character written in TD has been transferred. When CSAAT is set, this
allows to close the communication with the current serial peripheral by raising the corresponding NPCS line as soon as TD
transfer has completed.
248
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
27.7.5
SPI Status Register
Name:
SPI_SR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
SPIENS
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
TXEMPTY
NSSR
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TXBUFE
RXBUFF
ENDTX
ENDRX
OVRES
MODF
TDRE
RDRF
• RDRF: Receive Data Register Full
0 = No data has been received since the last read of SPI_RDR
1 = Data has been received and the received data has been transferred from the serializer to SPI_RDR since the last read
of SPI_RDR.
• TDRE: Transmit Data Register Empty
0 = Data has been written to SPI_TDR and not yet transferred to the serializer.
1 = The last data written in the Transmit Data Register has been transferred to the serializer.
TDRE equals zero when the SPI is disabled or at reset. The SPI enable command sets this bit to one.
• MODF: Mode Fault Error
0 = No Mode Fault has been detected since the last read of SPI_SR.
1 = A Mode Fault occurred since the last read of the SPI_SR.
• OVRES: Overrun Error Status
0 = No overrun has been detected since the last read of SPI_SR.
1 = An overrun has occurred since the last read of SPI_SR.
An overrun occurs when SPI_RDR is loaded at least twice from the serializer since the last read of the SPI_RDR.
• ENDRX: End of RX buffer
0 = The Receive Counter Register has not reached 0 since the last write in SPI_RCR or SPI_RNCR.
1 = The Receive Counter Register has reached 0 since the last write in SPI_RCR or SPI_RNCR.
• ENDTX: End of TX buffer
0 = The Transmit Counter Register has not reached 0 since the last write in SPI_TCR or SPI_TNCR.
1 = The Transmit Counter Register has reached 0 since the last write in SPI_TCR or SPI_TNCR.
• RXBUFF: RX Buffer Full
0 = SPI_RCR or SPI_RNCR has a value other than 0.
1 = Both SPI_RCR and SPI_RNCR has a value of 0.
249
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
• TXBUFE: TX Buffer Empty
0 = SPI_TCR or SPI_TNCR has a value other than 0.
1 = Both SPI_TCR and SPI_TNCR has a value of 0.
• NSSR: NSS Rising
0 = No rising edge detected on NSS pin since last read.
1 = A rising edge occurred on NSS pin since last read.
• TXEMPTY: Transmission Registers Empty
0 = As soon as data is written in SPI_TDR.
1 = SPI_TDR and internal shifter are empty. If a transfer delay has been defined, TXEMPTY is set after the completion of
such delay.
• SPIENS: SPI Enable Status
0 = SPI is disabled.
1 = SPI is enabled.
250
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
27.7.6
SPI Interrupt Enable Register
Name:
SPI_IER
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
TXEMPTY
NSSR
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TXBUFE
RXBUFF
ENDTX
ENDRX
OVRES
MODF
TDRE
RDRF
• RDRF: Receive Data Register Full Interrupt Enable
• TDRE: SPI Transmit Data Register Empty Interrupt Enable
• MODF: Mode Fault Error Interrupt Enable
• OVRES: Overrun Error Interrupt Enable
• ENDRX: End of Receive Buffer Interrupt Enable
• ENDTX: End of Transmit Buffer Interrupt Enable
• RXBUFF: Receive Buffer Full Interrupt Enable
• TXBUFE: Transmit Buffer Empty Interrupt Enable
• TXEMPTY: Transmission Registers Empty Enable
• NSSR: NSS Rising Interrupt Enable
0 = No effect.
1 = Enables the corresponding interrupt.
251
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
27.7.7
SPI Interrupt Disable Register
Name:
SPI_IDR
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
TXEMPTY
NSSR
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TXBUFE
RXBUFF
ENDTX
ENDRX
OVRES
MODF
TDRE
RDRF
• RDRF: Receive Data Register Full Interrupt Disable
• TDRE: SPI Transmit Data Register Empty Interrupt Disable
• MODF: Mode Fault Error Interrupt Disable
• OVRES: Overrun Error Interrupt Disable
• ENDRX: End of Receive Buffer Interrupt Disable
• ENDTX: End of Transmit Buffer Interrupt Disable
• RXBUFF: Receive Buffer Full Interrupt Disable
• TXBUFE: Transmit Buffer Empty Interrupt Disable
• TXEMPTY: Transmission Registers Empty Disable
• NSSR: NSS Rising Interrupt Disable
0 = No effect.
1 = Disables the corresponding interrupt.
252
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
27.7.8
SPI Interrupt Mask Register
Name:
SPI_IMR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
TXEMPTY
NSSR
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TXBUFE
RXBUFF
ENDTX
ENDRX
OVRES
MODF
TDRE
RDRF
• RDRF: Receive Data Register Full Interrupt Mask
• TDRE: SPI Transmit Data Register Empty Interrupt Mask
• MODF: Mode Fault Error Interrupt Mask
• OVRES: Overrun Error Interrupt Mask
• ENDRX: End of Receive Buffer Interrupt Mask
• ENDTX: End of Transmit Buffer Interrupt Mask
• RXBUFF: Receive Buffer Full Interrupt Mask
• TXBUFE: Transmit Buffer Empty Interrupt Mask
• TXEMPTY: Transmission Registers Empty Mask
• NSSR: NSS Rising Interrupt Mask
0 = The corresponding interrupt is not enabled.
1 = The corresponding interrupt is enabled.
253
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
27.7.9
SPI Chip Select Register
Name:
SPI_CSR0... SPI_CSR3
Access Type:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
DLYBCT
23
22
21
20
DLYBS
15
14
13
12
SCBR
7
6
5
4
BITS
3
2
1
0
CSAAT
–
NCPHA
CPOL
• CPOL: Clock Polarity
0 = The inactive state value of SPCK is logic level zero.
1 = The inactive state value of SPCK is logic level one.
CPOL is used to determine the inactive state value of the serial clock (SPCK). It is used with NCPHA to produce the
required clock/data relationship between master and slave devices.
• NCPHA: Clock Phase
0 = Data is changed on the leading edge of SPCK and captured on the following edge of SPCK.
1 = Data is captured on the leading edge of SPCK and changed on the following edge of SPCK.
NCPHA determines which edge of SPCK causes data to change and which edge causes data to be captured. NCPHA is
used with CPOL to produce the required clock/data relationship between master and slave devices.
• CSAAT: Chip Select Active After Transfer
0 = The Peripheral Chip Select Line rises as soon as the last transfer is achieved.
1 = The Peripheral Chip Select does not rise after the last transfer is achieved. It remains active until a new transfer is
requested on a different chip select.
• BITS: Bits Per Transfer
The BITS field determines the number of data bits transferred. Reserved values should not be used.
BITS
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
254
Bits Per Transfer
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
• SCBR: Serial Clock Baud Rate
In Master Mode, the SPI Interface uses a modulus counter to derive the SPCK baud rate from the Master Clock MCK. The
Baud rate is selected by writing a value from 1 to 255 in the SCBR field. The following equations determine the SPCK baud
rate:
If FDIV is 0:
MCK
SPCK Baudrate = --------------SCBR
If FDIV is 1:
Note:
N = 32
MCK
SPCK Baudrate = ------------------------------( N × SCBR )
Programming the SCBR field at 0 is forbidden. Triggering a transfer while SCBR is at 0 can lead to unpredictable results.
At reset, SCBR is 0 and the user has to program it at a valid value before performing the first transfer.
• DLYBS: Delay Before SPCK
This field defines the delay from NPCS valid to the first valid SPCK transition.
When DLYBS equals zero, the NPCS valid to SPCK transition is 1/2 the SPCK clock period.
Otherwise, the following equations determine the delay:
If FDIV is 0:
Delay Before SPCK = DLYBS
------------------MCK
If FDIV is 1:
Note:
N = 32
N × DLYBS
Delay Before SPCK = -----------------------------MCK
• DLYBCT: Delay Between Consecutive Transfers
This field defines the delay between two consecutive transfers with the same peripheral without removing the chip select.
The delay is always inserted after each transfer and before removing the chip select if needed.
When DLYBCT equals zero, no delay between consecutive transfers is inserted and the clock keeps its duty cycle over the
character transfers.
Otherwise, the following equation determines the delay:
255
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
If FDIV is 0:
32 × DLYBCT SCBR
Delay Between Consecutive Transfers = ------------------------------------- + ----------------MCK
2MCK
If FDIV is 1:
Note:
256
N = 32
32 × N × DLYBCT N × SCBR
Delay Between Consecutive Transfers = ------------------------------------------------- + -------------------------MCK
2MCK
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
28. Two-wire Interface (TWI)
28.1
Overview
The Two-wire Interface (TWI) interconnects components on a unique two-wire bus, made up of
one clock line and one data line with speeds of up to 400 Kbits per second, based on a byte-oriented transfer format. It can be used with any Atmel two-wire bus Serial EEPROM. The TWI is
programmable as a master with sequential or single-byte access. A configurable baud rate generator permits the output data rate to be adapted to a wide range of core clock frequencies.
28.2
Block Diagram
Figure 28-1. Block Diagram
APB Bridge
TWCK
PIO
PMC
MCK
TWD
Two-wire
Interface
TWI
Interrupt
28.3
AIC
Application Block Diagram
Figure 28-2. Application Block Diagram
VDD
R
Host with
TWI
Interface
R
TWD
TWCK
AT24LC16
U1
AT24LC16
U2
LCD Controller
U3
Slave 1
Slave 2
Slave 3
257
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
28.4
28.4.1
Product Dependencies
I/O Lines Description
Table 28-1.
I/O Lines Description
Pin Name
Pin Description
Type
TWD
Two-wire Serial Data
Input/Output
TWCK
Two-wire Serial Clock
Input/Output
Both TWD and TWCK are bidirectional lines, connected to a positive supply voltage via a current
source or pull-up resistor (see Figure 28-2 on page 257). When the bus is free, both lines are
high. The output stages of devices connected to the bus must have an open-drain or open-collector to perform the wired-AND function.
TWD and TWCK pins may be multiplexed with PIO lines. To enable the TWI, the programmer
must perform the following steps:
• Program the PIO controller to:
– Dedicate TWD and TWCK as peripheral lines.
– Define TWD and TWCK as open-drain.
28.4.2
Power Management
• Enable the peripheral clock.
The TWI interface may be clocked through the Power Management Controller (PMC), thus the
programmer must first configure the PMC to enable the TWI clock.
28.4.3
Interrupt
The TWI interface has an interrupt line connected to the Advanced Interrupt Controller (AIC). In
order to handle interrupts, the AIC must be programmed before configuring the TWI.
258
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
28.5
28.5.1
Functional Description
Transfer Format
The data put on the TWD line must be 8 bits long. Data is transferred MSB first; each byte must
be followed by an acknowledgement. The number of bytes per transfer is unlimited (see Figure
28-4 on page 259).
Each transfer begins with a START condition and terminates with a STOP condition (see Figure
28-3 on page 259).
• A high-to-low transition on the TWD line while TWCK is high defines the START condition.
• A low-to-high transition on the TWD line while TWCK is high defines a STOP condition.
Figure 28-3.
START and STOP Conditions
TWD
TWCK
Start
Stop
Figure 28-4. Transfer Format
TWD
TWCK
Start
28.5.2
Address
R/W
Ack
Data
Ack
Data
Ack
Stop
Modes of Operation
The TWI has two modes of operation:
• Master transmitter mode
• Master receiver mode
The TWI Control Register (TWI_CR) allows configuration of the interface in Master Mode. In this
mode, it generates the clock according to the value programmed in the Clock Waveform Generator Register (TWI_CWGR). This register defines the TWCK signal completely, enabling the
interface to be adapted to a wide range of clocks.
28.5.3
Transmitting Data
After the master initiates a Start condition, it sends a 7-bit slave address, configured in the Master Mode register (DADR in TWI_MMR), to notify the slave device. The bit following the slave
address indicates the transfer direction (write or read). If this bit is 0, it indicates a write operation
(transmit operation). If the bit is 1, it indicates a request for data read (receive operation).
The TWI transfers require the slave to acknowledge each received byte. During the acknowledge clock pulse, the master releases the data line (HIGH), enabling the slave to pull it down in
order to generate the acknowledge. The master polls the data line during this clock pulse and
259
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
sets the NAK bit in the status register if the slave does not acknowledge the byte. As with the
other status bits, an interrupt can be generated if enabled in the interrupt enable register
(TWI_IER). After writing in the transmit-holding register (TWI_THR), setting the START bit in the
control register starts the transmission. The data is shifted in the internal shifter and when an
acknowledge is detected, the TXRDY bit is set until a new write in the TWI_THR (see Figure 286 below). The master generates a stop condition to end the transfer.
The read sequence begins by setting the START bit. When the RXRDY bit is set in the status
register, a character has been received in the receive-holding register (TWI_RHR). The RXRDY
bit is reset when reading the TWI_RHR.
The TWI interface performs various transfer formats (7-bit slave address, 10-bit slave address).
The three internal address bytes are configurable through the Master Mode register
(TWI_MMR). If the slave device supports only a 7-bit address, IADRSZ must be set to 0. For a
slave address higher than 7 bits, the user must configure the address size (IADRSZ) and set the
other slave address bits in the internal address register (TWI_IADR).
Figure 28-5. Master Write with One, Two or Three Bytes Internal Address and One Data Byte
Three bytes internal address
S
TWD
DADR
W
A
IADR(23:16)
A
IADR(15:8)
A
IADR(7:0)
A
W
A
IADR(15:8)
A
IADR(7:0)
A
DATA
A
W
A
IADR(7:0)
A
DATA
A
A
DATA
P
Two bytes internal address
S
TWD
DADR
P
One byte internal address
S
TWD
DADR
P
Figure 28-6. Master Write with One Byte Internal Address and Multiple Data Bytes
S
TWD
DADR
W
A
IADR(7:0)
DATA
A
A
DATA
DATA
A
A
P
TXCOMP
Write THR
TXRDY
Write THR
Write THR
Write THR
Figure 28-7. Master Read with One, Two or Three Bytes Internal Address and One Data Byte
Three bytes internal address
TWD
S
DADR
W
A
IADR(23:16)
A
IADR(15:8)
A
IADR(7:0)
A
S
DADR
R
A
DATA
N
P
Two bytes internal address
TWD
S
DADR
W
A
IADR(15:8)
A
IADR(7:0)
A
S
W
A
IADR(7:0)
A
S
R
A
DADR
R
A
DATA
N
P
One byte internal address
TWD
260
S
DADR
DADR
DATA
N
P
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
Figure 28-8. Master Read with One Byte Internal Address and Multiple Data Bytes
TWD
S
DADR
W
A
IADR(7:0)
S
A
DADR
R
A
DATA
A
DATA
N
P
TXCOMP
Write START Bit
Write STOP Bit
RXRDY
Read RHR
Read RHR
• S = Start
• P = Stop
• W = Write
• R = Read
• A = Acknowledge
• N = Not Acknowledge
• DADR = Device Address
• IADR = Internal Address
Figure 28-9 below shows a byte write to an Atmel AT24LC512 EEPROM. This demonstrates the
use of internal addresses to access the device.
Figure 28-9.
Internal Address Usage
S
T
A
R
T
Device
Address
W
R
I
T
E
FIRST
WORD ADDRESS
SECOND
WORD ADDRESS
S
T
O
P
DATA
0
M
S
B
28.5.4
LR A
S / C
BW K
M
S
B
A
C
K
LA
SC
BK
A
C
K
Read/Write Flowcharts
The following flowcharts shown in Figure 28-10 on page 262 and in Figure 28-11 on page 263
give examples for read and write operations in Master Mode. A polling or interrupt method can
be used to check the status bits. The interrupt method requires that the interrupt enable register
(TWI_IER) be configured first.
261
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
Figure 28-10. TWI Write in Master Mode
START
Set TWI clock:
TWI_CWGR = clock
Set the control register:
- Master enable
TWI_CR = MSEN
Set the Master Mode register:
- Device slave address
- Internal address size
- Transfer direction bit
Write ==> bit MREAD = 0
Internal address size = 0?
Set theinternal address
TWI_IADR = address
Yes
Load transmit register
TWI_THR = Data to send
Start the transfer
TWI_CR = START
Read status register
TWI_THR = data to send
TXRDY = 0?
Yes
Data to send?
Yes
Stop the transfer
TWI_CR = STOP
Read status register
TXCOMP = 0?
Yes
END
262
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
Figure 28-11. TWI Read in Master Mode
START
Set TWI clock:
TWI_CWGR = clock
Set the control register:
- Master enable
- Slave disable
TWI_CR = MSEN
Set the Master Mode register:
- Device slave address
- Internal address size
- Transfer direction bit
Read ==> bit MREAD = 0
Internal address size = 0?
Set the internal address
TWI_IADR = address
Yes
Start the transfer
TWI_CR = START
Read status register
RXRDY = 0?
Yes
Data to read?
Yes
Stop the transfer
TWI_CR = STOP
Read status register
TXCOMP = 0?
Yes
END
263
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
28.6
Two-wire Interface (TWI) User Interface
Table 28-2.
Two-wire Interface (TWI) Register Mapping
Offset
Register
Name
Access
Reset Value
0x0000
Control Register
TWI_CR
Write-only
N/A
0x0004
Master Mode Register
TWI_MMR
Read/Write
0x0000
0x0008
Reserved
–
–
–
0x000C
Internal Address Register
TWI_IADR
Read/Write
0x0000
0x0010
Clock Waveform Generator Register
TWI_CWGR
Read/Write
0x0000
0x0020
Status Register
TWI_SR
Read-only
0x0008
0x0024
Interrupt Enable Register
TWI_IER
Write-only
N/A
0x0028
Interrupt Disable Register
TWI_IDR
Write-only
N/A
0x002C
Interrupt Mask Register
TWI_IMR
Read-only
0x0000
0x0030
Receive Holding Register
TWI_RHR
Read-only
0x0000
0x0034
Transmit Holding Register
TWI_THR
Read/Write
0x0000
–
–
–
0x0038-0x00FC
264
Reserved
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
28.6.1
TWI Control Register
Register Name:
TWI_CR
Access Type:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
SWRST
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
MSDIS
2
MSEN
1
STOP
0
START
• START: Send a START Condition
0 = No effect.
1 = A frame beginning with a START bit is transmitted according to the features defined in the mode register.
This action is necessary when the TWI peripheral wants to read data from a slave. When configured in Master Mode with a
write operation, a frame is sent with the mode register as soon as the user writes a character in the holding register.
• STOP: Send a STOP Condition
0 = No effect.
1 = STOP Condition is sent just after completing the current byte transmission in master read or write mode.
In single data byte master read or write, the START and STOP must both be set.
In multiple data bytes master read or write, the STOP must be set before ACK/NACK bit transmission.
In master read mode, if a NACK bit is received, the STOP is automatically performed.
In multiple data write operation, when both THR and shift register are empty, a STOP condition is automatically sent.
• MSEN: TWI Master Transfer Enabled
0 = No effect.
1 = If MSDIS = 0, the master data transfer is enabled.
• MSDIS: TWI Master Transfer Disabled
0 = No effect.
1 = The master data transfer is disabled, all pending data is transmitted. The shifter and holding characters (if they contain
data) are transmitted in case of write operation. In read operation, the character being transferred must be completely
received before disabling.
• SWRST: Software Reset
0 = No effect.
1 = Equivalent to a system reset.
265
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
28.6.2
TWI Master Mode Register
Register Name:
TWI_MMR
Address Type:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
21
20
19
DADR
18
17
16
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
MREAD
11
–
10
–
9
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
8
IADRSZ
0
–
• IADRSZ: Internal Device Address Size
IADRSZ[9:8]
0
0
No internal device address (Byte command protocol)
0
1
One-byte internal device address
1
0
Two-byte internal device address
1
1
Three-byte internal device address
• MREAD: Master Read Direction
0 = Master write direction.
1 = Master read direction.
• DADR: Device Address
The device address is used in Master Mode to access slave devices in read or write mode.
266
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
28.6.3
TWI Internal Address Register
Register Name:
TWI_IADR
Access Type:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
IADR
15
14
13
12
IADR
7
6
5
4
IADR
• IADR: Internal Address
0, 1, 2 or 3 bytes depending on IADRSZ.
– Low significant byte address in 10-bit mode addresses.
28.6.4
TWI Clock Waveform Generator Register
Register Name:
TWI_CWGR
Access Type:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
17
CKDIV
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
CHDIV
7
6
5
4
CLDIV
• CLDIV: Clock Low Divider
The SCL low period is defined as follows:
T low = ( ( CLDIV × 2
CKDIV
) + 3 ) × T MCK
• CHDIV: Clock High Divider
The SCL high period is defined as follows:
T high = ( ( CHDIV × 2
CKDIV
) + 3 ) × T MCK
• CKDIV: Clock Divider
The CKDIV is used to increase both SCL high and low periods.
267
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
28.6.5
TWI Status Register
Register Name:
TWI_SR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
NACK
7
UNRE
6
OVRE
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
TXRDY
1
RXRDY
0
TXCOMP
• TXCOMP: Transmission Completed
0 = In master, during the length of the current frame. In slave, from START received to STOP received.
1 = When both holding and shift registers are empty and STOP condition has been sent (in Master) or when MSEN is set
(enable TWI).
• RXRDY: Receive Holding Register Ready
0 = No character has been received since the last TWI_RHR read operation.
1 = A byte has been received in the TWI_RHR since the last read.
• TXRDY: Transmit Holding Register Ready
0 = The transmit holding register has not been transferred into shift register. Set to 0 when writing into TWI_THR register.
1 = As soon as data byte is transferred from TWI_THR to internal shifter or if a NACK error is detected, TXRDY is set at the
same time as TXCOMP and NACK. TXRDY is also set when MSEN is set (enable TWI).
• OVRE: Overrun Error
0 = TWI_RHR has not been loaded while RXRDY was set
1 = TWI_RHR has been loaded while RXRDY was set. Reset by read in TWI_SR when TXCOMP is set.
• UNRE: Underrun Error
0 = No underrun error
1 = No valid data in TWI_THR (TXRDY set) while trying to load the data shifter. This action automatically generated a
STOP bit in Master Mode. Reset by read in TWI_SR when TXCOMP is set.
• NACK: Not Acknowledged
0 = Each data byte has been correctly received by the far-end side TWI slave component.
1 = A data byte has not been acknowledged by the slave component. Set at the same time as TXCOMP. Reset after read.
268
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
28.6.6
TWI Interrupt Enable Register
Register Name:
TWI_IER
Access Type:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
NACK
7
UNRE
6
OVRE
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
TXRDY
1
RXRDY
0
TXCOMP
• TXCOMP: Transmission Completed
• RXRDY: Receive Holding Register Ready
• TXRDY: Transmit Holding Register Ready
• OVRE: Overrun Error
• UNRE: Underrun Error
• NACK: Not Acknowledge
0 = No effect.
1 = Enables the corresponding interrupt.
269
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
28.6.7
TWI Interrupt Disable Register
Register Name:
TWI_IDR
Access Type:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
NACK
7
UNRE
6
OVRE
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
TXRDY
1
RXRDY
0
TXCOMP
• TXCOMP: Transmission Completed
• RXRDY: Receive Holding Register Ready
• TXRDY: Transmit Holding Register Ready
• OVRE: Overrun Error
• UNRE: Underrun Error
• NACK: Not Acknowledge
0 = No effect.
1 = Disables the corresponding interrupt.
270
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
28.6.8
TWI Interrupt Mask Register
Register Name:
TWI_IMR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
NACK
7
UNRE
6
OVRE
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
TXRDY
1
RXRDY
0
TXCOMP
• TXCOMP: Transmission Completed
• RXRDY: Receive Holding Register Ready
• TXRDY: Transmit Holding Register Ready
• OVRE: Overrun Error
• UNRE: Underrun Error
• NACK: Not Acknowledge
0 = The corresponding interrupt is disabled.
1 = The corresponding interrupt is enabled.
271
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
28.6.9
TWI Receive Holding Register
Register Name:
TWI_RHR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RXDATA
• RXDATA: Master or Slave Receive Holding Data
28.6.10
TWI Transmit Holding Register
Register Name:
TWI_THR
Access Type:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TXDATA
• TXDATA: Master or Slave Transmit Holding Data
272
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
29. Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter (USART)
29.1
Overview
The Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Transceiver (USART) provides one full
duplex universal synchronous asynchronous serial link. Data frame format is widely programmable (data length, parity, number of stop bits) to support a maximum of standards. The
receiver implements parity error, framing error and overrun error detection. The receiver timeout enables handling variable-length frames and the transmitter timeguard facilitates communications with slow remote devices. Multidrop communications are also supported through
address bit handling in reception and transmission.
The USART features three test modes: remote loopback, local loopback and automatic echo.
The USART supports specific operating modes providing interfaces on RS485 buses, with
ISO7816 T = 0 or T = 1 smart card slots and infrared transceivers. The hardware handshaking
feature enables an out-of-band flow control by automatic management of the pins RTS and
CTS.
The USART supports the connection to the Peripheral DMA Controller, which enables data
transfers to the transmitter and from the receiver. The PDC provides chained buffer management without any intervention of the processor.
273
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
29.2
Block Diagram
Figure 29-1. USART Block Diagram
Peripheral DMA
Controller
Channel
Channel
PIO
Controller
USART
RXD
Receiver
RTS
AIC
TXD
USART
Interrupt
Transmitter
CTS
PMC
MCK
DIV
Baud Rate
Generator
SCK
MCK/DIV
User Interface
SLCK
APB
274
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
29.3
Application Block Diagram
Figure 29-2. Application Block Diagram
IrLAP
PPP
Serial
Driver
Field Bus
Driver
EMV
Driver
IrDA
Driver
USART
29.4
RS232
Drivers
RS485
Drivers
Serial
Port
Differential
Bus
Smart
Card
Slot
IrDA
Transceivers
I/O Lines Description
Table 29-1.
I/O Line Description
Name
Description
Type
Active Level
SCK
Serial Clock
I/O
TXD
Transmit Serial Data
I/O
RXD
Receive Serial Data
Input
CTS
Clear to Send
Input
Low
RTS
Request to Send
Output
Low
275
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
29.5
29.5.1
Product Dependencies
I/O Lines
The pins used for interfacing the USART may be multiplexed with the PIO lines. The programmer must first program the PIO controller to assign the desired USART pins to their peripheral
function. If I/O lines of the USART are not used by the application, they can be used for other
purposes by the PIO Controller.
29.5.2
Power Management
The USART is not continuously clocked. The programmer must first enable the USART Clock
in the Power Management Controller (PMC) before using the USART. However, if the application does not require USART operations, the USART clock can be stopped when not needed
and be restarted later. In this case, the USART will resume its operations where it left off.
Configuring the USART does not require the USART clock to be enabled.
29.5.3
Interrupt
The USART interrupt line is connected on one of the internal sources of the Advanced Interrupt Controller. Using the USART interrupt requires the AIC to be programmed first. Note that
it is not recommended to use the USART interrupt line in edge sensitive mode.
276
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
29.6
Functional Description
The USART is capable of managing several types of serial synchronous or asynchronous
communications.
It supports the following communication modes:
• 5- to 9-bit full-duplex asynchronous serial communication
– MSB- or LSB-first
– 1, 1.5 or 2 stop bits
– Parity even, odd, marked, space or none
– By 8 or by 16 over-sampling receiver frequency
– Optional hardware handshaking
– Optional break management
– Optional multidrop serial communication
• High-speed 5- to 9-bit full-duplex synchronous serial communication
– MSB- or LSB-first
– 1 or 2 stop bits
– Parity even, odd, marked, space or none
– By 8 or by 16 over-sampling frequency
– Optional hardware handshaking
– Optional break management
– Optional multidrop serial communication
• RS485 with driver control signal
• ISO7816, T0 or T1 protocols for interfacing with smart cards
– NACK handling, error counter with repetition and iteration limit
• InfraRed IrDA Modulation and Demodulation
• Test modes
– Remote loopback, local loopback, automatic echo
29.6.1
Baud Rate Generator
The Baud Rate Generator provides the bit period clock named the Baud Rate Clock to both
the receiver and the transmitter.
The Baud Rate Generator clock source can be selected by setting the USCLKS field in the
Mode Register (US_MR) between:
• the Master Clock MCK
• a division of the Master Clock, the divider being product dependent, but generally set to 8
• the external clock, available on the SCK pin
The Baud Rate Generator is based upon a 16-bit divider, which is programmed with the CD
field of the Baud Rate Generator Register (US_BRGR). If CD is programmed at 0, the Baud
Rate Generator does not generate any clock. If CD is programmed at 1, the divider is
bypassed and becomes inactive.
If the external SCK clock is selected, the duration of the low and high levels of the signal provided on the SCK pin must be longer than a Master Clock (MCK) period. The frequency of the
signal provided on SCK must be at least 4.5 times lower than MCK.
277
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
Figure 29-3. Baud Rate Generator
USCLKS
MCK
MCK/DIV
SCK
Reserved
CD
CD
SCK
0
1
16-bit Counter
2
FIDI
>1
3
1
0
0
0
SYNC
OVER
Sampling
Divider
0
Baud Rate
Clock
1
1
SYNC
Sampling
Clock
USCLKS = 3
29.6.1.1
Baud Rate in Asynchronous Mode
If the USART is programmed to operate in asynchronous mode, the selected clock is first
divided by CD, which is field programmed in the Baud Rate Generator Register (US_BRGR).
The resulting clock is provided to the receiver as a sampling clock and then divided by 16 or 8,
depending on the programming of the OVER bit in US_MR.
If OVER is set to 1, the receiver sampling is 8 times higher than the baud rate clock. If OVER
is cleared, the sampling is performed at 16 times the baud rate clock.
The following formula performs the calculation of the Baud Rate.
SelectedClock
Baudrate = -------------------------------------------( 8 ( 2 – Over )CD )
This gives a maximum baud rate of MCK divided by 8, assuming that MCK is the highest possible clock and that OVER is programmed at 1.
Baud Rate Calculation Example
Table 29-2 shows calculations of CD to obtain a baud rate at 38400 bauds for different source
clock frequencies. This table also shows the actual resulting baud rate and the error.
Table 29-2.
278
Baud Rate Example (OVER = 0)
Source Clock
Expected Baud
Rate
MHz
Bit/s
3 686 400
38 400
6.00
6
38 400.00
0.00%
4 915 200
38 400
8.00
8
38 400.00
0.00%
5 000 000
38 400
8.14
8
39 062.50
1.70%
7 372 800
38 400
12.00
12
38 400.00
0.00%
8 000 000
38 400
13.02
13
38 461.54
0.16%
12 000 000
38 400
19.53
20
37 500.00
2.40%
12 288 000
38 400
20.00
20
38 400.00
0.00%
Calculation Result
CD
Actual Baud Rate
Error
Bit/s
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
Table 29-2.
Baud Rate Example (OVER = 0) (Continued)
Source Clock
Expected Baud
Rate
Calculation Result
CD
Actual Baud Rate
Error
14 318 180
38 400
23.30
23
38 908.10
1.31%
14 745 600
38 400
24.00
24
38 400.00
0.00%
18 432 000
38 400
30.00
30
38 400.00
0.00%
24 000 000
38 400
39.06
39
38 461.54
0.16%
24 576 000
38 400
40.00
40
38 400.00
0.00%
25 000 000
38 400
40.69
40
38 109.76
0.76%
32 000 000
38 400
52.08
52
38 461.54
0.16%
32 768 000
38 400
53.33
53
38 641.51
0.63%
33 000 000
38 400
53.71
54
38 194.44
0.54%
40 000 000
38 400
65.10
65
38 461.54
0.16%
50 000 000
38 400
81.38
81
38 580.25
0.47%
60 000 000
38 400
97.66
98
38 265.31
0.35%
70 000 000
38 400
113.93
114
38 377.19
0.06%
The baud rate is calculated with the following formula:
BaudRate = MCK ⁄ CD × 16
The baud rate error is calculated with the following formula. It is not recommended to work
with an error higher than 5%.
ExpectedBaudRate
Error = 1 – ⎛⎝ ---------------------------------------------------⎞⎠
ActualBaudRate
29.6.1.2
Baud Rate in Synchronous Mode
If the USART is programmed to operate in synchronous mode, the selected clock is simply
divided by the field CD in US_BRGR.
BaudRate = SelectedClock
-------------------------------------CD
In synchronous mode, if the external clock is selected (USCLKS = 3), the clock is provided
directly by the signal on the USART SCK pin. No division is active. The value written in
US_BRGR has no effect. The external clock frequency must be at least 4.5 times lower than
the system clock.
When either the external clock SCK or the internal clock divided (MCK/DIV) is selected, the
value programmed in CD must be even if the user has to ensure a 50:50 mark/space ratio on
the SCK pin. If the internal clock MCK is selected, the Baud Rate Generator ensures a 50:50
duty cycle on the SCK pin, even if the value programmed in CD is odd.
29.6.1.3
Baud Rate in ISO 7816 Mode
The ISO7816 specification defines the bit rate with the following formula:
Di
B = ------ × f
Fi
279
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
where:
• B is the bit rate
• Di is the bit-rate adjustment factor
• Fi is the clock frequency division factor
• f is the ISO7816 clock frequency (Hz)
Di is a binary value encoded on a 4-bit field, named DI, as represented in Table 29-3.
Table 29-3.
Binary and Decimal Values for D
DI field
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
1000
1001
1
2
4
8
16
32
12
20
Di (decimal)
Fi is a binary value encoded on a 4-bit field, named FI, as represented in Table 29-4.
Table 29-4.
Binary and Decimal Values for F
FI field
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
Fi (decimal
372
372
558
744
1116
1488
1860
512
768
1024
1536
2048
Table 29-5 shows the resulting Fi/Di Ratio, which is the ratio between the ISO7816 clock and
the baud rate clock.
Table 29-5.
Possible Values for the Fi/Di Ratio
Fi/Di
372
558
774
1116
1488
1806
512
768
1024
1536
2048
1
372
558
744
1116
1488
1860
512
768
1024
1536
2048
2
186
279
372
558
744
930
256
384
512
768
1024
4
93
139.5
186
279
372
465
128
192
256
384
512
8
46.5
69.75
93
139.5
186
232.5
64
96
128
192
256
16
23.25
34.87
46.5
69.75
93
116.2
32
48
64
96
128
32
11.62
17.43
23.25
34.87
46.5
58.13
16
24
32
48
64
12
31
46.5
62
93
124
155
42.66
64
85.33
128
170.6
20
18.6
27.9
37.2
55.8
74.4
93
25.6
38.4
51.2
76.8
102.4
If the USART is configured in ISO7816 Mode, the clock selected by the USCLKS field in the
Mode Register (US_MR) is first divided by the value programmed in the field CD in the Baud
Rate Generator Register (US_BRGR). The resulting clock can be provided to the SCK pin to
feed the smart card clock inputs. This means that the CLKO bit can be set in US_MR.
This clock is then divided by the value programmed in the FI_DI_RATIO field in the
FI_DI_Ratio register (US_FIDI). This is performed by the Sampling Divider, which performs a
division by up to 2047 in ISO7816 Mode. The non-integer values of the Fi/Di Ratio are not supported and the user must program the FI_DI_RATIO field to a value as close as possible to the
expected value.
The FI_DI_RATIO field resets to the value 0x174 (372 in decimal) and is the most common
divider between the ISO7816 clock and the bit rate (Fi = 372, Di = 1).
Figure 29-4 shows the relation between the Elementary Time Unit, corresponding to a bit time,
and the ISO 7816 clock.
280
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
Figure 29-4. Elementary Time Unit (ETU)
FI_DI_RATIO
ISO7816 Clock Cycles
ISO7816 Clock
on SCK
ISO7816 I/O Line
on TXD
1 ETU
29.6.2
Receiver and Transmitter Control
After reset, the receiver is disabled. The user must enable the receiver by setting the RXEN bit
in the Control Register (US_CR). However, the receiver registers can be programmed before
the receiver clock is enabled.
After reset, the transmitter is disabled. The user must enable it by setting the TXEN bit in the
Control Register (US_CR). However, the transmitter registers can be programmed before
being enabled.
The Receiver and the Transmitter can be enabled together or independently.
At any time, the software can perform a reset on the receiver or the transmitter of the USART
by setting the corresponding bit, RSTRX and RSTTX respectively, in the Control Register
(US_CR). The reset commands have the same effect as a hardware reset on the corresponding logic. Regardless of what the receiver or the transmitter is performing, the communication
is immediately stopped.
The user can also independently disable the receiver or the transmitter by setting RXDIS and
TXDIS respectively in US_CR. If the receiver is disabled during a character reception, the
USART waits until the end of reception of the current character, then the reception is stopped.
If the transmitter is disabled while it is operating, the USART waits the end of transmission of
both the current character and character being stored in the Transmit Holding Register
(US_THR). If a timeguard is programmed, it is handled normally.
29.6.3
29.6.3.1
Synchronous and Asynchronous Modes
Transmitter Operations
The transmitter performs the same in both synchronous and asynchronous operating modes
(SYNC = 0 or SYNC = 1). One start bit, up to 9 data bits, one optional parity bit and up to two
stop bits are successively shifted out on the TXD pin at each falling edge of the programmed
serial clock.
The number of data bits is selected by the CHRL field and the MODE9 bit in the Mode Register (US_MR). Nine bits are selected by setting the MODE 9 bit regardless of the CHRL field.
The parity bit is set according to the PAR field in US_MR. The even, odd, space, marked or
none parity bit can be configured. The MSBF field in US_MR configures which data bit is sent
first. If written at 1, the most significant bit is sent first. At 0, the less significant bit is sent first.
The number of stop bits is selected by the NBSTOP field in US_MR. The 1.5 stop bit is supported in asynchronous mode only.
281
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
Figure 29-5. Character Transmit
Example: 8-bit, Parity Enabled One Stop
Baud Rate
Clock
TXD
Start
Bit
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Parity
Bit
Stop
Bit
The characters are sent by writing in the Transmit Holding Register (US_THR). The transmitter reports two status bits in the Channel Status Register (US_CSR): TXRDY (Transmitter
Ready), which indicates that US_THR is empty and TXEMPTY, which indicates that all the
characters written in US_THR have been processed. When the current character processing
is completed, the last character written in US_THR is transferred into the Shift Register of the
transmitter and US_THR becomes empty, thus TXRDY raises.
Both TXRDY and TXEMPTY bits are low since the transmitter is disabled. Writing a character
in US_THR while TXRDY is active has no effect and the written character is lost.
Figure 29-6. Transmitter Status
Baud Rate
Clock
TXD
Start
D0
Bit
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Parity Stop Start
D0
Bit Bit Bit
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Parity Stop
Bit Bit
Write
US_THR
TXRDY
TXEMPTY
29.6.3.2
Asynchronous Receiver
If the USART is programmed in asynchronous operating mode (SYNC = 0), the receiver oversamples the RXD input line. The oversampling is either 16 or 8 times the Baud Rate clock,
depending on the OVER bit in the Mode Register (US_MR).
The receiver samples the RXD line. If the line is sampled during one half of a bit time at 0, a
start bit is detected and data, parity and stop bits are successively sampled on the bit rate
clock.
If the oversampling is 16, (OVER at 0), a start is detected at the eighth sample at 0. Then, data
bits, parity bit and stop bit are sampled on each 16 sampling clock cycle. If the oversampling is
8 (OVER at 1), a start bit is detected at the fourth sample at 0. Then, data bits, parity bit and
stop bit are sampled on each 8 sampling clock cycle.
The number of data bits, first bit sent and parity mode are selected by the same fields and bits
as the transmitter, i.e. respectively CHRL, MODE9, MSBF and PAR. The number of stop bits
has no effect on the receiver as it considers only one stop bit, regardless of the field NBSTOP,
282
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
so that resynchronization between the receiver and the transmitter can occur. Moreover, as
soon as the stop bit is sampled, the receiver starts looking for a new start bit so that resynchronization can also be accomplished when the transmitter is operating with one stop bit.
Figure 29-7 and Figure 29-8 illustrate start detection and character reception when USART
operates in asynchronous mode.
Figure 29-7. Asynchronous Start Detection
Baud Rate
Clock
Sampling
Clock (x16)
RXD
Sampling
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
D0
Sampling
Start
Detection
RXD
Sampling
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0 1
Start
Rejection
Figure 29-8. Asynchronous Character Reception
Example: 8-bit, Parity Enabled
Baud Rate
Clock
RXD
Start
Detection
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
samples samples samples samples samples samples samples samples samples samples
D0
29.6.3.3
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Parity
Bit
Stop
Bit
Synchronous Receiver
In synchronous mode (SYNC = 1), the receiver samples the RXD signal on each rising edge of
the Baud Rate Clock. If a low level is detected, it is considered as a start. All data bits, the parity bit and the stop bits are sampled and the receiver waits for the next start bit. Synchronous
mode operations provide a high speed transfer capability.
Configuration fields and bits are the same as in asynchronous mode.
Figure 29-9 illustrates a character reception in synchronous mode.
283
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
Figure 29-9. Synchronous Mode Character Reception
Example: 8-bit, Parity Enabled 1 Stop
Baud Rate
Clock
RXD
Sampling
Start
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
Stop Bit
D7
Parity Bit
29.6.3.4
Receiver Operations
When a character reception is completed, it is transferred to the Receive Holding Register
(US_RHR) and the RXRDY bit in the Status Register (US_CSR) rises. If a character is completed while the RXRDY is set, the OVRE (Overrun Error) bit is set. The last character is
transferred into US_RHR and overwrites the previous one. The OVRE bit is cleared by writing
the Control Register (US_CR) with the RSTSTA (Reset Status) bit at 1.
Figure 29-10. Receiver Status
Baud Rate
Clock
RXD
Start
D0
Bit
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Parity Stop Start
D0
Bit Bit Bit
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Parity Stop
Bit Bit
RSTSTA = 1
Write
US_CR
Read
US_RHR
RXRDY
OVRE
284
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
29.6.3.5
Parity
The USART supports five parity modes selected by programming the PAR field in the Mode
Register (US_MR). The PAR field also enables the Multidrop mode, see ”Multidrop Mode” on
page 286. Even and odd parity bit generation and error detection are supported.
If even parity is selected, the parity generator of the transmitter drives the parity bit at 0 if a
number of 1s in the character data bit is even, and at 1 if the number of 1s is odd. Accordingly,
the receiver parity checker counts the number of received 1s and reports a parity error if the
sampled parity bit does not correspond. If odd parity is selected, the parity generator of the
transmitter drives the parity bit at 1 if a number of 1s in the character data bit is even, and at 0
if the number of 1s is odd. Accordingly, the receiver parity checker counts the number of
received 1s and reports a parity error if the sampled parity bit does not correspond. If the mark
parity is used, the parity generator of the transmitter drives the parity bit at 1 for all characters.
The receiver parity checker reports an error if the parity bit is sampled at 0. If the space parity
is used, the parity generator of the transmitter drives the parity bit at 0 for all characters. The
receiver parity checker reports an error if the parity bit is sampled at 1. If parity is disabled, the
transmitter does not generate any parity bit and the receiver does not report any parity error.
Table 29-6 shows an example of the parity bit for the character 0x41 (character ASCII “A”)
depending on the configuration of the USART. Because there are two bits at 1, 1 bit is added
when a parity is odd, or 0 is added when a parity is even.
Table 29-6.
Parity Bit Examples
Character
Hexa
Binary
Parity Bit
Parity Mode
A
0x41
0100 0001
1
Odd
A
0x41
0100 0001
0
Even
A
0x41
0100 0001
1
Mark
A
0x41
0100 0001
0
Space
A
0x41
0100 0001
None
None
When the receiver detects a parity error, it sets the PARE (Parity Error) bit in the Channel Status Register (US_CSR). The PARE bit can be cleared by writing the Control Register (US_CR)
with the RSTSTA bit at 1. Figure 29-11 illustrates the parity bit status setting and clearing.
285
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
Figure 29-11. Parity Error
Baud Rate
Clock
RXD
Start
D0
Bit
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Bad Stop
Parity Bit
Bit
RSTSTA = 1
Write
US_CR
PARE
RXRDY
29.6.3.6
Multidrop Mode
If the PAR field in the Mode Register (US_MR) is programmed to the value 0x6 or 0x07, the
USART runs in Multidrop Mode. This mode differentiates the data characters and the address
characters. Data is transmitted with the parity bit at 0 and addresses are transmitted with the
parity bit at 1.
If the USART is configured in multidrop mode, the receiver sets the PARE parity error bit when
the parity bit is high and the transmitter is able to send a character with the parity bit high when
the Control Register is written with the SENDA bit at 1.
To handle parity error, the PARE bit is cleared when the Control Register is written with the bit
RSTSTA at 1.
The transmitter sends an address byte (parity bit set) when SENDA is written to US_CR. In
this case, the next byte written to US_THR is transmitted as an address. Any character written
in US_THR without having written the command SENDA is transmitted normally with the parity
at 0.
29.6.3.7
Transmitter Timeguard
The timeguard feature enables the USART interface with slow remote devices.
The timeguard function enables the transmitter to insert an idle state on the TXD line between
two characters. This idle state actually acts as a long stop bit.
The duration of the idle state is programmed in the TG field of the Transmitter Timeguard Register (US_TTGR). When this field is programmed at zero no timeguard is generated.
Otherwise, the transmitter holds a high level on TXD after each transmitted byte during the
number of bit periods programmed in TG in addition to the number of stop bits.
As illustrated in Figure 29-12, the behavior of TXRDY and TXEMPTY status bits is modified by
the programming of a timeguard. TXRDY rises only when the start bit of the next character is
sent, and thus remains at 0 during the timeguard transmission if a character has been written
in US_THR. TXEMPTY remains low until the timeguard transmission is completed as the timeguard is part of the current character being transmitted.
286
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
Figure 29-12. Timeguard Operations
TG = 4
TG = 4
Baud Rate
Clock
TXD
Start
D0
Bit
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Parity Stop
Bit Bit
Start
D0
Bit
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Parity Stop
Bit Bit
Write
US_THR
TXRDY
TXEMPTY
Table 29-7 indicates the maximum length of a timeguard period that the transmitter can handle
in relation to the function of the Baud Rate.
Table 29-7.
29.6.3.8
Maximum Timeguard Length Depending on Baud Rate
Baud Rate
Bit time
Timeguard
Bit/sec
µs
ms
1 200
833
212.50
9 600
104
26.56
14400
69.4
17.71
19200
52.1
13.28
28800
34.7
8.85
33400
29.9
7.63
56000
17.9
4.55
57600
17.4
4.43
115200
8.7
2.21
Receiver Time-out
The Receiver Time-out provides support in handling variable-length frames. This feature
detects an idle condition on the RXD line. When a time-out is detected, the bit TIMEOUT in the
Channel Status Register (US_CSR) rises and can generate an interrupt, thus indicating to the
driver an end of frame.
The time-out delay period (during which the receiver waits for a new character) is programmed
in the TO field of the Receiver Time-out Register (US_RTOR). If the TO field is programmed at
0, the Receiver Time-out is disabled and no time-out is detected. The TIMEOUT bit in
US_CSR remains at 0. Otherwise, the receiver loads a 16-bit counter with the value programmed in TO. This counter is decremented at each bit period and reloaded each time a new
character is received. If the counter reaches 0, the TIMEOUT bit in the Status Register rises.
The user can either:
287
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
• Obtain an interrupt when a time-out is detected after having received at least one
character. This is performed by writing the Control Register (US_CR) with the STTTO
(Start Time-out) bit at 1.
• Obtain a periodic interrupt while no character is received. This is performed by writing
US_CR with the RETTO (Reload and Start Time-out) bit at 1.
If STTTO is performed, the counter clock is stopped until a first character is received. The idle
state on RXD before the start of the frame does not provide a time-out. This prevents having to
obtain a periodic interrupt and enables a wait of the end of frame when the idle state on RXD
is detected.
If RETTO is performed, the counter starts counting down immediately from the value TO. This
enables generation of a periodic interrupt so that a user time-out can be handled, for example
when no key is pressed on a keyboard.
Figure 29-13 shows the block diagram of the Receiver Time-out feature.
Figure 29-13. Receiver Time-out Block Diagram
TO
Baud Rate
Clock
1
D
Clock
Q
16-bit Time-out
Counter
16-bit
Value
=
STTTO
Character
Received
Clear
Load
TIMEOUT
0
RETTO
Table 29-8 gives the maximum time-out period for some standard baud rates.
Table 29-8.
288
Maximum Time-out Period
Baud Rate
Bit Time
Time-out
bit/sec
µs
ms
600
1 667
109 225
1 200
833
54 613
2 400
417
27 306
4 800
208
13 653
9 600
104
6 827
14400
69
4 551
19200
52
3 413
28800
35
2 276
33400
30
1 962
56000
18
1 170
57600
17
1 138
200000
5
328
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
29.6.3.9
Framing Error
The receiver is capable of detecting framing errors. A framing error happens when the stop bit
of a received character is detected at level 0. This can occur if the receiver and the transmitter
are fully desynchronized.
A framing error is reported on the FRAME bit of the Channel Status Register (US_CSR). The
FRAME bit is asserted in the middle of the stop bit as soon as the framing error is detected. It
is cleared by writing the Control Register (US_CR) with the RSTSTA bit at 1.
Figure 29-14. Framing Error Status
Baud Rate
Clock
RXD
Start
D0
Bit
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Parity Stop
Bit Bit
RSTSTA = 1
Write
US_CR
FRAME
RXRDY
29.6.3.10
Transmit Break
The user can request the transmitter to generate a break condition on the TXD line. A break
condition drives the TXD line low during at least one complete character. It appears the same
as a 0x00 character sent with the parity and the stop bits at 0. However, the transmitter holds
the TXD line at least during one character until the user requests the break condition to be
removed.
A break is transmitted by writing the Control Register (US_CR) with the STTBRK bit at 1. This
can be performed at any time, either while the transmitter is empty (no character in either the
Shift Register or in US_THR) or when a character is being transmitted. If a break is requested
while a character is being shifted out, the character is first completed before the TXD line is
held low.
Once STTBRK command is requested further STTBRK commands are ignored until the end of
the break is completed.
The break condition is removed by writing US_CR with the STPBRK bit at 1. If the STPBRK is
requested before the end of the minimum break duration (one character, including start, data,
parity and stop bits), the transmitter ensures that the break condition completes.
The transmitter considers the break as though it is a character, i.e. the STTBRK and STPBRK
commands are taken into account only if the TXRDY bit in US_CSR is at 1 and the start of the
break condition clears the TXRDY and TXEMPTY bits as if a character is processed.
Writing US_CR with the both STTBRK and STPBRK bits at 1 can lead to an unpredictable
result. All STPBRK commands requested without a previous STTBRK command are ignored.
A byte written into the Transmit Holding Register while a break is pending, but not started, is
ignored.
289
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
After the break condition, the transmitter returns the TXD line to 1 for a minimum of 12 bit
times. Thus, the transmitter ensures that the remote receiver detects correctly the end of
break and the start of the next character. If the timeguard is programmed with a value higher
than 12, the TXD line is held high for the timeguard period.
After holding the TXD line for this period, the transmitter resumes normal operations.
Figure 29-15 illustrates the effect of both the Start Break (STTBRK) and Stop Break (STPBRK) commands on the TXD line.
Figure 29-15. Break Transmission
Baud Rate
Clock
TXD
Start
D0
Bit
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Parity Stop
Bit Bit
STTBRK = 1
Break Transmission
End of Break
STPBRK = 1
Write
US_CR
TXRDY
TXEMPTY
29.6.3.11
Receive Break
The receiver detects a break condition when all data, parity and stop bits are low. This corresponds to detecting a framing error with data at 0x00, but FRAME remains low.
When the low stop bit is detected, the receiver asserts the RXBRK bit in US_CSR. This bit
may be cleared by writing the Control Register (US_CR) with the bit RSTSTA at 1.
An end of receive break is detected by a high level for at least 2/16 of a bit period in asynchronous operating mode or one sample at high level in synchronous operating mode. The end of
break detection also asserts the RXBRK bit.
29.6.3.12
Hardware Handshaking
The USART features a hardware handshaking out-of-band flow control. The RTS and CTS
pins are used to connect with the remote device, as shown in Figure 29-16.
Figure 29-16. Connection with a Remote Device for Hardware Handshaking
USART
Remote
Device
TXD
RXD
RXD
TXD
CTS
RTS
RTS
CTS
Setting the USART to operate with hardware handshaking is performed by writing the
USART_MODE field in the Mode Register (US_MR) to the value 0x2.
290
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
The USART behavior when hardware handshaking is enabled is the same as the behavior in
standard synchronous or asynchronous mode, except that the receiver drives the RTS pin as
described below and the level on the CTS pin modifies the behavior of the transmitter as
described below. Using this mode requires using the PDC channel for reception. The transmitter can handle hardware handshaking in any case.
Figure 29-17 shows how the receiver operates if hardware handshaking is enabled. The RTS
pin is driven high if the receiver is disabled and if the status RXBUFF (Receive Buffer Full)
coming from the PDC channel is high. Normally, the remote device does not start transmitting
while its CTS pin (driven by RTS) is high. As soon as the Receiver is enabled, the RTS falls,
indicating to the remote device that it can start transmitting. Defining a new buffer to the PDC
clears the status bit RXBUFF and, as a result, asserts the pin RTS low.
Figure 29-17. Receiver Behavior when Operating with Hardware Handshaking
RXD
RXEN = 1
RXDIS = 1
Write
US_CR
RTS
RXBUFF
Figure 29-18 shows how the transmitter operates if hardware handshaking is enabled. The
CTS pin disables the transmitter. If a character is being processing, the transmitter is disabled
only after the completion of the current character and transmission of the next character happens as soon as the pin CTS falls.
Figure 29-18. Transmitter Behavior when Operating with Hardware Handshaking
CTS
TXD
29.6.4
ISO7816 Mode
The USART features an ISO7816-compatible operating mode. This mode permits interfacing
with smart cards and Security Access Modules (SAM) communicating through an ISO7816
link. Both T = 0 and T = 1 protocols defined by the ISO7816 specification are supported.
Setting the USART in ISO7816 mode is performed by writing the USART_MODE field in the
Mode Register (US_MR) to the value 0x4 for protocol T = 0 and to the value 0x5 for protocol T
= 1.
29.6.4.1
ISO7816 Mode Overview
The ISO7816 is a half duplex communication on only one bidirectional line. The baud rate is
determined by a division of the clock provided to the remote device (see ”Baud Rate Generator” on page 277).
The USART connects to a smart card as shown in Figure 29-19. The TXD line becomes bidirectional and the Baud Rate Generator feeds the ISO7816 clock on the SCK pin. As the TXD
pin becomes bidirectional, its output remains driven by the output of the transmitter but only
291
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
when the transmitter is active while its input is directed to the input of the receiver. The USART
is considered as the master of the communication as it generates the clock.
Figure 29-19. Connection of a Smart Card to the USART
USART
CLK
SCK
I/O
TXD
Smart
Card
When operating in ISO7816, either in T = 0 or T = 1 modes, the character format is fixed. The
configuration is 8 data bits, even parity and 1 or 2 stop bits, regardless of the values programmed in the CHRL, MODE9, PAR and CHMODE fields. MSBF can be used to transmit
LSB or MSB first.
The USART cannot operate concurrently in both receiver and transmitter modes as the communication is unidirectional at a time. It has to be configured according to the required mode
by enabling or disabling either the receiver or the transmitter as desired. Enabling both the
receiver and the transmitter at the same time in ISO7816 mode may lead to unpredictable
results.
The ISO7816 specification defines an inverse transmission format. Data bits of the character
must be transmitted on the I/O line at their negative value. The USART does not support this
format and the user has to perform an exclusive OR on the data before writing it in the Transmit Holding Register (US_THR) or after reading it in the Receive Holding Register (US_RHR).
29.6.4.2
Protocol T = 0
In T = 0 protocol, a character is made up of one start bit, eight data bits, one parity bit and one
guard time, which lasts two bit times. The transmitter shifts out the bits and does not drive the
I/O line during the guard time.
If no parity error is detected, the I/O line remains at 1 during the guard time and the transmitter
can continue with the transmission of the next character, as shown in Figure 29-20.
If a parity error is detected by the receiver, it drives the I/O line at 0 during the guard time, as
shown in Figure 29-21. This error bit is also named NACK, for Non Acknowledge. In this case,
the character lasts 1 bit time more, as the guard time length is the same and is added to the
error bit time which lasts 1 bit time.
When the USART is the receiver and it detects an error, it does not load the erroneous character in the Receive Holding Register (US_RHR). It appropriately sets the PARE bit in the Status
Register (US_SR) so that the software can handle the error.
Figure 29-20. T = 0 Protocol without Parity Error
Baud Rate
Clock
RXD
Start
Bit
292
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Parity Guard Guard Next
Bit Time 1 Time 2 Start
Bit
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
Figure 29-21. T = 0 Protocol with Parity Error
Baud Rate
Clock
Error
I/O
Start
Bit
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Parity Guard
Bit Time 1
Guard Start
Time 2 Bit
D0
D1
Repetition
Receive Error Counter
The USART receiver also records the total number of errors. This can be read in the Number
of Error (US_NER) register. The NB_ERRORS field can record up to 255 errors. Reading
US_NER automatically clears the NB_ERRORS field.
Receive NACK Inhibit
The USART can also be configured to inhibit an error. This can be achieved by setting the
INACK bit in the Mode Register (US_MR). If INACK is at 1, no error signal is driven on the I/O
line even if a parity bit is detected, but the INACK bit is set in the Status Register (US_SR).
The INACK bit can be cleared by writing the Control Register (US_CR) with the RSTNACK bit
at 1.
Moreover, if INACK is set, the erroneous received character is stored in the Receive Holding
Register, as if no error occurred. However, the RXRDY bit does not raise.
Transmit Character Repetition
When the USART is transmitting a character and gets a NACK, it can automatically repeat the
character before moving on to the next one. Repetition is enabled by writing the
MAX_ITERATION field in the Mode Register (US_MR) at a value higher than 0. Each character can be transmitted up to eight times; the first transmission plus seven repetitions.
If MAX_ITERATION does not equal zero, the USART repeats the character as many times as
the value loaded in MAX_ITERATION.
When the USART repetition number reaches MAX_ITERATION, the ITERATION bit is set in
the Channel Status Register (US_CSR). If the repetition of the character is acknowledged by
the receiver, the repetitions are stopped and the iteration counter is cleared.
The ITERATION bit in US_CSR can be cleared by writing the Control Register with the RSIT
bit at 1.
Disable Successive Receive NACK
The receiver can limit the number of successive NACKs sent back to the remote transmitter.
This is programmed by setting the bit DSNACK in the Mode Register (US_MR). The maximum
number of NACK transmitted is programmed in the MAX_ITERATION field. As soon as
MAX_ITERATION is reached, the character is considered as correct, an acknowledge is sent
on the line and the ITERATION bit in the Channel Status Register is set.
29.6.4.3
Protocol T = 1
When operating in ISO7816 protocol T = 1, the transmission is similar to an asynchronous format with only one stop bit. The parity is generated when transmitting and checked when
receiving. Parity error detection sets the PARE bit in the Channel Status Register (US_CSR).
293
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
29.6.5
IrDA Mode
The USART features an IrDA mode supplying half-duplex point-to-point wireless communication. It embeds the modulator and demodulator which allows a glueless connection to the
infrared transceivers, as shown in Figure 29-22. The modulator and demodulator are compliant with the IrDA specification version 1.1 and support data transfer speeds ranging from 2.4
Kb/s to 115.2 Kb/s.
The USART IrDA mode is enabled by setting the USART_MODE field in the Mode Register
(US_MR) to the value 0x8. The IrDA Filter Register (US_IF) allows configuring the demodulator filter. The USART transmitter and receiver operate in a normal asynchronous mode and all
parameters are accessible. Note that the modulator and the demodulator are activated.
Figure 29-22. Connection to IrDA Transceivers
USART
IrDA
Transceivers
Receiver
Demodulator
Transmitter
Modulator
RXD
RX
TX
TXD
The receiver and the transmitter must be enabled or disabled according to the direction of the
transmission to be managed.
29.6.5.1
IrDA Modulation
For baud rates up to and including 115.2 Kbits/sec, the RZI modulation scheme is used. "0" is
represented by a light pulse of 3/16th of a bit time. Some examples of signal pulse duration
are shown in Table 29-9.
Table 29-9.
IrDA Pulse Duration
Baud Rate
Pulse Duration (3/16)
2.4 Kb/s
78.13 µs
9.6 Kb/s
19.53 µs
19.2 Kb/s
9.77 µs
38.4 Kb/s
4.88 µs
57.6 Kb/s
3.26 µs
115.2 Kb/s
1.63 µs
Figure 29-23 shows an example of character transmission.
294
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
Figure 29-23. IrDA Modulation
Start
Bit
Transmitter
Output
0
Stop
Bit
Data Bits
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
TXD
3
16 Bit Period
Bit Period
29.6.5.2
IrDA Baud Rate
Table 29-10 gives some examples of CD values, baud rate error and pulse duration. Note that
the requirement on the maximum acceptable error of ±1.87% must be met.
Table 29-10. IrDA Baud Rate Error
Peripheral Clock
Baud Rate
CD
Baud Rate Error
Pulse Time
3 686 400
115 200
2
0.00%
1.63
20 000 000
115 200
11
1.38%
1.63
32 768 000
115 200
18
1.25%
1.63
40 000 000
115 200
22
1.38%
1.63
3 686 400
57 600
4
0.00%
3.26
20 000 000
57 600
22
1.38%
3.26
32 768 000
57 600
36
1.25%
3.26
40 000 000
57 600
43
0.93%
3.26
3 686 400
38 400
6
0.00%
4.88
20 000 000
38 400
33
1.38%
4.88
32 768 000
38 400
53
0.63%
4.88
40 000 000
38 400
65
0.16%
4.88
3 686 400
19 200
12
0.00%
9.77
20 000 000
19 200
65
0.16%
9.77
32 768 000
19 200
107
0.31%
9.77
40 000 000
19 200
130
0.16%
9.77
3 686 400
9 600
24
0.00%
19.53
20 000 000
9 600
130
0.16%
19.53
32 768 000
9 600
213
0.16%
19.53
40 000 000
9 600
260
0.16%
19.53
3 686 400
2 400
96
0.00%
78.13
20 000 000
2 400
521
0.03%
78.13
32 768 000
2 400
853
0.04%
78.13
295
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
29.6.5.3
IrDA Demodulator
The demodulator is based on the IrDA Receive filter comprised of an 8-bit down counter which
is loaded with the value programmed in US_IF. When a falling edge is detected on the RXD
pin, the Filter Counter starts counting down at the Master Clock (MCK) speed. If a rising edge
is detected on the RXD pin, the counter stops and is reloaded with US_IF. If no rising edge is
detected when the counter reaches 0, the input of the receiver is driven low during one bit
time.
Figure 29-24 illustrates the operations of the IrDA demodulator.
Figure 29-24. IrDA Demodulator Operations
MCK
RXD
Counter
Value
Receiver
Input
6
5
4
3
2
6
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Pulse
Accepted
Pulse
Rejected
Driven Low During 16 Baud Rate Clock Cycles
As the IrDA mode uses the same logic as the ISO7816, note that the FI_DI_RATIO field in
US_FIDI must be set to a value higher than 0 in order to assure IrDA communications operate
correctly.
296
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
29.6.6
RS485 Mode
The USART features the RS485 mode to enable line driver control. While operating in RS485
mode, the USART behaves as though in asynchronous or synchronous mode and configuration of all the parameters is possible. The difference is that the RTS pin is driven high when the
transmitter is operating. The behavior of the RTS pin is controlled by the TXEMPTY bit. A typical connection of the USART to a RS485 bus is shown in Figure 29-25.
Figure 29-25. Typical Connection to a RS485 Bus
USART
RXD
Differential
Bus
TXD
RTS
The USART is set in RS485 mode by programming the USART_MODE field in the Mode Register (US_MR) to the value 0x1.
The RTS pin is at a level inverse to the TXEMPTY bit. Significantly, the RTS pin remains high
when a timeguard is programmed so that the line can remain driven after the last character
completion. Figure 29-26 gives an example of the RTS waveform during a character transmission when the timeguard is enabled.
Figure 29-26. Example of RTS Drive with Timeguard
TG = 4
Baud Rate
Clock
TXD
Start
D0
Bit
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Parity Stop
Bit Bit
Write
US_THR
TXRDY
TXEMPTY
RTS
297
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
29.6.7
Test Modes
The USART can be programmed to operate in three different test modes. The internal loopback capability allows on-board diagnostics. In the loopback mode the USART interface pins
are disconnected or not and reconfigured for loopback internally or externally.
29.6.7.1
Normal Mode
Normal mode connects the RXD pin on the receiver input and the transmitter output on the
TXD pin.
Figure 29-27. Normal Mode Configuration
RXD
Receiver
TXD
Transmitter
29.6.7.2
Automatic Echo Mode
Automatic echo mode allows bit-by-bit retransmission. When a bit is received on the RXD pin,
it is sent to the TXD pin, as shown in Figure 29-28. Programming the transmitter has no effect
on the TXD pin. The RXD pin is still connected to the receiver input, thus the receiver remains
active.
Figure 29-28. Automatic Echo Mode Configuration
RXD
Receiver
TXD
Transmitter
29.6.7.3
Local Loopback Mode
Local loopback mode connects the output of the transmitter directly to the input of the receiver,
as shown in Figure 29-29. The TXD and RXD pins are not used. The RXD pin has no effect on
the receiver and the TXD pin is continuously driven high, as in idle state.
Figure 29-29. Local Loopback Mode Configuration
RXD
Receiver
Transmitter
298
1
TXD
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
29.6.7.4
Remote Loopback Mode
Remote loopback mode directly connects the RXD pin to the TXD pin, as shown in Figure 2930. The transmitter and the receiver are disabled and have no effect. This mode allows bit-bybit retransmission.
Figure 29-30. Remote Loopback Mode Configuration
Receiver
1
RXD
TXD
Transmitter
299
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
29.7
USART User Interface
Table 29-11.
USART Memory Map
Offset
Register
Name
Access
Reset State
0x0000
Control Register
US_CR
Write-only
–
0x0004
Mode Register
US_MR
Read/Write
–
0x0008
Interrupt Enable Register
US_IER
Write-only
–
0x000C
Interrupt Disable Register
US_IDR
Write-only
–
0x0010
Interrupt Mask Register
US_IMR
Read-only
0
0x0014
Channel Status Register
US_CSR
Read-only
–
0x0018
Receiver Holding Register
US_RHR
Read-only
0
0x001C
Transmitter Holding Register
US_THR
Write-only
–
0x0020
Baud Rate Generator Register
US_BRGR
Read/Write
0
0x0024
Receiver Time-out Register
US_RTOR
Read/Write
0
0x0028
Transmitter Timeguard Register
US_TTGR
Read/Write
0
–
–
–
0x2C - 0x3C
0x0040
FI DI Ratio Register
US_FIDI
Read/Write
0x174
0x0044
Number of Errors Register
US_NER
Read-only
–
0x0048
Reserved
–
–
–
0x004C
IrDA Filter Register
US_IF
Read/Write
0
Reserved
–
–
–
Reserved for PDC Registers
–
–
–
0x5C - 0xFC
0x100 - 0x128
300
Reserved
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
29.7.1
USART Control Register
Name:
US_CR
Access Type:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
RTSDIS
18
RTSEN
17
–
16
–
15
RETTO
14
RSTNACK
13
RSTIT
12
SENDA
11
STTTO
10
STPBRK
9
STTBRK
8
RSTSTA
7
TXDIS
6
TXEN
5
RXDIS
4
RXEN
3
RSTTX
2
RSTRX
1
–
0
–
• RSTRX: Reset Receiver
0: No effect.
1: Resets the receiver.
• RSTTX: Reset Transmitter
0: No effect.
1: Resets the transmitter.
• RXEN: Receiver Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the receiver, if RXDIS is 0.
• RXDIS: Receiver Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the receiver.
• TXEN: Transmitter Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the transmitter if TXDIS is 0.
• TXDIS: Transmitter Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the transmitter.
• RSTSTA: Reset Status Bits
0: No effect.
1: Resets the status bits PARE, FRAME, OVRE and RXBRK in the US_CSR.
• STTBRK: Start Break
0: No effect.
1: Starts transmission of a break after the characters present in US_THR and the Transmit Shift Register have been transmitted. No effect if a break is already being transmitted.
• STPBRK: Stop Break
0: No effect.
1: Stops transmission of the break after a minimum of one character length and transmits a high level during 12-bit periods.
No effect if no break is being transmitted.
301
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
• STTTO: Start Time-out
0: No effect
1: Starts waiting for a character before clocking the time-out counter.
• SENDA: Send Address
0: No effect.
1: In Multidrop Mode only, the next character written to the US_THR is sent with the address bit set.
• RSTIT: Reset Iterations
0: No effect.
1: Resets ITERATION in US_CSR. No effect if the ISO7816 is not enabled.
• RSTNACK: Reset Non Acknowledge
0: No effect
1: Resets NACK in US_CSR.
• RETTO: Rearm Time-out
0: No effect
1: Restart Time-out
• RTSEN: Request to Send Enable
0: No effect.
1: Drives the pin RTS to 0.
• RTSDIS: Request to Send Disable
0: No effect.
1: Drives the pin RTS to 1.
302
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
29.7.2
USART Mode Register
Name:
US_MR
Access Type:
Read/Write
31
ONEBIT
30
–
29
–
28
FILTER
27
–
26
25
MAX_ITERATION
24
23
–
22
VAR_SYNC
21
DSNACK
20
INACK
19
OVER
18
CLKO
17
MODE9
16
MSBF
14
13
12
11
10
PAR
9
8
SYNC
4
3
2
1
0
15
CHMODE
7
NBSTOP
6
5
CHRL
USCLKS
USART_MODE
• USART_MODE
USART_MODE
Mode of the USART
0
0
0
0
Normal
0
0
0
1
RS485
0
0
1
0
Hardware Handshaking
0
0
1
1
Reserved
0
1
0
0
IS07816 Protocol: T = 0
0
1
0
1
Reserved
0
1
1
0
IS07816 Protocol: T = 1
0
1
1
1
Reserved
1
0
0
0
IrDA
1
1
x
x
Reserved
• USCLKS: Clock Selection
USCLKS
Selected Clock
0
0
MCK
0
1
MCK / DIV
1
0
Reserved
1
1
SCK
• CHRL: Character Length.
CHRL
Character Length
0
0
5 bits
0
1
6 bits
1
0
7 bits
1
1
8 bits
303
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
• SYNC: Synchronous Mode Select
0: USART operates in Asynchronous Mode.
1: USART operates in Synchronous Mode.
• PAR: Parity Type
PAR
Parity Type
0
0
0
Even parity
0
0
1
Odd parity
0
1
0
Parity forced to 0 (Space)
0
1
1
Parity forced to 1 (Mark)
1
0
x
No parity
1
1
x
Multidrop mode
• NBSTOP: Number of Stop Bits
NBSTOP
Asynchronous (SYNC = 0)
Synchronous (SYNC = 1)
0
0
1 stop bit
1 stop bit
0
1
1.5 stop bits
Reserved
1
0
2 stop bits
2 stop bits
1
1
Reserved
Reserved
• CHMODE: Channel Mode
CHMODE
Mode Description
0
0
Normal Mode
0
1
Automatic Echo. Receiver input is connected to the TXD pin.
1
0
Local Loopback. Transmitter output is connected to the Receiver Input..
1
1
Remote Loopback. RXD pin is internally connected to the TXD pin.
• MSBF: Bit Order
0: Least Significant Bit is sent/received first.
1: Most Significant Bit is sent/received first.
• MODE9: 9-bit Character Length
0: CHRL defines character length.
1: 9-bit character length.
• CKLO: Clock Output Select
0: The USART does not drive the SCK pin.
1: The USART drives the SCK pin if USCLKS does not select the external clock SCK.
• OVER: Oversampling Mode
0: 16x Oversampling.
1: 8x Oversampling.
• INACK: Inhibit Non Acknowledge
0: The NACK is generated.
1: The NACK is not generated.
304
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
• DSNACK: Disable Successive NACK
0: NACK is sent on the ISO line as soon as a parity error occurs in the received character (unless INACK is set).
1: Successive parity errors are counted up to the value specified in the MAX_ITERATION field. These parity errors generate a NACK on the ISO line. As soon as this value is reached, no additional NACK is sent on the ISO line. The flag
ITERATION is asserted.
• VAR_SYNC: Variable synchronization of command/data sync Start Frame Delimiter
0: User defined configuration of command or data sync field depending on SYNC value.
1: The sync field is updated when a character is written into US_THR register.
• MAX_ITERATION
Defines the maximum number of iterations in mode ISO7816, protocol T= 0.
• FILTER: Infrared Receive Line Filter
0: The USART does not filter the receive line.
1: The USART filters the receive line using a three-sample filter (1/16-bit clock) (2 over 3 majority).
• ONEBIT: Start Frame Delimiter selector
0: Start Frame delimiter is COMMAND or DATA SYNC.
1: Start Frame delimiter is One Bit.
305
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
29.7.3
USART Interrupt Enable Register
Name:
US_IER
Access Type:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
MANE
19
CTSIC
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
NACK
12
RXBUFF
11
TXBUFE
10
ITERATION
9
TXEMPTY
8
TIMEOUT
7
PARE
6
FRAME
5
OVRE
4
ENDTX
3
ENDRX
2
RXBRK
1
TXRDY
0
RXRDY
• RXRDY: RXRDY Interrupt Enable
• TXRDY: TXRDY Interrupt Enable
• RXBRK: Receiver Break Interrupt Enable
• ENDRX: End of Receive Transfer Interrupt Enable
• ENDTX: End of Transmit Interrupt Enable
• OVRE: Overrun Error Interrupt Enable
• FRAME: Framing Error Interrupt Enable
• PARE: Parity Error Interrupt Enable
• TIMEOUT: Time-out Interrupt Enable
• TXEMPTY: TXEMPTY Interrupt Enable
• ITERATION: Iteration Interrupt Enable
• TXBUFE: Buffer Empty Interrupt Enable
• RXBUFF: Buffer Full Interrupt Enable
• NACK: Non Acknowledge Interrupt Enable
• CTSIC: Clear to Send Input Change Interrupt Enable
• MANE: Manchester Error Interrupt Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the corresponding interrupt.
306
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
29.7.4
USART Interrupt Disable Register
Name:
US_IDR
Access Type:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
CTSIC
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
NACK
12
RXBUFF
11
TXBUFE
10
ITERATION
9
TXEMPTY
8
TIMEOUT
7
PARE
6
FRAME
5
OVRE
4
ENDTX
3
ENDRX
2
RXBRK
1
TXRDY
0
RXRDY
• RXRDY: RXRDY Interrupt Disable
• TXRDY: TXRDY Interrupt Disable
• RXBRK: Receiver Break Interrupt Disable
• ENDRX: End of Receive Transfer Interrupt Disable
• ENDTX: End of Transmit Interrupt Disable
• OVRE: Overrun Error Interrupt Disable
• FRAME: Framing Error Interrupt Disable
• PARE: Parity Error Interrupt Disable
• TIMEOUT: Time-out Interrupt Disable
• TXEMPTY: TXEMPTY Interrupt Disable
• ITERATION: Iteration Interrupt Disable
• TXBUFE: Buffer Empty Interrupt Disable
• RXBUFF: Buffer Full Interrupt Disable
• NACK: Non Acknowledge Interrupt Disable
• CTSIC: Clear to Send Input Change Interrupt Disable
307
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
29.7.5
USART Interrupt Mask Register
Name:
US_IMR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
CTSIC
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
NACK
12
RXBUFF
11
TXBUFE
10
ITERATION
9
TXEMPTY
8
TIMEOUT
7
PARE
6
FRAME
5
OVRE
4
ENDTX
3
ENDRX
2
RXBRK
1
TXRDY
0
RXRDY
• RXRDY: RXRDY Interrupt Mask
• TXRDY: TXRDY Interrupt Mask
• RXBRK: Receiver Break Interrupt Mask
• ENDRX: End of Receive Transfer Interrupt Mask
• ENDTX: End of Transmit Interrupt Mask
• OVRE: Overrun Error Interrupt Mask
• FRAME: Framing Error Interrupt Mask
• PARE: Parity Error Interrupt Mask
• TIMEOUT: Time-out Interrupt Mask
• TXEMPTY: TXEMPTY Interrupt Mask
• ITERATION: Iteration Interrupt Mask
• TXBUFE: Buffer Empty Interrupt Mask
• RXBUFF: Buffer Full Interrupt Mask
• NACK: Non Acknowledge Interrupt Mask
• CTSIC: Clear to Send Input Change Interrupt Mask
308
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
29.7.6
USART Channel Status Register
Name:
US_CSR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
CTS
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
CTSIC
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
NACK
12
RXBUFF
11
TXBUFE
10
ITERATION
9
TXEMPTY
8
TIMEOUT
7
PARE
6
FRAME
5
OVRE
4
ENDTX
3
ENDRX
2
RXBRK
1
TXRDY
0
RXRDY
• RXRDY: Receiver Ready
0: No complete character has been received since the last read of US_RHR or the receiver is disabled. If characters were
being received when the receiver was disabled, RXRDY changes to 1 when the receiver is enabled.
1: At least one complete character has been received and US_RHR has not yet been read.
• TXRDY: Transmitter Ready
0: A character is in the US_THR waiting to be transferred to the Transmit Shift Register, or an STTBRK command has been
requested, or the transmitter is disabled. As soon as the transmitter is enabled, TXRDY becomes 1.
1: There is no character in the US_THR.
• RXBRK: Break Received/End of Break
0: No Break received or End of Break detected since the last RSTSTA.
1: Break Received or End of Break detected since the last RSTSTA.
• ENDRX: End of Receiver Transfer
0: The End of Transfer signal from the Receive PDC channel is inactive.
1: The End of Transfer signal from the Receive PDC channel is active.
• ENDTX: End of Transmitter Transfer
0: The End of Transfer signal from the Transmit PDC channel is inactive.
1: The End of Transfer signal from the Transmit PDC channel is active.
• OVRE: Overrun Error
0: No overrun error has occurred since the last RSTSTA.
1: At least one overrun error has occurred since the last RSTSTA.
• FRAME: Framing Error
0: No stop bit has been detected low since the last RSTSTA.
1: At least one stop bit has been detected low since the last RSTSTA.
• PARE: Parity Error
0: No parity error has been detected since the last RSTSTA.
1: At least one parity error has been detected since the last RSTSTA.
• TIMEOUT: Receiver Time-out
0: There has not been a time-out since the last Start Time-out command or the Time-out Register is 0.
1: There has been a time-out since the last Start Time-out command.
309
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
• TXEMPTY: Transmitter Empty
0: There are characters in either US_THR or the Transmit Shift Register, or the transmitter is disabled.
1: There is at least one character in either US_THR or the Transmit Shift Register.
• ITERATION: Max number of Repetitions Reached
0: Maximum number of repetitions has not been reached since the last RSIT.
1: Maximum number of repetitions has been reached since the last RSIT.
• TXBUFE: Transmission Buffer Empty
0: The signal Buffer Empty from the Transmit PDC channel is inactive.
1: The signal Buffer Empty from the Transmit PDC channel is active.
• RXBUFF: Reception Buffer Full
0: The signal Buffer Full from the Receive PDC channel is inactive.
1: The signal Buffer Full from the Receive PDC channel is active.
• NACK: Non Acknowledge
0: No Non Acknowledge has not been detected since the last RSTNACK.
1: At least one Non Acknowledge has been detected since the last RSTNACK.
• CTSIC: Clear to Send Input Change Flag
0: No input change has been detected on the CTS pin since the last read of US_CSR.
1: At least one input change has been detected on the CTS pin since the last read of US_CSR.
• CTS: Image of CTS Input
0: CTS is at 0.
1: CTS is at 1.
310
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
29.7.7
USART Receive Holding Register
Name:
US_RHR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
RXSYNH
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
RXCHR
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RXCHR
• RXCHR: Received Character
Last character received if RXRDY is set.
• RXSYNH: Received Sync
0: Last Character received is a Data.
1: Last Character received is a Command.
29.7.8
USART Transmit Holding Register
Name:
US_THR
Access Type:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
TXSYNH
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
TXCHR
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TXCHR
• TXCHR: Character to be Transmitted
Next character to be transmitted after the current character if TXRDY is not set.
• TXSYNH: Sync Field to be transmitted
0: The next character sent is encoded as a data. Start Frame Delimiter is DATA SYNC.
1: The next character sent is encoded as a command. Start Frame Delimiter is COMMAND SYNC.
311
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
29.7.9
USART Baud Rate Generator Register
Name:
US_BRGR
Access Type:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
17
–
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
CD
7
6
5
4
CD
• CD: Clock Divider
USART_MODE ≠ ISO7816
SYNC = 0
CD
OVER = 0
0
1 to 65535
312
SYNC = 1
USART_MODE =
ISO7816
OVER = 1
Baud Rate Clock Disabled
Baud Rate =
Selected Clock/16/CD
Baud Rate =
Selected Clock/8/CD
Baud Rate =
Selected Clock /CD
Baud Rate = Selected
Clock/CD/FI_DI_RATIO
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
29.7.10
USART Receiver Time-out Register
Name:
US_RTOR
Access Type:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
TO
7
6
5
4
TO
• TO: Time-out Value
0: The Receiver Time-out is disabled.
1 - 65535: The Receiver Time-out is enabled and the Time-out delay is TO x Bit Period.
29.7.11
USART Transmitter Timeguard Register
Name:
US_TTGR
Access Type:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TG
• TG: Timeguard Value
0: The Transmitter Timeguard is disabled.
1 - 255: The Transmitter timeguard is enabled and the timeguard delay is TG x Bit Period.
313
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
29.7.12
USART FI DI RATIO Register
Name:
US_FIDI
Access Type:
Read/Write
Reset Value :
0x174
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
9
FI_DI_RATIO
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
FI_DI_RATIO
• FI_DI_RATIO: FI Over DI Ratio Value
0: If ISO7816 mode is selected, the Baud Rate Generator generates no signal.
1 - 2047: If ISO7816 mode is selected, the Baud Rate is the clock provided on SCK divided by FI_DI_RATIO.
29.7.13
USART Number of Errors Register
Name:
US_NER
Access Type:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
NB_ERRORS
• NB_ERRORS: Number of Errors
Total number of errors that occurred during an ISO7816 transfer. This register automatically clears when read.
314
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
29.7.14
USART IrDA FILTER Register
Name:
US_IF
Access Type:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IRDA_FILTER
• IRDA_FILTER: IrDA Filter
Sets the filter of the IrDA demodulator.
315
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
316
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
30. Synchronous Serial Controller (SSC)
30.1
Overview
The Atmel Synchronous Serial Controller (SSC) provides a synchronous communication link
with external devices. It supports many serial synchronous communication protocols generally
used in audio and telecom applications such as I2S, Short Frame Sync, Long Frame Sync, etc.
The SSC contains an independent receiver and transmitter and a common clock divider. The
receiver and the transmitter each interface with three signals: the TD/RD signal for data, the
TK/RK signal for the clock and the TF/RF signal for the Frame Sync. Transfers contain up to 16
data of up to 32 bits. They can be programmed to start automatically or on different events
detected on the Frame Sync signal.
The SSC’s high-level of programmability and its two dedicated PDC channels of up to 32 bits
permit a continuous high bit rate data transfer without processor intervention.
Featuring connection to two PDC channels, the SSC permits interfacing with low processor
overhead to the following:
• CODEC’s in master or slave mode
• DAC through dedicated serial interface, particularly I2S
• Magnetic card reader
317
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
30.2
Block Diagram
Figure 30-1. Block Diagram
ASB
APB Bridge
PDC
APB
TF
TK
PMC
TD
MCK
PIO
SSC Interface
RF
RK
Interrupt Control
RD
SSC Interrupt
30.3
Application Block Diagram
Figure 30-2. Application Block Diagram
OS or RTOS Driver
Power
Management
Interrupt
Management
Test
Management
SSC
Serial AUDIO
318
Codec
Time Slot
Management
Frame
Management
Line Interface
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
30.4
Pin Name List
Table 30-1.
I/O Lines Description
Pin Name
Pin Description
RF
Receiver Frame Synchro
Input/Output
RK
Receiver Clock
Input/Output
RD
Receiver Data
Input
TF
Transmitter Frame Synchro
Input/Output
TK
Transmitter Clock
Input/Output
TD
Transmitter Data
Output
30.5
30.5.1
Type
Product Dependencies
I/O Lines
The pins used for interfacing the compliant external devices may be multiplexed with PIO lines.
Before using the SSC receiver, the PIO controller must be configured to dedicate the SSC
receiver I/O lines to the SSC peripheral mode.
Before using the SSC transmitter, the PIO controller must be configured to dedicate the SSC
transmitter I/O lines to the SSC peripheral mode.
30.5.2
Power Management
The SSC is not continuously clocked. The SSC interface may be clocked through the Power
Management Controller (PMC), therefore the programmer must first configure the PMC to
enable the SSC clock.
30.5.3
Interrupt
The SSC interface has an interrupt line connected to the Advanced Interrupt Controller (AIC).
Handling interrupts requires programming the AIC before configuring the SSC.
All SSC interrupts can be enabled/disabled configuring the SSC Interrupt mask register. Each
pending and unmasked SSC interrupt will assert the SSC interrupt line. The SSC interrupt service routine can get the interrupt origin by reading the SSC interrupt status register.
319
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
30.6
Functional Description
This chapter contains the functional description of the following: SSC Functional Block, Clock
Management, Data format, Start, Transmitter, Receiver and Frame Sync.
The receiver and transmitter operate separately. However, they can work synchronously by programming the receiver to use the transmit clock and/or to start a data transfer when transmission
starts. Alternatively, this can be done by programming the transmitter to use the receive clock
and/or to start a data transfer when reception starts. The transmitter and the receiver can be programmed to operate with the clock signals provided on either the TK or RK pins. This allows the
SSC to support many slave-mode data transfers. The maximum clock speed allowed on the TK
and RK pins is the master clock divided by 2. Each level of the clock must be stable for at least
two master clock periods.
Figure 30-3. SSC Functional Block Diagram
Transmitter
MCK
TK Input
Clock
Divider
Transmit Clock
Controller
RX clock
TF
RF
Start
Selector
TX clock
Clock Output
Controller
TK
Frame Sync
Controller
TF
Transmit Shift Register
TX PDC
APB
Transmit Holding
Register
TD
Transmit Sync
Holding Register
Load Shift
User
Interface
Receiver
RK Input
Receive Clock RX Clock
Controller
TX Clock
RF
TF
Start
Selector
Interrupt Control
RK
Frame Sync
Controller
RF
Receive Shift Register
RX PDC
PDC
Clock Output
Controller
Receive Holding
Register
RD
Receive Sync
Holding Register
Load Shift
AIC
320
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
30.6.1
Clock Management
The transmitter clock can be generated by:
• an external clock received on the TK I/O pad
• the receiver clock
• the internal clock divider
The receiver clock can be generated by:
• an external clock received on the RK I/O pad
• the transmitter clock
• the internal clock divider
Furthermore, the transmitter block can generate an external clock on the TK I/O pad, and the
receiver block can generate an external clock on the RK I/O pad.
This allows the SSC to support many Master and Slave-mode data transfers.
30.6.2
Clock Divider
Figure 30-4. Divided Clock Block diagram
Clock Divider
SSC_CMR
MCK
/2
12-bit Counter
Divided Clock
The Master Clock divider is determined by the 12-bit field DIV counter and comparator (so its
maximal value is 4095) in the Clock Mode Register SSC_CMR, allowing a Master Clock division
by up to 8190. The Divided Clock is provided to both the Receiver and Transmitter. When this
field is programmed to 0, the Clock Divider is not used and remains inactive.
When DIV is set to a value equal or greater to 1, the Divided Clock has a frequency of Master
Clock divided by 2 times DIV. Each level of the Divided Clock has a duration of the Master Clock
multiplied by DIV. This ensures a 50% duty cycle for the Divided Clock regardless if the DIV
value is even or odd.
321
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
Figure 30-5.
Divided Clock Generation
Master Clock
Divided Clock
DIV = 1
Divided Clock Frequency = MCK/2
Master Clock
Divided Clock
DIV = 3
Divided Clock Frequency = MCK/6
Table 30-2.
30.6.2.1
Bit Rate
Maximum
Minimum
MCK / 2
MCK / 8190
Transmitter Clock Management
The transmitter clock is generated from the receiver clock or the divider clock or an external
clock scanned on the TK I/O pad. The transmitter clock is selected by the CKS field in
SSC_TCMR (Transmit Clock Mode Register). Transmit Clock can be inverted independently by
the CKI bits in SSC_TCMR.
The transmitter can also drive the TK I/O pad continuously or be limited to the actual data transfer. The clock output is configured by the SSC_TCMR register. The Transmit Clock Inversion
(CKI) bits have no effect on the clock outputs. Programming the TCMR register to select TK pin
(CKS field) and at the same time Continuous Transmit Clock (CKO field) might lead to unpredictable results.
Figure 30-6. Transmitter Clock Management
SSC_TCMR.CKS
SSC_TCMR.CKO
TK
Receiver Clock
TK
Divider Clock
0
Transmitter Clock
1
SSC_TCMR.CKI
30.6.2.2
Receiver Clock Management
The receiver clock is generated from the transmitter clock or the divider clock or an external
clock scanned on the RK I/O pad. The Receive Clock is selected by the CKS field in
SSC_RCMR (Receive Clock Mode Register). Receive Clocks can be inverted independently by
the CKI bits in SSC_RCMR.
322
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
The receiver can also drive the RK I/O pad continuously or be limited to the actual data transfer.
The clock output is configured by the SSC_RCMR register. The Receive Clock Inversion (CKI)
bits have no effect on the clock outputs. Programming the RCMR register to select RK pin (CKS
field) and at the same time Continuous Receive Clock (CKO field) might lead to unpredictable
results.
Figure 30-7. Receiver Clock Management
SSC_RCMR.CKO
SSC_RCMR.CKS
RK
Transmitter Clock
RK
Divider Clock
0
Receiver Clock
1
SSC_RCMR.CKI
323
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
30.6.3
Transmitter Operations
A transmitted frame is triggered by a start event and can be followed by synchronization data
before data transmission.
The start event is configured by setting the Transmit Clock Mode Register (SSC_TCMR). See
“Start” on page 325.
The frame synchronization is configured setting the Transmit Frame Mode Register
(SSC_TFMR). See “Frame Sync” on page 327.
To transmit data, the transmitter uses a shift register clocked by the transmitter clock signal and
the start mode selected in the SSC_TCMR. Data is written by the application to the SSC_THR
register then transferred to the shift register according to the data format selected.
When both the SSC_THR and the transmit shift register are empty, the status flag TXEMPTY is
set in SSC_SR. When the Transmit Holding register is transferred in the Transmit shift register,
the status flag TXRDY is set in SSC_SR and additional data can be loaded in the holding
register.
Figure 30-8. Transmitter Block Diagram
SSC_CR.TXEN
SSC_SR.TXEN
SSC_CR.TXDIS
SSC_TFMR.DATDEF
1
RF
Transmitter Clock
TF
Start
Selector
324
TD
0
SSC_TFMR.MSBF
Transmit Shift Register
SSC_TFMR.FSDEN
SSC_TCMR.STTDLY
SSC_TFMR.DATLEN
SSC_TCMR.STTDLY
SSC_TFMR.FSDEN
SSC_TFMR.DATNB
0
SSC_THR
1
SSC_TSHR
SSC_TFMR.FSLEN
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
30.6.4
Receiver Operations
A received frame is triggered by a start event and can be followed by synchronization data
before data transmission.
The start event is configured setting the Receive Clock Mode Register (SSC_RCMR). See
“Start” on page 325.
The frame synchronization is configured setting the Receive Frame Mode Register
(SSC_RFMR). See “Frame Sync” on page 327.
The receiver uses a shift register clocked by the receiver clock signal and the start mode
selected in the SSC_RCMR. The data is transferred from the shift register in function of data format selected.
When the receiver shift register is full, the SSC transfers this data in the holding register, the status flag RXRDY is set in SSC_SR and the data can be read in the receiver holding register, if
another transfer occurs before read the RHR register, the status flag OVERUN is set in SSC_SR
and the receiver shift register is transferred in the RHR register.
Figure 30-9. Receiver Block Diagram
SSC_CR.RXEN
SSC_SR.RXEN
SSC_CR.RXDIS
RF
Receiver Clock
TF
Start
Selector
SSC_RFMR.MSBF
SSC_RFMR.DATNB
Receive Shift Register
SSC_RSHR
SSC_RHR
SSC_RFMR.FSLEN
SSC_RFMR.DATLEN
RD
SSC_RCMR.STTDLY
30.6.5
Start
The transmitter and receiver can both be programmed to start their operations when an event
occurs, respectively in the Transmit Start Selection (START) field of SSC_TCMR and in the
Receive Start Selection (START) field of SSC_RCMR.
Under the following conditions the start event is independently programmable:
• Continuous. In this case, the transmission starts as soon as a word is written in SSC_THR
and the reception starts as soon as the Receiver is enabled.
• Synchronously with the transmitter/receiver
• On detection of a falling/rising edge on TK/RK
• On detection of a low level/high level on TK/RK
• On detection of a level change or an edge on TK/RK
325
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
A start can be programmed in the same manner on either side of the Transmit/Receive Clock
Register (RCMR/TCMR). Thus, the start could be on TF (Transmit) or RF (Receive).
Detection on TF/RF input/output is done through the field FSOS of the Transmit/Receive Frame
Mode Register (TFMR/RFMR).
Generating a Frame Sync signal is not possible without generating it on its related output.
Figure 30-10. Transmit Start Mode
TK
TF
(Input)
Start = Low Level on TF
Start = Falling Edge on TF
Start = High Level on TF
Start = Rising Edge on TF
Start = Level Change on TF
Start = Any Edge on TF
TD
(Output)
TD
(Output)
X
BO
STTDLY
BO
X
B1
STTDLY
BO
X
TD
(Output)
B1
STTDLY
TD
(Output)
BO
X
B1
STTDLY
TD
(Output)
TD
(Output)
B1
BO
X
B1
BO
B1
STTDLY
X
B1
BO
BO
B1
STTDLY
Figure 30-11. Receive Pulse/Edge Start Modes
RK
RF
(Input)
Start = Low Level on RF
Start = Falling Edge on RF
Start = High Level on RF
Start = Rising Edge on RF
Start = Level Change on RF
Start = Any Edge on RF
RD
(Input)
RD
(Input)
X
BO
STTDLY
BO
X
B1
STTDLY
BO
X
RD
(Input)
B1
STTDLY
RD
(Input)
BO
X
B1
STTDLY
RD
(Input)
RD
(Input)
B1
BO
X
B1
BO
B1
STTDLY
X
BO
B1
BO
B1
STTDLY
326
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
30.6.6
Frame Sync
The Transmitter and Receiver Frame Sync pins, TF and RF, can be programmed to generate
different kinds of frame synchronization signals. The Frame Sync Output Selection (FSOS) field
in the Receive Frame Mode Register (SSC_RFMR) and in the Transmit Frame Mode Register
(SSC_TFMR) are used to select the required waveform.
• Programmable low or high levels during data transfer are supported.
• Programmable high levels before the start of data transfers or toggling are also supported.
If a pulse waveform is selected, the Frame Sync Length (FSLEN) field in SSC_RFMR and
SSC_TFMR programs the length of the pulse, from 1-bit time up to 16-bit time.
The periodicity of the Receive and Transmit Frame Sync pulse output can be programmed
through the Period Divider Selection (PERIOD) field in SSC_RCMR and SSC_TCMR.
30.6.6.1
Frame Sync Data
Frame Sync Data transmits or receives a specific tag during the Frame Synchro signal.
During the Frame Sync signal, the Receiver can sample the RD line and store the data in the
Receive Sync Holding Register and the transmitter can transfer Transmit Sync Holding Register
in the Shifter Register. The data length to be sampled/shifted out during the Frame Sync signal
is programmed by the FSLEN field in SSC_RFMR/SSC_TFMR.
Concerning the Receive Frame Sync Data operation, if the Frame Sync Length is equal to or
lower than the delay between the start event and the actual data reception, the data sampling
operation is performed in the Receive Sync Holding Register through the Receive Shift Register.
The Transmit Frame Sync Operation is performed by the transmitter only if the bit Frame Sync
Data Enable (FSDEN) in SSC_TFMR is set. If the Frame Sync length is equal to or lower than
the delay between the start event and the actual data transmission, the normal transmission has
priority and the data contained in the Transmit Sync Holding Register is transferred in the Transmit Register then shifted out.
30.6.6.2
Frame Sync Edge Detection
The Frame Sync Edge detection is programmed by the FSEDGE field in
SSC_RFMR/SSC_TFMR. This sets the corresponding flags RXSYN/TXSYN in the SSC Status
Register (SSC_SR) on frame synchro edge detection (signals RF/TF).
30.6.7
Data Format
The data framing format of both the transmitter and the receiver are largely programmable
through the Transmitter Frame Mode Register (SSC_TFMR) and the Receiver Frame Mode
Register (SSC_RFMR). In either case, the user can independently select:
• The event that starts the data transfer (START).
• The delay in number of bit periods between the start event and the first data bit (STTDLY).
• The length of the data (DATLEN)
• The number of data to be transferred for each start event (DATNB).
• The length of Synchronization transferred for each start event (FSLEN).
• The bit sense: most or lowest significant bit first (MSBF).
Additionally, the transmitter can be used to transfer Synchronization and select the level
driven on the TD pin while not in data transfer operation. This is done respectively by the
327
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
Frame Sync Data Enable (FSDEN) and by the Data Default Value (DATDEF) bits in
SSC_TFMR.
Table 30-3.
Data Frame Registers
Transmitter
Receiver
Field
Length
Comment
SSC_TFMR
SSC_RFMR
DATLEN
Up to 32
Size of word
SSC_TFMR
SSC_RFMR
DATNB
Up to 16
Number Word transmitter in frame
SSC_TFMR
SSC_RFMR
MSBF
SSC_TFMR
SSC_RFMR
FSLEN
Up to 16
Size of Synchro data register
SSC_TFMR
DATDEF
0 or 1
Data default value ended
SSC_TFMR
FSDEN
1 most significant bit in first
Enable send SSC_TSHR
SSC_TCMR
SSC_RCMR
PERIOD
up to 512
Frame size
SSC_TCMR
SSC_RCMR
STTDLY
up to 255
Size of transmit start delay
Figure 30-12. Transmit and Receive Frame Format in Edge/Pulse Start Modes
Start
Start
PERIOD
TF/RF
(1)
FSLEN
TD
(If FSDEN = 1)
TD
(If FSDEN = 0)
RD
Data
Data
From SSC_TSHR FromDATDEF
From SSC_THR
From SSC_THR
Default
Data
Data
Sync Data
Default
From DATDEF
Sync Data
Ignored
To SSC_RSHR
STTDLY
From SSC_THR
From SSC_THR
Data
Data
To SSC_RHR
To SSC_RHR
DATLEN
DATLEN
Default
Sync Data
FromDATDEF
Default
From DATDEF
Ignored
Sync Data
DATNB
Note: 1.
328
Example of Input on falling edge of TF/RF.
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
Figure 30-13. Transmit Frame Format in Continuous Mode
Start
Data
TD
Default
Data
From SSC_THR
From SSC_THR
DATLEN
DATLEN
Start: 1. TXEMPTY set to 1
2. Write into the SSC_THR
Note:
1. STTDLY is set to 0. In this example, SSC_THR is loaded twice. FSDEN value has no effect on
the transmission. SyncData cannot be output in continuous mode.
Figure 30-14. Receive Frame Format in Continuous Mode
Start = Enable Receiver
RD
Note:
30.6.8
Data
Data
To SSC_RHR
To SSC_RHR
DATLEN
DATLEN
1. STTDLY is set to 0.
Loop Mode
The receiver can be programmed to receive transmissions from the transmitter. This is done by
setting the Loop Mode (LOOP) bit in SSC_RFMR. In this case, RD is connected to TD, RF is
connected to TF and RK is connected to TK.
30.6.9
Interrupt
Most bits in SSC_SR have a corresponding bit in interrupt management registers.
The SSC Controller can be programmed to generate an interrupt when it detects an event. The
Interrupt is controlled by writing SSC_IER (Interrupt Enable Register) and SSC_IDR (Interrupt
Disable Register), which respectively enable and disable the corresponding interrupt by setting
and clearing the corresponding bit in SSC_IMR (Interrupt Mask Register), which controls the
generation of interrupts by asserting the SSC interrupt line connected to the AIC.
329
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
Figure 30-15. Interrupt Block Diagram
SSC_IMR
SSC_IER
PDC
SSC_IDR
Set
Clear
TXBUFE
ENDTX
Transmitter
TXRDY
TXEMPTY
TXSYNC
Interrupt
Control
RXBUFF
ENDRX
SSC Interrupt
Receiver
RXRDY
OVRUN
RXSYNC
330
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
30.7
SSC Application Examples
The SSC can support several serial communication modes used in audio or high speed serial
links. Some standard applications are shown in the following figures. All serial link applications
supported by the SSC are not listed here.
Figure 30-16. Audio Application Block Diagram
Clock SCK
TK
Word Select WS
I2S
RECEIVER
TF
Data SD
SSC
TD
RD
Clock SCK
RF
Word Select WS
RK
MSB
Data SD
LSB
MSB
Right Channel
Left Channel
Figure 30-17. Codec Application Block Diagram
Serial Data Clock (SCLK)
TK
Frame sync (FSYNC)
TF
Serial Data Out
SSC
CODEC
TD
Serial Data In
RD
RF
RK
Serial Data Clock (SCLK)
Frame sync (FSYNC)
First Time Slot
Dstart
Dend
Serial Data Out
Serial Data In
331
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
Figure 30-18. Time Slot Application Block Diagram
SCLK
TK
FSYNC
TF
CODEC
First
Time Slot
Data Out
TD
SSC
RD
Data in
RF
RK
CODEC
Second
Time Slot
Serial Data Clock (SCLK)
Frame sync (FSYNC)
First Time Slot
Dstart
Second Time Slot
Dend
Serial Data Out
Serial Data in
332
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
30.8
Synchronous Serial Controller (SSC) User Interface
Table 30-4.
Synchronous Serial Controller (SSC) Register Mapping
Offset
Register
Register Name
Access
Reset
SSC_CR
Write
–
SSC_CMR
Read/Write
0x0
0x0
Control Register
0x4
Clock Mode Register
0x8
Reserved
–
–
–
0xC
Reserved
–
–
–
0x10
Receive Clock Mode Register
SSC_RCMR
Read/Write
0x0
0x14
Receive Frame Mode Register
SSC_RFMR
Read/Write
0x0
0x18
Transmit Clock Mode Register
SSC_TCMR
Read/Write
0x0
0x1C
Transmit Frame Mode Register
SSC_TFMR
Read/Write
0x0
0x20
Receive Holding Register
SSC_RHR
Read
0x0
0x24
Transmit Holding Register
SSC_THR
Write
–
0x28
Reserved
–
–
–
0x2C
Reserved
–
–
–
0x30
Receive Sync. Holding Register
SSC_RSHR
Read
0x0
0x34
Transmit Sync. Holding Register
SSC_TSHR
Read/Write
0x0
0x38
Reserved
–
–
–
0x3C
Reserved
–
–
–
0x40
Status Register
SSC_SR
Read
0x000000CC
0x44
Interrupt Enable Register
SSC_IER
Write
–
0x48
Interrupt Disable Register
SSC_IDR
Write
–
0x4C
Interrupt Mask Register
SSC_IMR
Read
0x0
Reserved
–
–
–
Reserved for Peripheral DMA Controller (PDC)
–
–
–
0x50-0xFC
0x100 - 0x124
333
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
30.8.1
SSC Control Register
Name:
SSC_CR
Access Type:
Write-only
31
–
23
–
15
SWRST
7
–
30
–
22
–
14
–
6
–
29
–
21
–
13
–
5
–
28
–
20
–
12
–
4
–
27
–
19
–
11
–
3
–
26
–
18
–
10
–
2
–
25
–
17
–
9
TXDIS
1
RXDIS
24
–
16
–
8
TXEN
0
RXEN
• RXEN: Receive Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables Data Receive if RXDIS is not set.(1)
• RXDIS: Receive Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables Data Receive.(1)
• TXEN: Transmit Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables Data Transmit if TXDIS is not set.(1)
• TXDIS: Transmit Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables Data Transmit.(1)
• SWRST: Software Reset
0: No effect.
1: Performs a software reset. Has priority on any other bit in SSC_CR.
Note: 1.
334
Only the data management is affected
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
30.8.2
SSC Clock Mode Register
Name:
SSC_CMR
Access Type:
Read/Write
31
–
23
–
15
–
7
30
–
22
–
14
–
6
29
–
21
–
13
–
5
28
–
20
–
12
–
4
27
–
19
–
11
26
–
18
–
10
3
2
25
–
17
–
9
24
–
16
–
8
1
0
DIV
DIV
• DIV: Clock Divider
0: The Clock Divider is not active.
Any Other Value: The Divided Clock equals the Master Clock divided by 2 times DIV. The maximum bit rate is MCK/2. The
minimum bit rate is MCK/2 x 4095 = MCK/8190.
335
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
30.8.3
SSC Receive Clock Mode Register
Name:
SSC_RCMR
Access Type:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
PERIOD
23
22
21
20
STTDLY
15
–
7
–
14
–
6
–
13
–
5
CKI
12
–
4
START
3
CKO
2
1
0
CKS
• CKS: Receive Clock Selection
CKS
Selected Receive Clock
0x0
Divided Clock
0x1
TK Clock Signal
0x2
RK Pin
0x3
Reserved
• CKO: Receive Clock Output Mode Selection
CKO
Receive Clock Output Mode
0x0
None
0x1
Continuous Receive Clock
0x2-0x7
RK pin
Input-only
Output
Reserved
• CKI: Receive Clock Inversion
0: The data and the Frame Sync signal are sampled on Receive Clock falling edge.
1: The data and the Frame Sync signal are shifted out on Receive Clock rising edge.
CKI does not affect the RK output clock signal.
• START: Receive Start Selection
START
0x0
Continuous, as soon as the receiver is enabled, and immediately after the end of transfer of the previous data.
0x1
Transmit Start
0x2
Detection of a low level on RF input
0x3
Detection of a high level on RF input
0x4
Detection of a falling edge on RF input
0x5
Detection of a rising edge on RF input
0x6
Detection of any level change on RF input
0x7
Detection of any edge on RF input
0x8-0xF
336
Receive Start
Reserved
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
• STTDLY: Receive Start Delay
If STTDLY is not 0, a delay of STTDLY clock cycles is inserted between the start event and the actual start of reception.
When the Receiver is programmed to start synchronously with the Transmitter, the delay is also applied.
Please Note: It is very important that STTDLY be set carefully. If STTDLY must be set, it should be done in relation to TAG
(Receive Sync Data) reception.
• PERIOD: Receive Period Divider Selection
This field selects the divider to apply to the selected Receive Clock in order to generate a new Frame Sync Signal. If 0, no
PERIOD signal is generated. If not 0, a PERIOD signal is generated each 2 x (PERIOD+1) Receive Clock.
337
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
30.8.4
SSC Receive Frame Mode Register
Name:
SSC_RFMR
Access Type:
Read/Write
31
–
23
–
15
–
7
MSBF
30
–
22
14
–
6
–
29
–
21
FSOS
13
–
5
LOOP
28
–
20
27
–
19
26
–
18
25
–
17
24
FSEDGE
16
9
8
1
0
FSLEN
12
–
4
11
10
DATNB
3
2
DATLEN
• DATLEN: Data Length
0x0 is not supported. The value of DATLEN can be set between 0x1 and 0x1F.
The bit stream contains DATLEN + 1 data bits. Moreover, it defines the transfer size performed by the PDC assigned to the
Receiver.
If DATLEN is less than or equal to 7, data transfers are in bytes. If DATLEN is between 8 and 15 (included), half-words are
transferred. For any other value, 32-bit words are transferred.
• LOOP: Loop Mode
0: Normal operating mode.
1: RD is driven by TD, RF is driven by TF and TK drives RK.
• MSBF: Most Significant Bit First
0: The lowest significant bit of the data register is sampled first in the bit stream.
1: The most significant bit of the data register is sampled first in the bit stream.
• DATNB: Data Number per Frame
This field defines the number of data words to be received after each transfer start. If 0, only 1 data word is transferred. Up
to 16 data words can be transferred.
• FSLEN: Receive Frame Sync Length
This field defines the length of the Receive Frame Sync Signal and the number of bits sampled and stored in the Receive
Sync Data Register. Only when FSOS is set on negative or positive pulse.
• FSOS: Receive Frame Sync Output Selection
FSOS
RF pin
0x0
None
0x1
Negative Pulse
Output
0x2
Positive Pulse
Output
0x3
Driven Low during data transfer
Output
0x4
Driven High during data transfer
Output
0x5
Toggling at each start of data transfer
Output
0x6-0x7
338
Selected Receive Frame Sync Signal
Reserved
Input-only
Undefined
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
• FSEDGE: Frame Sync Edge Detection
Determines which edge on Frame Sync sets RXSYN in the SSC Status Register.
FSEDGE
Frame Sync Edge Detection
0x0
Positive Edge Detection
0x1
Negative Edge Detection
339
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
30.8.5
SSC Transmit Clock Mode Register
Name:
SSC_TCMR
Access Type:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
PERIOD
23
22
21
20
STTDLY
15
–
7
–
14
–
6
–
13
–
5
CKI
12
–
4
START
3
CKO
2
1
0
CKS
• CKS: Transmit Clock Selection
CKS
Selected Transmit Clock
0x0
Divided Clock
0x1
RK Clock signal
0x2
TK Pin
0x3
Reserved
• CKO: Transmit Clock Output Mode Selection
CKO
Transmit Clock Output Mode
0x0
None
0x1
Continuous Transmit Clock
0x2-0x7
TK pin
Input-only
Output
Reserved
• CKI: Transmit Clock Inversion
0: The data and the Frame Sync signal are shifted out on Transmit Clock falling edge.
1: The data and the Frame Sync signal are shifted out on Transmit Clock rising edge.
CKI affects only the Transmit Clock and not the output clock signal.
• START: Transmit Start Selection
START
0x0
Continuous, as soon as a word is written in the SSC_THR Register (if Transmit is enabled) and
immediately after the end of transfer of the previous data.
0x1
Receive Start
0x2
Detection of a low level on TF signal
0x3
Detection of a high level on TF signal
0x4
Detection of a falling edge on TF signal
0x5
Detection of a rising edge on TF signal
0x6
Detection of any level change on TF signal
0x7
Detection of any edge on TF signal
0x8-0xF
340
Transmit Start
Reserved
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
• STTDLY: Transmit Start Delay
If STTDLY is not 0, a delay of STTDLY clock cycles is inserted between the start event and the actual start of transmission
of data. When the Transmitter is programmed to start synchronously with the Receiver, the delay is also applied.
Please Note: STTDLY must be set carefully. If STTDLY is too short in respect to TAG (Transmit Sync Data) emission, data
is emitted instead of the end of TAG.
• PERIOD: Transmit Period Divider Selection
This field selects the divider to apply to the selected Transmit Clock to generate a new Frame Sync Signal. If 0, no period
signal is generated. If not 0, a period signal is generated at each 2 x (PERIOD+1) Transmit Clock.
341
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
30.8.6
SSC Transmit Frame Mode Register
Name:
SSC_TFMR
Access Type:
Read/Write
31
–
23
FSDEN
15
–
7
MSBF
30
–
22
14
–
6
–
29
–
21
FSOS
13
–
5
DATDEF
28
–
20
27
–
19
26
–
18
25
–
17
24
FSEDGE
16
9
8
1
0
FSLEN
12
–
4
11
10
DATNB
3
2
DATLEN
• DATLEN: Data Length
0x0 is not supported. The value of DATLEN can be set between 0x1 and 0x1F.
The bit stream contains DATLEN + 1 data bits. Moreover, it defines the transfer size performed by the PDC assigned to the
Receiver.
If DATLEN is less than or equal to 7, data transfers are in bytes. If DATLEN is between 8 and 15 (included), half-words are
transferred. For any other value, 32-bit words are transferred.
• DATDEF: Data Default Value
This bit defines the level driven on the TD pin while out of transmission. Note that if the pin is defined as multi-drive by the
PIO Controller, the pin is enabled only if the SCC TD output is 1.
• MSBF: Most Significant Bit First
0: The lowest significant bit of the data register is shifted out first in the bit stream.
1: The most significant bit of the data register is shifted out first in the bit stream.
• DATNB: Data Number per frame
This field defines the number of data words to be transferred after each transfer start. If 0, only 1 data word is transferred
and up to 16 data words can be transferred.
• FSLEN: Transmit Frame Sync Length
This field defines the length of the Transmit Frame Sync signal and the number of bits shifted out from the Transmit Sync
Data Register if FSDEN is 1. If 0, the Transmit Frame Sync signal is generated during one Transmit Clock period and up to
16 clock period pulse length is possible.
• FSOS: Transmit Frame Sync Output Selection
FSOS
TF pin
0x0
None
0x1
Negative Pulse
Output
0x2
Positive Pulse
Output
0x3
Driven Low during data transfer
Output
0x4
Driven High during data transfer
Output
0x5
Toggling at each start of data transfer
Output
0x6-0x7
342
Selected Transmit Frame Sync Signal
Reserved
Input-only
Undefined
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
• FSDEN: Frame Sync Data Enable
0: The TD line is driven with the default value during the Transmit Frame Sync signal.
1: SSC_TSHR value is shifted out during the transmission of the Transmit Frame Sync signal.
• FSEDGE: Frame Sync Edge Detection
Determines which edge on frame sync sets TXSYN (Status Register).
FSEDGE
Frame Sync Edge Detection
0x0
Positive Edge Detection
0x1
Negative Edge Detection
343
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
30.8.7
SSC Receive Holding Register
Name:
SSC_RHR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
RDAT
23
22
21
20
RDAT
15
14
13
12
RDAT
7
6
5
4
RDAT
• RDAT: Receive Data
Right aligned regardless of the number of data bits defined by DATLEN in SSC_RFMR.
30.8.8
SSC Transmit Holding Register
Name:
SSC_THR
Access Type:
Write only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
TDAT
23
22
21
20
TDAT
15
14
13
12
TDAT
7
6
5
4
TDAT
TDAT: Transmit Data
Right aligned regardless of the number of data bits defined by DATLEN in SSC_TFMR.
344
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
30.8.9
SSC Receive Synchronization Holding Register
Name:
SSC_RSHR
Access Type:
Read/Write
31
–
23
–
15
30
–
22
–
14
29
–
21
–
13
28
–
20
–
12
7
6
5
4
27
–
19
–
11
26
–
18
–
10
25
–
17
–
9
24
–
16
–
8
3
2
1
0
RSDAT
RSDAT
• RSDAT: Receive Synchronization Data
Right aligned regardless of the number of data bits defined by FSLEN in SSC_RFMR.
30.8.10
SSC Transmit Synchronization Holding Register
Name:
SSC_TSHR
Access Type:
Read/Write
31
–
23
–
15
30
–
22
–
14
29
–
21
–
13
28
–
20
–
12
7
6
5
4
27
–
19
–
11
26
–
18
–
10
25
–
17
–
9
24
–
16
–
8
3
2
1
0
TSDAT
TSDAT
• TSDAT: Transmit Synchronization Data
Right aligned regardless of the number of data bits defined by FSLEN in SSC_TFMR.
345
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
30.8.11
SSC Status Register
Register Name:
SSC_SR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
–
23
–
15
–
7
RXBUFF
30
–
22
–
14
–
6
ENDRX
29
–
21
–
13
–
5
OVRUN
28
–
20
–
12
–
4
RXRDY
27
–
19
–
11
RXSYN
3
TXBUFE
26
–
18
–
10
TXSYN
2
ENDTX
25
–
17
RXEN
9
–
1
TXEMPTY
24
–
16
TXEN
8
–
0
TXRDY
• TXRDY: Transmit Ready
0: Data has been loaded in SSC_THR and is waiting to be loaded in the Transmit Shift Register.
1: SSC_THR is empty.
• TXEMPTY: Transmit Empty
0: Data remains in SSC_THR or is currently transmitted from Transmit Shift Register.
1: Last data written in SSC_THR has been loaded in Transmit Shift Register and transmitted by it.
• ENDTX: End of Transmission
0: The register SSC_TCR has not reached 0 since the last write in SSC_TCR or SSC_TNCR.
1: The register SSC_TCR has reached 0 since the last write in SSC_TCR or SSC_TNCR.
• TXBUFE: Transmit Buffer Empty
0: SSC_TCR or SSC_TNCR have a value other than 0.
1: Both SSC_TCR and SSC_TNCR have a value of 0.
• RXRDY: Receive Ready
0: SSC_RHR is empty.
1: Data has been received and loaded in SSC_RHR.
• OVRUN: Receive Overrun
0: No data has been loaded in SSC_RHR while previous data has not been read since the last read of the Status Register.
1: Data has been loaded in SSC_RHR while previous data has not yet been read since the last read of the Status Register.
• ENDRX: End of Reception
0: Data is written on the Receive Counter Register or Receive Next Counter Register.
1: End of PDC transfer when Receive Counter Register has arrived at zero.
• RXBUFF: Receive Buffer Full
0: SSC_RCR or SSC_RNCR have a value other than 0.
1: Both SSC_RCR and SSC_RNCR have a value of 0.
• TXSYN: Transmit Sync
0: A Tx Sync has not occurred since the last read of the Status Register.
1: A Tx Sync has occurred since the last read of the Status Register.
346
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
• RXSYN: Receive Sync
0: A Rx Sync has not occurred since the last read of the Status Register.
1: A Rx Sync has occurred since the last read of the Status Register.
• TXEN: Transmit Enable
0: Transmit data is disabled.
1: Transmit data is enabled.
• RXEN: Receive Enable
0: Receive data is disabled.
1: Receive data is enabled.
347
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
30.8.12
SSC Interrupt Enable Register
Register Name:
SSC_IER
Access Type:
Write-only
31
–
23
–
15
–
7
RXBUFF
30
–
22
–
14
–
6
ENDRX
29
–
21
–
13
–
5
OVRUN
28
–
20
–
12
–
4
RXRDY
27
–
19
–
11
RXSYN
3
TXBUFE
26
–
18
–
10
TXSYN
2
ENDTX
25
–
17
–
9
–
1
TXEMPTY
24
–
16
–
8
–
0
TXRDY
• TXRDY: Transmit Ready
• TXEMPTY: Transmit Empty
• ENDTX: End of Transmission
• TXBUFE: Transmit Buffer Empty
• RXRDY: Receive Ready
• OVRUN: Receive Overrun
• ENDRX: End of Reception
• RXBUFF: Receive Buffer Full
• TXSYN: Tx Sync
• RXSYN: Rx Sync
0: No effect.
1: Enables the corresponding interrupt.
348
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
30.8.13
SSC Interrupt Disable Register
Register Name:
SSC_IDR
Access Type:
Write-only
31
–
23
–
15
–
7
RXBUFF
30
–
22
–
14
–
6
ENDRX
29
–
21
–
13
–
5
OVRUN
28
–
20
–
12
–
4
RXRDY
27
–
19
–
11
RXSYN
3
TXBUFE
26
–
18
–
10
TXSYN
2
ENDTX
25
–
17
–
9
–
1
TXEMPTY
24
–
16
–
8
–
0
TXRDY
• TXRDY: Transmit Ready
• TXEMPTY: Transmit Empty
• ENDTX: End of Transmission
• TXBUFE: Transmit Buffer Empty
• RXRDY: Receive Ready
• OVRUN: Receive Overrun
• ENDRX: End of Reception
• RXBUFF: Receive Buffer Full
• TXSYN: Tx Sync
• RXSYN: Rx Sync
0: No effect.
1: Disables the corresponding interrupt.
349
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
30.8.14
SSC Interrupt Mask Register
Register Name:
SSC_IMR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
–
23
–
15
–
7
RXBUFF
30
–
22
–
14
–
6
ENDRX
29
–
21
–
13
–
5
OVRUN
28
–
20
–
12
–
4
RXRDY
27
–
19
–
11
RXSYN
3
TXBUFE
26
–
18
–
10
TXSYN
2
ENDTX
25
–
17
–
9
–
1
TXEMPTY
24
–
16
–
8
–
0
TXRDY
• TXRDY: Transmit Ready
• TXEMPTY: Transmit Empty
• ENDTX: End of Transmission
• TXBUFE: Transmit Buffer Empty
• RXRDY: Receive Ready
• OVRUN: Receive Overrun
• ENDRX: End of Reception
• RXBUFF: Receive Buffer Full
• TXSYN: Tx Sync
• RXSYN: Rx Sync
0: The corresponding interrupt is disabled.
1: The corresponding interrupt is enabled.
350
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
31. Timer/Counter (TC)
31.1
Overview
The Timer/Counter (TC) includes three identical 16-bit Timer/Counter channels.
Each channel can be independently programmed to perform a wide range of functions including
frequency measurement, event counting, interval measurement, pulse generation, delay timing
and pulse width modulation.
Each channel has three external clock inputs, five internal clock inputs and two multi-purpose
input/output signals which can be configured by the user. Each channel drives an internal interrupt signal which can be programmed to generate processor interrupts.
The Timer/Counter block has two global registers which act upon all three TC channels.
The Block Control Register allows the three channels to be started simultaneously with the same
instruction.
The Block Mode Register defines the external clock inputs for each channel, allowing them to be
chained.
31.2
Block Diagram
Figure 31-1. Timer/Counter Block Diagram
Parallel I/O
Controller
TIMER_CLOCK1
TCLK0
TIMER_CLOCK2
TIOA1
TIOA2
TIMER_CLOCK3
TIMER_CLOCK4
XC0
XC1
TCLK1
Timer/Counter
Channel 0
TIOA
TIOA0
TIOB0
TIOA0
TIOB
XC2
TCLK2
TIMER_CLOCK5
TC0XC0S
TIOB0
SYNC
TCLK0
TCLK1
TCLK2
INT0
TCLK0
XC0
TCLK1
TIOA0
XC1
TIOA2
XC2
Timer/Counter
Channel 1
TIOA
TIOA1
TIOB1
TIOA1
TIOB
TCLK2
TC1XC1S
TCLK0
XC0
TCLK1
XC1
TCLK2
XC2
TIOB1
SYNC
Timer/Counter
Channel 2
INT1
TIOA
TIOA2
TIOB2
TIOA2
TIOB
TIOA0
TIOA1
TC2XC2S
TIOB2
SYNC
INT2
Timer Counter
Advanced
Interrupt
Controller
351
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
Table 31-1.
Signal Name Description
Block/Channel
Signal Name
XC0, XC1, XC2
Channel Signal
Capture Mode: Timer/Counter Input
Waveform Mode: Timer/Counter Output
TIOB
Capture Mode: Timer/Counter Input
Waveform Mode: Timer/Counter Input/output
SYNC
31.4.1
Interrupt Signal Output
Synchronization Input Signal
Pin Name List
Table 31-2.
31.4
External Clock Inputs
TIOA
INT
31.3
Description
TC pin list
Pin Name
Description
Type
TCLK0-TCLK2
External Clock Input
Input
TIOA0-TIOA2
I/O Line A
I/O
TIOB0-TIOB2
I/O Line B
I/O
Product Dependencies
I/O Lines
The pins used for interfacing the compliant external devices may be multiplexed with PIO lines.
The programmer must first program the PIO controllers to assign the TC pins to their peripheral
functions.
31.4.2
Power Management
The TC is clocked through the Power Management Controller (PMC), thus the programmer must
first configure the PMC to enable the Timer/Counter clock.
31.4.3
Interrupt
The TC has an interrupt line connected to the Advanced Interrupt Controller (AIC). Handling the
TC interrupt requires programming the AIC before configuring the TC.
31.5
31.5.1
Functional Description
TC Description
The three channels of the Timer/Counter are independent and identical in operation. The registers for channel programming are listed in Table 31-4 on page 365.
352
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
31.5.1.1
16-bit Counter
Each channel is organized around a 16-bit counter. The value of the counter is incremented at
each positive edge of the selected clock. When the counter has reached the value 0xFFFF and
passes to 0x0000, an overflow occurs and the COVFS bit in TC_SR (Status Register) is set.
The current value of the counter is accessible in real time by reading the Counter Value Register, TC_CV. The counter can be reset by a trigger. In this case, the counter value passes to
0x0000 on the next valid edge of the selected clock.
31.5.1.2
Clock Selection
At block level, input clock signals of each channel can either be connected to the external inputs
TCLK0, TCLK1 or TCLK2, or be connected to the configurable I/O signals TIOA0, TIOA1 or
TIOA2 for chaining by programming the TC_BMR (Block Mode). See Figure 31-2.
Each channel can independently select an internal or external clock source for its counter:
• Internal clock signals: TIMER_CLOCK1, TIMER_CLOCK2, TIMER_CLOCK3,
TIMER_CLOCK4, TIMER_CLOCK5
• External clock signals: XC0, XC1 or XC2
This selection is made by the TCCLKS bits in the TC Channel Mode Register.
The selected clock can be inverted with the CLKI bit in TC_CMR. This allows counting on the
opposite edges of the clock.
The burst function allows the clock to be validated when an external signal is high. The BURST
parameter in the Mode Register defines this signal (none, XC0, XC1, XC2).
Note:
In all cases, if an external clock is used, the duration of each of its levels must be longer than the
master clock period. The external clock frequency must be at least 2.5 times lower than the master clock
Figure 31-2. Clock Selection
TCCLKS
TIMER_CLOCK1
TIMER_CLOCK2
CLKI
TIMER_CLOCK3
TIMER_CLOCK4
TIMER_CLOCK5
Selected
Clock
XC0
XC1
XC2
BURST
1
353
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
31.5.1.3
Clock Control
The clock of each counter can be controlled in two different ways: it can be enabled/disabled
and started/stopped. See Figure 31-3.
• The clock can be enabled or disabled by the user with the CLKEN and the CLKDIS
commands in the Control Register. In Capture Mode it can be disabled by an RB load event if
LDBDIS is set to 1 in TC_CMR. In Waveform Mode, it can be disabled by an RC Compare
event if CPCDIS is set to 1 in TC_CMR. When disabled, the start or the stop actions have no
effect: only a CLKEN command in the Control Register can re-enable the clock. When the
clock is enabled, the CLKSTA bit is set in the Status Register.
• The clock can also be started or stopped: a trigger (software, synchro, external or compare)
always starts the clock. The clock can be stopped by an RB load event in Capture Mode
(LDBSTOP = 1 in TC_CMR) or a RC compare event in Waveform Mode (CPCSTOP = 1 in
TC_CMR). The start and the stop commands have effect only if the clock is enabled.
Figure 31-3. Clock Control
Selected
Clock
Trigger
CLKSTA
CLKEN
Q
Q
S
CLKDIS
S
R
R
Counter
Clock
31.5.1.4
Stop
Event
Disable
Event
TC Operating Modes
Each channel can independently operate in two different modes:
• Capture Mode provides measurement on signals.
• Waveform Mode provides wave generation.
The TC Operating Mode is programmed with the WAVE bit in the TC Channel Mode Register.
In Capture Mode, TIOA and TIOB are configured as inputs.
In Waveform Mode, TIOA is always configured to be an output and TIOB is an output if it is not
selected to be the external trigger.
31.5.1.5
Trigger
A trigger resets the counter and starts the counter clock. Three types of triggers are common to
both modes, and a fourth external trigger is available to each mode.
354
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
The following triggers are common to both modes:
• Software Trigger: Each channel has a software trigger, available by setting SWTRG in
TC_CCR.
• SYNC: Each channel has a synchronization signal SYNC. When asserted, this signal has the
same effect as a software trigger. The SYNC signals of all channels are asserted
simultaneously by writing TC_BCR (Block Control) with SYNC set.
• Compare RC Trigger: RC is implemented in each channel and can provide a trigger when the
counter value matches the RC value if CPCTRG is set in TC_CMR.
The channel can also be configured to have an external trigger. In Capture Mode, the external
trigger signal can be selected between TIOA and TIOB. In Waveform Mode, an external event
can be programmed on one of the following signals: TIOB, XC0, XC1 or XC2. This external
event can then be programmed to perform a trigger by setting ENETRG in TC_CMR.
If an external trigger is used, the duration of the pulses must be longer than the master clock
period in order to be detected.
Regardless of the trigger used, it will be taken into account at the following active edge of the
selected clock. This means that the counter value can be read differently from zero just after a
trigger, especially when a low frequency signal is selected as the clock.
31.5.2
Capture Operating Mode
This mode is entered by clearing the WAVE parameter in TC_CMR (Channel Mode Register).
Capture Mode allows the TC channel to perform measurements such as pulse timing, frequency, period, duty cycle and phase on TIOA and TIOB signals which are considered as
inputs.
Figure 31-4 shows the configuration of the TC channel when programmed in Capture Mode.
31.5.2.1
Capture Registers A and B
Registers A and B (RA and RB) are used as capture registers. This means that they can be
loaded with the counter value when a programmable event occurs on the signal TIOA.
The LDRA parameter in TC_CMR defines the TIOA edge for the loading of register A, and the
LDRB parameter defines the TIOA edge for the loading of Register B.
RA is loaded only if it has not been loaded since the last trigger or if RB has been loaded since
the last loading of RA.
RB is loaded only if RA has been loaded since the last trigger or the last loading of RB.
Loading RA or RB before the read of the last value loaded sets the Overrun Error Flag (LOVRS)
in TC_SR (Status Register). In this case, the old value is overwritten.
31.5.2.2
Trigger Conditions
In addition to the SYNC signal, the software trigger and the RC compare trigger, an external trigger can be defined.
The ABETRG bit in TC_CMR selects TIOA or TIOB input signal as an external trigger. The
ETRGEDG parameter defines the edge (rising, falling or both) detected to generate an external
trigger. If ETRGEDG = 0 (none), the external trigger is disabled.
355
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
356
MTIOA
MTIOB
1
If RA is not loaded
or RB is Loaded
Edge
Detector
ETRGEDG
SWTRG
Timer/Counter Channel
ABETRG
BURST
CLKI
RESET
LDRB
Edge
Detector
Edge
Detector
If RA is Loaded
CPCTRG
OVF
Capture
Register A
LDBSTOP
R
S
CLKEN
LDRA
Trig
CLK
S
R
16-bit Counter
Q
Q
CLKSTA
LDBDIS
Capture
Register B
CLKDIS
TC1_SR
TIOA
TIOB
SYNC
XC2
XC1
XC0
TIMER_CLOCK5
TIMER_CLOCK4
TIMER_CLOCK3
TIMER_CLOCK2
TIMER_CLOCK1
TCCLKS
Compare RC =
Register C
COVFS
INT
Figure 31-4. Capture Mode
CPCS
LOVRS
LDRBS
ETRGS
LDRAS
TC1_IMR
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
31.5.3
Waveform Operating Mode
Waveform operating mode is entered by setting the WAVE parameter in TC_CMR (Channel
Mode Register).
In Waveform Operating Mode the TC channel generates 1 or 2 PWM signals with the same frequency and independently programmable duty cycles, or generates different types of one-shot
or repetitive pulses.
In this mode, TIOA is configured as an output and TIOB is defined as an output if it is not used
as an external event (EEVT parameter in TC_CMR).
Figure 31-5 shows the configuration of the TC channel when programmed in Waveform Operating Mode.
31.5.3.1
Waveform Selection
Depending on the WAVSEL parameter in TC_CMR (Channel Mode Register), the behavior of
TC_CV varies.
With any selection, RA, RB and RC can all be used as compare registers.
RA Compare is used to control the TIOA output, RB Compare is used to control the TIOB output
(if correctly configured) and RC Compare is used to control TIOA and/or TIOB outputs.
357
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
358
TIOB
SYNC
XC2
XC1
XC0
TIMER_CLOCK5
TIMER_CLOCK4
TIMER_CLOCK3
TIMER_CLOCK2
TIMER_CLOCK1
1
EEVT
BURST
Timer/Counter Channel
Edge
Detector
EEVTEDG
SWTRG
ENETRG
CLKI
Trig
CLK
R
S
OVF
WAVSEL
RESET
16-bit Counter
WAVSEL
Q
Compare RA =
Register A
Q
CLKSTA
Compare RC =
Compare RB =
CPCSTOP
CPCDIS
Register C
CLKDIS
Register B
R
S
CLKEN
CPAS
INT
BSWTRG
BEEVT
BCPB
BCPC
ASWTRG
AEEVT
ACPA
ACPC
Output Controller
Output Controller
TCCLKS
TIOB
MTIOB
TIOA
MTIOA
Figure 31-5. Waveform Mode
CPCS
CPBS
COVFS
TC1_SR
ETRGS
TC1_IMR
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
31.5.3.2
WAVSEL = 00
When WAVSEL = 00, the value of TC_CV is incremented from 0 to 0xFFFF. Once 0xFFFF has
been reached, the value of TC_CV is reset. Incrementation of TC_CV starts again and the cycle
continues. See Figure 31-6.
An external event trigger or a software trigger can reset the value of TC_CV. It is important to
note that the trigger may occur at any time. See Figure 31-7.
RC Compare cannot be programmed to generate a trigger in this configuration. At the same
time, RC Compare can stop the counter clock (CPCSTOP = 1 in TC_CMR) and/or disable the
counter clock (CPCDIS = 1 in TC_CMR).
Figure 31-6. WAVSEL= 00 without trigger
Counter Value
Counter cleared by compare match with 0xFFFF
0xFFFF
RC
RB
RA
Waveform Examples
Time
TIOB
TIOA
359
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
Figure 31-7. WAVSEL= 00 with trigger
Counter Value
Counter cleared by compare match with 0xFFFF
0xFFFF
RC
Counter cleared by trigger
RB
RA
Waveform Examples
Time
TIOB
TIOA
31.5.3.3
WAVSEL = 10
When WAVSEL = 10, the value of TC_CV is incremented from 0 to the value of RC, then automatically reset on a RC Compare. Once the value of TC_CV has been reset, it is then
incremented and so on. See Figure 31-8.
It is important to note that TC_CV can be reset at any time by an external event or a software
trigger if both are programmed correctly. See Figure 31-9.
In addition, RC Compare can stop the counter clock (CPCSTOP = 1 in TC_CMR) and/or disable
the counter clock (CPCDIS = 1 in TC_CMR).
360
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
Figure 31-8. WAVSEL = 10 Without Trigger
Counter Value
0xFFFF
Counter cleared by compare match with RC
RC
RB
RA
Waveform Examples
Time
TIOB
TIOA
Figure 31-9. WAVSEL = 10 With Trigger
Counter Value
0xFFFF
Counter cleared by compare match with RC
Counter cleared by trigger
RC
RB
RA
Waveform Examples
Time
TIOB
TIOA
31.5.3.4
WAVSEL = 01
When WAVSEL = 01, the value of TC_CV is incremented from 0 to 0xFFFF. Once 0xFFFF is
reached, the value of TC_CV is decremented to 0, then re-incremented to 0xFFFF and so on.
See Figure 31-10.
A trigger such as an external event or a software trigger can modify TC_CV at any time. If a trigger occurs while TC_CV is incrementing, TC_CV then decrements. If a trigger is received while
TC_CV is decrementing, TC_CV then increments. See Figure 31-11.
361
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
RC Compare cannot be programmed to generate a trigger in this configuration.
At the same time, RC Compare can stop the counter clock (CPCSTOP = 1) and/or disable the
counter clock (CPCDIS = 1).
Figure 31-10. WAVSEL = 01 Without Trigger
Counter decremented by compare match with 0xFFFF
Counter Value
0xFFFF
RC
RB
RA
Time
Waveform Examples
TIOB
TIOA
Figure 31-11. WAVSEL = 01 With Trigger
Counter decremented by compare match with 0xFFFF
Counter Value
0xFFFF
Counter decremented
by trigger
RC
RB
Counter incremented
by trigger
RA
Time
Waveform Examples
TIOB
TIOA
31.5.3.5
WAVSEL = 11
When WAVSEL = 11, the value of TC_CV is incremented from 0 to RC. Once RC is reached, the
value of TC_CV is decremented to 0, then re-incremented to RC and so on. See Figure 31-12.
362
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
A trigger such as an external event or a software trigger can modify TC_CV at any time. If a trigger occurs while TC_CV is incrementing, TC_CV then decrements. If a trigger is received while
TC_CV is decrementing, TC_CV then increments. See Figure 31-13.
RC Compare can stop the counter clock (CPCSTOP = 1) and/or disable the counter clock (CPCDIS = 1).
Figure 31-12. WAVSEL = 11 Without Trigger
Counter Value
0xFFFF
Counter decremented by compare match with RC
RC
RB
RA
Time
Waveform Examples
TIOB
TIOA
Figure 31-13. WAVSEL = 11 With Trigger
Counter Value
0xFFFF
Counter decremented by compare match with RC
RC
Counter decremented
by trigger
RB
Counter incremented
by trigger
RA
Waveform Examples
Time
TIOB
TIOA
31.5.3.6
External Event/Trigger Conditions
An external event can be programmed to be detected on one of the clock sources (XC0, XC1,
XC2) or TIOB. The external event selected can then be used as a trigger.
363
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
The parameter EEVT parameter in TC_CMR selects the external trigger. The EEVTEDG parameter defines the trigger edge for each of the possible external triggers (rising, falling or both). If
EEVTEDG is cleared (none), no external event is defined.
If TIOB is defined as an external event signal (EEVT = 0), TIOB is no longer used as an output
and the TC channel can only generate a waveform on TIOA.
When an external event is defined, it can be used as a trigger by setting bit ENETRG in
TC_CMR.
As in Capture Mode, the SYNC signal and the software trigger are also available as triggers. RC
Compare can also be used as a trigger depending on the parameter WAVSEL.
31.5.3.7
Output Controller
The output controller defines the output level changes on TIOA and TIOB following an event.
TIOB control is used only if TIOB is defined as output (not as an external event).
The following events control TIOA and TIOB: software trigger, external event and RC compare.
RA compare controls TIOA and RB compare controls TIOB. Each of these events can be programmed to set, clear or toggle the output as defined in the corresponding parameter in
TC_CMR.
364
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
31.6
Timer/Counter (TC) User Interface
31.6.1
Global Register Mapping
Table 31-3.
Offset
Timer/Counter (TC) Global Register Map
Channel/Register
Name
Access
Reset Value
0x00
TC Channel 0
See Table 31-4
0x40
TC Channel 1
See Table 31-4
0x80
TC Channel 2
See Table 31-4
0xC0
TC Block Control Register
TC_BCR
Write-only
–
0xC4
TC Block Mode Register
TC_BMR
Read/Write
0
TC_BCR (Block Control Register) and TC_BMR (Block Mode Register) control the whole TC
block. TC channels are controlled by the registers listed in Table 31-4. The offset of each of the
channel registers in Table 31-4 is in relation to the offset of the corresponding channel as mentioned in Table 31-4.
31.6.2
Channel Memory Mapping
Table 31-4.
Offset
Timer/Counter (TC) Channel Memory Mapping
Register
Name
Access
Reset Value
0x00
Channel Control Register
TC_CCR
Write-only
–
0x04
Channel Mode Register
TC_CMR
Read/Write
0
0x08
Reserved
–
–
–
0x0C
Reserved
–
–
–
0x10
Counter Value
TC_CV
Read-only
0x14
Register A
TC_RA
0
Read/Write
(1)
0
Read/Write
(1)
0
0x18
Register B
TC_RB
0x1C
Register C
TC_RC
Read/Write
0
0x20
Status Register
TC_SR
Read-only
0
0x24
Interrupt Enable Register
TC_IER
Write-only
–
0x28
Interrupt Disable Register
TC_IDR
Write-only
–
0x2C
Interrupt Mask Register
TC_IMR
Read-only
0
–
–
–
0x30-0xFC
Note: 1.
Reserved
Read only if WAVE = 0
365
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
31.6.3
TC Block Control Register
Register Name:
TC_BCR
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
SYNC
• SYNC: Synchro Command
0 = No effect.
1 = Asserts the SYNC signal which generates a software trigger simultaneously for each of the channels.
366
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
31.6.4
TC Block Mode Register
Register Name:
TC_BMR
Access Type:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
–
–
TC2XC2S
TCXC1S
0
TC0XC0S
• TC0XC0S: External Clock Signal 0 Selection
TC0XC0S
Signal Connected to XC0
0
0
TCLK0
0
1
none
1
0
TIOA1
1
1
TIOA2
• TC1XC1S: External Clock Signal 1 Selection
TC1XC1S
Signal Connected to XC1
0
0
TCLK1
0
1
none
1
0
TIOA0
1
1
TIOA2
• TC2XC2S: External Clock Signal 2 Selection
TC2XC2S
Signal Connected to XC2
0
0
TCLK2
0
1
none
1
0
TIOA0
1
1
TIOA1
367
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
31.6.5
TC Channel Control Register
Register Name:
TC_CCR
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
–
–
–
SWTRG
CLKDIS
CLKEN
• CLKEN: Counter Clock Enable Command
0 = No effect.
1 = Enables the clock if CLKDIS is not 1.
• CLKDIS: Counter Clock Disable Command
0 = No effect.
1 = Disables the clock.
• SWTRG: Software Trigger Command
0 = No effect.
1 = A software trigger is performed: the counter is reset and the clock is started.
368
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
31.6.6
TC Channel Mode Register: Capture Mode
Register Name:
TC_CMR
Access Type:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
WAVE = 0
CPCTRG
–
–
–
ABETRG
7
6
5
3
2
LDBDIS
LDBSTOP
16
LDRB
4
BURST
CLKI
LDRA
9
8
ETRGEDG
1
0
TCCLKS
• TCCLKS: Clock Selection
TCCLKS
Clock Selected
0
0
0
TIMER_CLOCK1
0
0
1
TIMER_CLOCK2
0
1
0
TIMER_CLOCK3
0
1
1
TIMER_CLOCK4
1
0
0
TIMER_CLOCK5
1
0
1
XC0
1
1
0
XC1
1
1
1
XC2
• CLKI: Clock Invert
0 = Counter is incremented on rising edge of the clock.
1 = Counter is incremented on falling edge of the clock.
• BURST: Burst Signal Selection
BURST
0
0
The clock is not gated by an external signal.
0
1
XC0 is ANDed with the selected clock.
1
0
XC1 is ANDed with the selected clock.
1
1
XC2 is ANDed with the selected clock.
• LDBSTOP: Counter Clock Stopped with RB Loading
0 = Counter clock is not stopped when RB loading occurs.
1 = Counter clock is stopped when RB loading occurs.
• LDBDIS: Counter Clock Disable with RB Loading
0 = Counter clock is not disabled when RB loading occurs.
1 = Counter clock is disabled when RB loading occurs.
369
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
• ETRGEDG: External Trigger Edge Selection
ETRGEDG
Edge
0
0
none
0
1
rising edge
1
0
falling edge
1
1
each edge
• ABETRG: TIOA or TIOB External Trigger Selection
0 = TIOB is used as an external trigger.
1 = TIOA is used as an external trigger.
• CPCTRG: RC Compare Trigger Enable
0 = RC Compare has no effect on the counter and its clock.
1 = RC Compare resets the counter and starts the counter clock.
• WAVE
0 = Capture Mode is enabled.
1 = Capture Mode is disabled (Waveform Mode is enabled).
• LDRA: RA Loading Selection
LDRA
Edge
0
0
none
0
1
rising edge of TIOA
1
0
falling edge of TIOA
1
1
each edge of TIOA
• LDRB: RB Loading Selection
LDRB
370
Edge
0
0
none
0
1
rising edge of TIOA
1
0
falling edge of TIOA
1
1
each edge of TIOA
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
31.6.7
TC Channel Mode Register: Waveform Mode
Register Name:
TC_CMR
Access Type:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
BSWTRG
23
22
21
19
AEEVT
14
13
WAVE = 1
7
6
CPCDIS
CPCSTOP
24
BCPB
18
11
ENETRG
5
25
17
16
ACPC
12
WAVSEL
26
BCPC
20
ASWTRG
15
27
BEEVT
10
9
EEVT
4
BURST
ACPA
3
CLKI
8
EEVTEDG
2
1
0
TCCLKS
• TCCLKS: Clock Selection
TCCLKS
Clock Selected
0
0
0
TIMER_CLOCK1
0
0
1
TIMER_CLOCK2
0
1
0
TIMER_CLOCK3
0
1
1
TIMER_CLOCK4
1
0
0
TIMER_CLOCK5
1
0
1
XC0
1
1
0
XC1
1
1
1
XC2
• CLKI: Clock Invert
0 = Counter is incremented on rising edge of the clock.
1 = Counter is incremented on falling edge of the clock.
• BURST: Burst Signal Selection
BURST
0
0
The clock is not gated by an external signal.
0
1
XC0 is ANDed with the selected clock.
1
0
XC1 is ANDed with the selected clock.
1
1
XC2 is ANDed with the selected clock.
• CPCSTOP: Counter Clock Stopped with RC Compare
0 = Counter clock is not stopped when counter reaches RC.
1 = Counter clock is stopped when counter reaches RC.
• CPCDIS: Counter Clock Disable with RC Compare
0 = Counter clock is not disabled when counter reaches RC.
1 = Counter clock is disabled when counter reaches RC.
371
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
• EEVTEDG: External Event Edge Selection
EEVTEDG
Edge
0
0
none
0
1
rising edge
1
0
falling edge
1
1
each edge
• EEVT: External Event Selection
EEVT
Signal selected as external event
TIOB Direction
0
0
TIOB
input(1)
0
1
XC0
output
1
0
XC1
output
1
1
XC2
output
Note: 1.
If TIOB is chosen as the external event signal, it is configured as an input and no longer generates waveforms.
• ENETRG: External Event Trigger Enable
0 = The external event has no effect on the counter and its clock. In this case, the selected external event only controls the
TIOA output.
1 = The external event resets the counter and starts the counter clock.
• WAVSEL: Waveform Selection
WAVSEL
Effect
0
0
UP mode without automatic trigger on RC Compare
1
0
UP mode with automatic trigger on RC Compare
0
1
UPDOWN mode without automatic trigger on RC Compare
1
1
UPDOWN mode with automatic trigger on RC Compare
• WAVE = 1
0 = Waveform Mode is disabled (Capture Mode is enabled).
1 = Waveform Mode is enabled.
• ACPA: RA Compare Effect on TIOA
ACPA
372
Effect
0
0
none
0
1
set
1
0
clear
1
1
toggle
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
• ACPC: RC Compare Effect on TIOA
ACPC
Effect
0
0
none
0
1
set
1
0
clear
1
1
toggle
• AEEVT: External Event Effect on TIOA
AEEVT
Effect
0
0
none
0
1
set
1
0
clear
1
1
toggle
• ASWTRG: Software Trigger Effect on TIOA
ASWTRG
Effect
0
0
none
0
1
set
1
0
clear
1
1
toggle
• BCPB: RB Compare Effect on TIOB
BCPB
Effect
0
0
none
0
1
set
1
0
clear
1
1
toggle
• BCPC: RC Compare Effect on TIOB
BCPC
Effect
0
0
none
0
1
set
1
0
clear
1
1
toggle
373
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
• BEEVT: External Event Effect on TIOB
BEEVT
Effect
0
0
none
0
1
set
1
0
clear
1
1
toggle
• BSWTRG: Software Trigger Effect on TIOB
BSWTRG
374
Effect
0
0
none
0
1
set
1
0
clear
1
1
toggle
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
31.6.8
TC Counter Value Register
Register Name:
TC_CV
Access Type:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
CV
7
6
5
4
CV
• CV: Counter Value
CV contains the counter value in real time.
375
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
31.6.9
TC Register A
Register Name:
TC_RA
Access Type:
Read-only if WAVE = 0, Read/Write if WAVE = 1
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
RA
7
6
5
4
RA
• RA: Register A
RA contains the Register A value in real time.
31.6.10
TC Register B
Register Name:
376
TC_RB
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
Access Type:
Read-only if WAVE = 0, Read/Write if WAVE = 1
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
RB
7
6
5
4
RB
• RB: Register B
RB contains the Register B value in real time.
31.6.11
TC Register C
Register Name:
TC_RC
Access Type:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
RC
7
6
5
4
RC
• RC: Register C
RC contains the Register C value in real time.
377
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
31.6.12
TC Status Register
Register Name:
TC_SR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
MTIOB
MTIOA
CLKSTA
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ETRGS
LDRBS
LDRAS
CPCS
CPBS
CPAS
LOVRS
COVFS
• COVFS: Counter Overflow Status
0 = No counter overflow has occurred since the last read of the Status Register.
1 = A counter overflow has occurred since the last read of the Status Register.
• LOVRS: Load Overrun Status
0 = Load overrun has not occurred since the last read of the Status Register or WAVE = 1.
1 = RA or RB have been loaded at least twice without any read of the corresponding register since the last read of the Status Register, if WAVE = 0.
• CPAS: RA Compare Status
0 = RA Compare has not occurred since the last read of the Status Register or WAVE = 0.
1 = RA Compare has occurred since the last read of the Status Register, if WAVE = 1.
• CPBS: RB Compare Status
0 = RB Compare has not occurred since the last read of the Status Register or WAVE = 0.
1 = RB Compare has occurred since the last read of the Status Register, if WAVE = 1.
• CPCS: RC Compare Status
0 = RC Compare has not occurred since the last read of the Status Register.
1 = RC Compare has occurred since the last read of the Status Register.
• LDRAS: RA Loading Status
0 = RA Load has not occurred since the last read of the Status Register or WAVE = 1.
1 = RA Load has occurred since the last read of the Status Register, if WAVE = 0.
• LDRBS: RB Loading Status
0 = RB Load has not occurred since the last read of the Status Register or WAVE = 1.
1 = RB Load has occurred since the last read of the Status Register, if WAVE = 0.
• ETRGS: External Trigger Status
0 = External trigger has not occurred since the last read of the Status Register.
1 = External trigger has occurred since the last read of the Status Register.
• CLKSTA: Clock Enabling Status
0 = Clock is disabled.
1 = Clock is enabled.
378
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
• MTIOA: TIOA Mirror
0 = TIOA is low. If WAVE = 0, this means that TIOA pin is low. If WAVE = 1, this means that TIOA is driven low.
1 = TIOA is high. If WAVE = 0, this means that TIOA pin is high. If WAVE = 1, this means that TIOA is driven high.
• MTIOB: TIOB Mirror
0 = TIOB is low. If WAVE = 0, this means that TIOB pin is low. If WAVE = 1, this means that TIOB is driven low.
1 = TIOB is high. If WAVE = 0, this means that TIOB pin is high. If WAVE = 1, this means that TIOB is driven high.
379
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
31.6.13
TC Interrupt Enable Register
Register Name:
TC_IER
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ETRGS
LDRBS
LDRAS
CPCS
CPBS
CPAS
LOVRS
COVFS
• COVFS: Counter Overflow
0 = No effect.
1 = Enables the Counter Overflow Interrupt.
• LOVRS: Load Overrun
0 = No effect.
1 = Enables the Load Overrun Interrupt.
• CPAS: RA Compare
0 = No effect.
1 = Enables the RA Compare Interrupt.
• CPBS: RB Compare
0 = No effect.
1 = Enables the RB Compare Interrupt.
• CPCS: RC Compare
0 = No effect.
1 = Enables the RC Compare Interrupt.
• LDRAS: RA Loading
0 = No effect.
1 = Enables the RA Load Interrupt.
• LDRBS: RB Loading
0 = No effect.
1 = Enables the RB Load Interrupt.
• ETRGS: External Trigger
0 = No effect.
1 = Enables the External Trigger Interrupt.
380
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
31.6.14
TC Interrupt Disable Register
Register Name:
TC_IDR
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ETRGS
LDRBS
LDRAS
CPCS
CPBS
CPAS
LOVRS
COVFS
• COVFS: Counter Overflow
0 = No effect.
1 = Disables the Counter Overflow Interrupt.
• LOVRS: Load Overrun
0 = No effect.
1 = Disables the Load Overrun Interrupt (if WAVE = 0).
• CPAS: RA Compare
0 = No effect.
1 = Disables the RA Compare Interrupt (if WAVE = 1).
• CPBS: RB Compare
0 = No effect.
1 = Disables the RB Compare Interrupt (if WAVE = 1).
• CPCS: RC Compare
0 = No effect.
1 = Disables the RC Compare Interrupt.
• LDRAS: RA Loading
0 = No effect.
1 = Disables the RA Load Interrupt (if WAVE = 0).
• LDRBS: RB Loading
0 = No effect.
1 = Disables the RB Load Interrupt (if WAVE = 0).
• ETRGS: External Trigger
0 = No effect.
1 = Disables the External Trigger Interrupt.
381
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
31.6.15
TC Interrupt Mask Register
Register Name:
TC_IMR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ETRGS
LDRBS
LDRAS
CPCS
CPBS
CPAS
LOVRS
COVFS
• COVFS: Counter Overflow
0 = The Counter Overflow Interrupt is disabled.
1 = The Counter Overflow Interrupt is enabled.
• LOVRS: Load Overrun
0 = The Load Overrun Interrupt is disabled.
1 = The Load Overrun Interrupt is enabled.
• CPAS: RA Compare
0 = The RA Compare Interrupt is disabled.
1 = The RA Compare Interrupt is enabled.
• CPBS: RB Compare
0 = The RB Compare Interrupt is disabled.
1 = The RB Compare Interrupt is enabled.
• CPCS: RC Compare
0 = The RC Compare Interrupt is disabled.
1 = The RC Compare Interrupt is enabled.
• LDRAS: RA Loading
0 = The Load RA Interrupt is disabled.
1 = The Load RA Interrupt is enabled.
• LDRBS: RB Loading
0 = The Load RB Interrupt is disabled.
1 = The Load RB Interrupt is enabled.
• ETRGS: External Trigger
0 = The External Trigger Interrupt is disabled.
1 = The External Trigger Interrupt is enabled.
382
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
32. Pulse Width Modulation Controller (PWM)
32.1
Overview
The PWM macrocell controls several channels independently. Each channel controls one
square output waveform. Characteristics of the output waveform such as period, duty-cycle and
polarity are configurable through the user interface. Each channel selects and uses one of the
clocks provided by the clock generator. The clock generator provides several clocks resulting
from the division of the PWM macrocell master clock.
All PWM macrocell accesses are made through APB mapped registers.
Channels can be synchronized, to generate non overlapped waveforms. All channels integrate a
double buffering system in order to prevent an unexpected output waveform while modifying the
period or the duty-cycle.
32.2
Block Diagram
Figure 32-1. Pulse Width Modulation Controller Block Diagram
PWM
Controller
PWMx
Channel
Period
PWMx
Update
Duty Cycle
Clock
Selector
Comparator
PWMx
Counter
PIO
PWM0
Channel
Period
PWM0
Update
Duty Cycle
Clock
Selector
PMC
MCK
Clock Generator
Comparator
PWM0
Counter
APB Interface
Interrupt Generator
AIC
APB
383
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
32.3
I/O Lines Description
Each channel outputs one waveform on one external I/O line.
Table 32-1.
32.4
32.4.1
I/O Line Description
Name
Description
Type
PWMx
PWM Waveform Output for channel x
Output
Product Dependencies
I/O Lines
The pins used for interfacing the PWM may be multiplexed with PIO lines. The programmer must
first program the PIO controller to assign the desired PWM pins to their peripheral function. If I/O
lines of the PWM are not used by the application, they can be used for other purposes by the
PIO controller.
All of the PWM outputs may or may not be enabled. If an application requires only four channels,
then only four PIO lines will be assigned to PWM outputs.
32.4.2
Power Management
The PWM is not continuously clocked. The programmer must first enable the PWM clock in the
Power Management Controller (PMC) before using the PWM. However, if the application does
not require PWM operations, the PWM clock can be stopped when not needed and be restarted
later. In this case, the PWM will resume its operations where it left off.
Configuring the PWM does not require the PWM clock to be enabled.
32.4.3
Interrupt Sources
The PWM interrupt line is connected on one of the internal sources of the Advanced Interrupt
Controller. Using the PWM interrupt requires the AIC to be programmed first. Note that it is not
recommended to use the PWM interrupt line in edge sensitive mode.
384
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
32.5
Functional Description
The PWM macrocell is primarily composed of a clock generator module and 4 channels.
• Clocked by the system clock, MCK, the clock generator module provides 13 clocks.
• Each channel can independently choose one of the clock generator outputs.
• Each channel generates an output waveform with attributes that can be defined
independently for each channel through the user interface registers.
32.5.1
PWM Clock Generator
Figure 32-2. Functional View of the Clock Generator Block Diagram
MCK
modulo n counter
MCK
MCK/2
MCK/4
MCK/8
MCK/16
MCK/32
MCK/64
MCK/128
MCK/256
MCK/512
MCK/1024
Divider A
PREA
clkA
DIVA
PWM_MR
Divider B
PREB
clkB
DIVB
PWM_MR
Caution: Before using the PWM macrocell, the programmer must first enable the PWM clock in
the Power Management Controller (PMC).
The PWM macrocell master clock, MCK, is divided in the clock generator module to provide different clocks available for all channels. Each channel can independently select one of the
divided clocks.
The clock generator is divided in three blocks:
• a modulo n counter which provides 11 clocks: FMCK, FMCK/2, FMCK/4, FMCK/8, FMCK/16,
FMCK/32, FMCK/64, FMCK/128, FMCK/256, FMCK/512, FMCK/1024
• two linear dividers (1, 1/2, 1/3, ... 1/255) that provide two separate clocks: clkA and clkB
385
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
Each linear divider can independently divide one of the clocks of the modulo n counter. The
selection of the clock to be divided is made according to the PREA (PREB) field of the PWM
Mode register (PWM_MR). The resulting clock clkA (clkB) is the clock selected divided by DIVA
(DIVB) field value in the PWM Mode register (PWM_MR).
After a reset of the PWM controller, DIVA (DIVB) and PREA (PREB) in the PWM Mode register
are set to 0. This implies that after reset clkA (clkB) are turned off.
At reset, all clocks provided by the modulo n counter are turned off except clock “clk”. This situation is also true when the PWM master clock is turned off through the Power Management
Controller.
32.5.2
32.5.2.1
PWM Channel
Block Diagram
Figure 32-3. Functional View of the Channel Block Diagram
Inputs from
clock generator
Channel
Clock
Selector
Internal
Counter
Comparator
PWMx
output waveform
Inputs from
APB Bus
Each of the 4 channels is composed of three blocks:
• A clock selector which selects one of the clocks provided by the clock generator described in
Section 32.5.1 ”PWM Clock Generator” on page 385.
• An internal counter clocked by the output of the clock selector. This internal counter is
incremented or decremented according to the channel configuration and comparators events.
The size of the internal counter is 16 bits.
• A comparator used to generate events according to the internal counter value. It also
computes the PWMx output waveform according to the configuration.
32.5.2.2
Waveform Properties
The different properties of output waveforms are:
• the internal clock selection. The internal channel counter is clocked by one of the clocks
provided by the clock generator described in the previous section. This channel parameter is
defined in the CPRE field of the PWM_CMRx register. This field is reset at 0.
• the waveform period. This channel parameter is defined in the CPRD field of the
PWM_CPRDx register.
- If the waveform is left aligned, then the output waveform period depends on the counter
source clock and can be claculated:
By using the Master Clock (MCK) divided by an X given prescaler value
(with X being 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, or 1024), the resulting period formula
will be:
(------------------------------X × CPRD )MCK
386
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
By using a Master Clock divided by one of both DIVA or DIVB divider, the formula becomes,
respectively:
(-----------------------------------------CRPD × DIVA )( CRPD × DIVAB )
or ----------------------------------------------MCK
MCK
If the waveform is center aligned then the output waveform period depends on the counter
source clock and can be calculated:
By using the Master Clock (MCK) divided by an X given prescaler value
(with X being 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, or 1024). The resulting period formula will
be:
(-----------------------------------------2 × X × CPRD )MCK
By using a Master Clock divided by one of both DIVA or DIVB divider, the formula becomes,
respectively:
(----------------------------------------------------2 × CPRD × DIVA -)
( 2 × CPRD × DIVB )
or -----------------------------------------------------MCK
MCK
• the waveform duty cycle. This channel parameter is defined in the CDTY field of the
PWM_CDTYx register.
If the waveform is left aligned then:
( period – 1 ⁄ fchannel_x_clock × CDTY )
duty cycle = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------period
If the waveform is center aligned, then:
( ( period ⁄ 2 ) – 1 ⁄ fchannel_x_clock × CDTY )
uty cycle = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------( period ⁄ 2 )
• the waveform polarity. At the beginning of the period, the signal can be at high or low level.
This property is defined in the CPOL field of the PWM_CMRx register. By default the signal
starts by a low level.
• the waveform alignment. The output waveform can be left or center aligned. Center aligned
waveforms can be used to generate non overlapped waveforms. This property is defined in
the CALG field of the PWM_CMRx register. The default mode is left aligned.
Figure 32-4. Non Overlapped Center Aligned Waveforms(1)
No overlap
PWM0
PWM1
Period
Note:
1. See Figure 32-5 on page 389 for a detailed description of center aligned waveforms.
387
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
When center aligned, the internal channel counter increases up to CPRD and decreases down
to 0. This ends the period.
When left aligned, the internal channel counter increases up to CPRD and is reset. This ends
the period.
Thus, for the same CPRD value, the period for a center aligned channel is twice the period for a
left aligned channel.
Waveforms are fixed at 0 when:
• CDTY = CPRD and CPOL = 0
• CDTY = 0 and CPOL = 1
Waveforms are fixed at 1 (once the channel is enabled) when:
• CDTY = 0 and CPOL = 0
• CDTY = CPRD and CPOL = 1
The waveform polarity must be set before enabling the channel. This immediately affects the
channel output level. Changes on channel polarity are not taken into account while the channel
is enabled.
388
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
Figure 32-5. Waveform Properties
PWM_MCKx
CHIDx(PWM_SR)
CHIDx(PWM_ENA)
CHIDx(PWM_DIS)
Center Aligned
CALG(PWM_CMRx) = 1
PWM_CCNTx
CPRD(PWM_CPRDx)
CDTY(PWM_CDTYx)
Period
Output Waveform PWMx
CPOL(PWM_CMRx) = 0
Output Waveform PWMx
CPOL(PWM_CMRx) = 1
CHIDx(PWM_ISR)
Left Aligned
CALG(PWM_CMRx) = 0
PWM_CCNTx
CPRD(PWM_CPRDx)
CDTY(PWM_CDTYx)
Period
Output Waveform PWMx
CPOL(PWM_CMRx) = 0
Output Waveform PWMx
CPOL(PWM_CMRx) = 1
CHIDx(PWM_ISR)
389
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
32.5.3
32.5.3.1
PWM Controller Operations
Initialization
Before enabling the output channel, this channel must have been configured by the software
application:
• Configuration of the clock generator if DIVA and DIVB are required
• Selection of the clock for each channel (CPRE field in the PWM_CMRx register)
• Configuration of the waveform alignment for each channel (CALG field in the PWM_CMRx
register)
• Configuration of the period for each channel (CPRD in the PWM_CPRDx register). Writing in
PWM_CPRDx Register is possible while the channel is disabled. After validation of the
channel, the user must use PWM_CUPDx Register to update PWM_CPRDx as explained
below.
• Configuration of the duty cycle for each channel (CDTY in the PWM_CDTYx register).
Writing in PWM_CDTYx Register is possible while the channel is disabled. After validation of
the channel, the user must use PWM_CUPDx Register to update PWM_CDTYx as explained
below.
• Configuration of the output waveform polarity for each channel (CPOL in the PWM_CMRx
register)
• Enable Interrupts (Writing CHIDx in the PWM_IER register)
• Enable the PWM channel (Writing CHIDx in the PWM_ENA register)
It is possible to synchronize different channels by enabling them at the same time by means of
writing simultaneously several CHIDx bits in the PWM_ENA register.
• In such a situation, all channels may have the same clock selector configuration and the
same period specified.
32.5.3.2
Source Clock Selection Criteria
The large number of source clocks can make selection difficult. The relationship between the
value in the Period Register (PWM_CPRDx) and the Duty Cycle Register (PWM_CDTYx) can
help the user in choosing. The event number written in the Period Register gives the PWM accuracy. The Duty Cycle quantum cannot be lower than 1/PWM_CPRDx value. The higher the value
of PWM_CPRDx, the greater the PWM accuracy.
For example, if the user sets 15 (in decimal) in PWM_CPRDx, the user is able to set a value
between 1 up to 14 in PWM_CDTYx Register. The resulting duty cycle quantum cannot be lower
than 1/15 of the PWM period.
32.5.3.3
Changing the Duty Cycle or the Period
It is possible to modulate the output waveform duty cycle or period.
To prevent an unexpected output waveform when modifying the waveform parameters while the
channel is still enabled, PWM_CPRDx and PWM_CDTYx registers are double buffered. The
user can write a new period value or duty cycle value in the update register (PWM_CUPDx).
This register holds the new value until the end of the current cycle and updates the value for the
next cycle. According to the CPD field in the PWM_CMRx register, PWM_CUPDx either updates
the PWM_CPRDx or PWM_CDTYx.
390
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
Figure 32-6. Synchronized Period or Duty Cycle Update
User's Writing
PWM_CUPDx Value
0
1
PWM_CPRDx
PWM_CMRx. CPD
PWM_CDTYx
End of Cycle
To prevent overwriting the PWM_CUPDx by software, the user can use status events in order to
synchronize his software. Two methods are possible. In both, the user must enable the dedicated interrupt in PWM_IER at PWM Controller level.
The first method (polling method) consists of reading the relevant status bit in PWM_ISR Register according to the enabled channel(s). See Figure 32-7.
The second method uses an Interrupt Service Routine associated with the PWM channel.
Note:
Reading the PWM_ISR register automatically clears CHIDx flags.
Figure 32-7. Polling Method
PWM_ISR Read
Acknowledgement and clear previous register state
Writing in CPD field
Update of the Period or Duty Cycle
CHIDx = 1
YES
Writing in PWM_CUPDx
The last write has been taken into account
Note:
Polarity and alignment can be modified only when the channel is disabled.
391
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
32.5.3.4
Interrupts
Depending on the interrupt mask in the PWM_IMR register, an interrupt is generated at the end
of the corresponding channel period. The interrupt remains active until a read operation in the
PWM_ISR register occurs.
A channel interrupt is enabled by setting the corresponding bit in the PWM_IER register. A channel interrupt is disabled by setting the corresponding bit in the PWM_IDR register.
392
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
32.6
Pulse Width Modulation Controller (PWM) User Interface
Table 32-2.
Pulse Width Modulation Controller (PWM) Register Mapping
Access
Peripheral
Reset Value
PWM_MR
Read/Write
0
PWM Enable Register
PWM_ENA
Write-only
-
0x08
PWM Disable Register
PWM_DIS
Write-only
-
0x0C
PWM Status Register
PWM_SR
Read-only
0
0x10
PWM Interrupt Enable Register
PWM_IER
Write-only
-
0x14
PWM Interrupt Disable Register
PWM_IDR
Write-only
-
0x18
PWM Interrupt Mask Register
PWM_IMR
Read-only
0
0x1C
PWM Interrupt Status Register
PWM_ISR
Read-only
0
0x4C - 0xFC
Reserved
–
–
0x100 - 0x1FC
Reserved
0x200
Channel 0 Mode Register
PWM_CMR0
Read/Write
0x0
0x204
Channel 0 Duty Cycle Register
PWM_CDTY0
Read/Write
0x0
0x208
Channel 0 Period Register
PWM_CPRD0
Read/Write
0x0
0x20C
Channel 0 Counter Register
PWM_CCNT0
Read-only
0x0
0x210
Channel 0 Update Register
PWM_CUPD0
Write-only
-
...
Reserved
0x220
Channel 1 Mode Register
PWM_CMR1
Read/Write
0x0
0x224
Channel 1 Duty Cycle Register
PWM_CDTY1
Read/Write
0x0
0x228
Channel 1 Period Register
PWM_CPRD1
Read/Write
0x0
0x22C
Channel 1 Counter Register
PWM_CCNT1
Read-only
0x0
0x230
Channel 1 Update Register
PWM_CUPD1
Write-only
-
...
...
...
...
...
Offset
Register
Name
0x00
PWM Mode Register
0x04
–
393
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
32.6.1
PWM Mode Register
Register Name:
PWM_MR
Access Type:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
26
23
22
21
20
19
18
11
10
25
24
17
16
9
8
1
0
PREB
DIVB
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
7
6
5
4
PREA
3
2
DIVA
• DIVA, DIVB: CLKA, CLKB Divide Factor
DIVA, DIVB
CLKA, CLKB
0
CLKA, CLKB clock is turned off
1
CLKA, CLKB clock is clock selected by PREA, PREB
2-255
CLKA, CLKB clock is clock selected by PREA, PREB divided by DIVA, DIVB factor.
• PREA, PREB
PREA, PREB
0
0
0
0
MCK.
0
0
0
1
MCK/2
0
0
1
0
MCK/4
0
0
1
1
MCK/8
0
1
0
0
MCK/16
0
1
0
1
MCK/32
0
1
1
0
MCK/64
0
1
1
1
MCK/128
1
0
0
0
MCK/256
1
0
0
1
MCK/512
1
0
1
0
MCK/1024
Other
394
Divider Input Clock
Reserved
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
32.6.2
PWM Enable Register
Register Name:
PWM_ENA
Access Type:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
CHID3
2
CHID2
1
CHID1
0
CHID0
• CHIDx: Channel ID
0 = No effect.
1 = Enable PWM output for channel x.
32.6.3
PWM Disable Register
Register Name:
PWM_DIS
Access Type:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
CHID3
2
CHID2
1
CHID1
0
CHID0
• CHIDx: Channel ID
0 = No effect.
1 = Disable PWM output for channel x.
395
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
32.6.4
PWM Status Register
Register Name:
PWM_SR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
CHID3
2
CHID2
1
CHID1
0
CHID0
• CHIDx: Channel ID
0 = PWM output for channel x is disabled.
1 = PWM output for channel x is enabled.
32.6.5
PWM Interrupt Enable Register
Register Name:
PWM_IER
Access Type:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
CHID3
2
CHID2
1
CHID1
0
CHID0
• CHIDx: Channel ID.
0 = No effect.
1 = Enable interrupt for PWM channel x.
396
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
32.6.6
PWM Interrupt Disable Register
Register Name:
PWM_IDR
Access Type:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
CHID3
2
CHID2
1
CHID1
0
CHID0
• CHIDx: Channel ID.
0 = No effect.
1 = Disable interrupt for PWM channel x.
397
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
32.6.7
PWM Interrupt Mask Register
Register Name:
PWM_IMR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
CHID3
2
CHID2
1
CHID1
0
CHID0
• CHIDx: Channel ID.
0 = Interrupt for PWM channel x is disabled.
1 = Interrupt for PWM channel x is enabled.
32.6.8
PWM Interrupt Status Register
Register Name:
PWM_ISR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
CHID3
2
CHID2
1
CHID1
0
CHID0
• CHIDx: Channel ID
0 = No new channel period has been achieved since the last read of the PWM_ISR register.
1 = At least one new channel period has been achieved since the last read of the PWM_ISR register.
Note:
398
Reading PWM_ISR automatically clears CHIDx flags.
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
32.6.9
PWM Channel Mode Register
Register Name:
PWM_CMRx
Access Type:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
CPD
9
CPOL
8
CALG
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
2
1
0
CPRE
• CPRE: Channel Pre-scaler
CPRE
Channel Pre-scaler
0
0
0
0
MCK
0
0
0
1
MCK/2
0
0
1
0
MCK/4
0
0
1
1
MCK/8
0
1
0
0
MCK/16
0
1
0
1
MCK/32
0
1
1
0
MCK/64
0
1
1
1
MCK/128
1
0
0
0
MCK/256
1
0
0
1
MCK/512
1
0
1
0
MCK/1024
1
0
1
1
CLKA
1
1
0
0
CLKB
Other
Reserved
• CALG: Channel Alignment
0 = The period is left aligned.
1 = The period is center aligned.
• CPOL: Channel Polarity
0 = The output waveform starts at a low level.
1 = The output waveform starts at a high level.
• CPD: Channel Update Period
0 = Writing to the PWM_CUPDx will modify the duty cycle at the next period start event.
1 = Writing to the PWM_CUPDx will modify the period at the next period start event.
399
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
32.6.10
PWM Channel Duty Cycle Register
Register Name:
PWM_CDTYx
Access Type:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
CDTY
23
22
21
20
CDTY
15
14
13
12
CDTY
7
6
5
4
CDTY
Only the first 16 bits (internal channel counter size) are significative.
• CDTY: Channel Duty Cycle
Defines the waveform duty cycle. This value must be defined between 0 and CPRD (PWM_CPRx).
32.6.11
PWM Channel Period Register
Register Name:
PWM_CPRDx
Access Type:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
CPRD
23
22
21
20
CPRD
15
14
13
12
CPRD
7
6
5
4
CPRD
Only the first 16 bits (internal channel counter size) are significative.
• CPRD: Channel Period
If the waveform is left-aligned, then the output waveform period depends on the counter source clock and can be
calculated:
– By using the Master Clock (MCK) divided by an X given prescaler value (with X being 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128,
256, 512, or 1024). The resulting period formula will be:
(------------------------------X × CPRD )MCK
– By using a Master Clock divided by one of both DIVA or DIVB divider, the formula becomes, respectively:
400
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
(-----------------------------------------CRPD × DIVA )( CRPD × DIVAB )
or ----------------------------------------------MCK
MCK
If the waveform is center-aligned, then the output waveform period depends on the counter source clockand can be
calculated:
– By using the Master Clock (MCK) divided by an X given prescaler value (with X being 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128,
256, 512, or 1024). The resulting period formula will be:
(-----------------------------------------2 × X × CPRD )MCK
– By using a Master Clock divided by one of both DIVA or DIVB divider, the formula becomes, respectively:
(----------------------------------------------------2 × CPRD × DIVA )( 2 × CPRD × DIVB )
or -----------------------------------------------------MCK
MCK
401
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
32.6.12
PWM Channel Counter Register
Register Name:
PWM_CCNTx
Access Type:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
CNT
23
22
21
20
CNT
15
14
13
12
CNT
7
6
5
4
CNT
• CNT: Channel Counter Register
Internal counter value. This register is reset when:
– the channel is enabled (writing CHIDx in the PWM_ENA register).
– the counter reaches CPRD value defined in the PWM_CPRDx register if the waveform is left aligned.
32.6.13
PWM Channel Update Register
Register Name:
PWM_CUPDx
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
CUPD
23
22
21
20
CUPD
15
14
13
12
CUPD
7
6
5
4
CUPD
This register acts as a double buffer for the period or the duty cycle. This prevents an unexpected waveform when modifying the waveform period or duty-cycle.
Only the first 16 bits (internal channel counter size) are significative.
CPD (PWM_CMRx Register)
402
0
The duty-cycle (CDTC in the PWM_CDRx register) is updated with the CUPD value at the
beginning of the next period.
1
The period (CPRD in the PWM_CPRx register) is updated with the CUPD value at the beginning
of the next period.
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
33. USB Device Port (UDP)
33.1
Overview
The USB Device Port (UDP) is compliant with the Universal Serial Bus (USB) V2.0 full-speed
device specification.
Each endpoint can be configured in one several USB transfer types. It can be associated with
one or two banks of a dual-port RAM used to store the current data payload. If two banks are
used, one DPR bank is read or written by the processor, while the other is read or written by the
USB device peripheral. This feature is mandatory for isochronous endpoints. Thus the device
maintains the maximum bandwidth (1M bytes/s) by working with endpoints with two banks of
DPR.
Table 33-1.
Endpoint
Number
USB Endpoint Description
Mnemonic
Dual-Bank
Max. Endpoint Size
Endpoint Type
0
EP0
No
8
Control/Bulk/Interrupt
1
EP1
Yes
64
Bulk/Iso/Interrupt
3
EP2
Yes
64
Bulk/Iso/Interrupt
3
EP3
No
64
Control/Bulk/Interrupt
Suspend and resume are automatically detected by the USB device, which notifies the processor by raising an interrupt. Depending on the product, an external signal can be used to send a
wake-up to the USB host controller.
33.2
Block Diagram
Figure 33-1. Block Diagram
Atmel Bridge
MCK
APB
to
MCU
Bus
UDPCK
udp_int
external_resume
USB Device
txoen
U
s
e
r
I
n
t
e
r
f
a
c
e
W
r
a
p
p
e
r
Dual
Port
RAM
FIFO
W
r
a
p
p
e
r
eopn
Serial
Interface
Engine
12 MHz
SIE
txd
rxdm
Embedded
USB
Transceiver
DP
DM
rxd
rxdp
Suspend/Resume Logic
Master Clock
Domain
Recovered 12 MHz
Domain
403
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
Access to the UDP is via the APB bus interface. Read and write to the data FIFO are done by
reading and writing 8-bit values to APB registers.
The UDP peripheral requires two clocks: one peripheral clock used by the MCK domain and a
48 MHz clock used by the 12 MHz domain.
A USB 2.0 full-speed pad is embedded and controlled by the Serial Interface Engine (SIE).
The signal external_resume is optional. It allows the UDP peripheral to wake-up once in system
mode. The host is then notified that the device asks for a resume. This optional feature must be
also negotiated with the host during the enumeration.
33.3
Product Dependencies
For further details on the USB Device hardware implementation, see the specific Product Properties document.
The USB physical transceiver is integrated into the product. The bi-directional differential signals
DP and DM are available from the product boundary.
Two I/O lines may be used by the application:
• One to check that VBUS is still available from the host. Self-powered devices may use this
entry to be notified that the host has been powered off. In this case, the board pull-up on DP
must be disabled in order to prevent feeding current to the host.
• One to control the board pull-up on DP. Thus, when the device is ready to communicate with
the host, it activates its DP pull-up through this control line.
33.3.1
I/O Lines
DP and DM are not controlled by any PIO controllers. The embedded USB physical transceiver
is controlled by the USB device peripheral.
To reserve an I/O line to check VBUS, the programmer must first program the PIO controller to
assign this I/O in input PIO mode.
To reserve an I/O line to control the board pull-up, the programmer must first program the PIO
controller to assign this I/O in output PIO mode.
33.3.2
Power Management
The USB device peripheral requires a 48 MHz clock. This clock must be generated by a PLL
with an accuracy of ± 0.25%.
Thus, the USB device receives two clocks from the Power Management Controller (PMC): the
master clock, MCK, used to drive the peripheral user interface, and the UDPCK, used to interface with the bus USB signals (recovered 12 MHz domain).
33.3.3
Interrupt
The USB device interface has an interrupt line connected to the Advanced Interrupt Controller
(AIC).
Handling the USB device interrupt requires programming the AIC before configuring the UDP.
404
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
33.4
Typical Connection
Figure 33-2. Board Schematic to Interface USB Device Peripheral
USB_CNX is an input signal used to check if the host is connected
USB_DP_PUP is an output signal used to disable pull-up on DP by driving it to 0.
Figure 33-3. Figure 33-2 shows automatic activation of pull-up after reset.
PAm
USB_CNX
22 kΩ
15 kΩ
3V3
1.5 kΩ
47 kΩ
PAn
USB_DP_PUP
System
Reset
33 pF
27Ω
2
DM
1
100 nF
DP
27Ω
15 pF
3
Type B
4
Connector
15 pF
405
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
33.5
Functional Description
33.5.1
USB V2.0 Full-speed Introduction
The USB V2.0 full-speed provides communication services between host and attached USB
devices. Each device is offered with a collection of communication flows (pipes) associated with
each endpoint. Software on the host communicates with an USB device through a set of communication flows.
Figure 33-4. Example of USB V2.0 Full-speed Communication Control
USB Host V2.0
Software Client 1
Software Client 2
Data Flow: Control Transfer
Data Flow: Isochronous In Transfer
Data Flow: Isochronous Out Transfer
Data Flow: Control Transfer
EP1
USB Device 2.0
Block 1
EP2
EP0
Data Flow: Bulk In Transfer
EP4
Data Flow: Bulk Out Transfer
33.5.1.1
EP0
USB Device 2.0
Block 2
EP5
USB V2.0 Full-speed Transfer Types
A communication flow is carried over one of four transfer types defined by the USB device.
Table 33-2.
Transfer
USB Communication Flow
Direction
Bandwidth
Endpoint Size
Error Detection
Retrying
Bi-directional
Not guaranteed
8, 16, 32, 64
Yes
Automatic
Isochronous
Uni-directional
Guaranteed
1 - 1023
Yes
No
Interrupt
Uni-directional
Not guaranteed
≤64
Yes
Yes
Bulk
Uni-directional
Not guaranteed
8, 16, 32, 64
Yes
Yes
Control
33.5.1.2
USB Bus Transactions
Each transfer results in one or more transactions over the USB bus. There are five kinds of
transactions flowing across the bus in packets:
1. Setup Transaction
2. Data IN Transaction
3. Data OUT Transaction
4. Status IN Transaction
5. Status OUT Transaction
406
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
33.5.1.3
USB Transfer Event Definitions
As indicated below, transfers are sequential events carried out on the USB bus.
Table 33-3.
USB Transfer Events
• Setup transaction > Data IN transactions > Status
OUT transaction
Control Transfers(1) (3)
Interrupt IN Transfer
(device toward host)
33.5.2.1
• Setup transaction > Status IN transaction
• Data IN transaction > Data IN transaction
Interrupt OUT Transfer
(host toward device)
• Data OUT transaction > Data OUT transaction
Isochronous IN Transfer(2)
(device toward host)
• Data IN transaction > Data IN transaction
Isochronous OUT Transfer(2)
(host toward device)
• Data OUT transaction > Data OUT transaction
Bulk IN Transfer
(device toward host)
• Data IN transaction > Data IN transaction
Bulk OUT Transfer
(host toward device)
• Data OUT transaction > Data OUT transaction
Notes:
33.5.2
• Setup transaction > Data OUT transactions > Status
IN transaction
1. Control transfer must use endpoints with no ping-pong attributes.
2. Isochronous transfers must use endpoints with ping-pong attributes.
3. Control transfers can be aborted using a stall handshake.
Handling Transactions with USB V2.0 Device Peripheral
Setup Transaction
Setup is a special type of host-to-device transaction used during control transfers. Control transfers must be performed using endpoints with no ping-pong attributes. A setup transaction needs
to be handled as soon as possible by the firmware. It is used to transmit requests from the host
to the device. These requests are then handled by the USB device and may require more arguments. The arguments are sent to the device by a Data OUT transaction which follows the setup
transaction. These requests may also return data. The data is carried out to the host by the next
Data IN transaction which follows the setup transaction. A status transaction ends the control
transfer.
When a setup transfer is received by the USB endpoint:
• The USB device automatically acknowledges the setup packet
• RXSETUP is set in the USB_CSRx register
• An endpoint interrupt is generated while the RXSETUP is not cleared. This interrupt is
carried out to the microcontroller if interrupts are enabled for this endpoint.
Thus, firmware must detect the RXSETUP polling the USB_CSRx or catching an interrupt, read
the setup packet in the FIFO, then clear the RXSETUP. RXSETUP cannot be cleared before the
setup packet has been read in the FIFO. Otherwise, the USB device would accept the next Data
OUT transfer and overwrite the setup packet in the FIFO.
407
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
Figure 33-5. Setup Transaction Followed by a Data OUT Transaction
Setup Received
USB
Bus Packets
Setup
PID
Data Setup
RXSETUP Flag
Setup Handled by Firmware
ACK
PID
Data OUT
PID
Data OUT
Data OUT
PID
Data OUT
ACK
PID
Cleared by Firmware
Set by USB
Device Peripheral
RX_Data_BKO
(USB_CSRx)
33.5.2.2
NAK
PID
Interrupt Pending
Set by USB Device
FIFO (DPR)
Content
Data Out Received
XX
Data Setup
XX
Data OUT
Data IN Transaction
Data IN transactions are used in control, isochronous, bulk and interrupt transfers and conduct
the transfer of data from the device to the host. Data IN transactions in isochronous transfer
must be done using endpoints with ping-pong attributes.
33.5.2.3
Using Endpoints Without Ping-pong Attributes
To perform a Data IN transaction using a non ping-pong endpoint:
1. The microcontroller checks if it is possible to write in the FIFO by polling TXPKTRDY in
the endpoint’s USB_CSRx register (TXPKTRDY must be cleared).
2. The microcontroller writes data to be sent in the endpoint’s FIFO, writing zero or more
byte values in the endpoint’s USB_FDRx register,
3. The microcontroller notifies the USB peripheral it has finished by setting the TXPKTRDY in the endpoint’s USB_CSRx register.
4. The microcontroller is notified that the endpoint’s FIFO has been released by the USB
device when TXCOMP in the endpoint’s USB_CSRx register has been set. Then an
interrupt for the corresponding endpoint is pending while TXCOMP is set.
TXCOMP is set by the USB device when it has received an ACK PID signal for the Data IN
packet. An interrupt is pending while TXCOMP is set.
Note:
408
Refer to Chapter 8 of the Universal Serial Bus Specification, Rev 2.0, for more information on the
Data IN protocol layer.
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
Figure 33-6. Data IN Transfer for Non Ping-pong Endpoint
Prevous Data IN TX
USB Bus Packets
Data IN
PID
Data IN 1
Microcontroller Load Data in FIFO
Data IN
PID
ACK
PID
NAK
PID
Data is Sent on USB Bus
Data IN
PID
ACK
PID
Data IN 2
TXPKTRDY Flag
(USB_CSRx)
Set by the Firmware
Data Payload Written in FIFO
Cleared by USB Device
Interrupt Pending
TXCOMP Flag
(USB_CSRx)
Cleared by Firmware
FIFO (DPR)
Content
33.5.2.4
Data IN 1
Interrupt Pending
Start to Write Data
Payload in FIFO
Load In Progress
Load In
Progress
Data IN 2
Using Endpoints With Ping-pong Attribute
The use of an endpoint with ping-pong attributes is necessary during isochronous transfer. To
be able to guarantee a constant bandwidth, the microcontroller must prepare the next data payload to be sent while the current one is being sent by the USB device. Thus two banks of
memory are used. While one is available for the microcontroller, the other one is locked by the
USB device.
Figure 33-7. Bank Swapping Data IN Transfer for Ping-pong Endpoints
1st Data Payload
USB Bus
USB Device
Microcontroller
Write
Bank 0
Endpoint 1
Read
Read and Write at the Same Time
2nd Data Payload
Data IN Packet
Bank 1
Endpoint 1
Bank 0
Endpoint 1
1st Data Payload
Bank 0
Endpoint 1
Bank 1
Endpoint 1
2nd Data Payload
Bank 0
Endpoint 1
3rd Data Payload
3rd Data Payload
Data IN Packet
Data IN Packet
When using a ping-pong endpoint, the following procedures are required to perform Data IN
transactions:
409
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
1. The microcontroller checks if it is possible to write in the FIFO by polling TXPKTRDY to
be cleared in the endpoint’s USB_CSRx register.
2. The microcontroller writes the first data payload to be sent in the FIFO (Bank 0), writing
zero or more byte values in the endpoint’s USB_FDRx register.
3. The microcontroller notifies the USB peripheral it has finished writing in Bank 0 of the
FIFO by setting the TXPKTRDY in the endpoint’s USB_CSRx register.
4. Without waiting for TXPKTRDY to be cleared, the microcontroller writes the second
data payload to be sent in the FIFO (Bank 1), writing zero or more byte values in the
endpoint’s USB_FDRx register.
5. The microcontroller is notified that the first Bank has been released by the USB device
when TXCOMP in the endpoint’s USB_CSRx register is set. An interrupt is pending
while TXCOMP is being set.
6. Once the microcontroller has received TXCOMP for the first Bank, it notifies the USB
device that it has prepared the second Bank to be sent rising TXPKTRDY in the endpoint’s USB_CSRx register.
7. At this step, Bank 0 is available and the microcontroller can prepare a third data payload to be sent.
Figure 33-8. Data IN Transfer for Ping-pong Endpoint
Microcontroller
Load Data IN Bank 0
USB Bus
Packets
Data IN
PID
TXPKTRDY Flag
(USB_MCSRx)
Microcontroller Load Data IN Bank 1
USB Device Send Bank 0
ACK
PID
Data IN
Data IN
PID
Cleared by USB Device,
Data Payload Fully Transmitted
Set by Firmware,
Data Payload Written in FIFO Bank 0
ACK
PID
Data IN
Set by Firmware,
Data Payload Written in FIFO Bank 1
Interrupt Pending
Set by USB
Device
TXCOMP Flag
(USB_CSRx)
Set by USB Device
Interrupt Cleared by Firmware
FIFO (DPR) Written by
Microcontroller
Bank 0
FIFO (DPR)
Bank 1
Microcontroller Load Data IN Bank 0
USB Device Send Bank 1
Read by USB Device
Written by
Microcontroller
Written by
Microcontroller
Read by USB Device
Warning: There is software critical path due to the fact that once the second bank is filled, the
driver has to wait for TX_COMP to set TX_PKTRDY. If the delay between receiving TX_COMP
is set and TX_PKTRDY is set is too long, some Data IN packets may be NACKed, reducing the
bandwidth.
410
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
33.5.2.5
Data OUT Transaction
Data OUT transactions are used in control, isochronous, bulk and interrupt transfers and conduct the transfer of data from the host to the device. Data OUT transactions in isochronous
transfers must be done using endpoints with ping-pong attributes.
33.5.2.6
Data OUT Transaction Without Ping-pong Attributes
To perform a Data OUT transaction, using a non ping-pong endpoint:
1. The host generates a Data OUT packet.
2. This packet is received by the USB device endpoint. While the FIFO associated to this
endpoint is being used by the microcontroller, a NAK PID is returned to the host. Once
the FIFO is available, data are written to the FIFO by the USB device and an ACK is
automatically carried out to the host.
3. The microcontroller is notified that the USB device has received a data payload polling
RX_DATA_BK0 in the endpoint’s USB_CSRx register. An interrupt is pending for this
endpoint while RX_DATA_BK0 is set.
4. The number of bytes available in the FIFO is made available by reading RXBYTECNT
in the endpoint’s USB_CSRx register.
5. The microcontroller carries out data received from the endpoint’s memory to its memory. Data received is available by reading the endpoint’s USB_FDRx register.
6. The microcontroller notifies the USB device that it has finished the transfer by clearing
RX_DATA_BK0 in the endpoint’s USB_CSRx register.
7. A new Data OUT packet can be accepted by the USB device.
Figure 33-9. Data OUT Transfer for Non Ping-pong Endpoints
USB Bus
Packets
Host Sends Data Payload
Microcontroller Transfers Data
Host Sends the Next Data Payload
Data OUT
PID
ACK
PID
Data OUT 1
RX_DATA_BK0
(USB_CSRx)
Data OUT2 Data OUT2 NAK
PID
PID
Host Resends the Next Data Payload
Data OUT
PID
Data OUT2
ACK
PID
Interrupt Pending
Set by USB Device
FIFO (DPR)
Content
Data OUT 1
Written by USB Device
Data OUT 1
Microcontroller Read
Cleared by Firmware,
Data Payload Written in FIFO
Data OUT 2
Written by USB Device
An interrupt is pending while the flag RX_DATA_BK0 is set. Memory transfer between the USB
device, the FIFO and microcontroller memory can not be done after RX_DATA_BK0 has been
cleared. Otherwise, the USB device would accept the next Data OUT transfer and overwrite the
current Data OUT packet in the FIFO.
411
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
33.5.2.7
Using Endpoints With Ping-pong Attributes
During isochronous transfer, using an endpoint with ping-pong attributes is obligatory. To be
able to guarantee a constant bandwidth, the microcontroller must read the previous data payload sent by the host, while the current data payload is received by the USB device. Thus two
banks of memory are used. While one is available for the microcontroller, the other one is locked
by the USB device.
Figure 33-10. Bank Swapping in Data OUT Transfers for Ping-pong Endpoints
USB Bus
USB Device
Microcontroller
Write
Read
Data IN Packet
Bank 0
Endpoint 1
1st Data Payload
Bank 0
Endpoint 1
Bank 1
Endpoint 1
Data IN Packet
nd
2 Data Payload
Bank 1
Endpoint 1
Bank 0
Endpoint 1
3rd Data Payload
Write and Read at the Same Time
1st Data Payload
2nd Data Payload
Data IN Packet
3rd Data Payload
Bank 0
Endpoint 1
When using a ping-pong endpoint, the following procedures are required to perform Data OUT
transactions:
1. The host generates a Data OUT packet.
2. This packet is received by the USB device endpoint. It is written in the endpoint’s FIFO
Bank 0.
3. The USB device sends an ACK PID packet to the host. The host can immediately send
a second Data OUT packet. It is accepted by the device and copied to FIFO Bank 1.
4. The microcontroller is notified that the USB device has received a data payload, polling
RX_DATA_BK0 in the endpoint’s USB_CSRx register. An interrupt is pending for this
endpoint while RX_DATA_BK0 is set.
5. The number of bytes available in the FIFO is made available by reading RXBYTECNT
in the endpoint’s USB_CSRx register.
6. The microcontroller transfers out data received from the endpoint’s memory to the
microcontroller’s memory. Data received is made available by reading the endpoint’s
USB_FDRx register.
7. The microcontroller notifies the USB peripheral device that it has finished the transfer
by clearing RX_DATA_BK0 in the endpoint’s USB_CSRx register.
8. A third Data OUT packet can be accepted by the USB peripheral device and copied in
the FIFO Bank 0.
9. If a second Data OUT packet has been received, the microcontroller is notified by the
flag RX_DATA_BK1 set in the endpoint’s USB_CSRx register. An interrupt is pending
for this endpoint while RX_DATA_BK1 is set.
412
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
10. The microcontroller transfers out data received from the endpoint’s memory to the
microcontroller’s memory. Data received is available by reading the endpoint’s
USB_FDRx register.
11. The microcontroller notifies the USB device it has finished the transfer by clearing
RX_DATA_BK1 in the endpoint’s USB_CSRx register.
12. A fourth Data OUT packet can be accepted by the USB device and copied in the FIFO
Bank 0.
Figure 33-11. Data OUT Transfer for Ping-pong Endpoint
Microcontroller Reads Data 1 in Bank 0,
Host Sends Second Data Payload
Host Sends First Data Payload
USB Bus
Packets
Data OUT
PID
RX_DATA_BK0 Flag
(USB_CSRx)
Data OUT 1
Data OUT
PID
Data OUT 2
Set by USB Device,
Data Payload Written
in FIFO Endpoint Bank 0
Data OUT1
Write by USB Device
FIFO (DPR)
Bank 1
ACK
PID
Set by USB Device,
Data Payload Written
in FIFO Endpoint Bank 1
Data OUT 3
A
P
Cleared by Firmware
Interrupt Pending
Data OUT 1
Data OUT 3
Read By Microcontroller
Write In Progress
Data OUT 2
Write by USB Device
Note:
Data OUT
PID
Cleared by Firmware
Interrupt Pending
RX_DATA_BK1 Flag
(USB_CSRx)
FIFO (DPR)
Bank 0
ACK
PID
Microcontroller Reads Data2 in Bank 1,
Host Sends Third Data Payload
Data OUT 2
Read By Microcontroller
An interrupt is pending while the RX_DATA_BK0 or RX_DATA_BK1 flag is set.
Warning: When RX_DATA_BK0 and RX_DATA_BK1 are both set, there is no way to determine
which one to clear first. Thus the software must keep an internal counter to be sure to clear alternatively RX_DATA_BK0 then RX_DATA_BK1. This situation may occur when the software
application is busy elsewhere and the two banks are filled by the USB host. Once the application
comes back to the USB driver, the two flags are set.
33.5.2.8
Status Transaction
A status transaction is a special type of host-to-device transaction used only in a control transfer.
The control transfer must be performed using endpoints with no ping-pong attributes. According
to the control sequence (read or write), the USB device sends or receives a status transaction.
413
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
Figure 33-12. Control Read and Write Sequences
Setup Stage
Control Read
Setup TX
Setup Stage
Control Write
No Data
Control
Notes:
33.5.2.9
Setup TX
Data Stage
Data OUT TX
Status Stage
Data OUT TX
Data Stage
Data IN TX
Setup Stage
Status Stage
Setup TX
Status IN TX
Data IN TX
Status IN TX
Status Stage
Status OUT TX
1. During the Status IN stage, the host waits for a zero length packet (Data IN transaction with no
data) from the device using DATA1 PID. Refer to Chapter 8 of the Universal Serial Bus Specification, Rev. 2.0, for more information on the protocol layer.
2. During the Status OUT stage, the host emits a zero length packet to the device (Data OUT
transaction with no data).
Status IN Transfer
Once a control request has been processed, the device returns a status to the host. This is a
zero length Data IN transaction.
1. The microcontroller waits for TXPKTRDY in the USB_CSRx endpoint’s register to be
cleared. (At this step, TXPKTRDY must be cleared because the previous transaction
was a setup transaction or a Data OUT transaction.)
2. Without writing anything to the USB_FDRx endpoint’s register, the microcontroller sets
TXPKTRDY. The USB device generates a Data IN packet using DATA1 PID.
3. This packet is acknowledged by the host and TXPKTRDY is set in the USB_CSRx endpoint’s register.
414
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
Figure 33-13. Data Out Followed by Status IN Transfer.
Device Sends a Status IN
to the Host
Host Sends the Last
Data Payload to the Device
USB Bus
Packets
Data OUT
PID
Data OUT
NAK
PID
Data IN
PID
ACK
PID
Interrupt Pending
RX_DATA_BKO
(USB_CSRx)
Cleared by Firmware
Set by USB Device
Cleared by USB Device
TXPKTRDY
(USB_CSRx)
Set by Firmware
33.5.2.10
Status OUT Transfer
Once a control request has been processed and the requested data returned, the host acknowledges by sending a zero length packet. This is a zero length Data OUT transaction.
1. The USB device receives a zero length packet. It sets RX_DATA_BK0 flag in the
USB_CSRx register and acknowledges the zero length packet.
2. The microcontroller is notified that the USB device has received a zero length packet
sent by the host polling RX_DATA_BK0 in the USB_CSRx register. An interrupt is pending while RX_DATA_BK0 is set. The number of bytes received in the endpoint’s
USB_BCR register is equal to zero.
3. The microcontroller must clear RX_DATA_BK0.
Figure 33-14. Data IN Followed by Status OUT Transfer
Device Sends the Last
Data Payload to Host
USB Bus
Packets
Data IN
PID
Data IN
Device Sends a
Status OUT to Host
ACK
PID
Data OUT
PID
ACK
PID
Interrupt Pending
Set by USB Device
RX_DATA_BKO
(USB_CSRx)
Cleared by Firmware
TXCOMP
(USB_CSRx)
Set by USB Device
33.5.2.11
Cleared by Firmware
Stall Handshake
A stall handshake can be used in one of two distinct occasions. (For more information on the
stall handshake, refer to Chapter 8 of the Universal Serial Bus Specification, Rev 2.0.)
415
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
• A functional stall is used when the halt feature associated with the endpoint is set. (Refer to
Chapter 9 of the Universal Serial Bus Specification, Rev 2.0, for more information on the halt
feature.)
• To abort the current request, a protocol stall is used, but uniquely with control transfer.
The following procedure generates a stall packet:
1. The microcontroller sets the FORCESTALL flag in the USB_CSRx endpoint’s register.
2. The host receives the stall packet.
3. The microcontroller is notified that the device has sent the stall by polling the
STALLSENT to be set. An endpoint interrupt is pending while STALLSENT is set. The
microcontroller must clear STALLSENT to clear the interrupt.
When a setup transaction is received after a stall handshake, STALLSENT must be cleared in
order to prevent interrupts due to STALLSENT being set.
Figure 33-15. Stall Handshake (Data IN Transfer)
USB Bus
Packets
Data IN PID
Stall PID
Cleared by Firmware
FORCESTALL
Set by Firmware
Interrupt Pending
Cleared by Firmware
STALLSENT
Set by
USB Device
Figure 33-16. Stall Handshake (Data OUT Transfer)
USB Bus
Packets
Data OUT PID
Data OUT
Stall PID
Set by Firmware
FORCESTALL
Interrupt Pending
STALLSENT
Cleared by Firmware
Set by USB Device
416
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
33.5.3
Controlling Device States
A USB device has several possible states. Refer to Chapter 9 of the Universal Serial Bus Specification, Rev 2.0.
Figure 33-17. USB Device State Diagram
Attached
Hub Reset
or
Deconfigured
Hub
Configured
Bus Inactive
Powered
Suspended
Bus Activity
Power
Interruption
Reset
Bus Inactive
Suspended
Default
Bus Activity
Reset
Address
Assigned
Bus Inactive
Address
Suspended
Bus Activity
Device
Deconfigured
Device
Configured
Bus Inactive
Configured
Suspended
Bus Activity
Movement from one state to another depends on the USB bus state or on standard requests
sent through control transactions via the default endpoint (endpoint 0).
After a period of bus inactivity, the UDP device enters Suspend Mode. Accepting Suspend/Resume requests from the USB host is mandatory. Constraints in Suspend Mode are very
strict for bus-powered applications; devices may not consume more than 500 uA on the USB
bus.
While in Suspend Mode, the host may wake up a device by sending a resume signal (bus activity) or a USB device may send a wake-up request to the host, e.g., waking up a PC by moving a
USB mouse.
The wake-up feature is not mandatory for all devices and must be negotiated with the host.
417
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
33.5.3.1
From Powered State to Default State
After its connection to a USB host, the USB device waits for an end-of-bus reset. The USB host
stops driving a reset state once it has detected the device’s pull-up on DP. The unmasked flag
ENDBURST is set in the register UDP_ISR and an interrupt is triggered. The UDP software
enables the default endpoint, setting the EPEDS flag in the UDP_CSR[0] register and, optionally, enabling the interrupt for endpoint 0 by writing 1 to the UDP_IER register. The enumeration
then begins by a control transfer.
33.5.3.2
From Default State to Address State
After a set address standard device request, the USB host peripheral enters the address state.
Before this, it achieves the Status IN transaction of the control transfer, i.e., the UDP device sets
its new address once the TXCOMP flag in the UDP_CSR[0] register has been received and
cleared.
To move to address state, the driver software sets the FADDEN flag in the UDP_GLB_STATE,
sets its new address, and sets the FEN bit in the UDP_FADDR register.
33.5.3.3
From Address State to Configured State
Once a valid Set Configuration standard request has been received and acknowledged, the
device enables endpoints corresponding to the current configuration. This is done by setting the
EPEDS and EPTYPE fields in the UDP_CSRx registers and, optionally, enabling corresponding
interrupts in the UDP_IER register.
33.5.3.4
Enabling Suspend
When a Suspend (no bus activity on the USB bus) is detected, the RXSUSP signal in the
UDP_ISR register is set. This triggers an interrupt if the corresponding bit is set in the UDP_IMR
register.
This flag is cleared by writing to the UDP_ICR register. Then the device enters Suspend Mode.
As an example, the microcontroller switches to slow clock, disables the PLL and main oscillator,
and goes into Idle Mode. It may also switch off other devices on the board.
The USB device peripheral clocks may be switched off. However, the transceiver and the USB
peripheral must not be switched off, otherwise the resume is not detected.
33.5.3.5
Receiving a Host Resume
In suspend mode, the USB transceiver and the USB peripheral must be powered to detect the
RESUME. However, the USB device peripheral may not be clocked as the WAKEUP signal is
asynchronous.
Once the resume is detected on the bus, the signal WAKEUP in the UDP_ISR is set. It may generate an interrupt if the corresponding bit in the UDP_IMR register is set. This interrupt may be
used to wake-up the core, enable PLL and main oscillators and configure clocks. The WAKEUP
bit must be cleared as soon as possible by setting WAKEUP in the UDP_ICR register.
33.5.3.6
Sending an External Resume
The External Resume is negotiated with the host and enabled by setting the ESR bit in the
USB_GLB_STATE. An asynchronous event on the ext_resume_pin of the peripheral generates
a WAKEUP interrupt. On early versions of the USP peripheral, the K-state on the USB line is
generated immediately. This means that the USB device must be able to answer to the host very
418
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
quickly. On recent versions, the software sets the RMWUPE bit in the UDP_GLB_STATE register once it is ready to communicate with the host. The K-state on the bus is then generated.
The WAKEUP bit must be cleared as soon as possible by setting WAKEUP in the UDP_ICR
register.
419
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
33.6
USB Device User Interface
Table 33-4.
USB Memory Map
Offset
Register
Name
Access
Reset State
0x000
Frame Number Register
USB_FRM_NUM
Read
0x0000_0000
0x004
Global State Register
USB_GLB_STAT
Read/Write
0x0000_0010
0x008
Function Address Register
USB_FADDR
Read/Write
0x0000_0100
0x00C
Reserved
–
–
–
0x010
Interrupt Enable Register
USB_IER
Write
0x014
Interrupt Disable Register
USB_IDR
Write
0x018
Interrupt Mask Register
USB_IMR
Read
0x0000_1200
0x01C
Interrupt Status Register
USB_ISR
Read
0x0000_XX00
0x020
Interrupt Clear Register
USB_ICR
Write
0x024
Reserved
–
–
0x028
Reset Endpoint Register
USB_RST_EP
Read/Write
0x02C
Reserved
–
–
–
0x030
Endpoint 0 Control and Status Register
USB _CSR0
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
.
.
.
.
.
.
See Note: (1)
Endpoint 3 Control and Status Register
USB _CSR3
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0x050
Endpoint 0 FIFO Data Register
USB_FDR0
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
.
.
.
.
.
.
See Note: (2)
Endpoint 3 FIFO Data Register
USB_FDR3
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0x070
Reserved
–
–
–
0x074
Transceiver Control Register
USB_TXVC
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0x078 - 0xFC
Reserved
–
–
–
Notes:
420
–
1. The addresses of the USB_CSRx registers are calculated as: 0x030 + 4(Endpoint Number - 1).
2. The addresses of the USB_FDRx registers are calculated as: 0x050 + 4(Endpoint Number - 1).
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
33.6.1
USB Frame Number Register
Register Name:
USB_FRM_NUM
Access Type:
Read-only
31
---
30
---
29
---
28
---
27
---
26
---
25
---
24
---
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
FRM_OK
16
FRM_ERR
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
9
FRM_NUM
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
FRM_NUM
• FRM_NUM[10:0]: Frame Number as Defined in the Packet Field Formats
This 11-bit value is incremented by the host on a per frame basis. This value is updated at each start of frame.
Value Updated at the SOF_EOP (Start of Frame End of Packet).
• FRM_ERR: Frame Error
This bit is set at SOF_EOP when the SOF packet is received containing an error.
This bit is reset upon receipt of SOF_PID.
• FRM_OK: Frame OK
This bit is set at SOF_EOP when the SOF packet is received without any error.
This bit is reset upon receipt of SOF_PID (Packet Identification).
In the Interrupt Status Register, the SOF interrupt is updated upon receiving SOF_PID. This bit is set without waiting for
EOP.
Note:
In the 8-bit Register Interface, FRM_OK is bit 4 of FRM_NUM_H and FRM_ERR is bit 3 of FRM_NUM_L.
421
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
33.6.2
USB Global State Register
Register Name:
USB_GLB_STAT
Access Type:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
8
–
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
RMWUPE
3
RSMINPR
2
ESR
1
CONFG
0
FADDEN
This register is used to get and set the device state as specified in Chapter 9 of the USB Serial Bus Specification, Rev.2.0.
• FADDEN: Function Address Enable
Read:
0 = Device is not in address state.
1 = Device is in address state.
Write:
0 = No effect, only a reset can bring back a device to the default state.
1 = Sets device in address state. This occurs after a successful Set Address request. Beforehand, the USB_FADDR register must have been initialized with Set Address parameters. Set Address must complete the Status Stage before setting
FADDEN. Refer to chapter 9 of the Universal Serial Bus Specification, Rev. 2.0 for more details.
• CONFG: Configured
Read:
0 = Device is not in configured state.
1 = Device is in configured state.
Write:
0 = Sets device in a non configured state
1 = Sets device in configured state.
The device is set in configured state when it is in address state and receives a successful Set Configuration request. Refer
to Chapter 9 of the Universal Serial Bus Specification, Rev. 2.0 for more details.
• ESR: Enable Send Resume
0 = Disables the Remote Wake Up sequence.
1 = Remote Wake Up can be processed and the pin send_resume is enabled.
• RSMINPR: A Resume Has Been Sent to the Host
Read:
0 = No effect.
1 = A Resume has been received from the host during Remote Wake Up feature.
422
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
• RMWUPE: Remote Wake Up Enable
0 = Must be cleared after receiving any HOST packet or SOF interrupt.
1 = Enables the K-state on the USB cable if ESR is enabled.
423
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
33.6.3
USB Function Address Register
Register Name:
USB_FADDR
Access Type:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
8
–
FEN
7
–
6
5
4
3
FADD
2
1
0
• FADD[6:0]: Function Address Value
The Function Address Value must be programmed by firmware once the device receives a set address request from the
host, and has achieved the status stage of the no-data control sequence. Refer to the Universal Serial Bus Specification,
Rev. 2.0 for more information. After power up or reset, the function address value is set to 0.
• FEN: Function Enable
Read:
0 = Function endpoint disabled.
1 = Function endpoint enabled.
Write:
0 = Disables function endpoint.
1 = Default value.
The Function Enable bit (FEN) allows the microcontroller to enable or disable the function endpoints. The microcontroller
sets this bit after receipt of a reset from the host. Once this bit is set, the USB device is able to accept and transfer data
packets from and to the host.
424
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
33.6.4
USB Interrupt Enable Register
Register Name:
USB_IER
Access Type:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
WAKEUP
12
–
11
SOFINT
10
EXTRSM
9
8
RXRSM
RXSUSP
7
–
6
–
5
4
3
EP3INT
2
EP2INT
1
EP1INT
0
EP0INT
• EP0INT: Enable Endpoint 0 Interrupt
• EP1INT: Enable Endpoint 1 Interrupt
• EP2INT: Enable Endpoint 2Interrupt
• EP3INT: Enable Endpoint 3 Interrupt
0 = No effect.
1 = Enables corresponding Endpoint Interrupt.
• RXSUSP: Enable USB Suspend Interrupt
0 = No effect.
1 = Enables USB Suspend Interrupt.
• RXRSM: Enable USB Resume Interrupt
0 = No effect.
1 = Enables USB Resume Interrupt.
• EXTRSM: Enable External Resume Interrupt
0 = No effect.
1 = Enables External Resume Interrupt.
• SOFINT: Enable Start Of Frame Interrupt
0 = No effect.
1 = Enables Start Of Frame Interrupt.
• WAKEUP: Enable USB bus Wakeup Interrupt
0 = No effect.
1 = Enables USB bus Interrupt.
425
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
33.6.5
USB Interrupt Disable Register
Register Name:
USB_IDR
Access Type:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
WAKEUP
12
–
11
SOFINT
10
EXTRSM
9
8
RXRSM
RXSUSP
7
–
6
–
5
4
3
EP3INT
2
EP2INT
1
EP1INT
0
EP0INT
• EP0INT: Disable Endpoint 0 Interrupt
• EP1INT: Disable Endpoint 1 Interrupt
• EP2INT: Disable Endpoint 2 Interrupt
• EP3INT: Disable Endpoint 3 Interrupt
0 = No effect.
1 = Disables corresponding Endpoint Interrupt.
• RXSUSP: Disable USB Suspend Interrupt
0 = No effect.
1 = Disables USB Suspend Interrupt.
• RXRSM: Disable USB Resume Interrupt
0 = No effect.
1 = Disables USB Resume Interrupt.
• EXTRSM: Disable External Resume Interrupt
0 = No effect.
1 = Disables External Resume Interrupt.
• SOFINT: Disable Start Of Frame Interrupt
0 = No effect.
1 = Disables Start Of Frame Interrupt
• WAKEUP: Disable USB Bus Interrupt
0 = No effect.
1 = Disables USB Bus Wakeup Interrupt.
426
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
33.6.6
USB Interrupt Mask Register
Register Name:
USB_IMR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
WAKEUP
12
–
11
SOFINT
10
EXTRSM
9
8
RXRSM
RXSUSP
7
–
6
–
5
4
3
EP3INT
2
EP2INT
1
EP1INT
0
EP0INT
• EP0INT: Mask Endpoint 0 Interrupt
• EP1INT: Mask Endpoint 1 Interrupt
• EP2INT: Mask Endpoint 2 Interrupt
• EP3INT: Mask Endpoint 3 Interrupt
0 = Corresponding Endpoint Interrupt is disabled.
1 = Corresponding Endpoint Interrupt is enabled.
• RXSUSP: Mask USB Suspend Interrupt
0 = USB Suspend Interrupt is disabled.
1 = USB Suspend Interrupt is enabled.
• RXRSM: Mask USB Resume Interrupt.
0 = USB Resume Interrupt is disabled.
1 = USB Resume Interrupt is enabled.
• EXTRSM: Mask External Resume Interrupt
0 = External Resume Interrupt is disabled.
1 = External Resume Interrupt is enabled.
• SOFINT: Mask Start Of Frame Interrupt
0 = Start of Frame Interrupt is disabled.
1 = Start of Frame Interrupt is enabled.
• WAKEUP: USB Bus WAKEUP Interrupt
0 = USB Bus Wakeup Interrupt is disabled.
1 = USB Bus Wakeup Interrupt is enabled.
Note:
When the USB block is in suspend mode, the application may power down the USB logic. In this case, any USB HOST resume
request that is made must be taken into account and, thus, the reset value of the RXRSM bit of the register USB_IMR is
enabled.
427
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
33.6.7
USB Interrupt Status Register
Register Name:
USB_ISR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
14
13
11
10
9
8
–
–
WAKEUP
12
ENDBUSRE
S
SOFINT
EXTRSM
RXRSM
RXSUSP
7
–
6
–
5
3
EP3INT
2
EP2INT
1
EP1INT
0
EP0INT
4
• EP0INT: Endpoint 0 Interrupt Status
0 = No Endpoint0 Interrupt pending.
1 = Endpoint0 Interrupt has been raised.
Several signals can generate this interrupt. The reason can be found by reading USB_CSR0:
RXSETUP set to 1
RX_DATA_BK0 set to 1
RX_DATA_BK1 set to 1
TXCOMP set to 1
STALLSENT set to 1
EP0INT is a sticky bit. Interrupt remains valid until EP0INT is cleared by writing in the corresponding USB_CSR0 bit.
• EP1INT: Endpoint 1 Interrupt Status
0 = No Endpoint1 Interrupt pending.
1 = Endpoint1 Interrupt has been raised.
Several signals can generate this interrupt. The reason can be found by reading USB_CSR1:
RXSETUP set to 1
RX_DATA_BK0 set to 1
RX_DATA_BK1 set to 1
TXCOMP set to 1
STALLSENT set to 1
EP1INT is a sticky bit. Interrupt remains valid until EP1INT is cleared by writing in the corresponding USB_CSR1 bit.
• EP2INT: Endpoint 2 Interrupt Status
0 = No Endpoint2 Interrupt pending.
1 = Endpoint2 Interrupt has been raised.
Several signals can generate this interrupt. The reason can be found by reading USB_CSR2:
RXSETUP set to 1
RX_DATA_BK0 set to 1
RX_DATA_BK1 set to 1
428
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
TXCOMP set to 1
STALLSENT set to 1
EP2INT is a sticky bit. Interrupt remains valid until EP2INT is cleared by writing in the corresponding USB_CSR2 bit.
• EP3INT: Endpoint 3 Interrupt Status
0 = No Endpoint3 Interrupt pending.
1 = Endpoint3 Interrupt has been raised.
Several signals can generate this interrupt. The reason can be found by reading USB_CSR3:
RXSETUP set to 1
RX_DATA_BK0 set to 1
RX_DATA_BK1 set to 1
TXCOMP set to 1
STALLSENT set to 1
EP3INT is a sticky bit. Interrupt remains valid until EP3INT is cleared by writing in the corresponding USB_CSR3 bit.
• RXSUSP: USB Suspend Interrupt Status
0 = No USB Suspend Interrupt pending.
1 = USB Suspend Interrupt has been raised.
The USB device sets this bit when it detects no activity for 3ms. The USB device enters Suspend mode.
• RXRSM: USB Resume Interrupt Status
0 = No USB Resume Interrupt pending.
1 =USB Resume Interrupt has been raised.
The USB device sets this bit when a USB resume signal is detected at its port.
After reset, the state of this bit is undefined, the application must clear this bit by setting the RXRSM flag in the USB_ICR
register.
• EXTRSM: External Resume Interrupt Status
0 = No External Resume Interrupt pending.
1 = External Resume Interrupt has been raised.
This interrupt is raised when, in suspend mode, an asynchronous rising edge on the send_resume is detected.
If RMWUPE = 1, a resume state is sent in the USB bus.
• SOFINT: Start of Frame Interrupt Status
0 = No Start of Frame Interrupt pending.
1 = Start of Frame Interrupt has been raised.
This interrupt is raised each time a SOF token has been detected. It can be used as a synchronization signal by using
isochronous endpoints.
• ENDBUSRES: End of BUS Reset Interrupt Status
0 = No End of Bus Reset Interrupt pending.
1 = End of Bus Reset Interrupt has been raised.
This interrupt is raised at the end of a USB reset sequence. The USB device must prepare to receive requests on the endpoint 0. The host starts the enumeration, then performs the configuration.
• WAKEUP: USB Resume Interrupt Status
429
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
0 = No Wakeup Interrupt pending.
1 = A Wakeup Interrupt (USB Host Sent a RESUME or RESET) occurred since the last clear.
After reset the state of this bit is undefined, the application must clear this bit by setting the WAKEUP flag in the USB_ICR
register.
33.6.8
USB Interrupt Clear Register
Register Name:
430
USB_ICR
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
Access Type:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
WAKEUP
12
ENDBURST
11
SOFINT
10
EXTRSM
9
8
RXRSM
RXSUSP
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
–
• RXSUSP: Clear USB Suspend Interrupt
0 = No effect.
1 = Clears USB Suspend Interrupt.
• RXRSM: Clear USB Resume Interrupt
0 = No effect.
1 = Clears USB Resume Interrupt.
• EXTRSM: Clear External Resume Interrupt
0 = No effect.
1 = Clears External Resume Interrupt.
• SOFINT: Clear Start Of Frame Interrupt
0 = No effect.
1 = Clears Start Of Frame Interrupt.
• ENDBURST: Clear End of Bus Reset Interrupt
0 = No effect.
1 = Clears Start Of Frame Interrupt.
• WAKEUP: Clear Wakeup Interrupt
0 = No effect.
1 = Clears Wakeup Interrupt.
431
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
33.6.9
USB Reset Endpoint Register
Register Name:
USB_RST_EP
Access Type:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
8
–
–
7
–
6
–
5
4
3
EP3
2
EP2
1
EP1
0
EP0
• EP0: Reset Endpoint 0
• EP1: Reset Endpoint 1
• EP2: Reset Endpoint 2
• EP3: Reset Endpoint 3
This flag is used to reset the FIFO associated with the endpoint and the bit RXBYTECOUNT in the register UDP_CSRx.It
also resets the data toggle to DATA0. It is useful after removing a HALT condition on a BULK endpoint. Refer to Chapter
5.8.5 in the USB Serial Bus Specification, Rev.2.0.
Warning: This flag must be cleared at the end of the reset. It does not clear USB_CSRx flags.
0 = No reset.
1 = Forces the corresponding endpoint FIF0 pointers to 0, therefore RXBYTECNT field is read at 0 in USB_CSRx register.
432
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
33.6.10
USB Endpoint Control and Status Register
Register Name:
USB_CSRx [x = 0..3]
Access Type:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
25
RXBYTECNT
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
RXBYTECNT
15
EPEDS
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
DTGLE
10
9
EPTYPE
8
7
6
RX_DATA_
BK1
5
FORCE
STALL
4
3
STALLSENT
ISOERROR
2
1
RX_DATA_
BK0
0
DIR
TXPKTRDY
RXSETUP
TXCOMP
• TXCOMP: Generates an IN packet with data previously written in the DPR
This flag generates an interrupt while it is set to one.
Write (Cleared by the firmware):
0 = Clear the flag, clear the interrupt.
1 = No effect.
Read (Set by the USB peripheral):
0 = Data IN transaction has not been acknowledged by the Host.
1 = Data IN transaction is achieved, acknowledged by the Host.
After having issued a Data IN transaction setting TXPKTRDY, the device firmware waits for TXCOMP to be sure that the
host has acknowledged the transaction.
• RX_DATA_BK0: Receive Data Bank 0
This flag generates an interrupt while it is set to one.
Write (Cleared by the firmware):
0 = Notify USB peripheral device that data have been read in the FIFO's Bank 0.
1 = No effect.
Read (Set by the USB peripheral):
0 = No data packet has been received in the FIFO's Bank 0
1 = A data packet has been received, it has been stored in the FIFO's Bank 0.
When the device firmware has polled this bit or has been interrupted by this signal, it must transfer data from the FIFO to
the microcontroller memory. The number of bytes received is available in RXBYTCENT field. Bank 0 FIFO values are read
through the USB_FDRx register. Once a transfer is done, the device firmware must release Bank 0 to the USB peripheral
device by clearing RX_DATA_BK0.
433
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
• RXSETUP: Sends STALL to the Host (Control Endpoints)
This flag generates an interrupt while it is set to one.
Read:
0 = No setup packet available.
1 = A setup data packet has been sent by the host and is available in the FIFO.
Write:
0 = Device firmware notifies the USB peripheral device that it has read the setup data in the FIFO.
1 = No effect.
This flag is used to notify the USB device firmware that a valid Setup data packet has been sent by the host and successfully received by the USB device. The USB device firmware may transfer Setup data from the FIFO by reading the
USB_FDRx register to the microcontroller memory. Once a transfer has been done, RXSETUP must be cleared by the
device firmware.
Ensuing Data OUT transaction is not accepted while RXSETUP is set.
• STALLSENT: Stall Sent (Control, Bulk Interrupt Endpoints) / ISOERROR (Isochronous Endpoints)
This flag generates an interrupt while it is set to one.
STALLSENT: This ends a STALL handshake.
Read:
0 = The host has not acknowledged a STALL.
1 = Host has acknowledged the stall.
Write:
0 = Resets the STALLSENT flag, clears the interrupt.
1 = No effect.
This is mandatory for the device firmware to clear this flag. Otherwise the interrupt remains.
Refer to chapters 8.4.5 and 9.4.5 of the Universal Serial Bus Specification, Rev. 2.0 for more information on the STALL
handshake.
ISOERROR: A CRC error has been detected in an isochronous transfer.
Read:
0 = No error in the previous isochronous transfer.
1 = CRC error has been detected, data available in the FIFO are corrupted.
Write:
0 = Resets the ISOERROR flag, clears the interrupt.
1 = No effect.
• TXPKTRDY: Transmit Packet Ready
This flag is cleared by the USB device.
This flag is set by the USB device firmware.
Read:
0 = Data values can be written in the FIFO.
1 = Data values can not be written in the FIFO.
434
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
Write:
0 = No effect.
1 = A new data payload is has been written in the FIFO by the firmware and is ready to be sent.
This flag is used to generate a Data IN transaction (device to host). Device firmware checks that it can write a data payload
in the FIFO, checking that TXPKTRDY is cleared. Transfer to the FIFO is done by writing in the USB_FDRx register. Once
the data payload has been transferred to the FIFO, the firmware notifies the USB device setting TXPKTRDY to one. USB
bus transactions can start. TXCOMP is set once the data payload has been received by the host.
• FORCESTALL: Force Stall (used by Control, Bulk and Isochronous Endpoints)
Write-only
0 = No effect.
1 = Sends STALL to the host.
Refer to chapters 8.4.5 and 9.4.5 of the Universal Serial Bus Specification, Rev. 2.0 for more information on the STALL
handshake.
Control endpoints: During the data stage and status stage, this indicates that the microcontroller cannot complete the
request.
Bulk and interrupt endpoints: Notifies the host that the endpoint is halted.
The host acknowledges the STALL, device firmware is notified by the STALLSENT flag.
• RX_DATA_BK1: Receive Data Bank 1 (only used by endpoints with ping-pong attributes)
This flag generates an interrupt while it is set to one.
Write (Cleared by the firmware):
0 = Notifies USB device that data have been read in the FIFO’s Bank 1.
1 = No effect.
Read (Set by the USB peripheral):
0 = No data packet has been received in the FIFO's Bank 1.
1 = A data packet has been received, it has been stored in FIFO's Bank 1.
When the device firmware has polled this bit or has been interrupted by this signal, it must transfer data from the FIFO to
microcontroller memory. The number of bytes received is available in RXBYTECNT field. Bank 1 FIFO values are read
through USB_FDRx register. Once a transfer is done, the device firmware must release Bank 1 to the USB device by clearing RX_DATA_BK1.
• DIR: Transfer Direction (only available for control endpoints)
Read/Write
0 = Allows Data OUT transactions in the control data stage.
1 = Enables Data IN transactions in the control data stage.
Refer to Chapter 8.5.3 of the Universal Serial Bus Specification, Rev. 2.0 for more information on the control data stage.
This bit must be set before USB_CSRx/RXSETUP is cleared at the end of the setup stage. According to the request sent in
the setup data packet, the data stage is either a device to host (DIR = 1) or host to device (DIR = 0) data transfer. It is not
necessary to check this bit to reverse direction for the status stage.
435
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
• EPTYPE[2:0]: Endpoint Type
Read/Write
000
Control
001
Isochronous OUT
101
Isochronous IN
010
Bulk OUT
110
Bulk IN
011
Interrupt OUT
111
Interrupt IN
• DTGLE: Data Toggle
Read-only
0 = Identifies DATA0 packet.
1 = Identifies DATA1 packet.
Refer to Chapter 8 of the Universal Serial Bus Specification, Rev. 2.0 for more information on DATA0, DATA1 packet
definitions.
• EPEDS: Endpoint Enable Disable
Read:
0 = Endpoint disabled.
1 = Endpoint enabled.
Write:
0 = Disables endpoint.
1 = Enables endpoint.
• RXBYTECNT[10:0]: Number of Bytes Available in the FIFO
Read-only
When the host sends a data packet to the device, the USB device stores the data in the FIFO and notifies the microcontroller. The microcontroller can load the data from the FIFO by reading RXBYTECENT bytes in the USB_FDRx register.
436
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
33.6.11
USB FIFO Data Register
Register Name:
USB_FDRx [x = 0..3]
Access Type:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
8
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
FIFO_DATA
• FIFO_DATA[7:0]: FIFO Data Value
The microcontroller can push or pop values in the FIFO through this register.
RXBYTECNT in the corresponding USB_CSRx register is the number of bytes to be read from the FIFO (sent by the host).
The maximum number of bytes to write is fixed by the Max Packet Size in the Standard Endpoint Descriptor. It can not be
more than the physical memory size associated to the endpoint. Refer to the Universal Serial Bus Specification, Rev. 2.0
for more information.
33.6.12
USB Transceiver Control Register
Register Name:
USB_TXVC
Access Type:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
8
–
TXVDIS
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
0
–
–
• TXVDIS: Transceiver Disable
When UDP is disabled, power consumption can be reduced significantly by disabling the embedded transceiver. This can
be done by setting TXVDIS field.
To enable the transceiver, TXVDIS must be cleared.
437
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
438
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
34. Analog-to-digital Converter (ADC)
34.1
Overview
The ADC is based on a Successive Approximation Register (SAR) 10-bit Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC). It also integrates an 8-to-1 analog multiplexer, making possible the analog-todigital conversions of up to eight analog lines. The conversions extend from 0V to ADVREF.
The ADC supports an 8-bit or 10-bit resolution mode, and conversion results are reported in a
common register for all channels, as well as in a channel-dedicated register. Software trigger,
external trigger on rising edge of the ADTRG pin or internal triggers from Timer Counter output(s) are configurable.
The ADC also integrates a Sleep Mode and a conversion sequencer and connects with a PDC
channel. These features reduce both power consumption and processor intervention.
Finally, the user can configure ADC timings, such as Startup Time and Sample & Hold Time.
34.2
Block Diagram
Figure 34-1. Analog-to-Digital Converter Block Diagram
Timer
Counter
Channels
ADC
Trigger
Selection
ADTRG
Control
Logic
ADC Interrupt
AIC
VDDIN
ADVREF
ASB
AD0
AD1
PDC
PIO
User
Interface
AD2
AD3
AD4
AD5
Peripheral Bridge
Successive
Approximation
Register
Analog-to-Digital
Converter
APB
AD6
AD7
GND
439
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
34.3
Signal Description
Table 34-1.
ADC Pin Description
Pin Name
Description
VDDIN
Analog power supply
ADVREF
Reference voltage
AD0 - AD7
Analog input channels
ADTRG
External trigger
34.4
34.4.1
Product Dependencies
Power Management
The ADC is automatically clocked after the first conversion in Normal Mode. In Sleep Mode, the
ADC clock is automatically stopped after each conversion. As the logic is small and the ADC cell
can be put into Sleep Mode, the Power Management Controller has no effect on the ADC
behavior.
34.4.2
Interrupt Sources
The ADC interrupt line is connected on one of the internal sources of the Advanced Interrupt
Controller. Using the ADC interrupt requires the AIC to be programmed first.
34.4.3
Analog Inputs
The pins AD0 to AD7 can be multiplexed with PIO lines. In this case, the assignment of the ADC
input is automatically done as soon as the corresponding channel is enabled by writing the register ADC_CHER. By default, after reset, the PIO line is configured as input with its pull-up
enabled and the ADC input is connected to the GND.
34.4.4
I/O Lines
The pin ADTRG may be shared with other peripheral functions through the PIO Controller. In
this case, the PIO Controller should be set accordingly to assign the pin ADTRG to the ADC
function.
34.4.5
Timer Triggers
Timer Counters may or may not be used as hardware triggers depending on user requirements.
Thus, some or all of the timer counters may be non-connected.
34.4.6
Conversion Performances
For performance and electrical characteristics of the ADC, see ”ADC Characteristics” on page
466.
440
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
34.5
34.5.1
Functional Description
Analog-to-digital Conversion
The ADC uses the ADC Clock to perform conversions. Converting a single analog value to a 10bit digital data requires Sample and Hold Clock cycles as defined in the field SHTIM of the ”ADC
Mode Register” on page 447 and 10 ADC Clock cycles. The ADC Clock frequency is selected in
the PRESCAL field of the Mode Register (ADC_MR).
The ADC clock range is between MCK/2, if PRESCAL is 0, and MCK/128, if PRESCAL is set to
63 (0x3F). PRESCAL must be programmed in order to provide an ADC clock frequency according to the parameters given in the Product definition section.
34.5.2
Conversion Reference
The conversion is performed on a full range between 0V and the reference voltage pin ADVREF.
Analog inputs between these voltages convert to values based on a linear conversion.
34.5.3
Conversion Resolution
The ADC supports 8-bit or 10-bit resolutions. The 8-bit selection is performed by setting the bit
LOWRES in the ADC Mode Register (ADC_MR). By default, after a reset, the resolution is the
highest and the DATA field in the data registers is fully used. By setting the bit LOWRES, the
ADC switches in the lowest resolution and the conversion results can be read in the eight lowest
significant bits of the data registers. The two highest bits of the DATA field in the corresponding
ADC_CDR register and of the LDATA field in the ADC_LCDR register read 0.
Moreover, when a PDC channel is connected to the ADC, 10-bit resolution sets the transfer
request sizes to 16-bit. Setting the bit LOWRES automatically switches to 8-bit data transfers. In
this case, the destination buffers are optimized.
34.5.4
Conversion Results
When a conversion is completed, the resulting 10-bit digital value is stored in the Channel Data
Register (ADC_CDR) of the current channel and in the ADC Last Converted Data Register
(ADC_LCDR).
The channel EOC bit in the Status Register (ADC_SR) is set and the DRDY is set. In the case of
a connected PDC channel, DRDY rising triggers a data transfer request. In any case, either
EOC and DRDY can trigger an interrupt.
Reading one of the ADC_CDR registers clears the corresponding EOC bit. Reading ADC_LCDR
clears the DRDY bit and the EOC bit corresponding to the last converted channel.
441
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
Figure 34-2. EOCx and DRDY Flag Behavior
Write the ADC_CR
with START = 1
Read the ADC_CDRx
Write the ADC_CR
with START = 1
Read the ADC_LCDR
CHx
(ADC_CHSR)
EOCx
(ADC_SR)
Conversion Time
Conversion Time
DRDY
(ADC_SR)
If the ADC_CDR is not read before further incoming data is converted, the corresponding Overrun Error (OVRE) flag is set in the Status Register (ADC_SR).
In the same way, new data converted when DRDY is high sets the bit GOVRE (General Overrun
Error) in ADC_SR.
The OVRE and GOVRE flags are automatically cleared when ADC_SR is read.
442
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
Figure 34-3. GOVRE and OVREx Flag Behavior
Read ADC_SR
ADTRG
CH0
(ADC_CHSR)
CH1
(ADC_CHSR)
ADC_LCDR
Undefined Data
ADC_CDR0
Undefined Data
ADC_CDR1
Data B
Data A
Data A
Data C
Undefined Data
Data B
Conversion
EOC0
(ADC_SR)
EOC1
(ADC_SR)
Data C
Conversion
Conversion
Read ADC_CDR0
Read ADC_CDR1
GOVRE
(ADC_SR)
DRDY
(ADC_SR)
OVRE0
(ADC_SR)
Warning: If the corresponding channel is disabled during a conversion or if it is disabled and
then reenabled during a conversion, its associated data and its corresponding EOC and OVRE
flags in ADC_SR are unpredictable.
34.5.5
Conversion Triggers
Conversions of the active analog channels are started with a software or a hardware trigger. The
software trigger is provided by writing the Control Register (ADC_CR) with the bit START at 1.
The hardware trigger can be one of the TIOA outputs of the Timer Counter channels, or the
external trigger input of the ADC (ADTRG). The hardware trigger is selected with the field TRGSEL in the Mode Register (ADC_MR). The selected hardware trigger is enabled with the bit
TRGEN in the Mode Register (ADC_MR).
If a hardware trigger is selected, the start of a conversion is detected at each rising edge of the
selected signal. If one of the TIOA outputs is selected, the corresponding Timer Counter channel
must be programmed in Waveform Mode.
Only one start command is necessary to initiate a conversion sequence on all the channels. The
ADC hardware logic automatically performs the conversions on the active channels, then waits
443
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
for a new request. The Channel Enable (ADC_CHER) and Channel Disable (ADC_CHDR) Registers enable the analog channels to be enabled or disabled independently.
If the ADC is used with a PDC, only the transfers of converted data from enabled channels are
performed and the resulting data buffers should be interpreted accordingly.
Warning: Enabling hardware triggers does not disable the software trigger functionality. Thus, if
a hardware trigger is selected, the start of a conversion can be initiated either by the hardware or
the software trigger.
34.5.6
Sleep Mode and Conversion Sequencer
The ADC Sleep Mode maximizes power saving by automatically deactivating the ADC when it is
not being used for conversions. Sleep Mode is selected by setting the bit SLEEP in the Mode
Register ADC_MR.
The SLEEP mode is automatically managed by a conversion sequencer, which can automatically process the conversions of all channels at lowest power consumption.
When a start conversion request occurs, the ADC is automatically activated. As the analog cell
requires a start-up time, the logic waits during this time and starts the conversion on the enabled
channels. When all conversions are complete, the ADC is deactivated until the next trigger. Triggers occurring during the sequence are not taken into account.
The conversion sequencer allows automatic processing with minimum processor intervention
and optimized power consumption. Conversion sequences can be performed periodically using
a Timer/Counter output. The periodic acquisition of several samples can be processed automatically without any intervention of the processor thanks to the PDC.
Note:
34.5.7
The reference voltage pins always remain connected in normal mode as in sleep mode.
ADC Timings
Each ADC has its own minimal Startup Time that is programmed through the field STARTUP in
the Mode Register ADC_MR.
In the same way, a minimal Sample and Hold Time is necessary for the ADC to guarantee the
best converted final value between two channels selection. This time has to be programmed
through the bitfield SHTIM in the Mode Register ADC_MR.
Warning: No input buffer amplifier to isolate the source is included in the ADC. This must be
taken into consideration to program a precise value in the SHTIM field. See the section DC
Characteristics in the product datasheet.
444
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
34.6
Analog-to-digital Converter (ADC) User Interface
Table 34-2.
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) Register Mapping
Offset
Register
Name
Access
Reset State
0x00
Control Register
ADC_CR
Write-only
–
0x04
Mode Register
ADC_MR
Read/Write
0x00000000
0x08
Reserved
–
–
–
0x0C
Reserved
–
–
–
0x10
Channel Enable Register
ADC_CHER
Write-only
–
0x14
Channel Disable Register
ADC_CHDR
Write-only
–
0x18
Channel Status Register
ADC_CHSR
Read-only
0x00000000
0x1C
Status Register
ADC_SR
Read-only
0x000C0000
0x20
Last Converted Data Register
ADC_LCDR
Read-only
0x00000000
0x24
Interrupt Enable Register
ADC_IER
Write-only
–
0x28
Interrupt Disable Register
ADC_IDR
Write-only
–
0x2C
Interrupt Mask Register
ADC_IMR
Read-only
0x00000000
0x30
Channel Data Register 0
ADC_CDR0
Read-only
0x00000000
0x34
Channel Data Register 1
ADC_CDR1
Read-only
0x00000000
0x38
Channel Data Register 2
ADC_CDR2
Read-only
0x00000000
0x3C
Channel Data Register 3
ADC_CDR3
Read-only
0x00000000
0x40
Channel Data Register 4
ADC_CDR4
Read-only
0x00000000
0x44
Channel Data Register 5
ADC_CDR5
Read-only
0x00000000
0x48
Channel Data Register 6
ADC_CDR6
Read-only
0x00000000
0x4C
Channel Data Register 7
ADC_CDR7
Read-only
0x00000000
–
–
–
0x50 - 0xFC
Reserved
445
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
34.6.1
ADC Control Register
Register Name:
ADC_CR
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
–
–
–
–
START
SWRST
• SWRST: Software Reset
0 = No effect.
1 = Resets the ADC simulating a hardware reset.
• START: Start Conversion
0 = No effect.
1 = Begins analog-to-digital conversion.
446
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
34.6.2
ADC Mode Register
Register Name:
ADC_MR
Access Type:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
–
–
–
15
14
13
–
27
26
25
24
17
16
10
9
8
2
1
SHTIM
19
18
STARTUP
12
11
PRESCAL
–
7
6
5
4
–
–
SLEEP
LOWRES
3
TRGSEL
0
TRGEN
• TRGEN: Trigger Enable
TRGEN
Selected TRGEN
0
Hardware triggers are disabled. Starting a conversion is only possible by software.
1
Hardware trigger selected by TRGSEL field is enabled.
• TRGSEL: Trigger Selection
TRGSEL
Selected TRGSEL
0
0
0
TIOA Ouput of the Timer Counter Channel 0
0
0
1
TIOA Ouput of the Timer Counter Channel 1
0
1
0
TIOA Ouput of the Timer Counter Channel 2
0
1
1
Reserved
1
0
0
Reserved
1
0
1
Reserved
1
1
0
External trigger
1
1
1
Reserved
• LOWRES: Resolution
LOWRES
Selected Resolution
0
10-bit resolution
1
8-bit resolution
• SLEEP: Sleep Mode
SLEEP
Selected Mode
0
Normal Mode
1
Sleep Mode
447
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
• PRESCAL: Prescaler Rate Selection
ADCClock = MCK / ( (PRESCAL+1) * 2 )
• STARTUP: Start Up Time
Startup Time = (STARTUP+1) * 8 / ADCClock
• SHTIM: Sample & Hold Time
Sample & Hold Time = (SHTIM+1) / ADCClock
448
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
34.6.3
ADC Channel Enable Register
Register Name:
ADC_CHER
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CH7
CH6
CH5
CH4
CH3
CH2
CH1
CH0
• CHx: Channel x Enable
0 = No effect.
1 = Enables the corresponding channel.
34.6.4
ADC Channel Disable Register
Register Name:
ADC_CHDR
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CH7
CH6
CH5
CH4
CH3
CH2
CH1
CH0
• CHx: Channel x Disable
0 = No effect.
1 = Disables the corresponding channel.
Warning: If the corresponding channel is disabled during a conversion or if it is disabled then reenabled during a conversion, its associated data and its corresponding EOC and OVRE flags in ADC_SR are unpredictable.
449
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
34.6.5
ADC Channel Status Register
Register Name:
ADC_CHSR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CH7
CH6
CH5
CH4
CH3
CH2
CH1
CH0
• CHx: Channel x Status
0 = Corresponding channel is disabled.
1 = Corresponding channel is enabled.
450
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
34.6.6
ADC Status Register
Register Name:
ADC_SR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
RXBUFF
ENDRX
GOVRE
DRDY
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
OVRE7
OVRE6
OVRE5
OVRE4
OVRE3
OVRE2
OVRE1
OVRE0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
EOC7
EOC6
EOC5
EOC4
EOC3
EOC2
EOC1
EOC0
• EOCx: End of Conversion x
0 = Corresponding analog channel is disabled, or the conversion is not finished.
1 = Corresponding analog channel is enabled and conversion is complete.
• OVREx: Overrun Error x
0 = No overrun error on the corresponding channel since the last read of ADC_SR.
1 = There has been an overrun error on the corresponding channel since the last read of ADC_SR.
• DRDY: Data Ready
0 = No data has been converted since the last read of ADC_LCDR.
1 = At least one data has been converted and is available in ADC_LCDR.
• GOVRE: General Overrun Error
0 = No General Overrun Error occurred since the last read of ADC_SR.
1 = At least one General Overrun Error has occurred since the last read of ADC_SR.
• ENDRX: End of RX Buffer
0 = The Receive Counter Register has not reached 0 since the last write in ADC_RCR or ADC_RNCR.
1 = The Receive Counter Register has reached 0 since the last write in ADC_RCR or ADC_RNCR.
• RXBUFF: RX Buffer Full
0 = ADC_RCR or ADC_RNCR have a value other than 0.
1 = Both ADC_RCR and ADC_RNCR have a value of 0.
451
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
34.6.7
ADC Last Converted Data Register
Register Name:
ADC_LCDR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
–
–
3
2
8
LDATA
1
0
LDATA
• LDATA: Last Data Converted
The analog-to-digital conversion data is placed into this register at the end of a conversion and remains until a new conversion is completed.
34.6.8
ADC Interrupt Enable Register
Register Name:
ADC_IER
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
RXBUFF
ENDRX
GOVRE
DRDY
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
OVRE7
OVRE6
OVRE5
OVRE4
OVRE3
OVRE2
OVRE1
OVRE0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
EOC7
EOC6
EOC5
EOC4
EOC3
EOC2
EOC1
EOC0
• EOCx: End of Conversion Interrupt Enable x
• OVREx: Overrun Error Interrupt Enable x
• DRDY: Data Ready Interrupt Enable
• GOVRE: General Overrun Error Interrupt Enable
• ENDRX: End of Receive Buffer Interrupt Enable
• RXBUFF: Receive Buffer Full Interrupt Enable
0 = No effect.
1 = Enables the corresponding interrupt.
452
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
34.6.9
ADC Interrupt Disable Register
Register Name:
ADC_IDR
Access Type:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
RXBUFF
ENDRX
GOVRE
DRDY
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
OVRE7
OVRE6
OVRE5
OVRE4
OVRE3
OVRE2
OVRE1
OVRE0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
EOC7
EOC6
EOC5
EOC4
EOC3
EOC2
EOC1
EOC0
• EOCx: End of Conversion Interrupt Disable x
• OVREx: Overrun Error Interrupt Disable x
• DRDY: Data Ready Interrupt Disable
• GOVRE: General Overrun Error Interrupt Disable
• ENDRX: End of Receive Buffer Interrupt Disable
• RXBUFF: Receive Buffer Full Interrupt Disable
0 = No effect.
1 = Disables the corresponding interrupt.
453
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
34.6.10
ADC Interrupt Mask Register
Register Name:
ADC_IMR
Access Type:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
RXBUFF
ENDRX
GOVRE
DRDY
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
OVRE7
OVRE6
OVRE5
OVRE4
OVRE3
OVRE2
OVRE1
OVRE0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
EOC7
EOC6
EOC5
EOC4
EOC3
EOC2
EOC1
EOC0
• EOCx: End of Conversion Interrupt Mask x
• OVREx: Overrun Error Interrupt Mask x
• DRDY: Data Ready Interrupt Mask
• GOVRE: General Overrun Error Interrupt Mask
• ENDRX: End of Receive Buffer Interrupt Mask
• RXBUFF: Receive Buffer Full Interrupt Mask
0 = The corresponding interrupt is disabled.
1 = The corresponding interrupt is enabled.
34.6.11
ADC Channel Data Register
Register Name:
ADC_CDRx
Access Type:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
8
DATA
1
0
DATA
• DATA: Converted Data
The analog-to-digital conversion data is placed into this register at the end of a conversion and remains until a new conversion is completed. The Convert Data Register (CDR) is only loaded if the corresponding analog channel is enabled.
454
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
35. AT91SAM7S64 Electrical Characteristics
35.1
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Table 35-1.
Absolute Maximum Ratings*
Operating Temperature (Industrial)-40° C to + 85° C
Storage Temperature-60°C to + 150°C
Voltage on Input Pins
with Respect to Ground-0.3V to + 5.5V
Maximum Operating Voltage
(VDDCORE, and VDDPLL)1.95V
*NOTICE:
Stresses beyond those listed under “Absolute Maximum Ratings” may cause permanent damage to
the device. This is a stress rating only and functional operation of the device at these or other conditions beyond those indicated in the operational
sections of this specification is not implied. Exposure to absolute maximum rating conditions for
extended periods may affect device reliability.
Maximum Operating Voltage
(VDDIO, VDDIN and VDDFLASH)3.6V
Total DC Output Current on all I/O lines150 mA
455
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
35.2
DC Characteristics
The following characteristics are applicable to the operating temperature range: TA = -40°C to 85°C, unless otherwise specified and are certified for a junction temperature up to TJ = 100°C.
Table 35-2.
DC Characteristics
Symbol
Parameter
VVDDCORE
DC Supply Core
VVDDPLL
Conditions
Max
Units
1.65
1.95
V
DC Supply PLL
1.65
1.95
V
VVDDIO
DC Supply I/Os
3.0
3.6
V
VVDDFLASH
DC Supply Flash
3.0
3.6
V
VIL
Input Low-level Voltage
-0.3
0.8
V
VIH
Input High-level Voltage
2.0
5.5
V
VOL
Output Low-level Voltage
IO = 8 mA
0.4
V
VOH
Output High-level Voltage
IO = 8 mA
ILEAK
Input Leakage Current
Pull-up resistors disabled (Typ: TA =
25°C, Max: TA = 85°C)
IPULLUP
Input Pull-up Current
CIN
Input Capacitance
Static Current
IO
Output Current
TSLOPE
Supply Core Slope
Typ
VDDIO - 0.4
143
V
20
200
nA
321
600
µA
13.9
pF
64-LQFP Package
VVDDCORE = 1.85V,
MCK = 0 Hz
ISC
Min
All inputs driven at 1
(including TMS, TDI, TCK,
NRST)
TA =25°C
26
50
µA
TA = 85°C
260
500
PA0-PA3
16
mA
PA4-PA31
8
mA
6
V/ms
Note that even during startup, VVDDFLASH must always be superior or equal to VVDDCORE.
Table 35-3.
1.8V Voltage Regulator Characteristics
Symbol
Parameter
VVDDIN
Supply Voltage
VVDDOUT
Output Voltage
IVDDIN
Current consumption
TSTART
Startup Time
IO
Conditions
IO = 20 mA
Min
Typ
Max
Units
3.0
3.3
3.6
V
1.81
1.85
1.89
V
After startup, no load
90
After startup, Idle mode, no load
30
µA
60
µA
Cload = 2.2 µF, after VDDIN > 2.7V
150
µS
Maximum DC Output Current
VDDIN = 3.3V, TA=70 °C
100
mA
IO
Maximum DC Output Curren
VDDIN = 3.3V, TA=85 °C
50
mA
IO
Maximum DC Output Current
VDDIN = 3.3V, in Idle Mode
1
mA
456
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
Table 35-4.
Brownout Detector Characteristics
Symbol
Parameter
VBOT-
Threshold Level
VHYST
Hysteresis
IDD
Current Consumption
TSTART
Startup Time
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Units
1.65
1.68
1.71
V
VHYST = VBOT+ - VBOT-
50
65
mV
BOD on (GPNVM0 bit active)
12
18
µA
1
µA
200
µs
BOD off (GPNVM0 bit inactive)
100
457
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
35.3
Power Consumption
• Typical power consumption of PLLs, Slow Clock and Main Oscillator.
• Power consumption of power supply in two different modes: Active and ultra Low-power.
• Power consumption by peripheral: calculated as the difference in current measurement after
having enabled then disabled the corresponding clock.
35.3.1
Power Consumption Versus Modes
The values in Table 35-5 and Table 35-6 on page 459 are estimated values of the power consumption with operating conditions as follows:
• VDDIO = VDDIN = VDDFLASH = 3.3V
• VDDCORE = VDDPLL = 1.85V
• TA = 25° C
• MCK = 50 MHz
• There is no consumption on the I/Os of the device
Figure 35-1. Measure Schematics:
VDDFLASH
VDDIO
VDDIN
3.3V
Voltage
Regulator
AMP1
VDDOUT
AMP2
1.8V
VDDCORE
VDDPLL
458
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
These figures represent the power consumption estimated on the power supplies..
Table 35-5.
Mode
Conditions
Active
Ultra low
power
35.3.2
Power Consumption for Different Modes
Consumption
Unit
Voltage regulator is on.
Brown Out Detector is activated.
Flash is read.
ARM Core clock is 50MHz.
Analog-to-Digital Converter activated.
All peripheral clocks activated.
onto AMP1
onto AMP2
31.3
29.3
mA
Voltage regulator is in Low-power mode.
Brown Out Detector is de-activated.
Flash is in standby mode.
ARM Core clock is 500Hz.
Analog-to-Digital Converter de-activated.
All peripheral clocks de-activated.
onto AMP1
onto AMP2
36.2
35.2
µA
Peripheral Power Consumption in Active Mode
Table 35-6.
Power Consumption by Peripheral
Peripheral
Consumption
PIO Controller
0.4
USART
0.9
ADC
0.7
PWM
0.3
TWI
0.2
SPI
0.9
SSC
1.1
Timer Counter Channels
0.2
Unit
mA
459
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
35.3.3
Power Consumption versus Master Clock Frequency in Active Mode
Figure 35-2 produces estimated values with operating conditions as follows:
• VDDIO = VDDIN = VDDFLASH = 3.3V
• VDDCORE = VDDPLL = 1.85V
• TA = 25° C
• MCK in the MHz range
• Voltage regulator is on
• Brown-out Detector is activated
• Flash is read
• Analog-to-Digital Converter activated
• All peripheral clocks activated
• There is no consumption on the I/Os of the device
Figure 35-2 presents the power consumption estimated on the power supply.
Figure 35-2. Power Consumption versus MCK Frequency in Active Mode
Current Consumption at 3.3V
100,000
10,000
8,685
4,918
1,622
2,063
3,035
1,000
Consumption (µA)
31,278
16,219
100
0.78125 1.5625
3.125
6.25
12.5
25
50
Frequency (MHz)
460
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
35.3.4
Power Consumption versus Master Clock Frequency in Ultra Low-power Mode
Figure 35-3 produces estimated values with operating conditions as follows:
• VDDIO = VDDIN = VDDFLASH = 3.3V
• VDDCORE = VDDPLL = 1.85V
• TA = 25° C
• Voltage regulator is in Low-power mode
• Brown Out Detector is de-activated
• Flash is in standby mode
• Analog-to-digital Converter de-activated
• All peripheral clocks de-activated
• PLL in standby
• Main oscillator in standby
• USB Transeiver de-activated
• There is no consumption on the I/Os of the device
Figure 35-3 presents the power consumption estimated on the power supply.
Figure 35-3. Power Consumption versus MCK Frequency in the Ultra Low Power Mode
Current Consumption at 3.3V
35.2
36.4
35.7
35.3
46
40.5
37.7
Consumption (µA)
100
10
0.5
1
2
4
8
16
32
Frequency (KHz)
461
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
35.4
Crystal Oscillators Characteristics
35.4.1
RC Oscillator Characteristics
Table 35-7.
RC Oscillator Characteristics
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
1/(tCPRC)
RC Oscillator Frequency
VDDPLL = 1.65V
Duty Cycle
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
22
32
42
KHz
45
50
55
%
tST
Startup Time
VDDPLL = 1.65V
75
µs
IOSC
Current Consumption
After Startup Time
1.9
µA
35.4.2
Main Oscillator Characteristics
Table 35-8.
Main Oscillator Characteristics
Symbol
Parameter
1/(tCPMAIN)
Crystal Oscillator Frequency
CL1, CL2
Internal Load Capacitance
(CL1 = CL2)
CL
Equivalent Load Capacitance
Conditions
Duty Cycle
tST
Startup Time
IOSC
Current Consumption
Typ
Max
Unit
3
16
20
MHz
40
25
pF
12.5
pF
50
60
14.5
1.4
1
Active mode
550
µA
1
µA
XIN Clock Characteristics
XIN Clock Electrical Characteristics
Symbol
Parameter
1/(tCPXIN)
XIN Clock Frequency
tCPXIN
XIN Clock Period
20.0
tCHXIN
XIN Clock High Half-period
0.4 x tCPXIN
0.6 x tCPXIN
tCLXIN
XIN Clock Low Half-period
0.4 x tCPXIN
0.6 x tCPXIN
RIN
ms
CS is the shunt capacitance
Table 35-9.
CIN
%
VDDPLL = 1.2 to 2V
CS = 3 pF(1) 1/(tCPMAIN) = 3 MHz
CS = 7 pF(1) 1/(tCPMAIN) = 16 MHz
CS = 7 pF(1) 1/(tCPMAIN) = 20 MHz
Standby mode
Note: 1.
35.4.3
Min
Conditions
Min
Max
Units
50.0
MHz
ns
XIN Input Capacitance
(1)
25
pF
XIN Pull-down Resistor
(1)
500
kΩ
Note: 1.
These characteristics apply only when the Main Oscillator is in bypass mode (i.e., when MOSCEN = 0 and
OSCBYPASS = 1 in the CKGR_MOR register, (see ”PMC Clock Generator Main Oscillator Register” on page 173).
462
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
35.5
PLL Characteristics
Table 35-10. Phase Lock Loop Characteristics
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
FOUT
Output Frequency
Field out of CKGR_PLL is:
FIN
Input Frequency
IPLL
Current Consumption
Note:
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
00
80
160
MHz
10
150
220
MHz
1
32
MHz
Active mode
4
mA
Standby mode
1
µA
Startup time depends on PLL RC filter. A calculation tool is provided by Atmel.
463
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
35.6
USB Transceiver Characteristics
35.6.1
Electrical Characteristics
Table 35-11. Electrical Parameters
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
0.8
V
Input Levels
VIL
Low Level
VIH
High Level
VDI
Differential Input Sensitivity
VCM
Differential Input Common
Mode Range
CIN
Transceiver capacitance
Capacitance to ground on each line
I
Hi-Z State Data Line Leakage
0V < VIN < 3.3V
REXT
Recommended External USB
Series Resistor
In series with each USB pin with ±5%
VOL
Low Level Output
Measured with RL of 1.425 kOhm tied
to 3.6V
0.0
0.3
V
VOH
High Level Output
Measured with RL of 14.25 kOhm tied
to GND
2.8
3.6
V
VCRS
Output Signal Crossover
Voltage
Measure conditions described in
Figure 35-4
1.3
2.0
V
Max
Unit
|(D+) - (D-)|
2.0
V
0.2
V
0.8
-10
2.5
V
9.18
pF
+10
µA
Ω
27
Output Levels
35.6.2
Switching Characteristics
Table 35-12. In Low Speed
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
Min
Typ
tFR
Transition Rise Time
CLOAD = 400 pF
75
300
ns
tFE
Transition Fall Time
CLOAD = 400 pF
75
300
ns
tFRFM
Rise/Fall Time Matching
CLOAD = 400 pF
80
125
%
Min
Max
Unit
Table 35-13. In Full Speed
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
tFR
Transition Rise Time
CLOAD = 50 pF
4
20
ns
tFE
Transition Fall Time
CLOAD = 50 pF
4
20
ns
tFRFM
Rise/Fall time Matching
90
111.11
%
464
Typ
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
Figure 35-4. USB Data Signal Rise and Fall Times
Rise Time
Fall Time
90%
VCRS
10%
Differential
Data Lines
10%
tR
tF
(a)
REXT=27 ohms
Fosc = 6MHz/750kHz
Buffer
Cload
(b)
465
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
35.7
ADC Characteristics
Table 35-14. Channel Conversion Time and ADC CLock
Parameter
Conditions
Min
Typ
ADC Clock Frequency
Startup Time
Return from Idle Mode
Track and Hold Acquisition Time
Max
Units
5
MHz
20
µs
600
ns
Conversion Time
ADC Clock = 5 MHz
2
µs
Throughput Rate
ADC Clock = 5 MHz
384
kSPS
Table 35-15. External Voltage Reference Input
Conditions
Parameter
Min
Max
Units
ADVREF Input Voltage Range
2.6
VDDIN
V
12
250
µA
ADVREF Average Current
On 13 samples with ADC Clock = 5 MHz
Table 35-16. Analog Inputs
Parameter
Input Voltage Range
Min
Typ
0
Max
Units
VADVREF
Input Leakage Current
1
µA
Input Capacitance
12
14
pF
Typ
Max
Units
Table 35-17. Transfer Characteristics
Parameter
Resolution
Min
10
Bit
Integral Non-linearity
±3
LSB
Differential Non-linearity
±2
LSB
Offset Error
±2
LSB
Gain Error
±2
LSB
466
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
36. AT91SAM7S64 AC Characteristics
36.1
Applicable Conditions and Derating Data
These conditions and derating process apply to the following paragraphs: Clock Characteristics,
Embedded Flash Characteristics and JTAG/ICE Timings.
36.1.1
Conditions and Timings Computation
All delays are given as typical values under the following conditions:
• VDDIO = 3.3V
• VDDCORE = 1.8V
• Ambient Temperature = 25°C
• Load Capacitance = 0 pF
• The output level change detection is (0.5 x VDDIO).
• The input level is 0.8V for a low-level detection and is 2.0V for a high-level detection.
The minimum and maximum values given in the AC characteristics tables of this datasheet take
into account process variation and design. In order to obtain the timing for other conditions, the
following equation should be used:
t = δT° × ⎛ ( δVDDCORE × t DATASHEET ) + ⎛ δVDDIO ×
⎝
⎝
where:
∑( CSIGNAL × δCSIGNAL )⎞⎠ ⎞⎠
• δT° is the derating factor in temperature given in Figure 36-1 on page 468.
• δVDDCORE is the derating factor for the Core Power Supply given in Figure 36-2 on page 468.
• tDATASHEET is the minimum or maximum timing value given in this datasheet for a load
capacitance of 0 pF.
• δVDDIO is the derating factor for the IO Power Supply given in Figure 36-3 on page 469.
• CSIGNAL is the capacitance load on the considered output pin(1).
• δCSIGNAL is the load derating factor depending on the capacitance load on the related output
pins given in Min and Max in this datasheet.
The input delays are given as typical values.
Note:
1. The user must take into account the package capacitance load contribution (CIN) described in
Table 35-2, “DC Characteristics,” on page 456.
467
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
36.1.2
Temperature Derating Factor
Figure 36-1. Derating Curve for Different Operating Temperatures
1,1
Derating Factor
1,05
1
0,95
0,9
0,85
-40
-30
-20
-10
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
Operating Tem perature (°C)
36.1.3
VDDCORE Voltage Derating Factor
Figure 36-2. Derating Curve for Different Core Supply Voltages
1,2
1,15
Derating Factor
1,1
1,05
1
0,95
0,9
0,85
0,8
1,65
1,7
1,75
1,8
1,85
1,9
1,95
Core Supply Voltage (V)
468
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
36.1.4
VDDIO Voltage Derating Factor
Figure 36-3. Derating Curve for Different IO Supply Voltages
1,15
Derating Factor
1,1
1,05
1
0,95
0,9
0,85
3
3,1
3,2
3,3
3,4
3,5
3,6
I/O Supply Voltage (V)
Note:
The derating factor in this example is applicable only to timings related to output pins.
469
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
36.2
Clock Characteristics
These parameters are given in the following conditions:
• VDDCORE = 1.8V
• Ambient Temperature = 25°C
The Temperature Derating Factor described in ”Applicable Conditions and Derating Data” on page 467 and ”VDDCORE
Voltage Derating Factor” on page 468 are both applicable to these characteristics.
36.2.1
Master Clock Characteristics
Table 36-1.
Master Clock Waveform Parameters
Symbol
Parameter
1/(tCPMCK)
Master Clock Frequency
470
Conditions
Min
Max
Units
73
MHz
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
36.3
Embedded Flash Characteristics
Table 36-2.
DC Flash Characteristics
Symbol
Parameter
TPU
Power-up delay
Conditions
Min
@25°C
onto VDDCORE = 1.8V
onto VDDFLASH = 3.3V
Max
Units
30
µS
10
10
Standby current
ISB
µA
@85°C
onto VDDCORE = 1.8V
onto VDDFLASH = 3.3V
10
30
Random Read @ 40MHz
onto VDDCORE = 1.8V
onto VDDFLASH = 3.3V
3.0
0.4
mA
Write
onto VDDCORE = 1.8V
onto VDDFLASH = 3.3V
400
2.2
µA
mA
Active current
ICC
The maximum operating frequency is given in Table 36-2 but is limited by the Embedded Flash access time when the processor is fetching code out of it. Table 36-3 gives the device maximum operating frequency depending on the field FWS of
the MC_FMR register. This field defines the number of wait states required to access the Embedded Flash Memory.
Table 36-3.
Table 36-4.
Embedded Flash Wait States
FWS
Read Operations
Maximum Operating Frequency (MHz)
0
1 cycle
40
1
2 cycles
1/(tCPMCK)
2
3 cycles
1/(tCPMCK)
3
4 cycles
1/(tCPMCK)
AC Flash Characteristics
Parameter
Conditions
Min
Max
Units
per page including auto-erase
4
ms
per page without auto-erase
2
ms
Program Cycle Time
Full Chip Erase
10
ms
471
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
36.4
JTAG/ICE Timings
36.4.1
ICE Interface Signals
Table 36-5 shows timings relative to operating condition limits defined in the section ”Conditions
and Timings Computation” on page 467.
Table 36-5.
ICE Interface Timing Specification
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
Min
ICE0
TCK Low Half-period
51
ns
ICE1
TCK High Half-period
51
ns
ICE2
TCK Period
102
ns
ICE3
TDI, TMS, Setup before TCK High
3
ns
ICE4
TDI, TMS, Hold after TCK High
0
ns
3
ns
ICE5
TDO Hold Time
0.037
ns/pF
ICE6
TCK Low to TDO Valid
CTDO = 0 pF
CTDO derating
CTDO = 0 pF
CTDO derating
Max
Units
13
ns
0.037
ns/pF
Figure 36-4. ICE Interface Signals
ICE2
TCK
ICE0
ICE1
TMS/TDI
ICE3
ICE4
TDO
ICE5
ICE6
472
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
36.4.2
JTAG Interface Signals
The following table shows timings relative to operating condition limits defined in the section
”Conditions and Timings Computation” on page 467.
Table 36-6.
JTAG Interface Timing specification
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
JTAG0
TCK Low Half-period
6.5
ns
JTAG1
TCK High Half-period
5.5
ns
JTAG2
TCK Period
12
ns
JTAG3
TDI, TMS Setup before TCK High
2
ns
JTAG4
TDI, TMS Hold after TCK High
3
ns
2
ns
JTAG5
TDO Hold Time
0.037
ns/pF
JTAG6
TCK Low to TDO Valid
JTAG7
Device Inputs Setup Time
0
ns
JTAG8
Device Inputs Hold Time
3
ns
4
ns
JTAG9
Device Outputs Hold Time
0.037
ns/pF
JTAG10
TCK to Device Outputs Valid
CTDO = 0 pF
CTDO derating
Min
CTDO = 0 pF
CTDO derating
COUT = 0 pF
COUT derating
COUT = 0 pF
COUT derating
Max
Units
15
ns
0.037
ns/pF
20
ns
0.037
ns/pF
473
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
Figure 36-5. JTAG Interface Signals
JTAG2
TCK
JTAG
JTAG1
0
TMS/TDI
JTAG3
JTAG4
JTAG7
JTAG8
TDO
JTAG5
JTAG6
Device
Inputs
Device
Outputs
JTAG9
JTAG10
474
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
37. AT91SAM7S64 Mechanical Characteristics
37.1
37.1.1
Thermal Considerations
Thermal Data
In Table 37-1, the device lifetime is estimated using the MIL-217 standard in the “moderately
controlled” environmental model (this model is described as corresponding to an installation in a
permanent rack with adequate cooling air), depending on the device Junction Temperature. (For
details see the section ”Junction Temperature” on page 475.)
Note that the user must be extremely cautious with this MTBF calculation. It should be noted that
the MIL-217 model is pessimistic with respect to observed values due to the way the data/models are obtained (test under severe conditions). The life test results that have been measured
are always better than the predicted ones.
Table 37-1.
MTBF Versus Junction Temperature
Junction Temperature (TJ) (°C)
Estimated Lifetime (MTBF) (Year)
100
17
125
9
150
5
175
3
Table 37-2 summarizes the thermal resistance data depending on the package.
Table 37-2.
37.1.2
Thermal Resistance Data
Symbol
Parameter
θJA
Junction-to-ambient thermal resistance
θJC
Junction-to-case thermal resistance
Condition
Package
Typ
Still Air
LQFP64
47.2
LQFP64
12.2
Unit
°C/W
Junction Temperature
The average chip-junction temperature, TJ, in °C can be obtained from the following:
1.
T J = T A + ( P D × θ JA )
2.
T J = T A + ( P D × ( θ HEATSINK + θ JC ) )
where:
• θJA = package thermal resistance, Junction-to-ambient (°C/W), provided in Table 37-2 on
page 475.
• θJC = package thermal resistance, Junction-to-case thermal resistance (°C/W), provided in
Table 37-2 on page 475.
• θHEAT SINK = cooling device thermal resistance (°C/W), provided in the device datasheet.
• PD = device power consumption (W) estimated from data provided in the section ”Power
Consumption” on page 458.
• TA = ambient temperature (°C).
From the first equation, the user can derive the estimated lifetime of the chip and decide if a
cooling device is necessary or not. If a cooling device is to be fitted on the chip, the second
equation should be used to compute the resulting average chip-junction temperature TJ in °C.
475
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
37.2
Package Drawing
Figure 37-1. 64-lead LQFP Package Drawing
476
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
Table 37-3.
64-lead LQFP Package Dimensions (in mm)
Millimeter
Inch
Symbol
Min
Nom
Max
Min
Nom
Max
A
–
–
1.60
–
–
0.063
A1
0.05
–
0.15
0.002
–
0.006
A2
1.35
1.40
1.45
0.053
0.055
0.057
D
12.00 BSC
0.472 BSC
D1
10.00 BSC
0.383 BSC
E
12.00 BSC
0.472 BSC
E1
10.00 BSC
0.383 BSC
R2
0.08
–
0.20
0.003
–
0.008
R1
0.08
–
–
0.003
–
–
q
0°
3.5°
7°
0°
3.5°
7°
θ1
0°
–
–
0°
–
–
θ2
11°
12°
13°
11°
12°
13°
θ3
11°
12°
13°
11°
12°
13°
c
0.09
–
0.20
0.004
–
0.008
L
0.45
0.60
0.75
0.018
0.024
0.030
L1
1.00 REF
0.039 REF
S
0.20
–
–
0.008
–
–
b
0.17
0.20
0.27
0.007
0.008
0.011
e
0.50 BSC.
0.020 BSC.
D2
7.50
0.285
E2
7.50
0.285
Tolerances of Form and Position
aaa
0.20
0.008
bbb
0.20
0.008
ccc
0.08
0.003
ddd
0.08
0.003
Table 37-4.
Device and 64-lead LQFP Package Maximum Weight
700
Table 37-5.
mg
64-lead LQFP Package Characteristics
Moisture Sensitivity Level
3
477
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
37.3
Soldering Profile
Table 37-6 gives the recommended soldering profile from J-STD-20.
Table 37-6.
Soldering Profile
Convection or
IR/Convection
VPR
Average Ramp-up Rate (183° C to Peak)
3° C/sec. max.
10° C/sec.
Preheat Temperature 125° C ±25° C
120 sec. max
Temperature Maintained Above 183° C
60 sec. to 150 sec.
Time within 5° C of Actual Peak Temperature
10 sec. to 20 sec.
60 sec.
Peak Temperature Range
220 +5/-0° C or
235 +5/-0° C
215 to 219° C or
235 +5/-0° C
Ramp-down Rate
6° C/sec.
10° C/sec.
Time 25° C to Peak Temperature
6 min. max
Small packages may be subject to higher temperatures if they are reflowed in boards with larger
components. In this case, small packages may have to withstand temperatures of up to 235° C,
not 220° C (IR reflow).
Recommended package reflow conditions depend on package thickness and volume. See
Table 37-7.
Table 37-7.
Recommended Package Reflow Conditions (1) (2) (3)
Parameter
Temperature
Convection
235 +5/-0° C
VPR
235 +5/-0° C
IR/Convection
235 +5/-0° C
When certain small thin packages are used on boards without larger packages, these small
packages may be classified at 220°C instead of 235°C.
Notes:
1. The packages are qualified by Atmel by using IR reflow conditions, not convection or VPR.
2. By default, the package level 1 is qualified at 220° C (unless 235° C is stipulated).
3. The body temperature is the most important parameter but other profile parameters such as
total exposure time to hot temperature or heating rate may also influence component reliability.
A maximum of three reflow passes is allowed per component.
478
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
37.4
AT91SAM7S64 Ordering Information
Table 37-8.
Ordering Information
Ordering Code
Package
Package Type
ROM Code Revision
AT91SAM7S64-AU-001
LQFP 64
Green
001
Temperature
Operating Range
Industrial
(-40°C to 85°C)
479
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
480
AT91SAM7S64 Preliminary
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64
Table of Contents ì
Features ..................................................................................................... 1
1
Description ............................................................................................... 2
2
Block Diagram .......................................................................................... 3
3
Signal Description ................................................................................... 4
4
Package and Pinout ................................................................................. 7
4.164-lead LQFP Mechanical Overview .........................................................................7
4.2Pinout ........................................................................................................................7
5
Power Considerations ............................................................................. 8
5.1Power Supplies .........................................................................................................8
5.2Power Consumption ..................................................................................................8
5.3Voltage Regulator ......................................................................................................8
5.4Typical Powering Schematics ...................................................................................9
6
I/O Lines Considerations ....................................................................... 10
6.1JTAG Port Pins ........................................................................................................10
6.2Test Pin ...................................................................................................................10
6.3Reset Pin .................................................................................................................10
6.4ERASE Pin ..............................................................................................................10
6.5PIO Controller A Lines .............................................................................................10
6.6I/O Line Drive Levels ...............................................................................................11
7
Processor and Architecture .................................................................. 12
7.1ARM7TDMI Processor ............................................................................................12
7.2Debug and Test Features ........................................................................................12
7.3Memory Controller ...................................................................................................12
7.4Peripheral DMA Controller (PDC) ............................................................................13
8
Memory ................................................................................................... 14
8.1Memory Mapping .....................................................................................................14
8.2Embedded Flash .....................................................................................................15
8.3Fast Flash Programming Interface ..........................................................................16
9
System Controller .................................................................................. 17
9.1System Controller Mapping .....................................................................................18
9.2Reset Controller ......................................................................................................18
i
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
9.3Clock Generator ......................................................................................................19
9.4Power Management Controller ................................................................................20
9.5Advanced Interrupt Controller .................................................................................21
9.6Debug Unit ..............................................................................................................22
9.7Periodic Interval Timer ............................................................................................22
9.8Watchdog Timer ......................................................................................................22
9.9Real-time Timer .......................................................................................................22
9.10PIO Controller ........................................................................................................22
9.11Voltage Regulator Controller .................................................................................23
10 Peripherals ............................................................................................. 24
10.1Peripheral Mapping ...............................................................................................24
10.2Peripheral Multiplexing on PIO Lines ....................................................................25
10.3PIO Controller A Multiplexing ................................................................................26
10.4Peripheral Identifiers .............................................................................................27
10.5Serial Peripheral Interface .....................................................................................27
10.6Two-wire Interface .................................................................................................28
10.7USART ..................................................................................................................28
10.8Serial Synchronous Controller ...............................................................................28
10.9Timer Counter .......................................................................................................29
10.10PWM Controller ...................................................................................................29
10.11USB Device Port .................................................................................................29
10.12Analog-to-digital Converter ..................................................................................30
11 ARM7TDMI Processor Overview .......................................................... 31
11.1Overview ...............................................................................................................31
11.2ARM7TDMI Processor ..........................................................................................32
12 AT91SAM7S64 Debug and Test Features ............................................ 37
12.1Description ............................................................................................................37
12.2Block Diagram .......................................................................................................37
12.3Application Examples ............................................................................................38
12.4Debug and Test Pin Description ............................................................................39
12.5Functional Description ...........................................................................................40
12.6Test Pin .................................................................................................................40
13 Reset Controller (RSTC) ........................................................................ 45
13.1Overview ...............................................................................................................45
13.2Block Diagram .......................................................................................................45
ii
AT91SAM7S64
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64
13.3Functional Description ...........................................................................................46
13.4Reset Controller (RSTC) User Interface ................................................................55
14 Real-time Timer (RTT) ............................................................................ 59
14.1Overview ...............................................................................................................59
14.2Block Diagram .......................................................................................................59
14.3Functional Description ...........................................................................................59
14.4Real-time Timer (RTT) User Interface ...................................................................61
15 Periodic Interval Timer (PIT) ................................................................. 65
15.1Overview ...............................................................................................................65
15.2Block Diagram .......................................................................................................65
15.3Functional Description ...........................................................................................66
15.4Periodic Interval Timer (PIT) User Interface ..........................................................68
16 Watchdog Timer (WDT) ......................................................................... 73
16.1Overview ...............................................................................................................73
16.2Block Diagram .......................................................................................................73
16.3Functional Description ...........................................................................................74
16.4Watchdog Timer (WDT) User Interface .................................................................76
17 Voltage Regulator Mode Controller (VREG) ........................................ 79
17.1Overview ...............................................................................................................79
17.2Voltage Regulator Power Controller (VREG) User Interface .................................80
18 Memory Controller (MC) ........................................................................ 81
18.1Overview ...............................................................................................................81
18.2Block Diagram .......................................................................................................81
18.3Functional Description ...........................................................................................82
18.4Memory Controller (MC) User Interface ................................................................85
19 Embedded Flash Controller (EFC) ....................................................... 89
19.1Overview ..............................................................................................................89
19.2Functional Description ...........................................................................................89
19.3Embedded Flash Controller (EFC) User Interface .................................................99
20 Fast Flash Programming Interface (FFPI) .......................................... 105
20.1Overview .............................................................................................................105
20.2Parallel Fast Flash Programming ........................................................................106
20.3Serial Fast Flash Programming ...........................................................................113
iii
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
21 Peripheral DMA Controller (PDC) ....................................................... 119
21.1Overview .............................................................................................................119
21.2Block Diagram .....................................................................................................119
21.3Functional Description .........................................................................................120
21.4Peripheral DMA Controller (PDC) User Interface ................................................122
22 Advanced Interrupt Controller (AIC) .................................................. 129
22.1Overview .............................................................................................................129
22.2Block Diagram .....................................................................................................129
22.3Application Block Diagram ..................................................................................129
22.4AIC Detailed Block Diagram ................................................................................130
22.5I/O Line Description .............................................................................................130
22.6Product Dependencies ........................................................................................130
22.7Functional Description .........................................................................................132
22.8Advanced Interrupt Controller (AIC) User Interface .............................................142
23 Clock Generator ................................................................................... 153
23.1Overview .............................................................................................................153
23.2Slow Clock RC Oscillator .....................................................................................153
23.3Main Oscillator .....................................................................................................153
23.4Divider and PLL Block .........................................................................................155
24 Power Management Controller ........................................................... 157
24.1Overview .............................................................................................................157
24.2Master Clock Controller .......................................................................................157
24.3Processor Clock Controller ..................................................................................158
24.4USB Clock Controller ..........................................................................................158
24.5Peripheral Clock Controller .................................................................................158
24.6Programmable Clock Output Controller ...............................................................159
24.7Programming Sequence ......................................................................................159
24.8Clock Switching Details .......................................................................................164
24.9Power Management User Interface ....................................................................167
25 Debug Unit (DBGU) .............................................................................. 181
25.1Overview .............................................................................................................181
25.2Block Diagram .....................................................................................................182
25.3Product Dependencies ........................................................................................183
25.4UART Operations ................................................................................................183
25.5Debug Unit (DBGU) User Interface ....................................................................191
iv
AT91SAM7S64
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64
26 Parallel Input/Output Controller (PIO) ................................................ 205
26.1Overview .............................................................................................................205
26.2Block Diagram .....................................................................................................206
26.3Application Block Diagram ..................................................................................206
26.4Product Dependencies ........................................................................................207
26.5Functional Description .........................................................................................208
26.6I/O Lines Programming Example ........................................................................213
26.7Parallel Input/Output Controller (PIO) User Interface ..........................................214
27 Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) ......................................................... 231
27.1Overview .............................................................................................................231
27.2Block Diagram .....................................................................................................232
27.3Application Block Diagram ..................................................................................232
27.4Signal Description ...............................................................................................233
27.5Product Dependencies ........................................................................................233
27.6Functional Description .........................................................................................234
27.7Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) User Interface .................................................243
28 Two-wire Interface (TWI) ..................................................................... 257
28.1Overview .............................................................................................................257
28.2Block Diagram .....................................................................................................257
28.3Application Block Diagram ..................................................................................257
28.4Product Dependencies ........................................................................................258
28.5Functional Description .........................................................................................259
28.6Two-wire Interface (TWI) User Interface ............................................................264
29 Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter
USART) ................................................................................................. 273
29.1Overview .............................................................................................................273
29.2Block Diagram .....................................................................................................274
29.3Application Block Diagram ..................................................................................275
29.4I/O Lines Description ..........................................................................................275
29.5Product Dependencies ........................................................................................276
29.6Functional Description .........................................................................................277
29.7USART User Interface ........................................................................................300
30 Synchronous Serial Controller (SSC) ................................................ 317
30.1Overview .............................................................................................................317
30.2Block Diagram .....................................................................................................318
v
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
30.3Application Block Diagram ..................................................................................318
30.4Pin Name List ......................................................................................................319
30.5Product Dependencies ........................................................................................319
30.6Functional Description .........................................................................................320
30.7SSC Application Examples ..................................................................................331
30.8Synchronous Serial Controller (SSC) User Interface .........................................333
31 Timer/Counter (TC) .............................................................................. 351
31.1Overview .............................................................................................................351
31.2Block Diagram .....................................................................................................351
31.3Pin Name List ......................................................................................................352
31.4Product Dependencies ........................................................................................352
31.5Functional Description .........................................................................................352
31.6Timer/Counter (TC) User Interface ......................................................................365
32 Pulse Width Modulation Controller (PWM) ........................................ 383
32.1Overview .............................................................................................................383
32.2Block Diagram .....................................................................................................383
32.3I/O Lines Description ...........................................................................................384
32.4Product Dependencies ........................................................................................384
32.5Functional Description .........................................................................................385
32.6Pulse Width Modulation Controller (PWM) User Interface ..................................393
33 USB Device Port (UDP) ........................................................................ 403
33.1Overview .............................................................................................................403
33.2Block Diagram .....................................................................................................403
33.3Product Dependencies ........................................................................................404
33.4Typical Connection ..............................................................................................405
33.5Functional Description .........................................................................................406
33.6USB Device User Interface .................................................................................420
34 Analog-to-digital Converter (ADC) ..................................................... 439
34.1Overview .............................................................................................................439
34.2Block Diagram .....................................................................................................439
34.3Signal Description ...............................................................................................440
34.4Product Dependencies ........................................................................................440
34.5Functional Description .........................................................................................441
34.6Analog-to-digital Converter (ADC) User Interface ...............................................445
vi
AT91SAM7S64
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64
35 AT91SAM7S64 Electrical Characteristics .......................................... 455
35.1Absolute Maximum Ratings .................................................................................455
35.2DC Characteristics ..............................................................................................456
35.3Power Consumption ............................................................................................458
35.4Crystal Oscillators Characteristics .......................................................................462
35.5PLL Characteristics .............................................................................................463
35.6USB Transceiver Characteristics .........................................................................464
35.7ADC Characteristics ...........................................................................................466
36 AT91SAM7S64 AC Characteristics ..................................................... 467
36.1Applicable Conditions and Derating Data ............................................................467
36.2Clock Characteristics ...........................................................................................470
36.3Embedded Flash Characteristics .......................................................................471
36.4JTAG/ICE Timings ...............................................................................................472
37 AT91SAM7S64 Mechanical Characteristics ...................................... 475
37.1Thermal Considerations ......................................................................................475
37.2Package Drawing ................................................................................................476
37.3Soldering Profile ..................................................................................................478
37.4AT91SAM7S64 Ordering Information ..................................................................479
Table of Contents ì..................................................................................... i
Revision History..................................................................................... viii
vii
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
Revision History
Doc. Rev
Source
Lit° 6070A
Comments (1)
• Date Qualified: 28-Oct-04
• CSR’s Implemented: 19-Nov-04
viii
• CSR 04-204
• pg. 7, Table 2, pin 20 changed.
• pg.107 -120 FFPI replaced with update to lit #6077
• CSR 04-206
• pg. 3, Figure 1: Block Diagram. PGMM0-PGMM3
• CSR 04-209
• pg. 106, change in PROGE description
• CSR 04-210
• pg. 14; Security Bit Feature, Erase pin pull-down
• CSR 04-220
• pg. 175, Change to CSS field description in PMC_PCKx register
• CSR 04-231
• pg. 445, Table 89: Brownout Characteristics, table added (evolution of pagination)
• CSR 04-232
• pg. 455, ADC Characteristics chapter inserted (evolution of pagination)
• CSR 04-235
• pg. 452, Table 95, FOUT 01 changed to 10 (evolution of page and table number)
• CSR 04-241
• pg. 232, Table 54, NCPHA column changed
• CSR 04-262
• pg. 14, modification to Flash Overview
• CSR 04-270
• pg. 4, Table 1: Signal Description List, VDDPL function changed
• CSR 04-273
• pg. 427, ADC; ccondition tags changed
• Figure 185; VDDANA changed to VDDIN in ADC block diagram
• GLobal: VDDANA removed.
• CSR 04-274
• pg. 455, Table 99 and Table 100. changes
• CSR 04-283
• pg. 444, Table 87: DC Characteristics, CIN Max changed to 13.9
• CSR 04-284
• pg. 452, Table 95: Phase Lock Loop Characteristics, Field 10, Max changed
• CSR 04-292
• pg. 449, Figure 189, Chart replaced (pagination and figure # have evolved)
• CSR 04-295
• pg. 10, I/O Line Drive Levels “...draw only 4 mA...” changed to...”draw only 8 mA...”
• CSR 04-304
• pg. 26, Table 4: Peripheral Identifiers, changes to note 1.
• CSR 04-323
• pg. 428, Conversion Performances, cross ref changed to ADC Characteristics
• CSR 04-325
• pg. 103, change to FMCN
• CSR 04-337
• pg. 445 Table 89, change to Brownout Detector Characteristics
• CSR 04-338
• pg. 449, Chart replaced in Figure 189 (evolved from fig.187)
• CSR 04- 339
• pg. 450, Chart replaced in Figure 190 (evolved from fig. 188)
• CSR 04-342
• pg. 14, Lock Region information changed
• CSR 04-343
• pg. 19, RC oscillator range changed
• CSR 04-348
• pg. 4, Table 1; pg 8, Power Supplies; pg, 444, Table 88; VDDIN characteristics changed.
• CSR 04-356
• pg. 14, Flash Overview modified
• CSR 04-375
• pg. 169, PMC_SCSR register variable for UDP bit field implemented.
• CSR 04-377
• pg. 174, PMC_MCKR bit field defined as “–”
AT91SAM7S64
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
AT91SAM7S64
Doc. Rev
Source
Comments (1)
6070A
• CSR 04-378
• pg. 456 AC Characteristics Chapter relocated
• CSR 04-379
• pg. 460, Table 106: AC Flash Characteristics added
• CSR 04-389
• pg. 457 - 458, Figures 192, 193, 194 derating curves modified
Source
Comments (1)
Doc. Rev
6070B
• Date: 16-Feb-05
Global: Peripheral Data Controller (PDC) Changed to Peripheral DMA Controller (PDC)
Note:
• CSR 05-0
• pg. 3, Figure 1, Block Diagram. PGMEN2 added
• pg. 6, Table 1, Signal Description List. FFPI details, PGMEN2 added
• pg. 7, Table 2, Pinout in 64-lead LQFP Package, PGMEN2 added and associated with PA2.
• pg. 41, Table 10, JTAG Boundary Scan Register, PGMEN2 added and associated with PA2.
• CSR 05-086
• pg. 14, Flash Overview, text added
• CSR 05-081
• pg. 18, Reset Controller, text added
• CSR 04-427
• pg. 19, PLL Output range changed
• pg. 108, Table 19; pg 116, Table 33: Signal Description List, VDDPLL line changed
• CSR 04-436
• pg. 40 Text relevant to Debug Unit removed from Functional Description
• CSR 04-442
• pg. 40, Same as CSR 04-436
• CSR 05-107
• pg. 91-92, MC_ASR Register. MST0 and MST1 definitions reversed. SVMST0 and SVMST1
definitions reversed.
• CSR 04-440
• pg. 106, “disactive” replaced by “inactive”
• CSR 04-451
• pg. 201, ARCH: Architecture Identifier evolution in DBGU_CIDR register
• CSR 04-410
• pg. 381 note added below Figure 168.
• pg. 382 Interrupts, section added.
• CSR 04-411
• pg. 453, Restore USB Transeiver Characteristics
• CSR 04-423
• pg. 468, AT91SAM7S64-AI Ordering Code corrected (superceded by CSR 05-010)
Review
• pg. 450, Power Consumption versus Master CLock Frequency in Ultra Low-power Mode. “USB
Transeiver de-activiated” added to list.
• CSR 05-077
• pg. 442, Table 87: DC Characteristics, TSLOPE line added
• CSR 05-072
• pg. 442, Table 88: 1.8 V Voltage Regulator Characteristics, modified
• CSR 05-082
• pg. 423, Table 102: items removed.
• CSR 05-075
• pg. 458, added to page, Table 107: Endurance Flash Characteristics
Review
• pg. 460, Table 104: DC Flash Characteristics, @25° added to Standby Current, all Max values
changed in table.
• CSR 05-085
• pg. 464, Table 112, 64-lead-LQFP Package Dimensions, modified.
• CSR 05-010
• pg. 468, Table 116, Ordering Information. Table replaced.
1. Due to additions and deletions of tables, figure drawings and changes to text, the pagination in the current document often
does not correspond to that as stated in any given CSR. Under “comments” in the Revision History tables the numbering
properties corresponding to changes made are therefore also approximate.
ix
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
x
AT91SAM7S64
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05
Atmel Corporation
2325 Orchard Parkway
San Jose, CA 95131, USA
Tel: 1(408) 441-0311
Fax: 1(408) 487-2600
Regional Headquarters
Europe
Atmel Sarl
Route des Arsenaux 41
Case Postale 80
CH-1705 Fribourg
Switzerland
Tel: (41) 26-426-5555
Fax: (41) 26-426-5500
Asia
Room 1219
Chinachem Golden Plaza
77 Mody Road Tsimshatsui
East Kowloon
Hong Kong
Tel: (852) 2721-9778
Fax: (852) 2722-1369
Japan
9F, Tonetsu Shinkawa Bldg.
1-24-8 Shinkawa
Chuo-ku, Tokyo 104-0033
Japan
Tel: (81) 3-3523-3551
Fax: (81) 3-3523-7581
Atmel Operations
Memory
2325 Orchard Parkway
San Jose, CA 95131, USA
Tel: 1(408) 441-0311
Fax: 1(408) 436-4314
RF/Automotive
Theresienstrasse 2
Postfach 3535
74025 Heilbronn, Germany
Tel: (49) 71-31-67-0
Fax: (49) 71-31-67-2340
Microcontrollers
2325 Orchard Parkway
San Jose, CA 95131, USA
Tel: 1(408) 441-0311
Fax: 1(408) 436-4314
La Chantrerie
BP 70602
44306 Nantes Cedex 3, France
Tel: (33) 2-40-18-18-18
Fax: (33) 2-40-18-19-60
ASIC/ASSP/Smart Cards
1150 East Cheyenne Mtn. Blvd.
Colorado Springs, CO 80906, USA
Tel: 1(719) 576-3300
Fax: 1(719) 540-1759
Biometrics/Imaging/Hi-Rel MPU/
High Speed Converters/RF Datacom
Avenue de Rochepleine
BP 123
38521 Saint-Egreve Cedex, France
Tel: (33) 4-76-58-30-00
Fax: (33) 4-76-58-34-80
Zone Industrielle
13106 Rousset Cedex, France
Tel: (33) 4-42-53-60-00
Fax: (33) 4-42-53-60-01
1150 East Cheyenne Mtn. Blvd.
Colorado Springs, CO 80906, USA
Tel: 1(719) 576-3300
Fax: 1(719) 540-1759
Scottish Enterprise Technology Park
Maxwell Building
East Kilbride G75 0QR, Scotland
Tel: (44) 1355-803-000
Fax: (44) 1355-242-743
Literature Requests
www.atmel.com/literature
Disclaimer: The information in this document is provided in connection with Atmel products. No license, express or implied, by estoppel or otherwise, to any
intellectual property right is granted by this document or in connection with the sale of Atmel products. EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN ATMEL’S TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALE LOCATED ON ATMEL’S WEB SITE, ATMEL ASSUMES NO LIABILITY WHATSOEVER AND DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY
WARRANTY RELATING TO ITS PRODUCTS INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL ATMEL BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR LOSS OF INFORMATION) ARISING OUT
OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS DOCUMENT, EVEN IF ATMEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Atmel makes no
representations or warranties with respect to the accuracy or completeness of the contents of this document and reserves the right to make changes to specifications
and product descriptions at any time without notice. Atmel does not make any commitment to update the information contained herein. Atmel’s products are not
intended, authorized, or warranted for use as components in applications intended to support or sustain life.
© Atmel Corporation 2005. All rights reserved. Atmel ®, logo and combinations thereof, DataFlash® and others are registered trademarks, and
Everywhere You Are SM and others are trademarks of Atmel Corporation or its subsidiaries. ARM ®, Thumb ®, ARM7TDMI ® and others are registered
trademarks of ARM Limited. Other terms and product names may be the trademarks of others.
Printed on recycled paper.
6070B–ATARM–25-Feb-05